Volvo 2015 Early, V60 PLUG-IN HYBRID Owner's manual

Volvo 2015 Early, V60 PLUG-IN HYBRID Owner's manual
WEB EDITION
OWNER'S MANUAL
DEAR VOLVO OWNER
THANK YOU FOR CHOOSING VOLVO
We hope you will enjoy many years of driving
pleasure in your Volvo. The car has been
designed for the safety and comfort of you and
your passengers. Volvo is one of the safest cars in
the world. Your Volvo has also been designed to
satisfy all current safety and environmental
requirements.
In order to increase your enjoyment of the car, we
recommend that you familiarise yourself with the
equipment, instructions and maintenance information contained in this owner's manual.
Table of contents
01 Introduction
Owner information....................................
Reading the owner's manual....................
Recording data.........................................
Accessories and extra equipment............
Change of ownership for cars with Volvo
On Call*.....................................................
Information on the Internet.......................
Volvo Cars' environmental philosophy.....
The owner's manual and the environment..........................................................
Laminated glass........................................
Plug-in hybrid - overview..........................
Plug-in hybrid - introduction.....................
02 Safety
13
13
16
17
General information on seatbelts..............
Seatbelt - putting on.................................
Seat belt - loosening.................................
Seatbelt - pregnancy................................
Seatbelt reminder......................................
Seatbelt tensioner.....................................
Safety - warning symbol...........................
Airbag system...........................................
Driver airbag..............................................
Passenger airbag......................................
Passenger airbag - activating/deactivating*............................................................
Side airbag (SIPS).....................................
Side airbag (SIPS) - child seat/booster
cushion.....................................................
Inflatable Curtain (IC)................................
General information on WHIPS (whiplash
protection).................................................
WHIPS - child seats..................................
WHIPS - seating position..........................
When the systems deploy.........................
General information on safety mode.........
Safety mode - attempting to start the
car.............................................................
Safety mode - moving the car..................
27
28
29
29
30
30
31
31
32
32
General information on child safety..........
Child seats................................................
Child seats - location................................
Child seat - two-stage booster seat*........
Two-stage booster seat* - raising.............
Two-stage booster seat* - lowering..........
Child seat - ISOFIX...................................
ISOFIX - size classes................................
ISOFIX - types of child seat......................
Child seats - upper mounting points........
01 02 02
2
17
18
19
21
21
22
24
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
33
35
36
36
37
38
38
39
40
41
42
42
43
47
47
48
49
50
51
52
54
Table of contents
03 Instruments and controls
Instruments and controls, left-hand drive
car - overview...........................................
Instruments and controls, right-hand
drive car - overview...................................
Combined instrument panel......................
Digital combined instrument panel overview....................................................
Eco guide & Hybrid guide.........................
Combined instrument panel - meaning of
indicator symbols......................................
Combined instrument cluster - meaning
of warning symbols...................................
Outside temperature gauge......................
Trip meter..................................................
Clock.........................................................
Volvo Sensus............................................
Key positions............................................
Key positions - functions at different levels..............................................................
Seats, front................................................
Seats, front - electrically operated............
Key memory* in remote control key..........
Seats, rear.................................................
Steering wheel..........................................
Heating* of the steering wheel..................
56
59
62
Light switches........................................... 81
Position/parking lamps............................. 83
Daytime running lights.............................. 83
Tunnel detection*...................................... 84
Main/dipped beam.................................... 84
Active high beam*..................................... 85
Active Xenon headlamps*......................... 87
Rear fog lamp........................................... 88
Brake lights............................................... 89
Hazard warning flashers........................... 89
Direction indicators................................... 90
Interior lighting.......................................... 91
Home safe light duration........................... 92
Approach light duration............................ 92
Headlamps - adjusting headlamp pattern............................................................ 93
Wipers and washing.................................. 93
Power windows......................................... 95
Door mirrors.............................................. 97
Windows and rearview and door mirrors
- heating.................................................... 99
Rearview mirror - interior.......................... 99
Compass*............................................... 100
Sunroof*.................................................. 101
Menu navigation - combined instrument
panel.......................................................
Menu overview - combined instrument
panel.......................................................
Messages................................................
Messages - handling...............................
MY CAR..................................................
Trip computer.........................................
Trip computer - combined instrument
panel "Digital".........................................
Trip computer - supplementary information..........................................................
Trip computer - trip statistics*................
03 03 03
63
67
68
69
71
71
71
72
73
73
75
76
77
77
79
80
103
104
104
105
105
106
108
111
112
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
3
Table of contents
04 Climate control
General information on climate control... 115
Actual temperature................................. 116
Sensors - climate control........................ 116
Air cleaning............................................. 116
Air cleaning - passenger compartment filter............................................................ 117
Air cleaning - Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP)*.............................................. 117
Air cleaning - IAQS*................................ 118
Air cleaning - material............................. 118
Menu settings - climate control.............. 118
Air distribution in the passenger compartment.................................................. 119
Electronic climate control - ECC............. 121
Heated front seats*................................. 122
Heated rear seat*.................................... 122
Fan.......................................................... 123
Auto-regulation....................................... 123
Temperature control in the passenger
compartment.......................................... 124
Air conditioning....................................... 124
Demisting and defrosting the windscreen..................................................... 125
Air distribution - recirculation.................. 125
Air distribution - table............................. 127
05 Loading and storage
General information about preconditioning...........................................................
Preconditioning the car...........................
Preconditioning - setting.........................
Preconditioning - parking inside.............
Preconditioning - parking outside...........
Preconditioning - direct start..................
Preconditioning - immediate stop...........
Preconditioning - timer...........................
Timer - setting.........................................
Timer - starting........................................
Timer - switching off...............................
Preconditioning - messages...................
General information about heaters.........
Electrically-driven heater........................
Fuel-driven heater...................................
Fuel-driven heater - auto mode/deactivation..........................................................
129
129
130
130
131
132
133
133
133
134
134
135
137
137
137
Storage spaces.......................................
Jacket holder..........................................
Tunnel console........................................
Tunnel console - cigarette lighter and
ashtray*...................................................
Glovebox.................................................
Inlay mats*..............................................
Vanity mirror............................................
Tunnel console - 12 V-sockets...............
Loading...................................................
Loading - long load.................................
Roof load.................................................
Load retaining eyelets.............................
12 V electrical socket - cargo area*........
Safety net*...............................................
Safety net* combined with cargo cover..
Safety grille.............................................
Cargo cover............................................
04 04 05
4
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
138
140
142
142
142
143
143
143
144
145
146
146
146
147
147
149
149
150
Table of contents
06 Locks and alarm
Remote control key with key blade.........
Remote control key - losing ...................
Key memory*...........................................
Indication locking/unlocking - adjusting.
Lock indicator.........................................
Immobiliser..............................................
Remote-controlled immobiliser with
tracking system.......................................
Remote control key - functions...............
Remote control key - range....................
PCC* - unique functions.........................
PCC* - range...........................................
Detachable key blade.............................
Detachable key blade - detaching/
attaching.................................................
Detachable key blade - unlocking doors
Privacy locking*.......................................
Remote control key/PCC - replacing the
battery.....................................................
Keyless drive*..........................................
Keyless drive* - PCC range....................
Keyless drive* - handling the PCC safely
Keyless drive* - interference to PCC
function...................................................
Keyless drive* - locking...........................
07 Driver support
152
152
152
153
153
153
Keyless drive* - unlocking.......................
Keyless drive* - unlocking with the key
blade ......................................................
Keyless drive* - key memory..................
Keyless drive* - lock settings..................
Keyless drive* - antenna location...........
Locking/unlocking - from the outside.....
Manual locking of the door.....................
Locking/unlocking - from the inside.......
Total airing function................................
Locking/unlocking - glovebox.................
Locking/unlocking - tailgate....................
Deadlocks*..............................................
Child safety locks - manual activation....
Child safety locks - electrical activation*
Alarm.......................................................
Alarm indicator........................................
Alarm - automatic re-arming...................
Alarm - remote control key not working.
Alarm signals...........................................
Reduced alarm level...............................
164
165
165
166
166
167
168
168
169
170
170
171
172
173
174
175
175
175
176
176
Stability and traction control system
(DSTC).....................................................
Stability and traction control system
(DSTC) - operation..................................
Stability and traction control system
(DSTC) - symbols and messages...........
Road Sign Information (RSI)*..................
Road sign information (RSI)* - operation
Road sign information (RSI)* - limitations
Speed limiter*..........................................
Speed limiter* - getting started...............
Speed limiter* - changing speed.............
Speed limiter* - temporary deactivation
and standby mode..................................
Speed limiter* - alarm for speed exceeded..........................................................
Speed limiter* - deactivation...................
Cruise control*........................................
Cruise control* - managing speed..........
Cruise control* temporary deactivation
and standby mode..................................
Cruise control* - resume set speed........
Cruise control* - deactivate....................
Adaptive cruise control - ACC*...............
Adaptive cruise control* - function.........
06 06 07
154
154
156
156
157
158
158
159
159
161
162
162
163
163
164
178
179
180
181
181
183
184
184
185
185
186
186
187
188
188
189
189
190
191
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
5
Table of contents
Adaptive cruise control* - overview........
Adaptive cruise control* - managing
speed......................................................
Adaptive cruise control* - set time interval............................................................
Adaptive cruise control* - temporary
deactivation, and standby mode............
Adaptive cruise control* - overtaking
another vehicle........................................
Adaptive cruise control* - deactivate......
Adaptive Cruise Control* - Queue Assist
Adaptive cruise control* - switch cruise
control functionality................................
Radar sensor...........................................
Radar sensor - limitations.......................
Adaptive cruise control* - fault tracing
and action...............................................
Adaptive cruise control* - symbols and
messages................................................
Distance Warning*..................................
Distance Warning* - limitations...............
Distance Warning* - symbols and messages.......................................................
City Safety™...........................................
City Safety™ - function...........................
City Safety™ - operation........................
192
193
194
City Safety™ - limitations....................... 209
City Safety™ - laser sensor.................... 211
City Safety™ - symbols and messages.. 213
Collision warning system*....................... 214
Collision warning system* - function...... 215
Collision warning system* - cyclist detection.......................................................... 216
Collision warning system* - detection of
pedestrians............................................. 218
Collision warning system* - operation.... 219
Collision warning system* - general limitations..................................................... 220
Collision warning system* - camera sensor limitations.......................................... 222
Collision warning system* - symbols and
messages................................................ 224
Driver Alert System*................................ 226
Driver Alert Control (DAC)*...................... 226
Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - operation... 227
Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - symbols and
messages................................................ 228
Lane Departure Warning (LDW)*............. 230
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - function.......................................................... 230
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - operation.......................................................... 231
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - limitations........................................................
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - symbols and messages.................................
Park Assist*.............................................
Park assist syst* - function.....................
Park assist syst* - backward..................
Park assist syst* - forward......................
Park assist syst* - fault indication...........
Park assist syst* - cleaning the sensors.
Park assist camera..................................
Park assist camera - settings.................
Park assist camera - limitations..............
BLIS* (Blind Spot Information System)...
BLIS* (Blind Spot Information System) operation.................................................
CTA (Cross Traffic Alert)*........................
BLIS - symbols and messages...............
Adjustable steering force*.......................
07 07 07
6
195
196
196
196
198
199
199
201
202
204
205
206
207
207
208
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
232
233
235
235
236
237
238
238
239
241
242
242
243
244
246
247
Table of contents
08 Starting and driving
Alcolock*.................................................
Alcolock* - functions and operation........
Alcolock* - storage..................................
Alcolock* - before starting the engine....
Alcolock* - to bear in mind.....................
Alcolock* - symbols and text messages.
Starting the engine..................................
Switching off the engine.........................
Steering lock...........................................
Jump starting with battery......................
Drive systems..........................................
Drive system - drive modes....................
Energy flow.............................................
Drive system - symbols and messages..
Gearboxes...............................................
Gear shift indicator*................................
Automatic gearbox -- Geartronic............
Gear selector inhibitor.............................
Hill start assist (HSA)*.............................
All Wheel Drive - AWD............................
Foot brake...............................................
Foot brake - anti-lock braking system....
Foot brake - emergency brake lights and
automatic hazard warning flashers.........
249
249
250
250
251
253
254
255
255
256
257
258
260
262
264
264
264
267
268
268
269
271
Foot brake - emergency brake assistance.......................................................
Parking brake..........................................
Planning your driving..............................
Fording....................................................
Overheating.............................................
Driving with open tailgate.......................
Overload - starter battery........................
Before a long journey..............................
Winter driving..........................................
Range for electric operation...................
Fuel filler flap - Opening/closing.............
Fuel filler flap - manual opening..............
Filling up with fuel...................................
Fuel - handling........................................
Fuel - diesel.............................................
Catalytic converters................................
Diesel particle filter (DPF)........................
Economical driving..................................
Charging the hybrid battery....................
Charging current.....................................
Charging the hybrid battery - preparations........................................................
Charging cable with control unit.............
271
272
276
277
277
278
278
279
279
280
280
281
281
282
282
284
284
285
286
286
Charging cable with control unit - status
messages................................................
Charging cable with control unit - temperature monitoring................................
Charging cable with control unit - ground
fault breaker............................................
Charging the hybrid battery - starting.....
Charging the hybrid battery - ending......
Long-term storage - points to remember
Driving with a trailer................................
Driving with a trailer - automatic gearbox
Towing bracket/Towbar..........................
Detachable towbar - storage..................
Detachable towbar - specifications........
Detachable towbar - attachment/
removal...................................................
Trailer stabiliser - TSA.............................
Towing....................................................
Towing eye..............................................
Recovery.................................................
291
292
08 08 08
271
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
298
298
299
301
302
303
304
288
289
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
7
Table of contents
09 Wheels and tyres
Tyres - direction of rotation....................
Tyres - maintenance...............................
Tyres - tread wear indicators..................
Wheel bolts.............................................
Tools.......................................................
Jack*.......................................................
Winter tyres.............................................
Wheel and wheel rim dimensions...........
Tyres - dimensions..................................
Tyres - load index...................................
Tyres - speed ratings..............................
Changing wheels - removing wheels......
Changing wheels - fitting........................
Tyres - air pressure.................................
Warning triangle......................................
First aid kit*.............................................
Emergency puncture repair....................
Emergency puncture repair kit - location
Emergency puncture repair kit - overview.........................................................
Emergency puncture repair - operation..
Emergency puncture repair - rechecking
Emergency puncture repair kit - inflating
the tyres..................................................
10 Maintenance and service
306
306
308
308
308
309
310
310
311
311
312
312
315
316
317
318
318
319
Emergency puncture repair kit - sealant. 325
Volvo service programme....................... 327
Raising the car........................................ 328
Bonnet - opening and closing................. 330
Engine compartment - overview............. 330
Engine compartment - checking............. 331
Engine oil - general................................. 332
Engine oil - checking and filling.............. 333
Coolant - level......................................... 334
Brake and clutch fluid - level.................. 335
Power steering fluid - level...................... 336
Climate control system - fault tracing and
repair....................................................... 336
Lamp replacement.................................. 337
Lamp replacement - headlamps............. 338
Lamp replacement - cover for main/
dipped beam bulbs................................. 339
Lamp replacement - dipped beam......... 339
Lamp replacement - main beam............. 340
Lamp replacement - extra main beam.... 340
Lamp replacement - direction indicators
front......................................................... 340
Lamp replacement - rear lamp............... 341
Lamp replacement - location of rear
lamps...................................................... 342
09 09 10
8
320
320
323
324
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Table of contents
11 Specifications
Lamp replacement - number plate lighting...........................................................
Lamp replacement - lighting in cargo
area.........................................................
Lamp replacement - vanity mirror lighting...........................................................
Lamps - specifications ...........................
Wiper blades...........................................
Washer fluid - filling................................
Battery.....................................................
Battery - symbols....................................
Starter battery - replacement..................
Hybrid battery.........................................
Fuses - general.......................................
Fuses - in engine compartment..............
Fuses - under glovebox..........................
Fuses - in the control module under the
glovebox.................................................
Fuses - in cargo area..............................
Fuses - in the engine compartment's
cold zone................................................
Car washing............................................
Polishing and waxing..............................
Water and dirt-repellent coating.............
Rustproofing...........................................
342
342
Cleaning the interior................................ 367
Paint damage.......................................... 369
Type designations...................................
Dimensions.............................................
Weights...................................................
Towing capacity and towball load..........
Engine specifications..............................
Motor specifications - Electric drive
motor.......................................................
Engine oil - adverse driving conditions...
Engine oil - grade and volume................
Coolant - grade and volume...................
Transmission fluid - grade and volume...
Brake fluid - grade and volume...............
Power steering fluid - grade....................
Washer fluid - quality and volume..........
Fuel tank - volume..................................
Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions...
Tyres - approved tyre pressures.............
Electrical system.....................................
Starter battery - specification.................
Hybrid Battery - specification.................
Range - specification..............................
Type approval - remote control key system..........................................................
Type approval - radar system.................
10 10 11
343
343
344
346
346
347
348
350
350
352
355
357
359
363
365
366
367
367
372
375
376
377
378
379
379
381
382
383
384
384
384
385
386
387
388
388
388
389
389
389
9
Table of contents
12 Alphabetical Index
Type approval - Bluetooth®.................... 390
Licenses.................................................. 394
Symbols in the display............................ 397
Alphabetical Index.................................. 400
11 12
10
Table of contents
11
INTRODUCTION
01 Introduction
Owner information
Reading the owner's manual
Your car is equipped with a display screen*
where you can find information on how your
car works. This owner's manual is a supplement to the information and contains important text, the latest updates, as well as
instructions that can be useful when you, for
practical reasons, cannot read the on-screen
information.
A good way of getting to know your new car
is to read the owner's manual, ideally before
your first journey. This will give you the opportunity to familiarise yourself with new functions, to see how best to handle the car in different situations, and to make the best use of
all the car's features. Please pay attention to
the safety instructions contained in the manual.
Changing the display language may mean that
some information does not correspond to
national or local laws and regulations.
IMPORTANT
The driver is always responsible that the
vehicle is driven safely in traffic and that
applicable laws and regulations are followed. It is also important that the car is
maintained and handled in accordance
with Volvo's recommendations in the
owner's information.
If there should be a difference between the
information on the screen and in the printed manual then it is always the printed
information that applies.
The specifications, design features and illustrations in this owner's manual are not binding. We reserve the right to make modifications without prior notice.
©
Volvo Car Corporation
There are four options for finding information
in the owner's manual:
01
• Search - Search function for finding an
article.
• Categories - All articles sorted into categories.
• Favourites - Quick access to favouritebookmarked articles.
• Quick Guide - A selection of articles for
common functions.
NOTE
The owner's manual is not available while
driving.
Owner's Manual in mobile devices
IMPORTANT
Do not remove this manual from the car should a problem arise then the information required about where and how to seek
professional help would be missing.
Digital owner's manual in the car1
When the printed manual refers to the digital
owner's manual it means the one shown on
the screen in the car.
Open the digital owner's manual - press the
MY CAR button in the centre console, press
OK/MENU and select Owner's manual.
1
Applies to certain car models.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
13
01 Introduction
01
||
NOTE
The owner's manual is available for download as a mobile application (applies for
certain car models and mobile devices),
see www.volvocars.com.
The mobile application also includes video
and searchable content and easy navigation between different sections.
Options/accessories
All types of option/accessory are marked with
an asterisk*.
In addition to standard equipment, the
owner's manual also describes options (factory fitted equipment) and certain accessories
(retrofitted extra equipment).
The equipment described in the owner's
manual is not available in all cars - they have
different equipment depending on adaptations for the needs of different markets and
national or local laws and regulations.
In the event of uncertainty over what is standard or an option/accessory, contact a Volvo
dealer.
Special texts
WARNING
Warning texts appear if there is a risk of
injury.
14
IMPORTANT
Warning for personal injury
"Important" texts appear if there is a risk of
damage.
NOTE
NOTE texts give advice or tips that facilitate the use of e.g. features and functions.
Footnote
There is footnote information in the owner's
manual that is located at the bottom of the
page. This information is an addition to the
text that it refers to via a number. If the footnote refers to text in a table then letters are
used instead of numbers for referral.
Message texts
There are displays in the car that show text
messages. These text messages are highlighted in the owner's manual by means of
the text being slightly larger and printed in
grey. Examples of this are in menu texts and
message texts on the information display
(e.g. Audio settings).
Decals
The car contains different types of decal
which are designed to convey important
information in a simple and clear manner. The
decals in the car have the following descending degree of importance for the warning/
information.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
G031590
Black ISO symbols on yellow warning field,
white text/image on black message field.
Used to indicate the presence of danger
which, if the warning is ignored, may result in
serious personal injury or fatality.
01 Introduction
Risk of property damage
Information
When there is a series of illustrations for
step-by-step instructions each step is
numbered in the same way as the corresponding illustration.
01
There are numbered lists with letters
adjacent to the series of illustrations
where the order of the instructions is not
significant.
White ISO symbols and white text/image on
black or blue warning field and message field.
Used to indicate the presence of danger
which, if the warning is ignored, may result in
damage to property.
Arrows with letters are used to clarify a
movement when the reciprocal order is of
no relevance.
G031593
G031592
Arrows appear numbered and unnumbered and are used to illustrate a movement.
White ISO symbols and white text/image on
black message field.
NOTE
It is not intended that the decals illustrated
in the owner's manual should be exact
replicas of those in the car. They are
included to show their approximate
appearance and location in the car. The
information that applies to your particular
car is available on the respective decals
for your car.
Procedure lists
Procedures where action must be taken in a
certain sequence are numbered in the
owner's manual.
If there is no series of illustrations for step-bystep instructions then the different steps are
numbered with normal numbers.
Position lists
Red circles containing a number are used
in overview images where different components are pointed out. The number
recurs in the position list featured in connection with the illustration that describes
the item.
Bulleted lists
A bulleted list is used when there is a list of
points in the owner's manual.
Example:
•
•
Coolant
Engine oil
}}
15
01 Introduction
01
||
Related information
Recording data
Related information refers to other sections
containing related information.
Certain information about the vehicle's operation and functionality, and any incidents, are
recorded in the car.
Images
The manual's images are sometimes schematic and may deviate from the car's appearance depending on equipment level and market.
To be continued
}} This symbol is located furthest down to
the right when an article continues on the following page.
Continued from previous page
|| This symbol is located furthest up to the
left when an article continues from the previous page.
Related information
16
•
The owner's manual and the environment
(p. 21)
•
Information on the Internet (p. 18)
Your vehicle contains a number of computers
whose function is to continuously check and
monitor the vehicle's operation and functionality. Some of the computers can record
information during normal driving if they
detect an error. In addition, information is
recorded in the event of a collision or incident. Parts of the recorded information are
required so that technicians can diagnose
and rectify faults in the vehicle during servicing and maintenance and so that Volvo can
fulfil legal requirements and other regulations.
In addition to this, the information is used for
research purposes by Volvo in order to continually develop quality and safety, as the
information can contribute to a better understanding of the factors that cause accidents
and injuries. The information includes details
of the status and functionality of various systems and modules in the vehicle with regard
to engine, throttle, steering and brake systems, amongst other things. This information
may include details regarding the way the
driver drives the vehicle, such as vehicle
speed, brake and accelerator pedal use,
steering wheel movement and whether or not
the driver and passengers have used their
seatbelts. For the reasons given this information may be stored in the vehicle's computers
for a certain length of time, but also as a
result of a collision or incident. This information may be stored by Volvo as long as it can
help to further develop and further enhance
safety and quality and as long as there are
legal requirements and other regulations that
Volvo needs to consider.
Volvo will not contribute to the above-described information being disclosed to third parties without the vehicle owner's consent.
However, due to national legislation and regulations Volvo may be required to disclose
such information to authorities such as police
authorities, or others who may assert a legal
right to have access to it.
To be able to read and interpret the information recorded by the computers in the vehicle
requires special technical equipment that
Volvo, and workshops that have entered into
agreements with Volvo, have access to. Volvo
is responsible that the information, which is
transferred to Volvo during servicing and
maintenance, is stored and handled in a
secure manner and that the handling complies with applicable legal requirements. For
further information - contact a Volvo dealer.
01 Introduction
Accessories and extra equipment
The incorrect connection and installation of
accessories and extra equipment can negatively affect the car's electronic system.
Certain accessories only function when associated software is installed in the car's computer system. Volvo therefore recommends
that you always contact an authorised Volvo
workshop before installing accessories or
extra equipment which are connected to or
affect the electrical system.
Heat-reflecting windscreen*
The windscreen is equipped with a heatreflecting film (IR) that reduces the solar heat
radiation into the passenger compartment.
The positioning of electronic equipment, such
as a transponder, behind a glass surface with
heat-reflecting film may affect its function and
performance.
For the optimal function of electronic equipment, it should be positioned on the part of
the windscreen with no heat-reflecting film
(see the highlighted area in the above illustration).
Change of ownership for cars with
Volvo On Call*
01
If the car is equipped with Volvo On Call, VOC
it is important to change the owner of the
service.
VOC is a supplemental service that consists
of safety, security and comfort services. In
the event of change of ownership it is important to change the owner of the service.
Closing the VOC service
Contact a Volvo dealer in the event of change
of ownership in order to close the VOC service.
In the event of change of ownership it is
important to reset personal settings in the car
to the original factory settings2, see Change
of ownership.
Starting the VOC service
Areas where IR film is not applied.
Dimensions
A
40 mm
B
80 mm
It is very important that the VOC service
changes owner so that the previous owner's
ability to use services in the car is stopped.
Contact a Volvo dealer in the event of a
change of ownership.
Related information
•
Information on the Internet (p. 18)
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
17
01 Introduction
01
Information on the Internet
At www.volvocars.com there is further information concerning your car.
With a personal Volvo ID it is possible to log in
to My Volvo which is a personal web page for
you and your car.
QR code
A QR code reader is required to read the QR
code, which is available as a supplemental
program (app) for several mobile phones. The
QR code reader can be downloaded from e.g.
App Store, Windows Phone or Google Play.
2
18
Only applies to cars that can be connected to the Internet.
01 Introduction
Volvo Cars' environmental philosophy
01
tured in one of the cleanest and most
resource-efficient plants in the world.
G000000
Your Volvo complies with strict international
environmental standards and is also manufac-
Environmental care is one of Volvo Car Corporation's core values which influence all
operations. We also believe that our customers share our consideration for the environment.
Your Volvo complies with strict international
environmental standards and is also manufactured in one of the cleanest and most
resource-efficient plants in the world. Volvo
Car Corporation has global ISO certification,
which includes the environmental standard
ISO 14001 covering all factories and several
of our other units. We also set requirements
for our partners so that they work systematically with environmental issues.
Fuel consumption
Volvo cars have competitive fuel consumption in each of their respective classes. Lower
fuel consumption generally results in lower
emission of the greenhouse gas, carbon dioxide.
It is possible for the driver to influence fuel
consumption. For more information read
under the heading, Reducing environmental
impact.
Efficient emission control
Your Volvo is manufactured following the
concept "Clean inside and out" – a concept
that encompasses a clean interior environment as well as highly efficient emission control. In many cases the exhaust emissions are
well below the applicable standards.
Clean air in the passenger
compartment
A passenger compartment filter prevents dust
and pollen from entering the passenger compartment via the air intake.
}}
19
01 Introduction
01
||
A sophisticated air quality system, IAQS*
(Interior Air Quality System) ensures that the
incoming air is cleaner than the air in the traffic outside.
The system consists of an electronic sensor
and a carbon filter. The incoming air is monitored continuously and if there is an increase
in the level of certain unhealthy gases such as
carbon monoxide then the air intake is
closed. Such a situation may arise in heavy
traffic, queues and tunnels for example.
The entry of nitrous oxides, ground-level
ozone and hydrocarbons is prevented by the
carbon filter.
Interior
The interior of a Volvo is designed to be pleasant and comfortable, even for people with
contact allergies and for asthma sufferers.
Extreme attention has been given to choosing
environmentally-compatible materials.
required to guarantee good environmental
care.
Reducing environmental impact
You can easily help reduce environmental
impact - here are a few tips:
•
•
•
Drive economically - think ahead.
•
If the car is equipped with an engine
block heater*, use it before starting from
cold - it improves starting capacity and
reduces wear in cold weather and the
engine reaches normal operating temperature more quickly, which lowers consumption and reduces emissions.
•
High speed increases consumption considerably due to increased wind resistance - a doubling of speed increases
wind resistance 4 times.
•
Always dispose of environmentally hazardous waste, such as batteries and oils, in
an environmentally safe manner. Consult
a workshop in the event of uncertainty
about how this type of waste should be
discarded - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Volvo workshops and the environment
Regular maintenance creates the conditions
for a long service life and low fuel consumption for your car. In this way you contribute to
a cleaner environment. When Volvo's workshops are entrusted with the service and
maintenance of your car it becomes part of
our system. Volvo makes clear demands
regarding the way in which our workshops
are designed in order to prevent spills and
discharges into the environment. Our workshop staff have the knowledge and the tools
20
Avoid letting the engine idle - switch off
the engine when stationary for longer
periods. Pay attention to local regulations.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Perform service and maintenance in
accordance with the owner's manual's
instructions - follow the intervals recommended in the Service and Warranty
Booklet.
Following this advice can save money, the
planet's resources are saved, and the car's
durability is extended. For more information
and further advice, see Eco guide (p. 67) ,
Economical driving (p. 285) and Fuel consumption (p. 386).
Recycling
As a part of Volvo's environmental work, it is
important that the car is recycled in an environmentally sound manner. Almost all of the
car can be recycled. The last owner of the car
is therefore requested to contact a dealer for
referral to a certified/approved recycling
facility.
Related information
•
The owner's manual and the environment
(p. 21)
01 Introduction
The owner's manual and the
environment
The paper pulp in a printed owner's manual
comes from FSC® certified forests or other
controlled sources.
The Forest Stewardship Council® symbol
shows that the paper pulp in a printed
owner's manual comes from FSC® certified
forests or other controlled sources.
01
Laminated glass
Laminated glass
The glass is reinforced which provides better protection against
break-ins and improved sound insulation in the passenger compartment. The windscreen and other windows*
have laminated glass.
Related information
•
Volvo Cars' environmental philosophy (p.
19)
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
21
01 Introduction
01
Plug-in hybrid - overview
Overview of the V60 PLUG-IN HYBRID unique
functions.
Charging the hybrid battery (p. 286).
22
Hybrid battery (p. 350).
01 Introduction
Electric motor (p. 257) with drive on the
rear wheels.
01
Drive modes (p. 258).
Combined instrument panel (p. 63) with
unique information for the plug-in hybrid.
Related information
•
Plug-in hybrid - introduction (p. 24)
23
01 Introduction
01
Plug-in hybrid - introduction
Driving the car
The car is driven as a completely normal car.
The electric motor drives the car mostly at low
speeds, the diesel engine at higher speeds,
and during more active driving.
The car is driven as a completely normal car.
The electric motor drives the car mostly at
low speeds, the diesel engine at higher
speeds, and during more active driving. Read
more about Economical driving (p. 285).
the battery is too cold or too hot. Preconditioning prepares the car's drive systems and
the passenger compartment before departure
so that both wear and energy needs during
the journey are reduced. Read more about
Preconditioning the car (p. 129).
Drive modes
Charging the hybrid battery
Important to know
WARNING
Remember that the car does not emit any
engine noise when it is only powered by
the electric motor and may therefore be
difficult to notice by children, pedestrians,
cyclists and animals. This applies in particular at low speeds, such as in car parks.
Hazard voltage
ment (p. 330).
Several components in the
car operate with hazardous
electrical voltage. Do not
touch anything that is not
clearly described in this
owner's manual. Read more
about the engine compart-
WARNING
Orange cables marked with a high-voltage
decal must only be handled by qualified
personnel.
24
It is possible to set the car in different drive
modes while driving, e.g. electric operation
only or, when power is required, both electric
motor and diesel engine. The car calculates
an optimal combination of driveability, driving
experience, environmental load and fuel
economy according to the drive mode
selected. Read more about Drive system drive modes (p. 258).
Combined instrument panel
Two fields in the combined instrument panel
show unique information for the V60 PLUG-IN
HYBRID; hybrid battery gauge (current energy
level), active drive mode, symbol that is illuminated when the diesel engine is operating,
Hybrid Guide as well as energy recovery.
Read more about the combined instrument
panel (p. 63).
Preconditioning
In order that the car should have optimal
function it is important that the hybrid battery
with associated electrical drive systems, as
well as the diesel engine and its drive systems, have the correct operating temperature.
Battery capacity is reduced considerably if
IMPORTANT
Never connect the charging cable when
there is a risk of lightning.
The hybrid battery is the Lithium-ion type and
can be recharged in different ways. A charging cable with control unit can be connected
between the car and a 230V AC socket, see
Charging cable with control unit (p. 289).
Charging time depends on charging current
(p. 286).
The electric motor is used as an engine brake
during light braking and the car's kinetic
energy is converted to electrical energy which
is used to charge the hybrid battery. Read
more about recycling the brake force energy
(p. 269).
In addition, the diesel engine can charge the
electric motor's hybrid battery with a special
hazard voltage generator when the need arises, see drive system and drive modes (p.
258).
01 Introduction
Related information
•
01
Plug-in hybrid - overview (p. 22)
25
SAFETY
02 Safety
General information on seatbelts
Heavy braking can have serious consequences if the seatbelts are not used. Ensure that
all passengers are using their seatbelts during
the journey.
•
The hip strap must be positioned low
down (not over the abdomen).
•
Tension the hip strap over the lap by pulling the diagonal shoulder belt up towards
the shoulder.
Related information
•
•
•
Seatbelt - pregnancy (p. 29)
Seat belt - loosening (p. 29)
Seatbelt tensioner (p. 30)
02
WARNING
The seatbelts and airbags interact. If a
seatbelt is not used or is used incorrectly,
this may diminish the protection provided
by the airbag in the event of a collision.
WARNING
Each seatbelt is designed for only one person.
It is important that the seatbelt lies against
the body so it can provide maximum protection. Do not lean the backrest too far back.
The seatbelt is designed to protect in a normal seating position.
Unbelted occupants will be reminded to fasten (p. 28) their seatbelt by means of an
audio and visual reminder (p. 30).
Remember
•
Do not use clips or anything else that can
prevent the seatbelt from fitting properly.
•
The seatbelt must not be twisted or
caught on anything.
WARNING
Never modify or repair the seatbelts yourself. Volvo recommends that you contact
an authorised Volvo workshop.
If a seatbelt has been subjected to a major
load, such as in conjunction with a collision, the entire seatbelt must be replaced.
Some of the protective characteristics of
the seatbelt may have been lost, even if it
appears to be undamaged. In addition,
replace the seatbelt if the belt is worn or
damaged. The new seatbelt must be typeapproved and intended for installation in
the same position as the replaced seatbelt.
27
02 Safety
02
Seatbelt - putting on
Remember
Put on the seatbelt (p. 27) before setting off.
The seatbelt locks and cannot be withdrawn:
•
•
•
Pull the belt out slowly and secure it by
pressing its locking tab into the seatbelt
buckle. A loud "click" indicates that the belt
has locked.
Correctly fitted seatbelt.
Seatbelt height adjustment. Press the button and
move the belt vertically. Position the belt as high
as possible without it chafing against your throat.
The buckles only fit the intended lock in the
rear seat1.
28
Certain markets.
if the car leans heavily.
Related information
Incorrectly fitted seatbelt. The belt must rest on
the shoulder.
1
if it is pulled out too quickly
during braking and acceleration
•
•
•
•
Seatbelt - pregnancy (p. 29)
Seat belt - loosening (p. 29)
Seatbelt tensioner (p. 30)
Seatbelt reminder (p. 30)
02 Safety
Seat belt - loosening
Seatbelt - pregnancy
Loosen the seatbelt (p. 27) when the car is
stationary.
Seatbelt (p. 27) must always be worn during
pregnancy. But it is crucial that it be worn in
the correct way.
Press the red button on the seatbelt buckle
and then let the belt retract. If the seatbelt
does not retract fully, feed it in by hand so
that it does not hang loose.
The aim should be to position the seat with as
large a distance as possible between abdomen and steering wheel.
Related information
•
•
Seatbelt - putting on (p. 28)
02
Seat belt - loosening (p. 29)
Related information
Seatbelt - putting on (p. 28)
Seatbelt reminder (p. 30)
G020998
•
•
The diagonal section should wrap over the
shoulder then be routed between the breasts
and to the side of the abdomen.
The lap section should lay flat over the thighs
and as low as possible under the abdomen. –
It must never be allowed to ride upward.
Remove the slack from the seatbelt and
ensure that it fits as close to the body as possible. In addition, check that there are no
twists in the seatbelt.
As the pregnancy progresses, pregnant drivers must adjust the seat (p. 75) and steering wheel (p. 79) such that they can easily
maintain control of the vehicle as they drive
(which means that they must be able to easily
operate the foot pedals and steering wheel).
29
02 Safety
Seatbelt reminder
02
automatically after approximately 30 seconds driving or after pressing the indicator stalk (p. 103) OK button. If anyone is
unbelted then the message can only be
acknowledged manually by pressing the
indicator stalk OK button.
Unbelted occupants will be reminded to fasten their (p. 28) seatbelt by means of an audio
and visual reminder.
G017726
•
The audio reminder is speed dependent, and
in some cases time dependent. The visual
reminder is located in the roof console and in
the combined instrument panel (p. 62).
Child seats are not covered by the seatbelt
reminder system.
Rear seat
The seatbelt reminder in the rear seat has two
subfunctions:
•
30
Provides information on which seatbelts
(p. 27) are being used in the rear seat. A
message appears in the combined instrument panel when the seatbelts are in use,
or if one of the rear doors has been
opened. The message is acknowledged
Provides a warning if one of the rear seatbelts is unfastened during travel. This
warning takes the form of a message in
the combined instrument panel along with
the audio/visual signal. The warning stops
when the seatbelt is re-fastened, or it can
also be acknowledged manually by
pressing the OK button.
The combined instrument panel's information
display shows which seatbelts are in use.
This information is always available.
Certain markets
An acoustic signal and indicator lamp remind
the driver and front seat passenger to use a
seatbelt if either of them is not wearing one.
At low speed, the audible reminder will sound
for the first 6 seconds.
Seatbelt tensioner
All the seatbelts (p. 27) are equipped with belt
tensioners. A mechanism in the seatbelt tensioner tightens the seatbelt in the event of a
sufficiently violent collision. The seatbelt then
provides more effective restraint for the occupants.
WARNING
Never insert the tongue of the passenger's
seatbelt into the buckle on the driver's
side. Always insert the tongue of the seatbelt into the buckle on the correct side. Do
not make any damages on seatbelts nor
insert any foreign objects into a buckle.
The seatbelts and buckles would then
possibly not function as intended in the
event of a collision. There is a risk of
serous injury.
02 Safety
WARNING
If the warning symbol for the airbag system remains illuminated or illuminates
while driving, it means that the airbag system does not have full functionality. The
symbol indicates a fault in the seatbelt tensioner system, SIPS, the IC system or
some other fault in the system. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised
Volvo workshop immediately.
If the warning symbol malfunctions, the warning triangle illuminates and SRS airbag
Service required or SRS airbag Service
urgent appears in the display. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo
workshop immediately.
Related information
•
Warning triangle and warning symbol for the airbag system (p. 31) in the combined instrument
panel.
Airbag system
In the event of a frontal collision the airbag
system helps to protect the driver and passenger from injuries to head, face and chest.
02
G018665
Safety - warning symbol
The warning symbol is shown if a fault is
detected during fault tracing or if a system
has been activated. Where required, the
warning symbol is shown together with a
message in the combined instrument panel
(p. 62) information display.
Airbag system, left-hand drive car.
General information on safety mode (p.
40)
G018666
The warning symbol in the combined instrument panel illuminates when the remote control key is in key position II (p. 73). The symbol is extinguished after approx. 6 seconds
provided the airbag system is fault-free.
Airbag system, right-hand drive car.
31
02 Safety
02
||
The system consists of airbags and sensors.
A sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors
and the airbag(s) are inflated and become
hot. To cushion the impact, the airbag
deflates when compressed. When this
occurs, smoke escapes into the car. This is
completely normal. The entire process,
including inflation and deflation of the airbag,
occurs within tenths of a second.
Driver airbag
Passenger airbag
To supplement the protection afforded by the
seatbelt (p. 27) the car is equipped on the
driver's side with an airbag (p. 31).
To supplement the protection afforded by the
seatbelt (p. 27) on the passenger side, the car
is equipped with an airbag (p. 31).
This airbag is fitted into the centre of the
steering wheel. The steering wheel is marked
AIRBAG.
The airbag is folded up into a compartment
above the glovebox. Its cover panel is
marked AIRBAG.
WARNING
WARNING
Volvo recommends that you contact an
authorised Volvo workshop for repair.
Defective work in the airbag system could
cause malfunction and result in serious
personal injury.
NOTE
The detectors react differently depending
on the nature of the collision and whether
or not the seatbelts are fastened. Applies
to all belt positions.
It is therefore possible that only one (or
none) of the airbags may inflate in a collision. The detectors sense the force of the
collision on the vehicle and the action is
adapted accordingly so that one or more
airbags are deployed.
Related information
•
•
•
32
Driver airbag (p. 32)
Passenger airbag (p. 32)
Safety - warning symbol (p. 31)
The seatbelts and airbags interact. If the
belt is not used or is used incorrectly, this
may diminish the protection provided by
the airbag in the event of a collision.
Related information
•
Passenger airbag (p. 32)
Location of the front passenger airbag in a lefthand drive car.
02 Safety
Passenger airbag - activating/
deactivating*
WARNING
Never place a child in a child seat or on a
booster cushion in the front seat if the airbag is activated.
Never allow anybody to stand or sit in front
of the front passenger seat.
No one shorter than 140 cm should ever
sit in the front passenger seat if the airbag
is activated.
Failure to follow the advice given above
can endanger life.
Location of the front passenger airbag in a righthand drive car.
WARNING
The seatbelts and airbags interact. If the
belt is not used or is used incorrectly, this
may diminish the protection provided by
the airbag in the event of a collision.
Switch - PACOS*
The front passenger airbag can be deactivated (p. 33) if the car is equipped with a
switch, PACOS (Passenger Airbag Cut Off
Switch).
Do not put objects in front of or above the
dashboard where the passenger airbag is
located.
02
Switch - PACOS
The switch for the passenger airbag (PACOS)
is located on the passenger end of the instrument panel and is accessible when the passenger door is open.
Check that the switch is in the required position. The remote control key's key blade (p.
158) should be used to change position.
WARNING
To minimise the risk of injury if the airbag
deploys, passengers must sit as upright as
possible with their feet on the floor and
backs against the backrest. Seatbelts
must be secured.
WARNING
Front passenger airbag (p. 32) can be deactivated if the car is equipped with a switch,
PACOS (Passenger Airbag Cut Off Switch).
If the car is equipped with a front passenger airbag, but does not have a PACOS
switch (Passenger Airbag Cut Off Switch),
then the airbag will always be activated.
Related information
•
•
Driver airbag (p. 32)
Child seats (p. 43)
Location of airbag label plus switch.
The airbag is activated. With the switch in
this position, persons taller than 140 cm
can sit in the front passenger seat, but
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
33
02 Safety
||
never children in a child seat or on a
booster cushion.
02
The airbag is deactivated. With the switch
in this position, children in a child seat or
on a booster cushion can sit in the front
passenger seat, but never persons taller
than 140 cm.
2
Deactivated airbag (passenger seat):
No one taller than 140 cm should ever sit
in the front passenger seat when the airbag is deactivated.
Failure to follow the advice given above
can endanger life.
NOTE
When the remote control key is in key
position II (p. 73) the warning symbol (p.
31) for the airbag is shown in the combined instrument panel for
approx. 6 seconds.
Following which, the indicator in the roof
console is illuminated showing the correct
status for the front passenger seat airbag.
34
G017800
Never place a child in a child seat or on a
booster cushion on the front passenger
seat when the airbag is activated. This
applies to everyone shorter than 140 cm.
2
G017724
WARNING
Activated airbag (passenger seat):
Indicator showing that the passenger airbag is
activated.
Indicator showing that the passenger airbag is
deactivated.
A warning symbol in the roof console indicates that the airbag for the front passenger
seat is activated (see preceding illustration).
A text message and a symbol in the roof console indicate that the airbag for the front passenger seat is deactivated (see preceding
illustration).
WARNING
Never place a child in a child seat or on a
booster cushion in the front seat if the airbag is activated and the symbol
in
the roof console is illuminated. Failure to
follow this advice could endanger the life
of the child.
WARNING
Do not allow anyone to sit in the front passenger seat if the message in the roof console indicates that the airbag is deactivated, and if the warning symbol(p. 31) for
the airbag system is also displayed on the
combined instrument panel. This indicates
that there has been a severe malfunction.
Visit a workshop as soon as possible.
Volvo recommends that you contact an
authorised Volvo workshop.
02 Safety
Failure to follow the advice given above
can endanger the lives of passengers in
the car.
Related information
•
Child seats (p. 43)
Side airbag (SIPS)
In a side impact collision a large proportion of
the collision force is transferred by the SIPS
(Side Impact Protection System) to beams,
pillars, the floor, the roof and other structural
parts of the body. The side airbags at the driver's and front passenger seats protect the
chest area and the hip and are an important
part of the SIPS.
02
Driver's seat, left-hand drive.
G032949
WARNING
The SIPS bag system consists of two main
components, side airbag and sensors. The
side airbags are located in the front seat
backrests.
Front passenger seat, left-hand drive.
A sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors
and the side airbags are inflated. The airbag
inflates between the occupant and the door
panel and thereby cushions the initial impact.
The airbag deflates when compressed by the
collision. The side airbag is normally only
deployed on the side of the collision.
35
02 Safety
||
WARNING
•
Volvo recommends that repairs are
only carried out by an authorised Volvo
workshop. Defective work in the SIPSbag system could cause malfunction
and result in serious personal injury.
•
Do not put objects in the area between
the outside of the seat and the door
panel, since this area is required by
the side airbag.
•
Volvo recommends the use only of car
seat covers approved by Volvo. Other
seat covers may impede the operation
of the side airbags.
02
•
The protection provided by the car to children
seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion
is not diminished by the side airbag (p. 35).
Inflatable Curtain (IC)
The inflatable curtain helps to prevent the
driver and passengers from striking their
heads on the inside of the car during a collision.
Child seat/booster cushion (p. 43) can be
placed on the front passenger seat provided
that the car does not have an activated airbag
(p. 33) on the front passenger side.
Related information
•
•
Passenger airbag (p. 32)
General information on child safety (p.
42)
Side airbags are a supplement the
seatbelts. Always use a seatbelt.
Related information
36
Side airbag (SIPS) - child seat/booster
cushion
•
•
•
Passenger airbag (p. 32)
•
Inflatable Curtain (IC) (p. 36)
Driver airbag (p. 32)
Side airbag (SIPS) - child seat/booster
cushion (p. 36)
Inflatable curtain IC (Inflatable Curtain) is part
of the SIPS system (p. 35) and the airbag system (p. 31). It is fitted in the headlining along
both sides of the roof and protects the car's
occupants sitting in the outer seats. A sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors and
the inflatable curtain is inflated.
02 Safety
WARNING
Never hang or attach heavy items onto the
handles in the roof. The hook is only
designed for light clothing (not for solid
objects such as umbrellas for example).
Do not screw or install anything onto the
car's headlining, door pillars or side panels. This could compromise the intended
protection. Volvo recommends that you
only ever use Volvo genuine parts that are
approved for placement in these areas.
General information on WHIPS
(whiplash protection)
WHIPS (Whiplash Protection System) is a protection against whiplash injuries. The system
consists of energy absorbing backrests and
specially designed head restraints in the front
seats.
02
WARNING
Do not load the car higher than 50 mm
under the top edge of the door windows.
Otherwise, the intended protection of the
inflatable curtain, which is concealed in the
headlining, may be compromised.
WARNING
The inflatable curtain is a supplement to
the seatbelts.
Always use a seatbelt.
Related information
•
General information on seatbelts (p. 27)
The WHIPS system is actuated by a rear-end
collision, where the angle and speed of the
collision, and the nature of the colliding vehicle all have an influence.
37
02 Safety
||
WARNING
The WHIPS system is a supplement to the
seatbelts. Always use a seatbelt.
02
Properties of the seat
When the WHIPS system is deployed, the
front seat backrests are lowered backward to
alter the seating position of the driver and
front seat passenger. This reduces the risk of
whiplash injury.
WARNING
Never modify or repair the seat or WHIPS
system yourself. Volvo recommends that
you contact an authorised Volvo workshop.
WHIPS - child seats
WHIPS - seating position
The protection provided by the car to children
seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion
is not diminished by the WHIPS system (p.
37).
For optimum protection from the WHIPS system (p. 37) the driver and passenger must
have the correct seating position and make
sure that the system's function is not obstructed.
Child seat/booster cushion (p. 43) can be
placed on the front passenger seat provided
that the car does not have an activated airbag
(p. 33) on the front passenger side.
Related information
•
General information on child safety (p.
42)
Seating position
Set the correct seating position in the front
seat (p. 75) before driving starts.
Driver and front seat passenger should sit in
the centre of the seat with as little space as
possible between the head and the head
restraint.
Function
Related information
•
•
•
WHIPS - child seats (p. 38)
WHIPS - seating position (p. 38)
General information on seatbelts (p. 27)
Do not leave any objects on the floor behind the
driver's seat/passenger seat that may prevent the
WHIPS system from functioning.
38
02 Safety
WARNING
Do not squeeze rigid objects between the
rear seat cushion and the front seat backrest. Make sure you do not to obstruct the
function of the WHIPS system.
WARNING
If a seat has been subjected to extreme
forces, such as due to a rear-end collision,
the WHIPS system must be checked.
Volvo recommends that it is checked by
an authorised Volvo workshop.
Part of the WHIPS system's protective
capacity may have been lost even if the
seats appear to be undamaged.
Volvo recommends that you contact an
authorised Volvo workshop to have the
system checked even after a minor rearend collision.
Do not place objects on the rear seat that may
prevent the WHIPS system from functioning.
WARNING
If a rear seat backrest is folded down, the
corresponding front seat must be moved
forward so that it does not touch the
folded backrest.
When the systems deploy
In the event of a collision Volvo's different
personal safety systems work together in
order to minimise injury.
System
Triggered
Seatbelt tensioner (p. 30) front
seat
In the event of a
frontal collision,
and/or side-impact
collision, and/or rearend collision and/or
overturning
Seatbelt tensioner,
rear seat
In a frontal collision
and/or side-impact
accident and/or
overturning
Airbags
In a frontal collisionA
02
(Steering wheel(p.
32) and passenger
airbag (p. 32))
Side airbags
(SIPS) (p. 35)
In a side-impact
accidentA
39
02 Safety
System
Triggered
Inflatable Curtain
IC (p. 36)
In the event of a side
impact and/or overturning and/or some
frontal collisionsA
Whiplash protection WHIPS (p. 37)
In a rear-end collision
02
A
The bodywork of the car could be greatly deformed in a
collision without airbag deployment. A number of factors
such as the rigidity and weight of the object hit, the speed
of the car, the angle of the collision etc. affects how the
different safety systems of the car are activated.
If the airbags (p. 31) have deployed, the following is recommended:
•
Recovering the car. Volvo recommends
that you have it conveyed to an authorised Volvo workshop. Do not drive with
deployed airbags.
•
Volvo recommends that you engage an
authorised Volvo workshop to handle the
replacement of components in the car's
safety systems.
•
Always contact a doctor.
NOTE
The airbags and belt tensioner system are
deployed only once during a collision.
40
WARNING
The airbag system's control module is
located in the centre console. If the centre
console is drenched with water or other
liquid, disconnect the cables to the starter
battery. Do not attempt to start the car
since the airbags may deploy. Recovering
the car. Volvo recommends that you have
it conveyed to an authorised Volvo workshop.
General information on safety mode
Safety mode is a protective state that is
enforced when the collision may have damaged any of the car's vital functions such as,
for example, the fuel lines, sensors for one of
the safety systems, or the brake system.
WARNING
Never drive with deployed airbags. They
can make steering difficult. Other safety
systems may also be damaged. The
smoke and dust created when the airbags
are deployed can cause skin and eye irritation/injury after intensive exposure. In case
of irritation, wash with cold water. The
rapid deployment sequence and airbag
fabric may cause friction and skin burns.
Warning triangle in the combined instrument
panel.
If the car is involved in a collision, the text
Safety mode See manual may appear in the
combined instrument panel (p. 62) information display. This means that the car has
reduced functionality.
02 Safety
WARNING
Never attempt to repair your car or reset
the electronics yourself if the car has been
in safety mode. This could result in personal injury or the car not functioning as
normal. Volvo recommends that you
engage an authorised Volvo workshop to
check and restore the car to normal status
after Safety mode See manual has been
displayed.
Related information
•
Safety mode - attempting to start the car
(p. 41)
•
Safety mode - moving the car (p. 42)
Safety mode - attempting to start the
car
WARNING
Never, under any circumstances, attempt
to restart the car if it smells of fuel when
the Safety mode See manual message
is displayed. Leave the car at once.
If the car is set in safety mode (p. 40) then an
attempt to start the car can be made if everything seems normal and the absence of fuel
leakage has been checked.
WARNING
First, check that no fuel is leaking from the
car. There must be no smell of fuel either.
If the car is in safety mode it must not be
towed. It must be transported from its
location. Volvo recommends that it is
transported to an authorised Volvo workshop.
If everything seems normal and you have
checked for indications of fuel leakage, you
may attempt to start the car.
Remove the remote control key and open the
driver's door. If a message is now shown to
the effect that the ignition is on, press the
start button. Then close the door and reinsert
the remote control key. The car's electronics
will now try to reset themselves to normal
mode. Then try to start the car.
02
Related information
•
Safety mode - moving the car (p. 42)
If the message Safety mode See manual is
still shown on the display then the car must
not be driven or towed but a vehicle recovery
service (p. 304) used instead. Even if the car
appears to be driveable, hidden damage may
make the car impossible to control once moving.
41
02 Safety
02
Safety mode - moving the car
General information on child safety
If Normal mode is shown after Safety mode
See manual has been reset after attempting
to start the car (p. 41) , the car can be moved
carefully out of a dangerous position.
Children of all ages and sizes must always sit
correctly secured in the car. Never allow a
child to sit on the knee of a passenger.
Do not move the car further than necessary.
Related information
•
General information on safety mode (p.
40)
Volvo recommends that children travel in
rear-facing child seats until as late an age as
possible, at least until 3-4 years of age, and
then front-facing booster cushions/child seats
until up to 10 years of age.
The position of a child in the car and the
choice of equipment are dictated by the
child's weight and size; see Child seats (p.
43).
NOTE
Regulations regarding the placement of
children in cars vary from country to country. Check what does apply.
Volvo has child safety equipment (child seats,
booster cushions & attachment devices)
which is designed for your particular car.
Using Volvo's child safety equipment provides you with optimum conditions for your
child to travel safely in the car. Furthermore,
the child safety equipment fits and is easy to
use.
42
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
NOTE
In the event of questions when fitting child
safety products, contact the manufacturer
for clearer instructions.
Child safety locks
The rear doors and rear door windows* can
be blocked manually (p. 172) or electronically
(p. 173)* from opening from the inside.
Related information
•
•
•
Child seats - location (p. 47)
Child seat - ISOFIX (p. 50)
Child seats - upper mounting points (p.
54)
02 Safety
Child seats
NOTE
Children should sit comfortably and safely.
Make sure that the child seat is being used
correctly.
When using child safety products it is
important to read the installation instructions included.
02
WARNING
Do not secure the straps of the child seat
to the seat's horizontal adjustment bar,
springs or the rails and beams under the
seat. Sharp edges may damage the straps.
G020739
Look in the installation instructions for the
child seat for the correct fitting.
Child seats and airbags are not compatible.
}}
43
02 Safety
||
Recommended child seats2
Weight
Front seat (with deactivated airbag)
Group 0
02
Type approval: E1 04301146
Group 0+
(L)
max 13 kg
max 10 kg
Centre rear seat
Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant Seat) - rear-facing
child seat, secured with the ISOFIX fixture system.
max 10 kg
Group 0
Outer rear seat
Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant Seat) - rearfacing child seat, secured with the car's
seatbelt.
Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant Seat) - rear-facing
child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt.
Type approval: E1 04301146
Group 0+
Type approval: E1 04301146
max 13 kg
(U)
Group 0
Child seats which are universally approved.
Child seats which are universally approved.
max 10 kg
(U)
(U)
Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat (Volvo
Convertible Child Seat) - rear-facing child
seat, secured with the car's seatbelt and
straps.
Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat (Volvo
Convertible Child Seat) - rear-facing child seat,
secured with the car's seatbelt and straps.
(U)
Group 0+
Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant
Seat) - rear-facing child seat,
secured with the car's seatbelt.
Type approval: E1 04301146
(U)
Child seats which are universally approved.
(U)
max 13 kg
Group 1
9-18 kg
Type approval: E5 04192
(L)
2
44
Type approval: E5 04192
(L)
With regard to other child seats your car should be included in the manufacturer's enclosed list of vehicles or be universally approved in accordance with the ECE R44 legal requirement.
02 Safety
Weight
Front seat (with deactivated airbag)
Outer rear seat
Centre rear seat
Group 1
Child seats which are universally approved.
Child seats which are universally approved.
9-18 kg
(U)
(U)
Child seats which are universally approved.
Group 2
Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat (Volvo
Convertible Child Seat) - rear-facing child
seat, secured with the car's seatbelt and
straps.
Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat (Volvo
Convertible Child Seat) - rear-facing child seat,
secured with the car's seatbelt and straps.
15-25 kg
Type approval: E5 04192
(L)
Group 2
15-25 kg
Group 2/3
15-36 kg
Group 2/3
15-36 kg
(L)
Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat (Volvo
Convertible Child Seat) - front-facing child seat,
secured with the car's seatbelt.
Type approval: E5 04191
Type approval: E5 04191
(U)
(U)
Volvo booster seat with backrest (Volvo
Booster Seat with backrest).
Volvo booster seat with backrest (Volvo Booster
Seat with backrest).
Type approval: E1 04301169
Type approval: E1 04301169
(UF)
(UF)
Booster cushion with and without backrest
(Booster Cushion with and without
backrest).
Booster cushion with and without backrest
(Booster Cushion with and without backrest).
(UF)
02
Type approval: E5 04192
Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat (Volvo
Convertible Child Seat) - front-facing child
seat, secured with the car's seatbelt.
Type approval: E5 04216
(U)
Type approval: E5 04216
(UF)
Volvo rear-facing/turnable child
seat (Volvo Convertible Child
Seat) - front-facing child seat,
secured with the car's seatbelt.
Type approval: E5 04191
(U)
Volvo booster seat with backrest (Volvo Booster Seat with
backrest).
Type approval: E1 04301169
(UF)
Booster cushion with and without backrest (Booster Cushion
with and without backrest).
Type approval: E5 04216
(UF)
}}
45
02 Safety
||
Weight
Front seat (with deactivated airbag)
Group 2/3
02
15-36 kg
Outer rear seat
Centre rear seat
Integrated booster cushion (Integrated Booster
Cushion) - available as a factory fitted option.
Type approval: E5 04189
(B)
L: Suitable for specific child seats. These child seats may be intended for use in a special car model, limited or semi-universal categories.
U: Suitable for universally approved child seats in this weight class.
UF: Suitable for front-facing universally approved child seats in this weight class.
B: Built-in child seats approved for this weight class.
Related information
•
•
•
•
46
Child seats - location (p. 47)
Child seats - upper mounting points (p.
54)
Child seat - ISOFIX (p. 50)
General information on child safety (p. 42)
02 Safety
Child seats - location
Child seat - two-stage booster seat*
WARNING
Always fit child seats/booster cushions (p. 43)
in the rear seat if the passenger airbag is activated (p. 33). If a child is sitting on the front
passenger seat then he/she could suffer serious injury if the airbag deploys.
Booster cushions/child seats with steel
braces or some other design that could
rest on the seatbelt buckle's opening button must not be used, as they could cause
the seatbelt buckle to open accidentally.
Do not allow the upper section of the child
seat to rest against the windscreen.
The integrated booster seats in the rear seat
allow children to sit comfortably and safely.
The booster cushions are specially designed
to provide optimum safety. In combination
with the seatbelt (p. 27) they are approved for
children who weigh between 15 and 36 kg
and who are at least 95 cm in height.
02
Related information
The label for the airbag becomes visible when
the passenger door is opened, see illustration (p.
33).
•
•
General information on child safety (p. 42)
•
Child seat - ISOFIX (p. 50)
Child seats - upper mounting points (p.
54)
You may place:
•
a child seat/booster cushion on the front
passenger seat provided there is no activated airbag on the front passenger side.
•
one or more child seats/booster cushions
in the rear seat.
Correct position, the seatbelt should be positioned in on the shoulder.
WARNING
Never place a child in a child seat or on a
booster cushion in the front seat if the airbag (SRS) is activated.
No one shorter than 140 cm should ever
sit in the front passenger seat if the airbag
(SRS) is activated.
Failure to follow the advice given above
can endanger life.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
47
02 Safety
WARNING
02
Incorrect position, the head restraint must be
adjusted as high as the head and the seatbelt
must not be below the shoulder.
Check before driving that:
•
the integrated two-stage booster seat is
correctly set in accordance with the table
(p. 48) and in locked position
•
the seatbelt is in contact with the child's
body and is not slack or twisted
•
the seatbelt does not lie across the
child's throat or below the shoulder (see
preceding illustrations)
•
the lap section of the seatbelt is positioned low over the pelvis to provide optimal protection.
Volvo recommends that repair or replacement is only carried out by an authorised
Volvo workshop. Do not make any modifications or additions to the booster cushion. If an integrated booster cushion has
been subjected to a major load, such as in
conjunction with a collision, the entire
booster cushion must be replaced. Even if
the booster cushion appears to be undamaged, it may not afford the same level of
protection. The booster cushion must also
be replaced if it is heavily worn.
48
The integrated booster seat (p. 47) in the rear
seat can be folded up into two stages. How
many stages the cushion should be folded up
depends on the child's weight.
Weight
Stage 1
Stage 2
22-36 kg
15-25 kg
Stage 13
WARNING
If the instructions for the two-stage
booster seat are not followed then the
child could sustain serious injury in the
event of an accident.
Adjusting the booster seat's two levels is performed by raising (p. 48) and lowering (p.
49).
3
Two-stage booster seat* - raising
Lower stage.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Pull the handle forward and up in order to
release the booster cushion.
02 Safety
Two-stage booster seat* - lowering
The integrated booster seat (p. 47) in the rear
seat can be folded down from the upper or
lower stage to fully lowered position in the
seat cushion. However, it is not possible to
adjust the booster cushion from the upper
stage to the lower stage.
Press the booster cushion backwards to
lock.
Stage 24
02
Lift the booster cushion up at the front
edge and press it back against the backrest
to lock.
NOTE
It is not possible to adjust the booster seat
from stage 2 to stage 1. It must first be
reset by being fully folded down (p. 49)
into the seat cushion.
Pull the handle forwards to release the
cushion.
Start from the lower stage. Press the button.
4
Upper stage.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
49
02 Safety
||
Child seat - ISOFIX
ISOFIX is a fixture system for car child seats
(p. 43) that is based on an international standard.
02
Press down with your hand in the centre
of the cushion in order to lock it.
IMPORTANT
Check that there are no loose objects (e.g.
toys) left behind in the space under the
cushion before lowering.
NOTE
When folding the rear backrest the booster
seat must first be lowered.
Related information
•
Two-stage booster seat* - raising (p. 48)
Mounting points for the ISOFIX fixture system
are concealed behind the lower section of the
rear seat backrest, in the outer seats.
The location of the mounting points is indicated by symbols in the backrest upholstery
(see preceding illustration).
Press the seat cushion down to access the
mounting points.
Always follow the manufacturer's installation
instructions when connecting a child seat to
the ISOFIX mounting points.
Related information
•
•
50
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
ISOFIX - size classes (p. 51)
ISOFIX - types of child seat (p. 52)
•
General information on child safety (p. 42)
02 Safety
ISOFIX - size classes
There is a size classification for child seats
using the ISOFIX (p. 50) fixture system in
order to assist users in choosing the correct
type of child seat (p. 52).
Size
class
Description
A
Full size, front-facing child
seat
B
Reduced size (alt. 1), frontfacing child seat
B1
Reduced size (alt.2), front-facing child seat
C
Full size, rear-facing child seat
D
Reduced size, rear-facing
child seat
E
Rear-facing infant seat
F
Transverse infant seat, lefthand
G
Transverse infant seat, righthand
WARNING
Never place the child in the passenger
seat if the car is fitted with an activated airbag.
02
NOTE
If an ISOFIX child seat has no size classification, the car model must be included on
the vehicle list for the child seat.
NOTE
Volvo recommends that you contact an
authorised Volvo dealer for recommendations about which ISOFIX child seats Volvo
recommends.
51
02 Safety
ISOFIX - types of child seat
Child seats are in different sizes – cars are in
different sizes. This means that not all child
02
Type of child seat
Infant seat transverse
Infant seat, rear-facing
Weight
max 10 kg
max 10 kg
seats are suitable for all seats in all car models.
Size class
Passenger seats for ISOFIX installation of child seats
Front seat
Outer rear seat
F
X
X
G
X
X
E
X
OK
(IL)
Infant seat, rear-facing
max 13 kg
E
X
OK
(IL)
D
X
OK
(IL)
C
X
OK
(IL)
Child seat, rear-facing
9-18 kg
D
X
OK
(IL)
C
X
OK
(IL)
52
02 Safety
Type of child seat
Front-facing child seat
Weight
9-18 kg
Size class
B
Passenger seats for ISOFIX installation of child seats
Front seat
Outer rear seat
X
OKA
02
(IUF)
B1
X
OKA
(IUF)
A
X
OKA
(IUF)
X: The ISOFIX position is not suitable for ISOFIX child seats in this weight class and/or size class.
IL: Suitable for specific ISOFIX child seats. These child seats may be intended for use in a special car model, limited or semi-universal categories.
IUF: Suitable for front-facing ISOFIX child seats that are universally approved in this weight class.
A
Volvo recommends rear-facing child seats for this group.
Make sure you select the right size class (p.
51) of child seat with ISOFIX (p. 50) fixture
system.
53
02 Safety
Child seats - upper mounting points
02
NOTE
The car is equipped with upper mounting
points for certain front-facing child seats (p.
43). These mounting points are located on the
rear of the seat.
In cars with a cargo cover over the luggage compartment, this must be removed
before child seats can be attached to the
securing points.
For detailed information on how the child seat
should be tensioned in the upper mounting
points, see the seat manufacturer's instructions.
WARNING
The child seat's straps must always be
drawn through the hole in the head
restraint leg before they are tensioned at
the attachment point.
The upper mounting points are primarily
intended for use with front-facing child seats.
Volvo recommends that small children should
sit in rear-facing child seats to as late an age
as possible.
NOTE
Fold the head restraints in order to facilitate fitting this type of child seat in cars
with folding head restraints on the outer
seats.
54
Related information
•
•
•
General information on child safety (p. 42)
Child seats - location (p. 47)
Child seat - ISOFIX (p. 50)
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
03 Instruments and controls
Instruments and controls, left-hand
drive car - overview
The overview shows where the car's displays
and controls are located.
03
56
03 Instruments and controls
Overview, left-hand drive car
03
}}
57
03 Instruments and controls
||
03
58
Function
See
Function
See
Menus and messages, direction
indicators, main/
dipped beam, trip
computer
(p. 103), (p.
105), (p. 90),
(p. 84) and
(p. 111).
Control panel
(p. 168), (p.
173), (p. 95)
and (p. 97).
Cruise control*
(p. 187) and
(p. 190).
Horn, airbags
(p. 79) and
(p. 31).
Combined instrument panel
Hazard warning
flashers
(p. 89).
Control panel for
infotainment system
and menu navigation
(p. 105) and
the Sensus
Infotainment
supplement.
(p. 62).
Control panel for
climate control
(p. 121).
Menu navigation,
audio control,
phone control*
(p. 105) and
the Sensus
Infotainment
supplement.
Gear selector
(p. 264).
Controls for drive
modes
(p. 258).
START/STOP
ENGINE button
(p. 254).
Wipers and washing
(p. 93).
Ignition switch
(p. 73).
Steering wheel
adjustment
(p. 79).
Screen for infotainment system and
display of menus
(p. 105) and
the Sensus
Infotainment
supplement.
Bonnet opener
(p. 330).
Parking brake
(p. 272).
Door handle
–
Seat adjustment*
(p. 76).
Headlamp control,
opener for fuel filler
flap and tailgate
(p. 81), (p.
280) and (p.
170).
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Related information
•
•
•
Outside temperature gauge (p. 71)
Trip meter (p. 71)
Clock (p. 71)
03 Instruments and controls
Instruments and controls, right-hand
drive car - overview
The overview shows where the car's displays
and controls are located.
03
}}
59
03 Instruments and controls
||
Overview, right-hand drive cars
03
60
03 Instruments and controls
Function
See
Function
See
Screen for infotainment system and
display of menus
(p. 105) and
the Sensus
Infotainment
supplement.
Headlamp control,
opener for fuel filler
flap and tailgate
(p. 81), (p.
280) and (p.
170).
Ignition switch
(p. 73).
Seat adjustment*
(p. 76).
START/STOP
ENGINE button
(p. 254).
Parking brake
(p. 272).
(p. 79).
Cruise control*
(p. 187) and
(p. 190).
Steering wheel
adjustment
Combined instrument panel
(p. 62).
(p. 103), (p.
105), (p. 90),
(p. 84) and
(p. 111).
Horn, airbags
(p. 79) and
(p. 31).
Menus and messages, direction
indicators, main/
dipped beam, trip
computer
Gear selector
(p. 264).
Controls for drive
modes
(p. 258).
Control panel for
climate control
(p. 121).
Control panel for
infotainment system
and menu navigation
(p. 105) and
the Sensus
Infotainment
supplement.
Hazard warning
flashers
(p. 89).
Bonnet opener
(p. 330).
Menu navigation,
audio control,
phone control*
(p. 105) and
the Sensus
Infotainment
supplement.
Wipers and washing
(p. 93).
Door handle
–
Control panel
(p. 168), (p.
173), (p. 95)
and (p. 97).
Related information
•
•
•
Outside temperature gauge (p. 71)
Trip meter (p. 71)
Clock (p. 71)
03
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
61
03 Instruments and controls
Combined instrument panel
The combined instrument panel's information
display shows information on some of the
car's functions, as well as messages.
03
62
•
Digital combined instrument panel - overview (p. 63)
•
Combined instrument panel - meaning of
indicator symbols (p. 68)
•
Combined instrument cluster - meaning
of warning symbols (p. 69)
03 Instruments and controls
Digital combined instrument panel overview
The combined instrument panel's information
display shows information on some of the
car's functions, e.g. cruise control and trip
computer, as well as messages. The information is shown with symbols and text.
03
The instrument shows information according to the selections made, see Menu navigation - combined instrument panel (p. 103).
Hybrid battery gauge
Current energy level
mation, Eco guide & Hybrid guide (p.
67).
Active drive mode
The symbol illuminates when the diesel
engine is operating.
Hybrid guide (Driver Support Power
Meter). Shows the current driver-requested propulsion power and available electric motor power, i.e. the limit when the
diesel engine starts/stops. For more infor}}
63
03 Instruments and controls
||
Energy recovery
The combined instrument panel's information
display shows information on some of the
car's functions, e.g. cruise control and trip
computer, as well as messages. The information is shown with symbols and text. There
are further descriptions under the functions
that use the display.
Gauges and indicators
03
When the electric motor generates power
for the hybrid battery, bubbles are shown
in the hybrid battery gauge - see Foot
brake (p. 269).
Information display
Alternative themes can be selected for the
combined instrument panel. Possible themes
are "Hybrid", "Elegance", "Eco" and
"Performance". The setting for the theme can
be stored in the remote control key's memory
when locking the car, see Remote control key
with key blade (p. 152) and MY CAR (p.
105).
A theme can only be selected when the
engine is running.
To select the theme, press the left-hand stalk
switch's OK button and then select the
Themes menu option by turning the thumbwheel on the lever. Confirm your choice by
pressing the OK button. For more information
on menus, see Menu navigation - combined
instrument panel (p. 103).
The appearance of the centre console's
screen follows the combined instrument panel's theme setting on certain model variants.
Information display.
1
64
When the display's message "Distance to empty fuel tank:" starts to show "----", the marking becomes red.
Gauges and indicators, theme "Hybrid".
Fuel gauge. When the indicator lowers to
only one white marking1, the yellow indicator symbol for low level in the fuel tank
is illuminated. See also Trip computer supplementary information (p. 111) and
Filling up with fuel (p. 281).
Hybrid battery gauge
Speedometer
Hybrid guide. See also Eco guide &
Hybrid guide (p. 67).
Gear position indicator. See also Automatic gearbox -- Geartronic (p. 264).
03 Instruments and controls
03
Gauges and indicators, theme "Elegance".
Fuel gauge. When the indicator lowers to
only one white marking1, the yellow indicator symbol for low level in the fuel tank
is illuminated. See also Trip computer supplementary information (p. 111) and
Filling up with fuel (p. 281).
No function
Eco guide. See also Eco guide & Hybrid
guide (p. 67).
E-boost gauge. Illustrates electric motor
use, its support to the diesel engine and
engine braking2 with the electric motor.
No function
Gear position indicator. See also Automatic gearbox -- Geartronic (p. 264).
2
Gauges and indicators, theme "Performance".
Fuel gauge. When the indicator lowers to
only one white marking1, the yellow indicator symbol for low level in the fuel tank
is illuminated. See also Trip computer supplementary information (p. 111) and
Filling up with fuel (p. 281).
Speedometer
1
Gauges and indicators, theme "Eco".
Fuel gauge. When the indicator lowers to
only one white marking1, the yellow indicator symbol for low level in the fuel tank
is illuminated. See also Trip computer supplementary information (p. 111) and
Filling up with fuel (p. 281).
Speedometer
Hybrid guide. See also Eco guide &
Hybrid guide (p. 67).
Gear position indicator. See also Automatic gearbox -- Geartronic (p. 264).
When the display's message "Distance to empty fuel tank:" starts to show "----", the marking becomes red.
Engine braking with the electric motor charges the hybrid battery, see Foot brake (p. 269).
Speedometer
Tachometer. The meter indicates engine
speed in thousands of revolutions per
minute (rpm).
}}
65
03 Instruments and controls
||
Hybrid guide. See also Eco guide &
Hybrid guide (p. 67).
Gear position indicator. See also Automatic gearbox -- Geartronic (p. 264).
Indicator and warning symbols
If the engine does not start or if the functionality check is carried out in key position II
then all symbols go out within a few seconds
except the symbol for faults in the car's emissions system.
Related information
•
•
03
•
Indicator and warning symbols.
Indicator symbols
Indicator and warning symbols
Warning symbols
Functionality check
All indicator and warning symbols, apart from
symbols in the centre of the information display, illuminate in key position II or when the
engine is started. When the engine has
started, all the symbols should go out except
the parking brake symbol, which only goes
out when the brake is disengaged.
66
Combined instrument panel (p. 62)
Combined instrument panel - meaning of
indicator symbols (p. 68)
Combined instrument cluster - meaning
of warning symbols (p. 69)
03 Instruments and controls
Eco guide & Hybrid guide
Instantaneous value
Eco guide and Hybrid guide are two combined instrument panel (p. 62) instruments
which help the driver to drive the car with
optimum driving economy.
The instantaneous value is shown here - the
higher the reading on the scale, the better.
The car also stores statistics of journeys
made, which can be viewed in the form of a
block diagram; see Trip computer - trip statistics* (p. 112).
Eco guide
This instrument provides an indication of how
economically the car is being driven.
To view this function, select the theme "Eco";
see Digital combined instrument panel - overview (p. 63).
The instantaneous value is calculated based
on speed, engine speed, engine power utilised plus use of the foot brake.
Optimum speed (50-80 km/h) and low engine
speeds are encouraged. The pointers fall during acceleration and braking.
Very low instantaneous values illuminate the
red zone on the meter (with a short delay),
which means poor driving economy and
hence should be avoided.
Average value
The average value slowly follows the instantaneous value and describes how the car has
been driven most recently. The higher the
pointers on the scale, the better the economy
achieved by the driver.
Hybrid guide
This instrument shows the relationship
between how much power is being taken
from the electric motor and how much power
is available.
Instantaneous value
Average value
To view this function, select the theme
"Hybrid" or "Performance", see Digital combined instrument panel - overview (p. 63).
03
Driver-requested power
Available electric motor power
Where the two pointers meet is the threshold
for when the diesel engine starts/stops.
Driver-requested power
The large pointer indicates the amount of
engine power requested by the driver by regulating the accelerator pedal. The higher the
reading on the scale, the more power is
requested by the driver in the current gear.
Available electric motor power
The small pointer indicates the amount of
power currently available for the electric
motor.
A large gap between the two pointers indicates a large power reserve.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
67
03 Instruments and controls
Combined instrument panel meaning of indicator symbols
Symbol
Specification
Left-hand direction indicator
The indicator symbols alert the driver that a
function is activated, that the system is operating, or that an error or failure has occurred.
Right-hand direction indicator
Indicator symbols
Symbol
03
Specification
ABL fault
Emissions system
ABS fault
Rear fog lamp on
ABL fault
The symbol illuminates if a fault has arisen in
the ABL function (Active Bending Lights).
Emissions system
If the symbol illuminates after the engine has
been started then it may be due to a fault in
the car's emissions system. Drive to a workshop for checking. Volvo recommends that
you seek assistance from an authorised Volvo
workshop.
Stability system
ABS fault
Stability system, sport mode
If this symbol illuminates then the system is
not working. The car's regular brake system
continues to work, but without the ABS function.
Engine preheater
Low level in fuel tank
1. Stop the car in a safe place and turn off
the engine.
2. Restart the engine.
Information, read display text
Main beam On
68
3. If the symbol remains illuminated, drive to
a workshop to have the ABS system
checked. Volvo recommends that you
seek assistance from an authorised Volvo
workshop.
Rear fog lamp on
This symbol illuminates when the rear fog
lamp is switched on.
Stability system
A flashing symbol indicates that the stability
system is operating. If the symbol illuminates
with constant glow then there is a fault in the
system.
Stability system, sport mode
Sport mode allows for a more active driving
experience. The system then detects whether
the accelerator pedal, steering wheel movements and cornering are more active than in
normal driving and then allows controlled
skidding of the rear section up to a certain
level before it intervenes and stabilises the
car.
Engine preheater
This symbol illuminates during engine preheating. Preheating mostly takes place due to
low temperature.
Low level in fuel tank
When the symbol illuminates the level in the
fuel tank is low, refuel as soon as possible.
Information, read display text
When one of the car's systems does not
behave as intended, this information symbol
illuminates and a text appears on the information display. The message text is cleared with
03 Instruments and controls
the OK button, see Menu navigation - combined instrument panel (p. 103), or it disappears automatically after a time (time
depending on which function is indicated).
The information symbol can also illuminate in
conjunction with other symbols.
NOTE
When a service message is shown, the
symbol and message are cleared using the
OK button, or disappear automatically
after a time.
Main beam On
The symbol illuminates when main beam is on
and with main beam flash.
Combined instrument cluster meaning of warning symbols
Specification
If this symbol remains illuminated or illuminates while driving, it means a fault has been
detected in the seatbelt buckle, SRS, SIPS, or
IC systems. Drive immediately to a workshop
to have the system checked. Volvo recommends that you seek assistance from an
authorised Volvo workshop.
Parking brake applied
Seatbelt reminder
The warning symbols alert the driver that an
important function is activated, or that a serious error or a serious failure has occurred.
Warning symbols
Symbol
Airbags – SRS
Seatbelt reminder
Starter battery not charging
Left/right-hand direction indicator
Both direction indicator symbols flash when
the hazard warning flashers are used.
Fault in brake system
Related information
Warning
•
•
•
Combined instrument panel (p. 62)
Combined instrument cluster - meaning
of warning symbols (p. 69)
Digital combined instrument panel - overview (p. 63)
Airbags – SRS
Parking brake applied
This symbol illuminates with a constant glow
when the parking brake is applied. The symbol flashes during application, and then
changes over to a constant glow.
A flashing symbol in any other situation
means that a fault has arisen. Read the message on the information display.
03
This symbol flashes if someone in a front seat
has not put on their seatbelt or if someone in
a rear seat has taken off their seatbelt.
Starter battery not charging
This symbol illuminates during driving if a
fault has occurred in the electrical system.
Visit a workshop. Volvo recommends that you
seek assistance from an authorised Volvo
workshop.
Fault in brake system
If this symbol illuminates, the brake fluid level
may be too low. Stop the car in a safe place
and check the level in the brake fluid reservoir; see Brake and clutch fluid - level (p.
335).
If the brake and ABS symbols illuminate at
the same time, there may be a fault in the
brake force distribution system.
1. Stop the car in a safe place and turn off
the engine.
For more information, see Parking brake (p.
272).
69
03 Instruments and controls
||
2. Restart the engine.
03
•
If both symbols extinguish, continue
driving.
•
If the symbols remain illuminated,
check the level in the brake fluid reservoir, see Brake and clutch fluid - level
(p. 335). If the brake fluid level is normal but the symbols are still illuminated, the car can be driven, with great
care, to a workshop to have the brake
system checked. Volvo recommends
that you seek assistance from an
authorised Volvo workshop.
WARNING
If the brake fluid is under the MIN level in
the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive further before topping up the brake fluid.
The loss of brake fluid must be investigated by a workshop. Volvo recommends
that you contact an authorised Volvo
workshop.
WARNING
If the BRAKE and ABS symbols are lit at
the same time, there is a risk that the rear
end will skid during heavy braking.
Warning
The red warning symbol illuminates when a
fault has been indicated which could affect
the safety and/or driveability of the car. An
explanatory text is shown on the information
display at the same time. The symbol remains
visible until the fault has been rectified but the
text message can be cleared with the OK
button; see Menu navigation - combined
instrument panel (p. 103). The warning symbol can also illuminate in conjunction with
other symbols.
Action:
1. Stop in a safe place. Do not drive the car
further.
2. Read the information on the information
display. Implement the action in accordance with the message in the display.
Clear the message using the OK button.
Reminder – doors not closed
If one of the doors is not closed properly then
the information or warning symbol illuminates
together with an explanatory image in the
information display. Stop the car in a safe
place as soon as possible and close the door
that is open.
If the car is driven at a speed lower
than approx. 7 km/h then the information symbol illuminates.
3
70
Only cars with alarm*.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
If the car is driven at a speed higher
than approx. 7 km/h then the warning
symbol illuminates.
If the bonnet3 is not closed properly then the
warning symbol illuminates together with an
explanatory image in the information display.
Stop the car in a safe place as soon as possible and close the bonnet.
If the tailgate is not closed properly then the
information symbol illuminates together with
an explanatory image in the information display. Stop the car in a safe place as soon as
possible and close the tailgate.
Related information
•
•
•
Combined instrument panel (p. 62)
Combined instrument panel - meaning of
indicator symbols (p. 68)
Digital combined instrument panel - overview (p. 63)
03 Instruments and controls
Outside temperature gauge
Trip meter
Clock
The display for the outside temperature gauge
appears in the combined instrument panel.
The trip meter display appears in the combined instrument panel.
The clock display appears in the combined
instrument panel.
03
Display for outside temperature gauge,
digital instrument panel
Display for outside temperature gauge,
analogue instrument panel
When the temperature lies between +2 °C to
-5 °C a snowflake symbol illuminates in the
display. This warns of icy roads. If the car has
been stationary then the gauge may show a
reading that is too high.
Related information
•
Combined instrument panel (p. 62)
Trip meter.
Clock.
Display for trip meter
The two trip meters T1 and T2 are used for
measuring short distances. The distance is
shown in the display.
Turn the left stalk switch thumbwheel to show
the required meter.
A long press (until the change occurs) on the
left-hand stalk switch's RESET button resets
the trip meter shown. For more information,
see Trip computer - supplementary information (p. 111).
Display for showing the time
Set the clock
The clock can be adjusted in the menu system MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 105).
Related information
•
Combined instrument panel (p. 62)
Related information
•
Combined instrument panel (p. 62)
71
03 Instruments and controls
Volvo Sensus
Volvo Sensus is the heart of your personal
Volvo experience. It is Sensus that provides
information, entertainment and functions to
simplify your ownership.
functions can be activated or deactivated and
many different settings can be made.
buttons both vary, depending on the equipment
selected and the market.
Navigation* - NAV, see separate supplement.
With a press on MY CAR all settings related
to the driving and control of the car are presented, such as City Safety, locks and alarm,
automatic fan speed, setting the clock, etc.
Audio and media - RADIO, MEDIA, TEL*,
see separate supplement (Sensus Infotainment).
With a press on the respective function
*, NAV* and CAM*
RADIO, MEDIA, TEL*,
other sources, systems and functions can be
activated, e.g. AM, FM, CD, DVD*, TV*, Bluetooth*, navigation* and park assist camera*.
03
Car settings - MY CAR, see MY CAR (p.
105).
Internet-connected car *, see separate supplement (Sensus Infotainment).
Climate control system (p. 115).
For more information about all functions/
systems, see the relevant section in the
owner's manual or its supplement.
When you are sitting in your car you want
control, and in today's interconnected world,
this includes information, communication and
entertainment when it is most suitable for
you. Sensus covers all our solutions that enable connection* to the outside world, at the
same time providing you with intuitive control
over all the car's capabilities.
Volvo Sensus combines and presents many
functions in several of the car's systems on
the centre console's display screen. With
Volvo Sensus the car can be personalised by
means of an intuitive user interface. Settings
can be made in Car settings, Audio and
media, Climate control, etc.
Overview
Centre console control panel. The figure is schematic - the number of functions and layout of the
With the centre console buttons and controls
or the steering wheel's right-hand keypad*
72
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Park assist camera (p. 239) – CAM*.
Related information
•
Licenses (p. 394)
03 Instruments and controls
Key positions
The remote control key can be used to set the
vehicle's electrical system in different modes/
levels so that different functions are available;
see Key positions - functions at different levels (p. 73).
Key positions - functions at different
levels
the remote control key in the ignition
switch.
2. Then press the remote control key in the
lock up to its end position.
IMPORTANT
Foreign objects in the ignition switch can
impair the function or destroy the lock.
Do not press in the remote control key
incorrectly turned - hold the end with the
detachable key blade, see Detachable key
blade - detaching/attaching (p. 158).
In order to enable the use of a limited number
of functions with the engine switched off, the
car's electrical system can be set in 3 different levels (key positions) - 0, I and II - with the
remote control key. Throughout this owner's
manual these levels are described using the
denomination "key positions".
03
The following table shows the functions available in each key position/level.
Remove the remote control key
Push the remote control key, allow it to eject,
then pull it out from the ignition switch.
Ignition switch with remote control key extracted/inserted.
NOTE
For cars with the Keyless* function the
remote control key does not need to be
inserted into the ignition switch but can be
stored in e.g. a pocket. For more information on Keyless functions, see Keyless
drive* (p. 162).
Insert the remote control key
1. Hold the end of the remote control key
with the detachable key blade and insert
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
73
03 Instruments and controls
||
Level
0
Functions
•
•
•
03
I
•
Level
II
Odometer, clock and temperature gauge are illuminated.
Power seats can be adjusted.
The audio system can be
used for a limited time - see
the Sensus Infotainment supplement.
Sunroof, power windows, 12V
socket in the passenger compartment, navigation, phone,
ventilation fan and windscreen wipers can be used.
Current consumption loads the
starter battery in this key position.
Functions
•
•
The headlamps come on.
•
Several other systems are
activated. However, heating in
seat cushions and the rear
window can only be activated
after the engine has been
started.
Warning/indicator lamps illuminate for 5 seconds.
This key position consumes a
lot of current from the battery
and should therefore be avoided!
Choosing key position/level
•
Key position 0 - Unlock the car - This
means that the car's electrical system is
at level 0.
•
Key position I - With the remote control
key fully inserted into the ignition switch4
- Briefly press START/STOP ENGINE.
NOTE
To reach level I or II without starting the
engine - do not depress the brake/clutch
pedal when these key positions are due to
be selected.
4
5
74
Not necessary for cars with the Keyless* function.
Approx. 2 seconds.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
•
Key position II - With the remote control
key fully inserted into the ignition switch4
- Give a long5 press on START/STOP
ENGINE.
•
Back to key position 0 - To return to key
position 0 from position II and I - Briefly
press on START/STOP ENGINE.
Audio system
For information on audio system functions
with remote control key removed, see the
Sensus Infotainment supplement.
Starting and stopping the engine
For information about starting/stopping the
engine, see Starting the engine (p. 254).
Related information
•
Key positions (p. 73)
03 Instruments and controls
Seats, front
The car's front seats have different setting
options for optimum seating comfort.
WARNING
Adjust the position of the driver's seat
before setting off, never while driving.
Make sure that the seat is in locked position in order to avoid personal injury in the
event of sudden braking or an accident.
Lowering the front seat
4. Push the seat forward so that the head
restraint "locks" in under the glovebox.
Raising takes place in reverse order.
WARNING
Grasp the backrest and make sure that it
is properly locked after being folded up in
order to avoid personal injury in the event
of sudden braking or an accident.
backrest*7
03
Related information
•
Seats, front - electrically operated (p.
76)
•
Seats, rear (p. 77)
Lumbar support adjustment, turn the
wheel6.
Forward/backward: lift the handle to
adjust the distance to the steering wheel
and pedals. Check that the seat is locked
after changing position.
Raise/lower* front edge of seat cushion,
pump up/down.
Adjust backrest rake, turn the wheel.
Raise/lower the seat, pump up/down.
Control panel for power seat*.
6
7
The passenger seat backrest can be folded
forward to make room for long loads.
Move the seat as far back/down as possible.
Adjust the backrest to an upright position.
Lift the catches on the rear of the backrest and fold it forward.
Also applies to power seat.
The sport seat backrest cannot be folded.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
75
03 Instruments and controls
03
Seats, front - electrically operated
Preparations
The car's front seats have different setting
options for optimum seating comfort. The
power seat can be moved forward/backward
and up/down. The front edge of the seat
cushion can be raised/lowered. The backrest
angle can be changed.
The seats can be adjusted for a certain time
after unlocking the door with the remote control key without the key in the ignition switch.
Seat adjustment is normally made in key
position I and can always be made when the
engine is running.
Power seat*
Seat with memory function*
2. Hold the button depressed to store settings while depressing one of the memory
buttons.
Using a stored setting
Hold one of the memory buttons depressed
until the seat and the door mirrors stop. If you
release the button then the movement of the
seat will stop.
Heated seats
For heated seats, see Heated front seats* (p.
122) and Heated rear seat* (p. 122).
Related information
•
•
Front edge of seat cushion up/down
Seat forward/backward and up/down
Backrest rake
The memory function stores settings for the
seat and the door mirrors.
Store setting
Memory button
The power front seats have overload protection which is tripped if a seat is blocked by an
object. If this happens, go to key position I or
0 and wait a short time before adjusting the
seat again.
Only one movement (forward/back/up/down)
can be made at a time.
76
Memory button
Memory button
Button for storing settings
1. Adjust the seat and the door mirrors.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Seats, front (p. 75)
Seats, rear (p. 77)
03 Instruments and controls
Key memory* in remote control key8
All remote control keys can be used by different drivers to store the settings for the driver's
seat and door mirrors9.
remote control key's memory (if the seat
has been moved since you locked the
car).
The key memory can be activated/deactivated in the menu system MY CAR. For a
description of the menu system, see MY CAR
(p. 105).
Seats, rear
The rear seat backrest and the outer seat
head restraints can be folded. The centre seat
head restraint can be adjusted to suit the
height of the passenger.
Head restraint, centre seat, rear
Emergency stop
03
If the seat accidentally begins to move, press
one of the setting buttons for the seat or
memory buttons in order to stop the seat.
Restarting to reach the seat position stored in
the key memory is performed by pressing the
unlock button on the remote control key. The
driver's door must then be open.
WARNING
Proceed as follows in order to store the settings and use the key memory:
•
•
•
8
9
10
Risk of crushing! Make sure that children
do not play with the controls. Check that
there are no objects in front of, behind or
under the seat during adjustment. Ensure
that none of the rear seat passengers is in
danger of becoming trapped.
Adjust the seat as you want it.
Lock the car by pressing the lock button
on the remote control key that you normally use. This stores the positions of the
seat and door mirrors in the remote control key's memory10.
Unlock the car (by pressing the unlock
button on the same remote control key)
and open the driver's door. The driver's
seat and door mirrors will automatically
adopt the positions that are stored in the
Related information
•
Remote control key - functions (p. 154)
Adjust the head restraint according to passenger height so that the whole of the back of
the head is covered if possible. Slide it up as
required.
To lower the head restraint again, the button
(located in the centre between the backrest
and head restraint, see illustration) must be
pressed in while the head restraint is pressed
down carefully.
For key memory for Keyless function, see Keyless drive* - key memory (p. 165).
Only if the car is equipped with power seat with memory and retractable power door mirrors.
This setting does not affect settings that have been stored in the power seat's memory function.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
77
03 Instruments and controls
||
Manual lowering of the outer head
restraints, rear seat
The triple-section backrest can be folded in
different ways.
NOTE
The front seats may need to be pushed
forwards, and/or the backrests adjusted
upwards, in order that the rear backrests
can be folded forward fully.
03
Pull the locking handle closest to the head
restraint to fold the head restraint forward.
The head restraint is moved back manually
until a "click" can be heard.
WARNING
The head restraints must be in locked
position after being raised.
Lowering the rear seat backrest
IMPORTANT
There must be no objects on the rear seat
when the backrest is to be folded down.
The seat belts must not be connected
either. Otherwise there is a risk of damaging the rear seat upholstery.
78
•
The left-hand section can be folded separately.
•
The centre section can be folded separately.
•
The right-hand section can only be folded
together with the centre section.
•
If the entire backrest is to be folded then
the different sections should be folded
separately.
If the centre backrest is being lowered release and adjust the head restraint for
the centre backrest, see the earlier section "Head restraint, centre seat, rear".
The outer head restraints are lowered
automatically when the outer backrests
are lowered. Pull up the backrest's lockwhile folding the backrest
ing handle
forward at the same time. A red indicator
shows that the
on the lock catch
backrest is no longer locked in place.
NOTE
When the backrests have been lowered
the head restraints must be moved forward slightly so as not to make contact
with the seat cushion.
Raising takes place in reverse order.
03 Instruments and controls
NOTE
When the backrest has been raised, the
red indicator should no longer be showing.
If it is still showing then the backrest is not
locked in place.
Move the head restraint back manually until a
click is heard.
Check that the backrests and head
restraints in the rear seat are locked properly after being folded up.
Electrical lowering of the rear seat's
outer head restraints*
The steering wheel can be adjusted in different positions and has controls for horn and
cruise control, as well as menu, audio and
phone control.
Do not lower the outer head restraints if
there are any passengers using of the
outer seats.
Adjusting
03
WARNING
The head restraints must be in locked
position after being raised.
Related information
•
•
Seats, front (p. 75)
Seats, front - electrically operated (p. 76)
G021138
WARNING
Steering wheel
WARNING
Adjusting the steering wheel.
Lever - releasing the steering wheel
Possible steering wheel positions
The steering wheel can be adjusted for both
height and depth:
1. The remote control key must be in key
position II.
2. Press the button to lower the rear outer
head restraints to improve rearward visibility.
1. Pull the lever towards you to release the
steering wheel.
2. Adjust the steering wheel to the position
that suits you.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
79
03 Instruments and controls
||
3. Push back the lever to fix the steering
wheel in place. If the lever is stiff, press
the steering wheel lightly at the same time
as you push the lever back.
Horn
Heating* of the steering wheel
The steering wheel can be heated with electric heating.
Function
WARNING
Adjust the steering wheel and fix it before
driving away.
03
With speed related power steering* the level
of steering force can be adjusted, see Adjustable steering force* (p. 247).
Keypads*
Horn.
Press the centre of the steering wheel to signal.
Related information
•
Keypads in the steering wheel.
Cruise control* (p. 187)
Adaptive cruise control - ACC* (p. 190)
Audio and phone control, see separate
Sensus Infotainment supplement.
80
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Heating* of the steering wheel (p. 80)
Button position may vary depending on equipment selected and market.
Repeatedly press the button to switch
between the following functions:
Function
Indicator
Switched off
Button lamp extinguished
Heating
Button lamp illuminated
Automatic steering wheel heating
With activated automatic start of steering
wheel heating, the heating of the steering
wheel starts when the engine is started. Automatic start takes place when the car is cold
and the ambient temperature is below
03 Instruments and controls
approx. 10 °C. Activate/deactivate the function in the menu system MY CAR (p. 105).
Light switches
Knob positions
The headlamp control activates and adjusts
the external lighting. It is also used to adjust
the display, instrument and passenger compartment lighting.
Overview, light switches
NOTE
The same lamps are used for daytime running lights and position/parking lamps
front. The brightness is higher when the
lamps are used as daytime running lights.
Position
Specification
03
Daytime running lightsA when
the car's electrical system is in
key position II or the engine is
running.
Main beam flash can be used.
Daytime running lights, side
marker lamps front and position/parking lamps/side marker
lamps rear when the car's electrical system is in key position II
or the engine is running.
Overview, light switches.
Thumbwheel for adjusting display and
instrument lighting as well as ambient
lighting*
Button for rear fog lamp
11
Knob for daytime running lights and parking lamps
Automatic switching to position/parking lamps/side marker
lamps when the car is parked.
Thumbwheel11 for headlamp levelling
Main beam flash can be used.
Not available for cars equipped with active Xenon headlamps*.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
81
03 Instruments and controls
||
Position
03
Specification
Daytime running lights, side
marker lamps front and position/parking lamps/side marker
lamps rear during the day when
the car's electrical system is in
key position II or the engine is
running.
Automatic switching to dipped
beam and position/parking
lamps/side marker lamps in
poor light conditions or when
the windscreen wipers or rear
fog lamps are activated.
The tunnel detection (p. 84)*
function is activated.
Position
Specification
Dipped beam and position/
parking lamps/side marker
lamps.
2. Roll the thumbwheel up/down to raise/
lower beam alignment.
Main beam can be activated.
Main beam flash can be used.
A
Fitted in or under the front bumper.
mode is used
Volvo recommends that
when the car is being driven, as long as traffic
situations or weather conditions are unfavourable for the active high beam function*.
Instrument lighting
The active high beam (p. 85)*
function can be used.
Different display and instrument lighting is
switched on depending on key position; see
Key positions - functions at different levels (p.
73).
Main beam can be activated
when dipped beam is switched
on.
The display lighting is automatically subdued
in darkness - the sensitivity is set with the
thumbwheel.
Main beam flash can be used.
The intensity of the instrument lighting is
adjusted with the thumbwheel.
Headlamp levelling
The load in the car changes the vertical alignment of the headlamp beam, which could
dazzle oncoming motorists. Avoid this by
adjusting the height of the beam. Lower the
beam if the car is heavily laden.
82
1. Leave the engine running, or have the
car's electrical system in key position I.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Thumbwheel positions for different load cases.
Only driver
Driver and passenger in the front passenger seat
Occupants in all seats
Occupants in all seats and maximum load
in the cargo area
The driver and maximum load in the
cargo area
Cars with active Xenon headlamps* have
automatic headlamp levelling and are therefore not equipped with the thumbwheel.
03 Instruments and controls
Position/parking lamps
Position/parking lamps are switched on with
the headlamp control's knob.
Related information
•
Light switches (p. 81)
Daytime running lights
With the knob for headlamp control in posiand the car's electrical system in
tion
key position II or the engine running, the daytime running lights are activated automatically
in good light conditions.
Daytime running lights during the day.
DRL
03
Knob for headlamp control in the position for
position/parking lamps.
(numTurn the knob to the position for
ber plate lighting is switched on at the same
time).
If the car's electrical system is in key position
II or the engine is running then the daytime
running lights switch on instead of the front
position/parking lamps.
When it is dark outside and the tailgate is
opened the rear position/parking lamps illuminate to alert traffic behind. This takes place
irrespective of what position the knob is in or
what key position the car's electrical system
is in.
Knob for headlamp control in AUTO position.
With the knob for headlamp control in
position the daytime running lights (Daytime
Running Lights - DRL) are activated automatically when the car is driven during the day. A
light sensor on the top of the instrument
panel changes from daytime running lights to
dipped beam at twilight or when daylight
becomes too weak. Switching to dipped
beam also takes place if the windscreen wipers or rear fog lamps are activated.
83
03 Instruments and controls
WARNING
This system help to save energy - it cannot
determine in all situations when daylight is
too weak or sufficiently strong, e.g. in mist
and rain.
03
The driver is always responsible for ensuring that the car is driven with its lights in a
correct state and in accordance with applicable traffic regulations.
Tunnel detection*
Main/dipped beam
In markets without automatic dipped beam,
tunnel detection activates dipped beam when
driving into a tunnel. Dipped beam is deactivated approx. 20 seconds after the car has
been driven out of the tunnel.
With the knob for headlamp control in posiand the car's electrical system in
tion
key position II or the engine running, the
dipped beam is activated automatically in
poor light conditions.
The tunnel detection function is available in
cars with rain sensor*. The sensor detects the
entrance to a tunnel and resets the lighting
from daytime running lights to dipped beam.
Approx. 20 seconds after the car has left the
tunnel, the lighting returns to daytime running
lights. If the car is driven into another tunnel
within this time period then dipped beam is
kept switched on. This avoids repeated
changes to the car's light settings.
With the knob for headlamp control in posidipped beam is always switched on
tion
when the engine is running or when key position II is active.
Note that the headlamp control's knob must
position for tunnel detection
remain in
to work.
Related information
•
•
Main/dipped beam (p. 84)
Light switches (p. 81)
Stalk switch and knob for headlamp control.
Position for main beam flash
Position for main beam
Dipped beam
With the knob in
position, dipped beam
is activated automatically at twilight or when
daylight becomes too weak. Dipped beam is
84
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
03 Instruments and controls
also activated automatically if the windscreen
wipers or rear fog lamps are activated.
dipped beam
With the knob in position
is always switched on when the engine is running or when key position II is active.
Main beam flash
Move the stalk switch gently towards the
steering wheel to the position for main beam
flash. Main beam comes on until the stalk
switch is released.
Main beam
Main beam can be activated when the knob
12 or
is in position
. Activate/deactivate main beam by moving the stalk switch
towards the steering wheel to the end position and then releasing. Alternatively, the
main beam can be deactivated by a light
press of the stalk switch toward the steering
wheel.
When main beam has been activated the
symbol illuminates in the combined
instrument panel.
Active high beam*
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
Active Xenon headlamps* (p. 87)
Active high beam* (p. 85)
Light switches (p. 81)
Headlamps - adjusting headlamp pattern
(p. 93)
Tunnel detection* (p. 84)
The Active High Beam function detects the
headlamp beams of oncoming traffic or the
rear lights of vehicles in front, and switches
the lighting from main beam to dipped beam.
Xenon headlamps only dim the portion of the
light beam that points directly to the vehicle.
The lighting returns to main beam when the
incoming light has stopped.
Active high beam (Active High Beam - AHB) is
a function which uses a camera sensor at the
top edge of the windscreen to detect the
headlamp beams of oncoming traffic or the
rear lights of vehicles in front, and then
switches from main beam to dipped beam.
The function can also take streetlights into
account.
Car with halogen headlamps
The lighting returns to main beam about a
second after the camera sensor no longer
detects the headlamp beams from oncoming
traffic or the rear lights from vehicles in front.
Auxiliary lamps*
Car with Xenon headlamps
If the car has auxiliary lamps, the driver can
use the MY CAR menu system to choose
whether they should be deactivated or
switched on/off simultaneously with the main
beam13, see MY CAR (p. 105).
Unlike what happens during conventional
dimming, the light beam continues with main
beam on both sides of oncoming traffic or
vehicles ahead - only the part of the light
12
13
03
Active high beam - AHB
When dipped beam is switched on.
Auxiliary lamps must be connected to the electrical system by a workshop. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
85
03 Instruments and controls
||
beam that points directly to the vehicle is
dimmed.
Manual operation
NOTE
Keep the windscreen surface in front of the
camera sensor free from ice, snow, mist
and dirt.
Do not stick or attach anything to the
windscreen in front of the camera sensor
as this may reduce effectiveness or cause
one or more of the systems dependent on
the camera to stop working.
03
Stalk switch and knob for headlamp control in
AUTO position.
Dipped beam directly toward oncoming vehicles,
but continued main beam on both sides of the
vehicle.
The function can start while driving in the
dark when the car's speed is 20 km/h or
higher.
The lighting returns to full main beam about a
second after the camera sensor no longer
detects the headlamp beams from oncoming
traffic or the rear lights from vehicles in front.
Activate/deactivate AHB by moving the lefthand stalk switch towards the steering wheel
to the end position and then releasing. Deactivation when main beam is on means that the
lights are reset directly to dipped beam.
Activating/deactivating
AHB can be activated when the headlamp
control's knob is in position
(provided
that the function has not been deactivated in
the menu system MY CAR), see MY CAR (p.
105).
86
When AHB is activated the
symbol
turns white in the instrument's information
display.
When main beam is activated, the symbol
shines blue. This also applies for Xenon headlamps if the main beam is partially dimmed,
i.e. as soon as the light beam shines with
slightly more than dipped beam.
If the message Active main beam
Temporary unavailable Switch manually is
shown in the combined instrument panel's
information display then you have to switch
manually between main and dipped beam.
However, the knob for headlamp control can
still remain in position
. The same
applies if the message Windscreen sensors
blocked See manual and the
symbol
are shown. The
symbol goes out when
these messages are shown.
AHB may be temporarily unavailable e.g. in
situations with dense fog or heavy rain. When
AHB becomes available again, or the windscreen sensors are no longer blocked, the
symbol
message extinguishes and the
illuminates.
03 Instruments and controls
WARNING
Active Xenon headlamps*
IMPORTANT
Active Xenon headlamps are designed to provide maximum illumination in bends and junctions and so provide increased safety.
AHB is an aid for using optimum light
composition when conditions are favourable.
Examples of when manual switching
between main and dipped beam may be
required:
The driver always bears responsibility for
manually switching between main and
dipped beam when traffic situations or
weather conditions so require.
•
•
•
•
•
In heavy rain or dense fog
•
When the traffic ahead has weak lighting
•
If there are pedestrians on or beside
the road
•
If there are highly reflective objects
such as signs in the vicinity of the road
•
When the lighting from oncoming traffic is obscured by e.g. a crash barrier
•
When there is traffic on connecting
roads
•
•
On the brow of a hill or in a hollow
Active Xenon headlamps ABL
In freezing rain
In snow flurries or slush
03
In moonlight
When driving in poorly lit built-up
areas
In sharp bends.
For more information on the limitations of the
camera sensor, see Collision warning system*
- camera sensor limitations (p. 222).
Related information
•
•
Main/dipped beam (p. 84)
Light switches (p. 81)
Headlamp pattern with function deactivated (left)
and activated (right) respectively.
If the car is equipped with active Xenon headlamps (Active Bending Lights – ABL) the light
from the headlamps follows the steering
wheel movement in order to provide maximum lighting in bends and junctions and so
provide increased safety.
The function is activated automatically when
the car is started (provided that it has not
been deactivated in the menu system
MY CAR), see MY CAR (p. 105). In the event
symbol illuof a fault in the function the
minates in the combined instrument panel at
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
87
03 Instruments and controls
||
the same time as the information display
shows an explanatory text and a further illuminated symbol.
Symbol
03
Display
Specification
Headlamp
system
malfunction Service
required
The system is
disengaged. Visit
a workshop if
the message
remains. Volvo
recommends
that you contact
an authorised
Volvo workshop.
The function is activated when main beam or
dipped beam is used and the car's speed is
lower than approx. 30 km/h.
In addition, both cornering lights are switched
on as a supplement to the reversing lamp
during reversing.
Related information
•
•
•
The function is only active in twilight or darkness and only when the car is moving.
The function14 can be deactivated/activated
in the menu system MY CAR, see MY CAR (p.
105).
For headlamp pattern adjustment, see Headlamps - adjusting headlamp pattern (p. 93).
Cornering lights
Active Xenon headlamps are equipped with
cornering lights that temporarily illuminate the
area diagonally in front of the car in the direction the steering wheel is turned in a sharp
bend, or in the direction for which the direction indicators are used.
14
88
Rear fog lamp
When visibility is reduced by fog the rear fog
lamp can be used so that other road users
shall notice vehicles in front at an early stage.
Activated on delivery from the factory.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Main/dipped beam (p. 84)
Active high beam* (p. 85)
Light switches (p. 81)
Button for rear fog lamp.
The rear fog lamp can only be switched on
when key position II is active or the engine is
running and the headlamp control's knob is in
or
.
position
Press the button for On/Off. The rear fog
lamp's indicator symbol
in the combined instrument panel and the light in the
button both illuminate when the rear fog lamp
is switched on.
The rear fog lamp is switched off automatically when the engine is switched off or when
03 Instruments and controls
the headlamp control's knob is turned to
or
.
position
NOTE
Regulations on the use of rear fog lamps
vary from country to country.
Related information
•
Light switches (p. 81)
Brake lights
Hazard warning flashers
The brake light automatically comes on during
braking.
The hazard warning flashers warn other road
users by means of all of the car's direction
indicator lamps flashing simultaneously when
this function is activated.
The brake light is switched on when the brake
pedal is depressed. In addition, it is switched
on when one of driving support systems
Adaptive cruise control (p. 190), City Safety
(p. 207) or Collision warning system (p. 214)
brakes the car.
When the hazard warning flashers are activated both direction indicator symbols flash in
the combined instrument panel.
03
For information on emergency brake lights
and automatic hazard warning flashers, see
Foot brake - emergency brake lights and
automatic hazard warning flashers (p. 271).
Button for hazard warning flashers.
Press the button to activate the hazard warning flashers. Both direction indicator symbols
in the combined instrument panel flash when
the hazard warning flashers are used.
The hazard warning flashers are activated
automatically when the car has been braked
so suddenly that the emergency brake lights
have been activated at a speed below
10 km/h. The hazard warning flashers remain
on when the car has stopped and are deactivated automatically when the car is driven off
89
03 Instruments and controls
||
again or the button is depressed. For more
information on emergency brake lights and
automatic hazard warning flashers, see Foot
brake - emergency brake lights and automatic hazard warning flashers (p. 271).
Related information
•
Direction indicators
The car's direction indicators are operated
with the left-hand stalk switch. The direction
indicator lamps flash three times or continuously, depending on how far up or down the
stalk switch is moved.
Direction indicators (p. 90)
Direction indicator symbols
For direction indicator symbols, see Combined instrument panel - meaning of indicator
symbols (p. 68).
Related information
03
•
Direction indicators.
Short flash sequence
Move the stalk switch up or down to the
first position and release. The direction
indicator lamps flash three times. The
function can be activated/deactivated in
the menu system MY CAR, see MY
CAR (p. 105).
Continuous flash sequence
Move the stalk switch up or down to the
outer position.
90
The stalk switch remains in its position and is
moved back manually, or automatically by the
steering wheel movement.
Hazard warning flashers (p. 89)
03 Instruments and controls
Interior lighting
Front roof lighting
Lighting in the cargo area
The passenger compartment lighting is activated/deactivated with the buttons in the controls above the front seats and the rear seat.
The front reading lamps are switched on or
off by pressing the relevant button in the roof
console.
The lighting in the cargo area is switched on
and off respectively when the tailgate is
opened or closed.
Rear roof lighting
Automatic lighting
Controls in roof console for the front reading
lamps and passenger compartment lighting.
Reading lamp, left-hand side
Reading lamp, right-hand side
Interior lighting
All lighting in the passenger compartment can
be switched on and off manually within
30 minutes from when:
•
the engine has been switched off and the
car's electrical system is in key position 0
•
the car has been unlocked but the engine
has not been started.
G021150
G021149
The switch for passenger compartment lighting has three positions for the lighting in the
passenger compartment:
Rear roof lighting.
The lamps are switched on or off by pressing
each respective button.
Courtesy lighting
Courtesy lighting (and passenger compartment lighting) is switched on and off respectively when a side door is opened or closed.
•
Off – right-hand side pressed in, automatic lighting deactivated.
•
Neutral position – automatic lighting
activated.
•
On – left-hand side pressed in, passenger
compartment lighting switched on.
Neutral position
When the button is in neutral position the
passenger compartment lighting is switched
on and off automatically in accordance with
the following.
The passenger compartment lighting is
switched on and remains on for 30 seconds
if:
•
the car is unlocked with the remote control key or key blade, see Remote control
key - functions (p. 154) or Detachable
key blade - unlocking doors (p. 159)
•
the engine has been switched off and the
car's electrical system is in key position
0.
Glovebox lighting
Glovebox lighting is switched on and off
respectively when the lid is opened or closed.
Vanity mirror lighting
The lighting for the vanity mirror (p. 143) is
switched on and off respectively when the
cover is opened or closed.
03
}}
91
03 Instruments and controls
||
Passenger compartment lighting is switched
off when:
•
•
the engine is started
the car is locked.
The passenger compartment lighting comes
on and remains on for two minutes if one of
the doors is open.
03
If any lighting is switched on manually and
the car is locked then it will be switched off
automatically after two minutes.
Mood lights
When the normal passenger compartment
lighting is switched off and the engine is running, a number of LEDs illuminate, including
one in the ceiling lighting, in order to provide
a low-light and enhance the mood while driving. This lighting goes out for a little while
after the normal passenger compartment
lighting when the car is locked. The brightness is controlled using the thumbwheel on
the headlamp control (p. 81).
Home safe light duration
Approach light duration
Home safe lighting consists of dipped beam,
parking lamps, lamps in the door mirrors,
number plate lighting, interior roof lighting as
well as courtesy lighting.
Approach light duration consists of parking
lamps, lamps in the door mirrors, number
plate lighting, interior roof lighting as well as
courtesy lighting.
Some of the exterior lighting can be kept
switched on to work as home safe lighting
after the car has been locked.
Approach lighting is switched on with the
remote control key, see Remote control key functions (p. 154), and is used to switch on
the car's lighting at a distance.
1. Remove the remote control key from the
ignition switch.
2. Move the left-hand stalk switch toward
the steering wheel to the end position and
release it. The function can be activated
in the same way as with main beam flash;
see Main/dipped beam (p. 84).
3. Get out of the car and lock the door.
When the function is activated, dipped beam,
parking lamps, door mirror lamps, number
plate lighting, interior roof lamps and courtesy
lighting are switched on.
The length of time for which the home safe
lighting should be kept on can be set in the
menu system MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 105).
Related information
•
92
Approach light duration (p. 92)
When the function is activated with the
remote control, the parking lamps, door mirror lamps, number plate lighting, interior roof
lamps and courtesy lighting are switched on.
The length of time for which the approach
lighting should be kept on can be set in the
menu system MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 105).
Related information
•
Home safe light duration (p. 92)
03 Instruments and controls
Headlamps - adjusting headlamp
pattern
If the car is equipped with active Xenon headlamps and has the Active High Beam function
then the headlamp pattern must be reset
when changing from right to left-hand traffic,
and vice versa.
Wipers and washing
Intermittent wiping
Wipers and washers clean the windscreen
and rear window. The headlamps are cleaned
with high-pressure washing.
Continuous wiping
Windscreen wipers15
The wipers sweep at normal speed.
Active Xenon headlamps*
The wipers sweep at high speed.
No headlamp pattern adjustment is required
for cars with the function Active High Beam*.
The headlamp pattern is designed in such a
way that oncoming traffic is not dazzled.
Headlamp pattern adjustment is required for
cars with Active High Beam. The car must be
stationary with the engine running when the
headlamp pattern is shifted between right and
left-hand traffic.
The headlamp pattern is changed in the menu
system MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 105).
Halogen headlamps
No headlamp pattern adjustment needs to be
made. The headlamp pattern is designed in
such a way that oncoming traffic is not dazzled.
Set the number of sweeps per time
unit with the thumbwheel when
intermittent wiping is selected.
03
IMPORTANT
Before activating the wipers during winter
ensure that the wiper blades are not frozen
in, and that any snow or ice on the windscreen is scraped away.
IMPORTANT
Windscreen wipers and windscreen washers.
Rain sensor, on/off
Use plenty of washer fluid when the wipers
are cleaning the windscreen. The windscreen must be wet when the windscreen
wipers are operating.
Thumbwheel sensitivity/frequency
Windscreen wipers off
Move the stalk switch to position 0
to switch off the windscreen wipers.
Single sweep
Raise the stalk switch and release to
make one sweep.
Service position wiper blade
For cleaning the windscreen/wiper blades
and replacement of wiper blades, see Wiper
blades (p. 344) and Car washing (p. 365).
Rain sensor*
The rain sensor automatically starts the windscreen wipers based on how much water it
15
For replacing the wiper blades and service position wiper blades, see Wiper blades (p. 344). For filling washer fluid, see Washer fluid - filling (p. 346).
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
93
03 Instruments and controls
||
detects on the windscreen. The sensitivity of
the rain sensor can be adjusted using the
thumbwheel.
When the rain sensor is activated a lamp in
the button illuminates and the rain sensor
is shown in the combined
symbol
instrument panel.
03
Activating and setting the sensitivity
When activating the rain sensor, the car must
be running or the remote control key in position I or II while the windscreen wiper stalk
switch must be in position 0 or in the position
for a single sweep.
the ignition switch or five minutes after the
engine has been switched off.
IMPORTANT
The windscreen wipers could start and be
damaged in an automatic car wash.
Switch off the rain sensor while the car is
in motion or when the remote control key
is in position I or II. The symbol in the
combined instrument panel and the lamp
in the button go out.
Washing the headlamps and windows
Activate the rain sensor by pressing the but. The windscreen wipers make one
ton
sweep.
Press the stalk switch up for the wipers to
make an extra sweep.
Turn the thumbwheel upward for higher sensitivity and downward for lower sensitivity.
(An extra sweep is made when the thumbwheel is turned upward.)
Deactivate
Washing function.
Deactivate the rain sensor by pressing the
or move the stalk switch down
button
to another wiper program.
Washing the windscreen
The rain sensor is automatically deactivated
when the remote control key is removed from
94
Move the stalk switch toward the steering
wheel to start the windscreen and headlamp
washers.
The windscreen wipers will make several
more sweeps and the headlamps are washed
once the stalk switch has been released.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Heated washer nozzles*
The washer nozzles are heated automatically
in cold weather to prevent the washer fluid
freezing solid.
High-pressure headlamp washing*
High-pressure headlamp washing consumes
a large quantity of washer fluid. To save fluid,
the headlamps are washed automatically at
every fifth windscreen wash cycle.
Reduced washing
If only approx. 1 litre of washer fluid remains
in the reservoir and the message that you
should fill the washer fluid is shown in the
combined instrument panel, then the supply
of washer fluid to the headlamps is switched
off. This is in order to prioritise cleaning the
windscreen and the visibility through it.
03 Instruments and controls
Wiping and washing the rear window
Wiper – reversing
Power windows
Engaging reverse gear while the windscreen
wipers are on initiates intermittent rear window wiping16. The function stops when
reverse gear is disengaged.
All power windows can be operated using the
control panel for the driver's door - the control panels for the other doors operate their
respective power window.
If the rear window wiper is already on at continuous speed, no change is made.
03
NOTE
On cars with rain sensors, the rear wiper is
activated during reversing if the sensor is
activated and it is raining.
Rear window wiper – intermittent wiping
Rear window wiper – continuous speed
Press the stalk switch forward (see the arrow
in the illustration above) to initiate rear window washing and wiping.
NOTE
The rear window wiper is equipped with
overheating protection which means that
the motor is switched off if it overheats.
The rear window wiper works again after a
cooling period (30 seconds or longer,
depending on the heat in the motor and
the outside temperature).
16
Related information
•
•
Washer fluid - filling (p. 346)
Washer fluid - quality and volume (p.
384)
Driver's door control panel.
Switch for electric child safety locks* and
disengaging rear power window buttons;
see Child safety locks - electrical activation* (p. 173).
Rear window controls
Front window controls
This function (intermittent wiping when reversing) can be deactivated. Visit a workshop. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
95
03 Instruments and controls
||
WARNING
Operating
Check that no rear seat passengers are
trapped when the windows are closed
from the driver's door.
WARNING
03
Check that children or other passengers
are not trapped if the windows are closed,
even when the remote control key is used.
NOTE
WARNING
If there are children in the car - remember
to always switch off the power supply to
the power windows by selecting key position 0 and then take the remote control key
with you when leaving the car. For information on key positions - see Key positions - functions at different levels (p. 73).
Operating the power windows.
One way to reduce the pulsating wind
noise when the rear windows are open is
to also open the front windows slightly.
Operating without auto
Operating without auto
Operating with auto
Move one of the controls up/down gently.
The power windows move up/down as long
as the control is held in position.
All power windows can be operated using the
control panel for the driver's door - the control panels for the other doors can only each
operate their respective power window. Only
one control panel can be operated at a time.
In order for the power windows to be used,
the key position must be at least I - see Key
positions - functions at different levels (p. 73).
The power windows can be operated for a
few minutes after the engine has been
switched off and after the remote control key
has been removed - although not after a door
has been opened.
Closing of the windows is stopped and the
window is opened if anything prevents its
96
movement. It is possible to override the pinch
protection when closing has been interrupted,
e.g. if there is ice forming. After two successive closing interruptions the pinch protection
will be forced and the automatic function
deactivated for a short while, now it is possible to close by continually holding the button
pulled up.
Operating with auto
Move one of the controls up/down to the end
position and release it. The window runs
automatically to its end position.
Operating with the remote control key
and central locking
To remotely operate the power windows from
the outside with the remote control key or
from inside with central locking, see Remote
control key with key blade (p. 152) and Locking/unlocking - from the inside (p. 168).
03 Instruments and controls
Resetting
Door mirrors
If the battery is disconnected then the function for automatic opening must be reset so
that it can work correctly.
The door mirror positions are adjusted with
the joystick in the driver's door controls.
1. Gently raise the front section of the button to raise the window to its end position
and hold it there for one second.
Door mirrors
Storing the position17
The mirror positions are stored in the key
memory when the car has been locked with
the remote control key. When the car is
unlocked with the same remote control key
the mirrors and the driver's seat adopt the
stored positions when the driver's door is
opened.
2. Release the button briefly.
3. Raise the front section of the button again
for one second.
WARNING
A reset must take place for pinch protection to work.
Door mirror controls.
Adjusting
1. Press the L button for the left-hand door
mirror or the R button for the right-hand
door mirror. The light in the button illuminates.
2. Adjust the position with the joystick in the
centre.
3. Press the L or R button again. The light
should no longer be illuminated.
17
WARNING
The mirror on the driver's side is the wideangle type to provide optimal vision.
Objects may appear further away than
they actually are.
03
The function can be activated/deactivated in
the menu system MY CAR, see MY CAR (p.
105).
Angling the door mirror when parking17
The door mirror can be angled down for the
driver to view the side of the road when parking for example.
–
Engage reverse gear and press the L or R
button.
When reverse gear is disengaged the mirror
automatically returns to its original position
after about 10 seconds, or earlier by pressing
the button labelled L or R respectively.
Only in combination with power seat with memory; see Seats, front - electrically operated (p. 76).
97
03 Instruments and controls
||
03
Automatic angling of the door mirror
when parking17
3. Repeat the above procedure as necessary.
When reverse gear is engaged the door mirror
is automatically angled down so that the
driver can see the side of the road when
parking for example. When reverse gear is
disengaged the mirror automatically returns
to its original position after a short time.
The mirrors are now reset in neutral position.
The function can be activated/deactivated in
the menu system MY CAR, see MY CAR (p.
105).
Automatic retraction when locking17
When the car is locked/unlocked with the
remote control key the door mirrors are automatically retracted/extended.
The function can be activated/deactivated in
the menu system MY CAR, see MY CAR (p.
105).
Resetting to neutral
Mirrors that have been moved out of position
by an external force must be reset electrically
to the neutral position for electric retracting/
extending to work correctly:
1. Retract the mirrors with the L and R buttons.
2. Fold them out again with the L and R buttons.
17
98
Automatic dimming*
For the door mirrors to be fitted with this
function requires that the interior rearview
mirror also has automatic dimming, see Rearview mirror - interior (p. 99).
Retractable power door mirrors*
The mirrors can be retracted for parking/driving in narrow spaces:
1. Depress the L and R buttons simultaneously (key position must be at least I).
2. Release them after
approximately 1 second. The mirrors
automatically stop in the fully retracted
position.
Fold out the mirrors by pressing down the L
and R buttons simultaneously. The mirrors
automatically stop in the fully extended position.
Home safe and approach lighting
The lamp on the door mirrors illuminates
when approach lighting (p. 92) or home safe
lighting (p. 92) is selected.
Only in combination with power seat with memory; see Seats, front - electrically operated (p. 76).
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Related information
•
•
Rearview mirror - interior (p. 99)
Windows and rearview and door mirrors heating (p. 99)
03 Instruments and controls
Windows and rearview and door
mirrors - heating
The defroster is used to quickly remove misting and ice from the rear window and door
mirrors.
Rear window and door mirror
defrosters
+7 °C. Automatic defrosting can be selected
in the menu system MY CAR, see MY CAR (p.
105).
Rearview mirror - interior
The interior rearview mirror can be dimmed
with a control in the mirror's lower edge.
Alternatively, the rearview mirror dims automatically.
Interior rearview mirror
03
Heating, rear window and door mirrors
The function is used to remove ice and misting from the rear window and door mirrors.
One press of the button starts the heating.
The light in the button indicates that the function is active. Switch off the heating as soon
as the ice/misting is cleared in order not to
load the battery unnecessarily. However, the
function is switched off automatically after a
certain time.
Control for dimming
Manual dimming
Bright light from behind could be reflected in
the rearview mirror and dazzle the driver. Use
dimming with the dimming control when
lights from behind are distracting:
1. Use dimming by moving the control in
towards the passenger compartment.
2. Return to normal position by moving the
control towards the windscreen.
The door mirrors and rear window are demisted/defrosted automatically if the car is
started in an outside temperature lower than
99
03 Instruments and controls
||
03
Automatic dimming*
Compass*
Bright light from behind is automatically
dimmed by the rearview mirror. The control
for manual dimming is not available on mirrors with automatic dimming.
The rearview mirror contains an integrated
display that shows the compass direction in
which the front of the car is pointing.
The rearview mirror contains two sensors one forward facing and one rearward facing that work together to identify and eliminate
dazzling light. The forward facing sensor
detects ambient light, while the rearward facing sensor detects the light from vehicle
headlights behind.
Operation
The compass (p. 100) can only be specified
for a rearview mirror with automatic dimming.
Related information
•
Door mirrors (p. 97)
Proceed as follows to perform calibration:
1. Stop the car in a large open area free
from steel structures and high-voltage
power lines.
2. Start the car and switch off all electrical
equipment (air conditioning, wipers, etc.)
and ensure that all doors are closed.
Rearview mirror with compass.
The upper right-hand corner of the rearview
mirror has an integrated display that shows
the compass direction in which the front of
the car is pointing. Eight different directions
are shown with English abbreviations: N
(north), NE (north east), E (east), SE (south
east), S (south), SW (south west), W (west)
and NW (north west).
The compass is activated automatically when
the car is started or when key position II is
active, see Key positions - functions at different levels (p. 73). To deactivate/activate the
compass - press in the button on the under-
100
Calibration
The compass may need calibrating to show
the correct compass direction.
The earth is divided into 15 magnetic zones.
The compass should be calibrated if the car
is moved across several magnetic zones.
NOTE
If the sensors are obscured by e.g. parking
permits, transponders, sun visors or
objects in the seats or in the cargo area in
such a way that light is prevented from
reaching the sensors, then the dimming
function of the interior rearview and door
mirrors is reduced.
side of the mirror using a paper clip for example.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
NOTE
Calibration may fail or not start at all if
electrical equipment is not switched off.
3. Hold the button on the underside of the
rearview mirror depressed
approx. 3 seconds. The number of the
current magnetic zone is shown.
G030295
03 Instruments and controls
Magnetic zones.
4. Press the button repeatedly until the
required magnetic zone (1–15) is shown.
See the map of magnetic zones for the
compass.
7. Cars with heated windscreen*: If the
character C is shown in the display when
the heated windscreen is activated, perform the calibration in accordance with
point 6 above with the heated windscreen
activated, see Demisting and defrosting
the windscreen (p. 125).
Sunroof*
8. Repeat the above procedure as necessary.
The sunroof controls are located in the roof
panel. The sunroof can be opened vertically
at the rear edge and horizontally. Key position
I or II is required for the sunroof to be
opened.
The sunroof can be operated with a control in
the roof panel.
The sunroof's inner sunscreen is closed manually.
The sunroof has a wind deflector.
03
Horizontal opening
6. Drive slowly in a circle at a speed of no
more than 10 km/h until a compass direction is shown in the display, indicating
that calibration is complete. Then drive a
further 2 circles to fine-tune calibration.
G017823
5. Wait until the display returns to showing
the character C, or hold the button on the
bottom of the rearview mirror depressed
for approx. 6 seconds (use e.g. a paper
clip) until the character C is shown.
Horizontal opening, backward/forward.
Opening, automatic
Opening, manual
Closing, manual
Closing, automatic
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
101
03 Instruments and controls
||
03
Open manually by pulling the control backwards to the point of resistance for manual
opening. The sunroof moves to maximum
open position as long as the button is kept
depressed.
Closing
Close manually by pushing the control forwards to the point of resistance for manual
closing. The sunroof moves to closed position as long as the button is kept depressed.
Closing using the remote control key or
central locking button
WARNING
If there are children in the car:
Remember to always switch off the power
supply to the sunroof by selecting key
position 0 and then take the remote control key with you when leaving the car. For
information on key positions - see Key
positions - functions at different levels (p.
73).
Vertical opening
G021345
Opening
For maximum sunroof opening, move the
control back to the position for automatic
opening and release.
One long press on the lock button closes the
sunroof and all the windows, see Remote
control key - functions (p. 154) and Locking/
unlocking - from the inside (p. 168). The
doors and the tailgate are locked. To interrupt
closing, press the lock button again.
WARNING
Close automatically by pressing the control to
the position for automatic closing and then
release it.
The power supply to the sunroof is switched
off by selecting key position 0 and removing
the remote control key from the ignition
switch.
102
G028900
Risk of crushing when the sunroof is
closed. The sunroof's pinch-protection
function only operates during automatic
closing, not manual.
Vertical opening, raised at the rear edge.
Open by pressing the rear edge of the
control upward.
Close by pulling the rear edge of the control down.
WARNING
If the sunroof is closed with the remote
control key, check that no one risks being
trapped.
Sunscreen
The sunroof features a manual, sliding interior
sunscreen. The sunscreen slides back automatically when the sunroof is opened. Grip
the handle and slide the screen forward to
close it.
03 Instruments and controls
Pinch protection
The sunroof's pinch protection function is
triggered if it is blocked by an object during
automatic closing. If blocked, the sunroof will
stop and automatically open to the previous
position.
Wind deflector
Menu navigation - combined
instrument panel
Related information
•
Messages - handling (p. 105)
The left-hand stalk controls the menus (p.
104) shown on the information display in the
combined instrument panel (p. 62). Which
menus are shown depends on the key position (p. 73).
03
The sunroof has a wind deflector that is
folded up when the sunroof is in the open
position.
Display and controls for menu navigation.
OK – access to message list and message confirmation.
Thumbwheel – browse between menu
options.
RESET – reset the active function. Used
in certain cases to select/activate a function, see the explanation under each
respective function.
If there is a message (p. 104) then it must be
acknowledged with OK in order that the
menus shall be shown.
103
03 Instruments and controls
Menu overview - combined
instrument panel
Which menus are shown in the combined
instrument panel's information display
depends on the key position (p. 73).
03
Some of the following menu options require
the function and hardware to be installed in
the car.
Messages
When a warning, information or indicator
symbol illuminates, a corresponding message
appears on the information display.
Contrast mode/Colour mode
Preconditioning
Related information
•
Digital combined instrument panel - overview (p. 63)
•
Menu navigation - combined instrument
panel (p. 103)
18
19
104
Time for regular service contact a workshopB. The
timing is determined by
the number of kilometres
driven, number of months
since the last service,
engine running time and
oil grade.
Maintenance
overdue
If the service intervals are
not followed then the
warranty does not cover
any damaged parts contact a workshopB.
Stop safelyA
Stop and switch off the
engine. Serious risk of
damage - consult a workshopB.
Stop engineA
Stop and switch off the
engine. Serious risk of
damage - consult a workshopB.
Service
urgentA
Contact a workshopB to
check the car immediately.
Transmission
Oil change
needed
Contact a workshopB to
check the car as soon as
possible.
Service
requiredA
Contact a workshopB to
check the car as soon as
possible.
Transmission
Reduced
performance
See manualA
Read the owner's manual.
The gearbox cannot handle full capacity. Drive
carefully until the message clearsC.
Book time
for maintenance
Time to book regular
service - contact a workshopB.
Messages18
Trip computer reset
Time for regular maintenance
Specification
Service status
Oil level19
Specification
Message
Settings*
Themes
Message
The number of messages is indicated in brackets.
Certain engines.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
If shown repeatedly contact a workshopB.
03 Instruments and controls
Message
Specification
Transmission
hot Reduce
speed
Drive more smoothly or
stop the car in a safe
manner. Disengage the
gear and run the engine
at idling speed until the
message clearsC.
Transmission
hot Stop
safely Wait
for cooling
Critical fault. Stop the car
immediately in a safe
manner and contact a
workshopB.
Temporarily
offA
A function has been temporarily switched off and
is reset automatically
while driving or after starting again.
Low battery
charge
Power save
mode
A
B
C
The audio system is
switched off to save
energy. Charge the battery.
Part of message, shown together with information on
where the problem has arisen.
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
For more information regarding the automatic gearbox, see
Automatic gearbox -- Geartronic (p. 264).
Messages - handling
MY CAR
Use the left-hand stalk switch to acknowledge
and browse among messages (p. 104) that
are shown in the information display of the
combined instrument panel.
MY CAR is a menu source that handles many
of the car's functions, e.g. City Safety, locks
and alarm, automatic fan speed, setting the
clock, etc.
When a warning, information or indicator
symbol illuminates, a corresponding message
appears in the display at the same time. An
error message is stored in a memory list until
the fault has been rectified.
Certain functions are standard, others are
optional - the range also varies depending on
the market.
Press OK on the left-hand stalk switch to
acknowledge a message. Scroll through messages with the thumbwheel (p. 103).
03
Operation
Navigation in the menus is carried out using
buttons in the centre console or with the
steering wheel's right-hand keypad.
NOTE
If a warning message appears while you
are using the trip computer, the message
must be read (press OK) before the previous activity can be resumed.
Related information
•
Menu overview - combined instrument
panel (p. 104)
Related information
•
•
Messages - handling (p. 105)
Menu navigation - combined instrument
panel (p. 103)
105
03 Instruments and controls
||
lighted menu option or store the selected
function in the memory.
TUNE - turn the knob in the centre console or the thumbwheel on the steering
wheel to scroll up/down through the
menu options.
EXIT
03
EXIT functions
Depending on the function the cursor is on
when EXIT is pressed, and on the menu level,
one of the following may occur:
•
•
•
•
•
phone call is rejected
current function is interrupted
Trip computer
The car's trip computer can record, calculate
and show information while driving.
•
input characters are deleted
NOTE
most recent selections are undone
If a warning message appears when the
trip computer is used then the message
must first be acknowledged before the trip
computer can be reactivated.
leads up in the menu system.
Short and long press may produce varying
results.
•
A long press leads to the highest menu level
(main source view), from where all of the car's
functions/menu sources can be accessed.
Menu options and search paths
MY CAR - opens the menu system MY
CAR.
OK/MENU - press the button in the centre console or the thumbwheel on the
steering wheel to select/tick in the high-
106
Trip computer - content (p. 108)
Checking and settings can be made immediately after the combined instrument panel is
automatically illuminated in connection with
unlocking. If none of the trip computer's controls are actuated within approx. 30 seconds
after the driver's door has been opened then
the instrument extinguishes, after which
either key position II (p. 73) or engine starting
is required in order to operate the trip computer.
For a description of the menu options and
search paths in MY CAR, see the Sensus
Infotainment supplement.
Acknowledge the message by briefly
pressing the indicator stalk OK button.
Group menus
The trip computer has two different group
menus:
•
•
Functions
Heading in combined instrument panel
The trip computer's functions or headings
are each listed in an infinite loop.
03 Instruments and controls
Related information
•
•
Trip computer - trip statistics* (p. 112)
Trip computer - supplementary information (p. 111)
03
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
107
03 Instruments and controls
Trip computer - combined instrument
panel "Digital"
The car's trip computer can record, calculate
and show information while driving.
03
The trip computer's menu is in a variable
loop. One of the alternatives is that the trip
computer's three displays extinguish - this
also marks the start/end of the loop.
Functions
Proceed as follows to open and check/adjust
functions:
1. To ensure that no control is in the middle
of a sequence - "Reset" them first with
2 presses on RESET.
2. Press OK - loop with all functions opens.
3. Browse through the functions with the
thumbwheel and select/confirm with OK.
4. Finish by pressing RESET twice after
completed checking/ adjustment.
The different functions of the trip computer
are listed in the following table:
Information displays and stalk switch controls.
OK - Opens the loop with the trip computer's functions + Activates the selected
option.
Thumbwheel - Opens the loop with the
trip computer's headings + Scrolls
through the options.
RESET - Undoes, zeroes or backs out of
a function after making a selection.
108
03 Instruments and controls
Functions
Information
Trip computer reset
Note that this function does not reset both trip meters T1 and T2 - see the table under the
next section "Headings" or the section "Resetting" (p. 111) for information on the process.
•
•
Average
Average speed
Messages
For more information, see Messages - handling (p. 105).
Themes
The appearance of the combined instrument panel (p. 62) is selected here.
Settings*
Select Auto On or Off.
03
For more information, see General information about heaters (p. 137).
Contrast mode/Colour mode
Adjusting the combined instrument panel's brightness and colour intensity.
Preconditioning
For a description of programming the timer, see Timer - setting (p. 133).
• Direct start
• - Symbol Timer 1 - leads to the menu for
selecting time.
•
A
- Symbol Timer 2 - leads to the menu for
selecting time.
Service status
Shows the number of months and mileage to next service.
Oil levelA
For more information, see Engine oil - checking and filling (p. 333).
Certain engines.
Headings
Three trip computer headings can be displayed simultaneously - one in each "window" (see previous figure).
One of the heading combinations in the following table can be selected for constant dis-
play in the combined instrument panel. Proceed as follows to determine which:
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
109
03 Instruments and controls
||
1. To ensure that no control is in the middle
of a sequence - "Reset" them first with
2 presses on RESET.
2. Turn the thumbwheel - selectable heading combinations are shown in a loop.
Heading combinations
Information
Battery status
Trip meter T1 + Meter reading
Distance to empty battery
•
Long press on RESET resets trip meter T1.
Average
Trip meter T1 + Meter reading
Average speed
•
Long press on RESET resets trip meter T1.
Instantaneous
Trip meter T2 + Meter reading
Distance to empty tank
•
Long press on RESET resets trip meter T2.
Instantaneous
Meter reading
kmh<>mph
03
No trip computer information.
The combined instrument panel's heading
combination for the trip computer can be
changed to another option at any time during
the journey. Proceed as follows:
–
Turn the thumbwheel - stop on the
desired heading.
Related information
110
3. Stop on desired heading combination.
•
Trip computer - supplementary information (p. 111)
•
Trip computer - trip statistics* (p. 112)
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
kmh<>mph - see section "Digital speed display" (p. 111).
This option extinguishes all three trip computer displays - it also
marks the beginning/end of the loop.
03 Instruments and controls
Trip computer - supplementary
information
The car's trip computer can record, calculate
and show information while driving. Supplementary information of several functions follows below.
Range - distance to empty tank
NOTE
The trip computer shows the approximate
distance that can be driven with the fuel
quantity remaining in the tank.
There may be a slight error in the reading if
the driving style has been changed.
No guaranteed range remains when the heading Distance to empty shows "----".
Average
–
Average fuel consumption is calculated from
the last resetting.
The calculation is based on the average fuel
consumption over the last 30 km and the
remaining driveable fuel quantity.
NOTE
There may be a slight error in the reading if
a fuel-driven heater* has been used.
Average speed
The average speed is calculated for the driving distance driven since the last reset to
zero.
Instantaneous
The information for current fuel consumption
is updated continuously - approximately once
per second. When the car is driven at low
speed the consumption is shown per time
unit - at a higher speed it is shown related to
mileage.
Different units (km/miles) can be selected for
the display - see the section "Change unit" (p.
111).
In which case, refuel as soon as possible.
NOTE
There may be a slight error in the reading if
the driving style has been changed.
An economic driving style generally results in
a longer driving distance. For more information on how fuel consumption can be influenced, see Volvo Car Corporation 's Environmental Philosophy (p. 19).
Distance to empty battery
No guaranteed range remains when the display shows "---- km to empty battery". The
display shows the approximate distance that
can be driven with the energy quantity
remaining in the hybrid battery.
The calculation is based on the average fuel
consumption with normally loaded car, with
normal driving and not too many power consumers (stereo, AC, seat heating, etc).
An economic driving style generally results in
a longer driving distance. For more information on how energy consumption can be influenced, see Volvo Car Corporation 's Environmental Philosophy (p. 19).
03
Mileage for electric operation
In order to achieve the longest possible mileage for electric operation, the driver of an
electric car also has to think about energy
conservation. The more consumers there are
(stereo, electric heating in windows/mirrors/
seats, very cold air from the climate control
system, etc.) that are active - the shorter the
potential mileage.
NOTE
In addition to high current take-off in the
passenger compartment, sudden acceleration and braking, high speed, heavy
loads, low outside temperature and uphill
gradients also reduce the possible driving
distance.
Digital speed display
The speed is shown in the opposite unit
(kmh/mph) in relation to the main instrument.
If it is calibrated in mph then the trip com}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
111
03 Instruments and controls
||
puter shows the corresponding speed in
km/h and vice versa.
Related information
•
Trip computer - trip statistics* (p. 112)
Resetting
Trip meter:
1. Turn with the thumbwheel to the heading
combination containing the trip meter to
be reset.
03
Trip computer - trip statistics*
Information is stored about completed trips
containing average fuel consumption and
average speed, which can be viewed in the
centre console's screen as a bar chart.
Function
2. Give a long press on RESET - selected
trip meter is zeroed.
Average speed & Average consumption:
1. Select function Trip computer reset and
activate with OK.
2. Select one of the following options with
the thumbwheel and activate with OK:
•
•
•
l/100 km
km/h
Reset both
3. Finish with RESET.
Change unit
You can change unit (km/miles) for distance
and speed in the menu system My Car, see
MY CAR (p. 105).
NOTE
In addition to in the trip computer, these
units are also changed in Volvo's navigation system*.
20
112
The figure is schematic - layout may vary depending on car model or updated software.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Trip statistics20.
Fuel and electricity consumption are shown in
separate graphs. Electricity consumption is
"net" consumption, i.e. energy consumed
minus regenerated energy created during
braking.
Each bar symbolises 1 km or 10 km driven
distance, depending on the scale selected the bar at the far right shows the value for the
current kilometre or 10 km.
Using the TUNE control, the scale for the
bars can be changed between 1 km and
03 Instruments and controls
10 km - the cursor on the far right changes
position between up and down in relation to
the scale selected.
Operation
Different settings can be made in the menu
system MY CAR. For a description of the
menu system, see MY CAR (p. 105)
• Start new trip - ENTER is used to delete
all previous statistics, go back out of the
menu by selecting EXIT.
03
• Reset for every driving cycle - check
the box by selecting ENTER and go back
out of the menu by selecting EXIT.
With the "Reset for every driving cycle"
option checked, all statistics are deleted
automatically once driving is complete and
the car has been stopped for 4 hours. Trip
statistics start again from zero the next time
the engine is started.
If a new driving cycle is started before
4 hours have elapsed then the current period
must first be deleted manually using the
"Start new trip" option.
See also information on Eco guide (p. 67).
Related information
•
Trip computer - supplementary information (p. 111)
113
CLIMATE CONTROL
04 Climate control
General information on climate
control
Air conditioning (AC) (p. 124) can be
switched off, but to ensure the best possible climate comfort in the passenger compartment, and to prevent the windows
from misting, it should always be switched
on.
The car is equipped with electronic climate
control (p. 121). The climate control system
cools or heats as well as dehumidifies the air
in the passenger compartment.
When the climate control system is activated
it is recommended that the panel's air vents
are fully open in order to obtain the most efficient air conditioning possible.
To bear in mind
•
If there is no heat from the coolant then the
electrically-driven heater is used primarily. In
colder weather the car's fuel-driven heater
can also be started.
To ensure that the air conditioning works
optimally, the side windows and sunroof*
should be closed.
•
Total airing function (p. 169) opens/
closes all side windows simultaneously
and can be used for example to quickly
air the car during hot weather.
•
Remove ice and snow from the climate
control system air intake (the grille
between the bonnet and the windscreen).
•
When running at idling speed, preconditioning or charging the hybrid battery (p.
293) in hot weather, condensation from
the air conditioning may drip under the
car. This is normal.
•
When the engine requires full power, e.g.
for full acceleration or driving uphill with a
trailer, the air conditioning can be temporarily switched off. There may then be a
temporary increase in temperature in the
passenger compartment.
•
Remove misting on the insides of the windows primarily by using the defroster
function (p. 125). To reduce the risk of
The engine block heater, fuel-driven heater
and electrically-driven heater are used as
heat sources during driving. The heat
source(s) used depends on the prevailing
conditions, e.g. ambient temperature.
During driving the car automatically starts the
systems needed to maintain comfort inside
the passenger compartment - except in drive
mode (p. 258) PURE, when climate comfort
is deprioritised, e.g. AC and certain electrically-driven sources are switched off.
The climate in the car's passenger compartment can be preconditioned (p. 129) (acclimatised) before departure, in both hot and
cold climates.
misting, keep the windows clean and use
window cleaner.
NOTE
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
Actual temperature (p. 116)
Menu settings - climate control (p. 118)
Electronic climate control - ECC (p. 121)
Air distribution in the passenger compartment (p. 119)
Air cleaning (p. 116)
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
04
115
04 Climate control
04
Actual temperature
Sensors - climate control
Air cleaning
The temperature you select in the passenger
compartment corresponds to the physical
experience with reference to factors such as
air speed, humidity and solar radiation etc. in
and around the car.
The climate control system has a number of
sensors to help control the temperature (p.
116) in the car.
•
The sun sensor is located on the top side
of the dashboard.
The interior in a passenger compartment is
designed to be pleasant and comfortable,
even for people with contact allergies and for
asthma sufferers.
The system includes a sun sensor (p. 116)
which detects on which side the sun is shining into the passenger compartment. This
means that the temperature can differ
between the right and left-hand air vents
despite the controls being set for the same
temperature on both sides.
•
The temperature sensor for the passenger compartment is located below the climate control panel.
•
The outside temperature sensor is
located in the door mirror.
•
The humidity sensor* is located by the
interior rearview mirror.
Related information
•
General information on climate control (p.
115)
•
Temperature control in the passenger
compartment (p. 124)
NOTE
Do not cover or block the sensors with
clothing or other objects.
Related information
•
116
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
General information on climate control (p.
115)
•
•
Passenger compartment filter (p. 117)
Material in the passenger compartment (p. 118)
•
Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP) (p.
117)*
•
Interior Air Quality System (IAQS) (p.
118)*
Related information
•
General information on climate control (p.
115)
04 Climate control
Air cleaning - passenger
compartment filter
Air cleaning - Clean Zone Interior
Package (CZIP)*
For more information on CZIP, see the brochure included with the purchase of the car.
All air entering the car's passenger compartment is cleaned with a filter.
CZIP comprises a series of modifications that
keep the passenger compartment even
clearer from allergy and asthma-inducing substances.
Related information
The filter must be replaced at regular intervals. Follow the Volvo Service Programme for
the recommended replacement intervals. If
the car is used in a severely contaminated
environment, it may be necessary to replace
the filter more often.
The following is included:
•
NOTE
There are different types of passenger
compartment filter. Make sure that the correct filter is fitted.
Related information
•
Air cleaning (p. 116)
•
•
General information on climate control (p.
115)
•
Air cleaning (p. 116)
An enhanced fan function that means that
the fan starts when the car is opened with
the remote control key. The fan fills the
passenger compartment with fresh air.
The function starts when required and is
disengaged automatically after a time or
when one of the passenger compartment
doors is opened.
04
The air quality system IAQS (p. 118) is a
fully automatic system that cleans the air
in the passenger compartment from contaminants such as particles, hydrocarbons, nitrous oxides and ground-level
ozone.
NOTE
To keep the CZIP standard in cars with
CZIP the IAQS filter must be changed after
15 000 km or once per year depending on
whichever occurs first. However, up to
75 000 km over 5 years. In cars without
CZIP and where the customer does not
want to keep the CZIP standard the IAQS
filter must be changed at a regular service.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
117
04 Climate control
Air cleaning - IAQS*
Air cleaning - material
Menu settings - climate control
The air quality system IAQS separates gases
and particles to reduce the levels of odours
and pollution in the passenger compartment.
Tested materials have been developed in
order to minimise the quantity of dust in the
passenger compartment and to contribute to
making the passenger compartment easier to
keep clean.
It is possible to activate/deactivate or change
the default settings for six of the climate control system's functions via the centre console.
•
Fan level during automatic climate control
(p. 123).
The carpets in both the passenger compartment and the cargo area are removable and
easy to remove and clean. Use cleaning
agents and car care products recommended
by Volvo to clean the interior (p. 367).
•
•
Recirculation timer (p. 125).
•
•
Interior air quality system (p. 118)*.
•
Automatic start of steering wheel heating
(p. 80).
If the outside air is contaminated then the air
intake is closed and the air is recirculated.
It is possible to activate/deactivate the function in the menu system MY CAR. For a
description of the menu system, see MY CAR
(p. 105).
NOTE
04
The air quality sensor must always be enabled to ensure the best air in the passenger compartment.
Related information
•
In a cold climate recirculation is limited so
as to prevent misting.
In the event of misting, the air quality sensor should be disengaged, and the
defroster functions for the windscreen and
side windows, as well as the rear window,
should be used.
Related information
118
•
General information on climate control (p.
115)
•
•
Air cleaning (p. 116)
Air cleaning - Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP)* (p. 117)
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Air cleaning (p. 116)
Automatic start of rear window defroster
(p. 99).
Automatic start of seat heating driver (p.
122).
More information is available in the description of the menu system (p. 105).
The climate control system's functions can be
reset to default settings in the menu system
MY CAR. For a description of the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 105).
Related information
•
General information on climate control (p.
115)
04 Climate control
Air distribution in the passenger
compartment
Air vents in the dashboard
Air vents in the door pillars
The incoming air is divided between a number
of different vents in the passenger compartment.
Air distribution is fully automatic in AUTO
mode.
If necessary it can be controlled manually;
see the air distribution table (p. 127).
Open
Closed
Closed
Open
Lateral airflow
Lateral airflow
Vertical airflow
Vertical airflow
Aim the outer vents at the side windows to
remove misting.
04
Aim the vents at the windows to remove misting in cold weather.
Aim the vents into the passenger compartment to maintain a comfortable climate in the
rear seat in hot weather.
NOTE
Remember that small children may be sensitive to air flows and draughts.
}}
119
04 Climate control
||
Air distribution
04
Air distribution - defroster windscreen
Air distribution - air vent instrument panel
Air distribution - ventilation floor
The figure consists of three buttons. When
pressing the buttons the corresponding figure
is illuminated in the display screen (see following figure) and an arrow in front of each
part of the figure shows the air distribution
that is selected. For more information, see the
air distribution table (p. 127).
120
The selected air distribution is shown in the centre console display screen.
Related information
•
General information on climate control (p.
115)
•
•
Auto-regulation (p. 123)
Air distribution - recirculation (p. 125)
04 Climate control
Electronic climate control - ECC
ECC (Electronic Climate Control) maintains
the temperature selected in the passenger
compartment and can be set separately for
the driver's side and passenger side.
The auto function is used to automatically
control temperature, air conditioning, fan
speed, recirculation and air distribution.
04
Temperature control (p. 124), left-hand
side
Electrically heated front seat (p. 122),
right side
Electrically heated front seat (p. 122), left
side
Temperature control (p. 124), right-hand
side
Max. defroster (p. 125)
Recirculation (p. 125)
Fan (p. 123)
AUTO - Automatic climate control (p.
123)
Air distribution (p. 119) - ventilation floor
AC - Air conditioning on/off (p. 124)
Air distribution - air vent instrument panel
Air distribution - defroster windscreen
Rear window and door mirror defrosters (p. 99)
121
04 Climate control
Heated front seats*
•
The front seat heating has three positions for
increasing the comfort for driver and passenger when it is cold.
Lowest heat level - one orange field illuminates in the screen.
•
Switch off the heat - no field illuminates.
WARNING
Heated rear seat*
The heating for the rear seat's1 outer positions has three positions for increasing the
comfort for passengers when it is cold.
Heated seats must not be used by people
who find it difficult to perceive an increase
in temperature due to a lack of sensation
or who otherwise have problems operating
the controls for the heated seats. Otherwise they may suffer burn injuries.
Automatic start of driver's seat heating
04
Current heat level is shown in the centre console
display screen.
With the automatic start of the driver's seat
heating activated, the driver's seat will have
the highest heat level when the engine is
started.
Automatic start takes place when the car is
cold and the ambient temperature is lower
than approx. +7 °C.
It is possible to activate/deactivate the function in the menu system MY CAR. For a
description of the menu system, see MY CAR
(p. 105).
Press the button repeatedly in order to activate the function:
122
•
Highest heat level - three orange fields
illuminate in the centre console's screen
(see figure above).
•
Lower heat level - two orange fields illuminate in the screen.
Related information
•
General information on climate control (p.
115)
•
Heated rear seat* (p. 122)
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Current heat level is shown in the pushbutton's
lamps.
Press the button repeatedly in order to activate the function:
•
•
•
•
Highest heat level - three lamps illuminate.
Lower heat level - two lamps illuminate.
Lowest heat level - one lamp illuminates.
Switch off the heat - no lamp illuminates.
04 Climate control
WARNING
Heated seats must not be used by people
who find it difficult to perceive an increase
in temperature due to a lack of sensation
or who otherwise have problems operating
the controls for the heated seats. Otherwise they may suffer burn injuries.
Fan
Auto-regulation
The fan should always be activated in order to
avoid misting on the windows.
The auto function automatically regulates
temperature (p. 124), air conditioning (p.
124), fan speed (p. 123), recirculation (p. 125)
and air distribution (p. 119).
NOTE
If the fan is fully switched off then the air
conditioning is not engaged - which can
cause a risk of misting on the windows.
Related information
•
General information on climate control (p.
115)
•
Heated front seats* (p. 122)
Fan knob
Turn the knob to increase or
decrease fan speed. If AUTO
is selected, then the fan
speed is regulated automatically (p. 123) - the fan speed
previously set is disengaged.
Related information
1
•
General information on climate control (p.
115)
•
Electronic climate control - ECC (p. 121)
If you select one or more
manual functions, the other
functions continue to be
controlled automatically. All
manual settings are disengaged when AUTO is
pressed. The display screen
shows AUTO CLIMATE.
04
Fan speed in automatic mode can be set in
the menu system MY CAR. For a description
of the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 105).
Related information
•
General information on climate control (p.
115)
Heated rear seat is not specified with the option for integrated two-stage booster seat (p. 47).
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
123
04 Climate control
Temperature control in the passenger
compartment
When the car is started, the most recent temperature setting is resumed.
NOTE
Related information
•
General information on climate control (p.
115)
•
•
Actual temperature (p. 116)
Air conditioning
The air conditioning cools and dehumidifies
incoming air as required.
In drive mode (p. 258) PURE
the AC is preset not to start.
Electronic climate control - ECC (p. 121)
Heating or cooling cannot be hastened by
selecting a higher or lower temperature
than the actual desired temperature.
tion.
When the lamp in the AC button is switched
off the air conditioning is disconnected. Other
functions are still controlled automatically.
When the max. defroster function (p. 125) is
activated, the air conditioning is switched on
automatically so that the air is dehumidified at
the maximum setting.
04
Current temperature for each side is shown in
the centre console's display screen.
The temperature can be
adjusted with the knob separately for the driver's
side and the passenger side.
124
When the lamp in the AC
button illuminates, the air
conditioning is controlled by
the system's automatic func-
04 Climate control
Demisting and defrosting the
windscreen
Max. defroster is used to quickly remove misting and ice from the windscreen and side windows.
Related information
•
General information on climate control (p.
115)
Air distribution - recirculation
Select recirculation to shut out bad air,
exhaust gases etc. from the passenger compartment, i.e. no outside air is taken into the
car when this function is activated.
When recirculation is
engaged the orange lamp in
the button illuminates.
Air flowing to the windows.
The light in the defroster button illuminates when the
function is active.
The following also takes place in order to provide maximum dehumidification in the passenger compartment:
•
the air conditioning is automatically
engaged
•
recirculation and the air quality system
are automatically disengaged.
NOTE
The noise level increases as the fan is
operating at max.
When the defroster is switched off the climate
control returns to the previous settings.
In drive mode PURE, activation of the
defroster function may cause the internal
combustion engine to start and change to
drive mode (p. 258) HYBRID.
IMPORTANT
04
If the air in the car recirculates for too long,
there is a risk of misting on the insides of
the windows.
Timer
With the timer function activated the system
will exit manually activated recirculation mode
according to a time that depends on the outside temperature. This reduces the risk of ice,
misting and bad air.
It is possible to activate/deactivate the function in the menu system MY CAR. For a
description of the menu system, see MY CAR
(p. 105).
NOTE
When max. defroster is selected, recirculation is always deactivated.
125
04 Climate control
||
Related information
04
126
•
General information on climate control (p.
115)
•
Air distribution in the passenger compartment (p. 119)
•
Air distribution - table (p. 127)
04 Climate control
Air distribution - table
Three buttons are used to select the distribution (p. 119) of the air.
Air distribution
Use
Air to windows. Some air flows from the air vents. The air is not
recirculated. Air conditioning is always engaged.
to remove ice and misting quickly.
Air to windscreen, via defroster vent, and side windows. Some air
flows from the air vents.
to prevent misting and icing in a cold and humid climate,
(not at too low fan speed to enable this).
Airflow to the windows and from the dashboard air vents.
to ensure good comfort in warm, dry weather.
Airflow to the head and chest from dashboard air vents.
to ensure efficient cooling in warm weather.
04
}}
127
04 Climate control
||
Air distribution
Use
Air to the floor and windows. Some air flows from the dashboard air
vents.
to ensure comfortable conditions and good demisting in
cold or humid weather.
Air to floor and from dashboard air vents.
in sunny weather with cool outside temperatures.
Air to floor. Some air flows to the dashboard air vents and windows.
to direct heat or cold to the floor.
Airflow to windows, from dashboard air vents and to the floor.
to provide cooler air along the floor or warmer air higher
up in cold weather or hot, dry weather.
04
Related information
128
•
General information on climate control (p.
115)
•
Air distribution - recirculation (p. 125)
04 Climate control
General information about
preconditioning
The climate in the car's passenger compartment can be preconditioned (p. 129) (acclimatised) before departure, in both hot and
cold climates.
With preconditioning of the
V60 Plug-in Hybrid the energy needs during
the journey are reduced - the electricity mileage is extended. For this reason, use preconditioning to enable the use of the battery
power2 for driving.
Preconditioning the car
NOTE
Preconditioning of the car is possible when it
is plugged into the mains power circuit (p.
293).
The car's doors and windows should be
closed during the preconditioning of the
passenger compartment.
Related information
•
In a cold climate the fuel-driven heater
heats both the engine and the passenger
compartment - the electrically-driven
heater only heats the passenger compartment before departure.
•
In a hot climate the AC system cools the
passenger compartment.
Preconditioning - setting (p. 130)
Preconditioning the car reduces wear.
NOTE
Condensation may form during preconditioning, see General information about preconditioning (p. 129).
During preconditioning of the passenger
compartment, the car works to reach comfort temperature and not the temperature
set in the climate control system.
04
NOTE
Preconditioning is possible even when the
car is not connected to the mains.*
Warming-up includes the passenger compartment, windows and front seats if desired.
When the passenger compartment is being
cooled (when the car is not plugged into the
mains power circuit)* energy is drawn from
the hybrid battery, correspondingly reducing
mileage on electricity.
2
•
NOTE
During preconditioning of the passenger
compartment, the car works to reach comfort temperature and not the temperature
set in the climate control system.
If the car is cooled when it is not plugged into the mains power circuit then preconditioning draws energy from the hybrid battery.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
129
04 Climate control
||
NOTE
The compressor can operate and cool the
hybrid battery even when passenger compartment cooling is not selected or
required. The compressor emits noise.
Select from the following:
•
•
parking inside
parking outside.
Preconditioning can be activated:
04
•
directly (p. 132) via the information display, remote control key* or mobile*
•
with timer (p. 133).
NOTE
Volvo recommends that you activate preconditioning via the timer, and then have
the car connected to the mains power circuit (p. 130).
Related information
•
Preconditioning - setting
Preconditioning - parking inside
The car can be preconditioned (p. 129) both
when connected and not connected* to the
mains power circuit.
With the Indoor parking option the electrically-driven heater is activated during preconditioning, see page (p. 129).
Select from the following:
If you select the Indoor parking
setting then the fuel-driven heater is
deactivated during preconditioning.
This heating will have a slightly
lower performance than the Outdoor
parking setting in outside temperatures
lower than 5 °C.
•
•
Parking inside (p. 130)
Parking outside (p. 131).
When the car is plugged into the mains
power circuit
•
Heating/cooling can last up to 50
minutes.
Seat and steering wheel heating can be activated during preconditioning.
When the car is not plugged into the
mains power circuit*
•
•
Heating can last up to 50 minutes.
1. Press OK to access the menu.
Cooling takes place for 2-3 minutes.
2. Scroll with the thumbwheel to
Preconditioning and select with OK.
Related information
•
Preconditioning - messages (p. 135)
NOTE
The car must be connected to the mains
power circuit before the electrically-driven
heater can be activated.
Charging current (p. 286)
3. If the setting Indoor parking has already
been made then the symbol for this is
shown in the display, in which case continue from point 7.
4. If Outdoor parking is selected then the
symbol for this (p. 131) is shown instead.
Scroll with the thumbwheel to the symbol
and select with OK.
130
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
04 Climate control
5. Scroll forward in the next menu to Indoor
parking and select with OK.
6. Go back in the menu with RESET.
7. Select whether or not seat and steering
wheel heating3 should be activated. Scroll
and select
with the thumbwheel to
with OK.
8. Scroll with the thumbwheel to Driver
seat or Passenger seat and select with
the OK button if they should be activated4 during preconditioning.
9. Exit the menu with RESET.
WARNING
Do not use the fuel-driven auxiliary heater
indoors in unventilated areas. Exhaust
fumes are given off.
Related information
•
Preconditioning - setting (p. 130)
Preconditioning - parking outside
With the Outdoor parking option, both the
electrically-driven heater and the fuel-driven
heater5 are activated during preconditioning
(p. 129).
With the Outdoor parking option,
in addition to the electrically-driven
heater, the fuel-driven heater is also
permitted during preconditioning.
WARNING
Do not use the fuel-driven auxiliary heater
indoors in unventilated areas. Exhaust
fumes are given off.
NOTE
The car can be started and driven even
when the fuel-driven auxiliary heater is running.
4. If Indoor parking is selected then the
symbol for this (p. 130) is shown instead.
Scroll with the thumbwheel to the symbol
and select with OK.
5. Scroll forward in the next menu to
Outdoor parking and select with OK.
6. Go back in the menu with RESET.
7. Select whether or not seat and steering
wheel heating6 should be activated. Scroll
and select
with the thumbwheel to
with OK.
8. Scroll with the thumbwheel to Driver
seat or Passenger seat and select with
the OK button if they should be activated6 during preconditioning.
04
9. Exit the menu with RESET.
Related information
•
Preconditioning - setting (p. 130)
1. Press OK to access the menu.
2. Scroll with the thumbwheel to
Preconditioning and select with OK.
3. If the setting Outdoor parking has
already been made then the symbol for
this is shown in the display, in which case
continue from point 7.
3
4
5
6
Seat and steering wheel heating can only be activated when the car is plugged into the mains power circuit.
Tick the box to activate.
The fuel-driven heater is not activated if the outside temperature exceeds 15 °C.
Seat and steering wheel heating can only be activated when the car is plugged into the mains power circuit.
131
04 Climate control
Preconditioning - direct start
Direct start via the remote control key*
Preconditioning of the car can be started
directly.
Direct start can be performed via:
•
•
•
Information display
remote control key*
mobile*.
Status is also shown in the trip computer
while preconditioning is in progress.
NOTE
04
In the event of direct start of preconditioning, Volvo recommends that you activate
via the remote control key or mobile.
Direct start via the information display
1. Press OK to access the menu.
Direct start via a mobile*
Preconditioning can be activated via the
remote control key:
Activation and information about the selected
settings that can be managed from a mobile
phone will be available via Volvo On Call*, see
separate owner's manual for Volvo On Call*.
–
Related information
Indicator lamp on remote control key with PCC*.
2. Scroll with the thumbwheel to
Preconditioning and select with OK.
3. Scroll forward in the next menu to Direct
start in order to activate the preconditioning and select with OK.
Hold the button for approach lighting
depressed for 2 seconds.
Hazard warning flashers provide information in accordance with the following:
•
5 short flashes followed by a constant
glow for approx. 3 seconds - the signal
has reached the car and preconditioning has been activated.
•
5 short flashes - the signal has
reached the car but preconditioning
has not been activated.
•
Hazard warning flashers remain
switched off - the signal has not
reached the car.
4. Exit the menu with RESET.
132
is depressed
If the button for information
when preconditioning is active then the indicator lamp will show the status for this - at
the same time the car's lock status (p. 156) is
shown. While the status is being investigated
the indicator lamp emits a pair of short
flashes followed by a constant glow if preconditioning is active.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
•
Preconditioning - immediate stop (p.
133)
•
Menu navigation - combined instrument
panel (p. 103)
04 Climate control
Preconditioning - immediate stop
Preconditioning - timer
Timer - setting
Preconditioning of the car can be switched off
directly via the information display.
Preconditioning (p. 129) timer is connected to
the car's clock.
1. Press OK to access the menu.
The time when the car shall be used and
acclimatised is specified with the timer.
Two different times can be selected using the
timer. Here, "time" refers to the time when the
car shall be used and acclimatised.
2. Scroll with the thumbwheel to
Preconditioning and select with OK.
3. Scroll forward in the next menu to Stop in
order to deactivate the preconditioning
and select with OK.
4. Exit the menu with RESET.
Two different times can be selected using the
timer (p. 133). The car's electronics select
when preconditioning should be activated
based on prevailing outside climatic conditions.
NOTE
Related information
•
•
All timer programming will be cleared if the
car's clock is reset.
Preconditioning - direct start (p. 132)
Menu navigation - combined instrument
panel (p. 103)
Related information
•
•
Timer - starting (p. 134)
Timer - switching off (p. 134)
NOTE
All timer programming will be cleared if the
car's clock is reset.
1. Press OK to access the menu.
2. Scroll with the thumbwheel (p. 103) to
Preconditioning and select with OK.
3. Select one of the two timers using the
thumbwheel and confirm with OK.
04
4. Briefly press OK to move to the lit hours
setting.
5. Select the required hour using the thumbwheel.
6. Briefly press OK to move to the lit
minutes setting.
7. Select the required minute using the
thumbwheel.
8. Press OK7 to confirm the setting.
9. Go back in the menu structure using
RESET.
10. Select the other time (continue from step
2) or exit the menu with RESET.
7
Press OK again to activate the timer.
133
04 Climate control
||
Related information
•
•
•
04
Preconditioning - timer (p. 133)
Timer - starting (p. 134)
Timer - switching off (p. 134)
Timer - starting
Timer - switching off
The time when the car shall be used and
acclimatised is specified with the timer.
An activated timer for preconditioning, can be
switched off manually.
When the timer is activated the car's electronics choose when preconditioning should be
activated based on prevailing outside climatic
conditions.
1. Press OK to access the menu.
1. Press OK to access the menu.
2. Scroll with the thumbwheel to
Preconditioning and select with OK.
> If a timer is set then a clock symbol is
shown next to the set time.
2. Scroll with the thumbwheel to
Preconditioning and select with OK.
3. Select one of the two timers using the
thumbwheel and confirm with OK.
3. Select one of the two timers using the
thumbwheel and activate with OK.
4. Deactivate the timer as follows:
•
•
4. Exit the menu with RESET.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Preconditioning - timer (p. 133)
Timer - setting (p. 133)
5. Exit the menu with RESET.
Timer - switching off (p. 134)
A timer activated for preconditioning can also
be deactivated (p. 133) .
Menu navigation - combined instrument
panel (p. 103)
Related information
•
•
•
•
134
long press on OK or
short press on OK to continue in the
menu. Then select to stop the timer
and confirm with OK.
Preconditioning - timer (p. 133)
Timer - starting (p. 134)
Timer - setting (p. 133)
Menu navigation - combined instrument
panel (p. 103)
04 Climate control
Preconditioning - messages
Symbols and messages regarding preconditioning.
When the fuel-driven heater has
been activated the heat symbol illuminates in the information display.
Symbol
When one of the timers has been activated,
the symbol for activated timer illuminates in
the display at the same time as the set time is
shown next to the symbol.
Symbol in the display for activated
timer.
The table shows symbols and display texts
that appear.
Display
Specification
Auto heater ON
The fuel-driven heater is switched on and running.
The heater's timer is activated after the remote control key has been removed from the ignition switch and leaving the car - the engine and passenger compartment are heated at the set
time.
Fuel operated heater stopped Battery saving mode
04
The fuel-driven heater is stopped by the car's electronics in order to facilitate starting the
engine.
The starter battery's charge level is too low.
Fuel operated heater stopped Low fuel level
The fuel-driven heater is stopped.
Fuel operated heater Service
required
The fuel-driven heater is fully or partially disengaged.
Preconditioning interrupted
by power supply change
The electrically-driven heater or AC system is stopped.
Setting the heater is not possible due to fuel level being too low - this is in order to facilitate
starting the engine as well as approx. 50 km driving.
Visit a workshop if the message remains. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised
Volvo workshop.
The transfer of energy is interrupted.
}}
135
04 Climate control
||
Symbol
Display
Specification
Preconditioning stopped due
to malfunction
The electrically-driven heater or AC system is stopped.
Preconditioning stopped
Hybrid battery temperature
high
The electrically-driven heater or AC system is stopped.
A display text clears automatically after a time
or after one press on the indicator stalk (p.
103) OK button.
04
Related information
•
•
136
Preconditioning the car (p. 129)
Messages - handling (p. 105)
Visit a workshop. An authorised workshop is recommended.
The hybrid battery is too hot, wait until the temperature has returned to normal.
04 Climate control
General information about heaters
Electrically-driven heater
Fuel-driven heater
The V60 Plug-in Hybrid has a large heat
requirement, in particular during electric operation. As a consequence, the car is equipped
with electrically-driven heater and fuel-driven
heater. These heaters are required in order to
achieve the correct operating temperature for
the engine and to generate sufficient heat in
the passenger compartment.
The car is equipped with electrically-driven
and fuel-driven heater (p. 137).
The car is equipped with electrically-driven (p.
137) and fuel-driven heater.
The electrically-driven heater cannot be controlled manually but is activated automatically
when required.
In colder weather the car's fuel-driven heater
is activated during the heating. The heater
starts automatically when extra heat is
required and is switched off automatically
when not required.
•
•
NOTE
If the electrically-driven heater is activated
then the charging time for the hybrid battery will be extended. The time required for
heating the car is mainly determined by the
outside temperature.
Electrically-driven heater (p. 137)
Fuel-driven heater (p. 137)
NOTE
When the fuel-driven auxiliary heater is
active, exhaust fumes may be given off
from the right-hand wheel housing, which
is perfectly normal.
04
Related information
•
•
Preconditioning the car (p. 129)
General information about heaters (p.
137)
If you do not want the car's fuel-driven heater
to start during preconditioning, activate
Indoor parking, see Preconditioning - parking inside (p. 130). However, this may prolong
the warming-up time.
The fuel-driven heater cannot be started during driving or preconditioning if the outside
temperature exceeds 15 °C. At –5 °C or lower
the maximum running time of the heater is 50
minutes during preconditioning.
If the fuel level in the tank is too low then the
fuel-driven heater is prevented from starting,
with inadequate heating as a result.
137
04 Climate control
||
NOTE
Make sure that there is sufficient fuel in the
car's regular fuel tank when driving at temperatures below +15 °C.
WARNING
Do not use the fuel-driven auxiliary heater
indoors in unventilated areas. Exhaust
fumes are given off.
Refuelling
04
Parking on a hill
If the car is parked on a steep hill, the front of
the car should point downhill to ensure that
there is a supply of fuel to the fuel-driven
heater.
Fuel-driven heater - auto mode/
deactivation
The fuel-driven heater's automatic start
sequence can be deactivated if required.
NOTE
Starter battery and fuel
If the starter battery has insufficient charge or
if the fuel level is too low, the heater will be
switched off automatically and a message is
shown in the combined instrument panel.
Acknowledge the message by pressing the
indicator stalk (p. 103) OK button once.
Preconditioning the car (p. 129)
1. Press OK, see Menu navigation - combined instrument panel (p. 103), to access
the menu.
General information about heaters (p.
137)
2. Scroll with the thumbwheel to Settings
and select with OK.
Related information
•
•
If the fuel-driven auxiliary heater is deactivated, the diesel engine will start more frequently in order to meet the need for heat
in drive mode PURE or HYBRID, i.e. electrical operation will be restricted.
3. Select one of the options Auto heater
ON or Auto heater OFF using the
thumbwheel and confirm with OK.
4. Exit the menu with RESET.
Related information
Warning label on fuel filler flap.
WARNING
Fuel which spills out could be ignited.
Switch off the fuel-driven auxiliary heater
before starting to refuel.
Check in the combined instrument panel
that the heater is switched off. The heat
symbol is shown when it is operating.
138
•
•
Preconditioning the car (p. 129)
•
•
Fuel-driven heater (p. 137)
General information about heaters (p.
137)
Key positions - functions at different levels (p. 73)
LOADING AND STORAGE
05 Loading and storage
Storage spaces
Overview of storage spaces in the passenger
compartment.
05
140
05 Loading and storage
Storage compartment in door panel
Storage pocket* on front edge of front
seat cushions
Ticket clip
Glovebox (p. 143)
Storage compartment
Jacket holder (p. 142)
Storage compartment, cup holder (p.
142)
Cup holder* in armrest, rear seat
Storage pocket
WARNING
05
Keep loose objects such as mobile
phones, cameras, remote controls for
accessories, etc. in the glove compartment
or other compartments. Otherwise they
may injure people in the car in the event of
sudden braking or a collision.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
141
05 Loading and storage
Jacket holder
Tunnel console
The coat hanger is located on the left-hand
side of the passenger seat's head restraint.
The tunnel console is located between the
front seats.
The jacket holder is only designed for light
clothing.
Related information
•
Tunnel console - cigarette lighter and
ashtray*
A detachable ashtray is fitted in the cup
holder under the armrest. The cigarette lighter
is fitted in the 12 V socket (p. 144) for the
front seat.
The ashtray in the tunnel console (p. 142) is
detached by lifting the tray straight up.
Storage spaces (p. 140)
Activate the lighter by pushing in the button.
The button pops out when the lighter is hot.
Pull out the lighter and light a cigarette on the
heated coils.
Related information
•
Storage compartment (e.g. for CDs) and
USB*/AUX input under the armrest.
05
Includes cup holder for driver and passenger. (If ashtray and cigarette lighter (p.
142) are specified, then there is a cigarette lighter in the 12 V socket (p. 144) for
the front seat, and a detachable ashtray
in the cup holder.)
Related information
•
142
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Storage spaces (p. 140)
Storage spaces (p. 140)
05 Loading and storage
Glovebox
Inlay mats*
Vanity mirror
The glovebox is located on the passenger
side.
Inlay mats collect e.g. rubbish and slush.
Volvo supplies specially manufactured inlay
mats.
The vanity mirror is located on the rear of the
sun visor.
WARNING
Before setting off check that the inlaid mat
in the driver area is firmly affixed and
secured in the bosses in order to avoid
getting caught adjacent to and under the
pedals.
Related information
•
The owner's manual and maps can be kept in
here for example. There are also holders for
pens on the inside of the lid. The glovebox
can be locked (p. 170)* using the key blade
(p. 158).
Related information
•
Cleaning the interior (p. 367)
Vanity mirror with lighting.
The light illuminates automatically when the
cover is lifted.
05
Related information
•
Lamp replacement - vanity mirror lighting
(p. 343)
Storage spaces (p. 140)
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
143
05 Loading and storage
Tunnel console - 12 V-sockets
The electrical sockets (12 V) are located next
to the cup holder1 and rear of the tunnel console.
The electrical socket can be used for various
accessories designed for 12 V, e.g. display
screens, music players and mobile phones.
For the socket to supply current, the remote
control key must be in at least key position I
(p. 73).
IMPORTANT
Max. socket is 10 A (120 W) if one socket
is used at a time. If both sockets in the
tunnel console are used simultaneously,
7.5 A (90 W) per socket is applicable.
If the compressor for emergency puncture
repair is connected to one of the two sockets, no other current consumer must be
connected to the other one.
WARNING
Always leave the plug in the socket when
the socket is not in use.
NOTE
NOTE
05
12 V socket in tunnel console, front seat.
Optional equipment and accessories - e.g.
display screens, music players and mobile
phones - which are connected to one of
the passenger compartment's 12V electrical sockets, could be activated by the climate control system, even when the
remote control key has been removed or
when the car is locked, for example, when
the parking heater is activated at a preset
time.
For this reason remove the plugs from the
electrical sockets for optional equipment
or accessories when not in use because
the battery could be drained in the event of
such an occurrence!
12 V socket in tunnel console, rear seat.
1
144
If ashtray and cigarette lighter are specified then there is no cup holder and adjacent 12 V socket.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
The compressor for emergency puncture
repair (p. 318) has been tested and
approved by Volvo.
Related information
•
Tunnel console - cigarette lighter and
ashtray* (p. 142)
•
12 V electrical socket - cargo area* (p.
147)
05 Loading and storage
Loading
•
Secure all loads to the load retaining eyelets with straps or web lashings.
Payload depends on the car's kerb weight.
Payload depends on the car's kerb weight.
The total of the weight of the passengers and
all accessories reduces the car's payload by
a corresponding weight. For more detailed
information on weights, see Weights (p. 376).
WARNING
WARNING
The protection provided by the inflatable
curtain in the headlining may be compromised or eliminated by high loads.
WARNING
•
The car’s driving properties change
depending on the weight and positioning
of the load.
Cover sharp edges and sharp corners with
something soft.
Note that objects must not prevent the function of the WHIPS system for the front seats if
any of the rear seat's backrests is folded
down, seeWHIPS - seating position (p. 38).
•
Cover sharp edges with something soft to
avoid damaging the upholstery.
Heavy objects should be placed as low
as possible. Avoid placing heavy loads on
lowered backrests.
05
Always secure the load. During heavy
braking the load may otherwise shift, causing injury to the car's occupants.
Position the load firmly against the rear
seat's backrest.
Centre the load.
Never load cargo above the backrest.
WARNING
To bear in mind when loading
•
•
Loading - long load (p. 146)
Roof load (p. 146)
A loose object weighing 20 kg can, in a
frontal collision at a speed of 50 km/h,
carry the impact of an item weighing
1000 kg.
The tailgate is opened via a button
on the lighting panel or the remote
control key, see Locking/unlocking tailgate (p. 170).
•
•
•
Switch off the engine and apply the parking brake when loading/unloading long
items. Otherwise you may accidentally
knock the gear lever or gear selector with
the load into a drive position - and the car
could then move off.
Related information
•
•
Load retaining eyelets (p. 146)
Safety net* (p. 147)
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
145
05 Loading and storage
Loading - long load
Roof load
Load retaining eyelets
To simplify loading (p. 145) in the cargo area,
the rear seat backrest can be folded down.
The passenger seat backrest can also be
folded for an extra long load2.
The load carriers recommended for roof loads
are the ones developed by Volvo. This is in
order to avoid damage to the car and in order
to achieve the maximum possible safety during a journey.
The folding load retaining eyelets are used to
fasten straps in order to anchor items in the
cargo area.
Lowering the rear seat backrest
To simplify loading in the cargo area, the rear
seat backrest can be folded down, see Seats,
rear (p. 77).
Carefully follow the installation instructions
supplied with the carriers.
•
Check periodically that the load carriers
and load are properly secured. Lash the
load securely with retaining straps.
•
Distribute the load evenly over the load
carriers. Put the heaviest objects at the
bottom.
•
The size of the area exposed to the wind,
and therefore fuel consumption, increase
with the size of the load.
•
Drive gently. Avoid quick acceleration,
heavy braking and hard cornering.
05
WARNING
Hard, sharp and/or heavy objects which
protrude may cause injury under violent
braking.
WARNING
The car's centre of gravity and driving characteristics are altered by roof loads. For
information about the maximum allowable
load on the roof, including load carriers
and any space box, Weights (p. 376).
Related information
•
2
146
Only applies to comfort seats.
Loading (p. 145)
Always secure large and heavy objects
with a seatbelt or cargo retaining straps.
Related information
•
Loading (p. 145)
05 Loading and storage
12 V electrical socket - cargo area*
Safety net*
NOTE
The electrical socket can be used for various
accessories designed for 12 V, e.g. display
screens, music players and mobile phones.
The compressor for temporary emergency
puncture repair has been tested and
approved by Volvo. For information on the
use of Volvo's recommended temporary
emergency puncture repair (TMK), Emergency puncture repair (p. 318).
A safety net prevents loads from being thrown
forward in the passenger compartment in the
event of sudden braking.
Related information
•
Lower the cover to access the electrical
socket.
•
The socket also provides voltage when
the remote control key is not in the ignition switch.
IMPORTANT
Max. power takeoff is 10 A (120 W).
Tunnel console - 12 V-sockets (p. 144)
Storage space, safety net cassettes.
05
A rollable safety net comprising two cassettes
has a storage space under the cargo area
floor hatch.
Securing the net cassettes
A rollable safety net comprising two cassettes
has a storage space under the cargo area
floor hatch.
NOTE
Remember that using the electrical socket
with the engine switched off involves the
risk of discharging the car's battery.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
147
05 Loading and storage
||
Using the safety net
Removing the net cassettes
1. Roll the safety nets into the cassettes in
accordance with the procedure in the
section entitled "Using the safety net",
but in reverse.
2. Fold the whole backrest forward.
3. Slide the cassettes out until they loosen
from the anchor rails.
Store the cassettes in their compartment
under the cargo area floor hatch.
The two-part safety net cassette is secured
on the rear of the backrest. The narrowest
cassette is secured on the left-hand side
(seen from the tailgate).
05
WARNING
Pull the net up from the cassettes. The net is
self-locking after about 1 minute if the rear
seat's backrests are raised.
1. Fold the rear seat's backrest forward, see
Seats, rear (p. 77).
Pull up the right-hand section of the net
using its strap.
2. Align the cassette's anchor rails in front of
the backrest attachment lugs
.
Insert the rod in the mounting on the
right-hand side and then press it forward
– the rod locks in with a click.
3. Slide the cassette into the attachment
.
lugs
Pull out the rod's telescope section and
click it in on the other side.
4. Fold back and lock the backrests.
•
Removing the cassette takes place in
reverse order.
Pull up the left-hand safety net and hook
it into the rod.
•
Folding up takes place in reverse order.
The net can also be used when the rear
seat's backrests are folded forward.
148
Loads in the luggage compartment must
be anchored well, and also using a correctly fitted safety net.
Related information
•
•
Loading (p. 145)
Safety grille (p. 149)
05 Loading and storage
Safety net* combined with cargo
cover
A safety net prevents loads from being thrown
forward in the passenger compartment in the
event of sudden braking.
Safety grille
A safety grille prevents loads or pets from
being thrown forward in the passenger compartment in the event of sudden braking.
For information about the tools required and
methods for fitting/removal, see the installation instructions that were included with the
initial purchase.
For safety reasons, the safety grille must
always be correctly fastened and secured
when being refitted.
Related information
•
•
•
Puller-straps for raising the net.
The safety net can also be raised from the
rear seat when the cargo cover is extended.
Follow the procedure described in the section
"Using the safety net" (p. 147). The straps for
folding up are located by the arrows.
Safety net* (p. 147)
Loading (p. 145)
Load retaining eyelets (p. 146)
05
Folding up
Take hold of the bottom of the safety grille
and pull back/up.
IMPORTANT
The protective grille cannot be folded up
or down when a cargo cover is fitted.
Related information
•
•
•
Safety net* (p. 147)
Fitting/removal
Loading (p. 145)
The safety grille is normally permanently
installed in the car because it can easily be
folded up in the roof and so be out of the way
if a longer cargo area is required. However, if
desired, the safety grille can be dismantled
and removed from the car.
Load retaining eyelets (p. 146)
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
149
05 Loading and storage
Cargo cover
Removing the cargo cover
1. Press in one end piece button and lift it
out.
2. Carefully angle the cover up/out and the
other end piece loosens automatically.
Lowering the cargo cover's rear sealing
disc
In its rolled-in position, the cargo cover's rear
sealing disc protrudes horizontally into the
cargo area when it is fitted.
–
05
Pull the cargo cover over the load and hook it
into the recesses at the cargo area's rear
posts.
IMPORTANT
The protective grille cannot be folded up
or down when the cargo cover is fitted.
Attaching the cargo cover
Move one end piece of the cover into the
recess on the side panel.
Move the other end piece into the corresponding recess.
Press both sides in. A "click" should be
audible and the red marking should disappear.
> Check that both end pieces are
locked.
150
Pull the sealing disc back gently, free
from its support shelves, and lower.
Related information
•
•
Loading (p. 145)
Loading - long load (p. 146)
LOCKS AND ALARM
06 Locks and alarm
Remote control key with key blade
Remote control key - losing
Key memory*
The remote control key is used to start the car
and for locking and unlocking. It contains a
detachable key blade (p. 158) made of metal.
The visible section is available in two versions
so that it is possible to distinguish between
the remote control keys.
If you lose a remote control key then a new
one can be ordered at a workshop - an
authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
The key memory in the remote control key (p.
152) means that certain settings in the car can
be individually adapted for different people.
The remaining remote control keys must be
taken to the Volvo workshop. The code of the
missing remote control key must be erased
from the system as a theft prevention measure. The current number of keys registered to
the car can be checked in the menu system
MY CAR. For a description of the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 105).
The key memory function is available in combination with power seat and power rearview
and door mirrors. Settings for door mirrors,
driver's seat and steering force can be saved
in the key memory.
The car is supplied with 2 remote control
keys or PCCs* (Personal Car Communicator).
Additional remote control keys can be
ordered - up to 6 can be programmed and
used for the same car.
WARNING
Related information
•
If there are children in the car:
Remember to switch off the supply to the
power windows and sunroof by removing
the remote control key if the driver leaves
the car.
06
Remote control key with PCC (p. 156) has
increased functionality compared with the
remote control key, see PCC* - unique functions (p. 156).
Related information
•
152
Remote control key - functions (p. 154)
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Remote control key - functions (p. 154)
Key memory – door mirrors and driver's
seat
The settings are automatically connected to
each respective remote control key, see Key
memory* in remote control key (p. 77) and
Adjustable steering force* (p. 247). After
locking with the remote control key the setting of the combined instrument panel's
theme is also saved in the key, see MY CAR
(p. 105).
The function can be activated/deactivated in
the menu system MY CAR. For a description
of the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 105).
For cars with the Keyless drive function, see
Keyless drive* (p. 162).
06 Locks and alarm
Indication locking/unlocking adjusting
When the car is locked or unlocked using the
remote control key (p. 152) the direction indicators confirm that locking/unlocking was
correctly performed.
•
Locking - one flash and the door mirrors
are folded1 in.
•
Unlocking - two flashes and the door mirrors are folded1 out.
Lock indicator
Immobiliser
A flashing LED by the windscreen verifies that
the car is locked.
The electronic immobiliser is a theft protection system that prevents an unauthorised
person from starting the car.
Each remote control key (p. 152) has a unique
code. The car can only be started with the
correct remote control key with the correct
code.
The following error messages in the combined instrument panel's information display
are related to the electronic immobiliser:
After locking the indication is only given if all
locks are activated once the doors have been
closed.
Selecting the function
Different options for indicating locking/
unlocking with light can be set in the car's
menu system MY CAR. For a description of
the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 105).
Same LED as alarm indicator (p. 175).
NOTE
Cars that are not equipped with alarm also
have this indicator.
Related information
•
•
•
1
Keyless drive* (p. 162)
Lock indicator (p. 153)
Alarm indicator (p. 175)
06
Related information
•
Indication locking/unlocking - adjusting
(p. 153)
Only for cars with retractable power door mirrors.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
153
06 Locks and alarm
||
Message
Specification
Insert
car key
Error when reading the
remote control key during
starting - Remove the key
from the ignition switch, press
it in again and make a new
start attempt.
Car key
not
found
Error reading the remote control key during starting - Try to
start again.
If the error persists: Insert the
remote control key into the
ignition switch and try to start
again.
06
Immobiliser Try
start
again
Error in immobiliser system
during starting. If the error
persists: Contact a workshop
- an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
For starting the car, see Starting the engine
(p. 254).
Related information
•
154
Remote-controlled immobiliser with
tracking system (p. 154)
Remote-controlled immobiliser with
tracking system
Remote-controlled immobiliser with tracking
system makes it possible to track and locate
the car, and to remotely activate the immobiliser to switch off the engine.
Remote control key - functions
The remote control key has functions such as
locking and unlocking the doors.
Contact your nearest Volvo dealer for more
information and assistance with activating the
system.
Related information
•
Remote control key with key blade (p.
152)
•
Immobiliser (p. 153)
Remote control key, standard version.
Locking
Unlocking
Approach light duration
Tailgate
Panic function
06 Locks and alarm
Remote control key with PCC* - Personal Car
Communicator.
Information
Function buttons
Locking – Locks the doors and tailgate
while the alarm is activated.
A long press also closes all windows and
sunroof* simultaneously (see also Total airing
function (p. 169)).
WARNING
If the sunroof and windows are closed
using the remote control key, check that
nobody's hands are trapped.
Unlocking – Unlocks the doors and tailgate while the alarm is deactivated.
A long press also opens all windows simultaneously (see also Total airing function (p.
169)).
Related information
•
Remote control key with key blade (p.
152)
The function can be changed from unlocking
all doors simultaneously, to unlocking the
driver's door only with one press of the button and, after a further press of the button within 10 seconds - unlocking the remaining
doors.
•
•
PCC* - unique functions (p. 156)
Locking/unlocking - from the outside (p.
167)
The function can be changed in the menu
system MY CAR. For a description of the
menu system, see MY CAR (p. 105).
Approach light duration – Used to
switch on the car's lighting at a distance. For
more information, see Approach light duration
(p. 92).
The button can also be used for activating
preconditioning (p. 132).
Tailgate (p. 170) - Unlocks and disarms
the alarm for the tailgate only.
06
Panic function – Used to attract attention in an emergency.
Press and hold the button for at least 3 seconds or press it twice within 3 seconds to
activate the direction indicators and the horn.
The function can be turned off with the same
button once it has been active for at least
5 seconds. Otherwise the function switches
off automatically after approx. 3 minutes.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
155
06 Locks and alarm
Remote control key - range
PCC* - unique functions
Using the information button
Remote control key (p. 152) functions have a
range of about 20 metres from the car.
Remote control key with PCC has extended
functionality compared with remote control
key without PCC (p. 152) in the form of an
information button and indicator lamps.
–
If the car does not verify a button being
pressed - move closer and try again.
NOTE
NOTE
If the remote control key is removed from the
car when the engine is running or key position
(p. 73) I or II is active, and if all doors are
closed, then a warning message is shown in
the information display in the combined
instrument panel and an audio reminder signal sounds at the same time.
Remote control key with PCC* - Personal Car
Communicator.
The message is extinguished and the audible
reminder signal stops when the remote control key is brought back to the car after
either/or:
Using the information button enables access
to certain information from the car via the
indicator lamps.
•
•
•
156
If none of the indicator lamps illuminates with repeated use of the information
button and in different locations (as well as
after 7 seconds and after the light has
travelled around on the PCC), contact a
workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop
is recommended.
Information button
Indicator lamps
The remote control key has been inserted
into the ignition switch.
Speed exceeds 30 km/h.
the OK button has been pressed.
Related information
•
.
> All indicator lamps flash for approximately 7 seconds and the light travels
around on the PCC. This indicates that
information from the car has been
read.
If any of the other buttons are pressed
during this time then the reading is
interrupted.
The remote control key functions may be
disrupted by surrounding radio waves,
buildings, topographical conditions, etc.
The car can always be locked/unlocked
with the key blade, Detachable key blade unlocking doors (p. 159).
06
Press the information button
Remote control key - functions (p. 154)
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Indicator lamps display information in accordance with the following illustration:
06 Locks and alarm
PCC* - range
Related information
•
•
The PCC's range for locking, unlocking and
tailgate is approx. 20 m from the car - for
other functions up to approx. 100 m.
Keyless drive* - PCC range (p. 162)
Remote control key - range (p. 156)
If the car does not verify a button being
pressed - move closer and try again.
NOTE
The information button function may be
disrupted by surrounding radio waves,
buildings, topographical conditions, etc.
Green continuous light – the car is
locked.
Red continuous light – the alarm has
been triggered since the car was locked.
Red light flashing alternately in both indicator lamps – The alarm was triggered
less than 5 minutes ago.
If several PCCs are used for the car then it is
only the PCC last used for locking/unlocking
that shows correct status.
Related information
•
Out of PCC range
If the PCC is too far away from the car for the
information to be read then the status the car
was last left in is shown, without the light
travelling around on the PCC.
Yellow continuous light – the car is
unlocked.
PCC* - range (p. 157)
06
NOTE
If no indicator lamps illuminate when
the information button is used within range
then this may be because the last communication between the PCC and the car was
disrupted by surrounding radio waves,
buildings, topographical conditions etc.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
157
06 Locks and alarm
Detachable key blade
A remote control key (p. 152) contains a
detachable key blade of metal with which
some functions can be activated and some
operations carried out.
Remote control key - functions (p. 154)
Detachable key blade - detaching/
attaching
Remote control key with key blade (p.
152)
Detaching/attaching the detachable key blade
(p. 158) is carried out as follows:
Related information
•
•
The key blade's unique code is provided by
authorised Volvo workshops, which are recommended when ordering new key blades.
Removing the key blade
Key blade functions
Using the remote control key's detachable
key blade:
06
158
•
the left-hand front door can be opened
manually if central locking cannot be activated with the remote control key, see
Detachable key blade - unlocking doors
(p. 159).
•
the rear doors' mechanical child safety
locks can be activated/deactivated (p.
172).
•
the right-hand front door and the rear
doors can be locked manually (p. 168),
e.g. in the event of power failure.
•
access to the glovebox and cargo area
(privacy locking (p. 159)*) can be
blocked.
•
the airbag for front passenger seat
(PACOS*) can be activated/deactivated
(p. 33).
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Slide the spring-loaded catch to the side.
At the same time pull the key blade
straight out backwards.
Attaching the key blade
Carefully refit the key blade into its location in
the remote control key (p. 152).
1. Hold the remote control key with the slot
pointed up and lower the key blade into
its slot.
2. Lightly press the key blade. You should
hear a "click" when the key blade is
locked in.
06 Locks and alarm
•
Detachable key blade - unlocking doors
(p. 159)
•
Child safety locks - manual activation (p.
172)
•
Passenger airbag - activating/deactivating* (p. 33)
Detachable key blade - unlocking
doors
Privacy locking*
The detachable key blade (p. 158) can be
used if central locking cannot be activated
with the remote control key (p. 152), e.g. if the
key's battery has run out.
If central locking cannot be activated with the
remote control key - e.g. if the batteries are
discharged - then the left-hand front door can
be opened as follows:
Privacy locking is intended for when the car is
left for service, with a hotel parking valet or
similar. The glovebox is then locked and the
tailgate lock is disconnected from the central
locking - the tailgate cannot be opened with
either the central locking button in the front
doors or the remote control key (p. 152).
1. Unlock the left-hand front door with the
key blade in the door handle's lock cylinder. For illustration and more information,
see Keyless drive* - unlocking with the
key blade (p. 165).
NOTE
G017869
Related information
When the door has been unlocked using
the key blade and is opened, the alarm is
triggered.
Active locks for remote control key with key
blade.
06
2. Deactivate the alarm by inserting the
remote control key in the ignition switch.
For cars with the Keyless system, see
Keyless drive* - unlocking with the key blade
(p. 165).
Related information
•
Remote control key with key blade (p.
152)
•
Remote control key/PCC - replacing the
battery (p. 161)
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
159
06 Locks and alarm
||
Activate/deactivate
NOTE
Do not reinsert the key blade into the
remote control key, but keep it in a safe
place instead.
•
Deactivation takes place in reverse order.
G017870
For information on locking the glovebox only,
see Locking/unlocking - glovebox (p. 170).
Active locks for remote control key, without key
blade and privacy locking activated.
This means that the remote control key without key blade can only be used to activate/
deactivate the alarm (p. 174), to open the
doors and to drive the car.
06
The remote control key without key blade can
then be handed over to the service or hotel
staff - the loose key blade is retained by the
car owner.
NOTE
Do not forget to pull out the cargo cover
(p. 150)) over the cargo area before closing
the tailgate.
160
Activating privacy locking.
To activate privacy locking:
Insert the key blade in the glovebox lock
cylinder.
Turn the key blade 180 degrees clockwise. The keyhole is vertical in the locked
position for privacy locking.
Pull out the key blade. The combined
instrument panel's information display
shows a message at the same time.
The glovebox is then locked and the tailgate
can no longer be unlocked with the remote
control key or the central locking button.
06 Locks and alarm
Remote control key/PCC - replacing
the battery
NOTE
Turn the remote control key over with the
buttons facing up, this is to avoid the batteries falling out when it is opened.
The batteries for the remote control key/PCC
can be replaced.
The batteries for the remote control key/PCC
should be replaced if:
•
IMPORTANT
the information symbol in the combined
instrument panel illuminates and the display shows Low battery in remote
control. Please change batteries.
Avoid touching new batteries and their
contact surfaces with your fingers as this
may impair their function.
and/or
•
Battery replacement
Closely study how the battery/batteries
are secured on the inside of the cover,
with regard to their (+) and (–) sides.
the locks repeatedly do not react to signals from the remote control key within
20 metres from the car.
Remove control key (1 battery)
1. Carefully prize out the battery.
2. Install a new one with the (+) side down.
Opening
PCC* (2 batteries)
Slide the spring-loaded catch to the
side.
1. Carefully prize out the batteries.
2. First install one new one with the (+) side
up.
At the same time pull the key blade
straight out backwards.
Insert a 3 mm slot screwdriver in the
hole behind the spring-loaded catch and
gently prize the remote control key up.
06
3. Position the white plastic tab in between
and finally install a second new battery
with the (+) side down.
Battery type
Use batteries with the designation CR2430,
3V - one in the remote control key and two in
the PCC.
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
161
06 Locks and alarm
||
NOTE
Volvo recommends that the batteries to be
used in the remote control key/PCC fulfil
UN Manual of Test and Criteria, Part III,
sub-section 38.3. Batteries fitted in the
factory or replaced by an authorised Volvo
workshop fulfil the above criteria.
Assembly
1. Press the remote control key together.
2. Hold the remote control key with the slot
pointed up and lower the key blade into
its slot.
3. Lightly press the key blade. You should
hear a "click" when the key blade is
locked in.
IMPORTANT
Make sure that exhausted batteries are
disposed of in a manner which is kind to
the environment.
06
Related information
•
Remote control key with key blade (p.
152)
•
Remote control key - functions (p. 154)
2
162
Keyless drive*
Keyless drive* - PCC range
Keyless drive, only with PCC (p.
means
that the car's lock and starting systems can
be operated keylessly.
In order to open a door or the tailgate, a PCC
must be no more than approx. 1.5 metres
from the car door handle or tailgate.
The Keyless drive function in the PCC allows
the car to be unlocked (p. 164), driven and
locked without the need for a key. You simply
have to have the PCC with you. The system
makes it easier and more convenient to open
the car, e.g. when your hands are full.
The person who wishes to lock or unlock a
door must have the PCC with him or her. It is
not possible to lock or unlock a door if the
PCC is on the opposite side of the car.
156)2
Both of the car's PCCs incorporate the
Keyless function. Additional PCCs can be
ordered, see Remote control key with key
blade (p. 152).
The car's electrical system can be set to
three different levels - key position 0, I and II
(p. 73) - with the remote control key.
Related information
•
•
Keyless drive* - PCC range (p. 162)
Keyless drive* - handling the PCC safely
(p. 163)
•
The red rings in the above figure indicate the
range covered by the system's antennas.
Keyless drive* - interference to PCC function (p. 163)
If all PCCs are removed from the car when
the engine is running or key position I or II (p.
73) is active, and if all doors are closed, then
a warning message is shown in the information display in the combined instrument panel
and an audio reminder signal sounds at the
same time.
Personal Car Communicator.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
06 Locks and alarm
When the PCC has been returned to the car,
the warning message goes off and the audible reminder ceases once either/or:
•
•
•
a door has been opened and closed
the PCC is inserted into the ignition
switch
the OK button has been pressed.
Related information
•
•
Keyless drive* (p. 162)
Keyless drive* - antenna location (p. 166)
Keyless drive* - handling the PCC
safely
Keyless drive* - interference to PCC
function
It is important to handle all remote control
keys with great care.
Electromagnetic fields and screening can
interfere with the Keyless function.
If a PCC with keyless function is left in the
car, it is deactivated temporarily when the car
is locked. This prevents unauthorised entry.
However, if someone breaks into the car and
finds the PCC, it can be reactivated. It is
therefore important to handle all PCCs with
great care.
IMPORTANT
Never leave a PCC in the car.
Related information
•
Keyless drive* (p. 162)
NOTE
Do not place/store the PCC near a mobile
phone or metal object - no closer than
10-15 cm.
If interference is experienced nonetheless,
use the PCC and the key blade as a remote
control key, see Remote control key - functions (p. 154).
Related information
•
Remote control key/PCC - replacing the
battery (p. 161)
•
Keyless drive* - handling the PCC safely
(p. 163)
•
Keyless drive* - PCC range (p. 162)
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
06
163
06 Locks and alarm
Keyless drive* - locking
NOTE
Cars with the Keyless-drive system have a
touch-sensitive area on the outer handle of
the doors and a rubberised button next to the
tailgate's rubberised pressure plate for locking/unlocking.
In cars with automatic gearbox selectors,
the gear selector must be set to the P
position; otherwise the car can be neither
locked nor alarmed.
Keyless drive* - unlocking
Unlocking takes place when a hand grasps a
door handle or the tailgate's rubberised pressure plate is actuated - open the door or tailgate as normal.
NOTE
Related information
•
•
The door handles normally register a hand
that takes hold of the handle, but with
thick gloves on or after a very quick hand
movement a second attempt may be
required, or with the glove taken off.
Keyless drive* (p. 162)
Alarm indicator (p. 175)
Related information
•
•
The touch-sensitive area on the outer door handles and the rubberised button next to the tailgate's rubberised pressure plate.
06
Lock the doors and the tailgate with one long
press on any of the door handles' touch-sensitive areas or press the smaller of the tailgate's two rubberised buttons - the lock indicator (p. 153) in the windscreen confirms that
locking has been completed by starting to
flash.
All doors and the tailgate must be closed
before the car can be locked - otherwise the
car is not locked.
164
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Keyless drive* (p. 162)
Keyless drive* - locking (p. 164)
06 Locks and alarm
Keyless drive* - unlocking with the
key blade
2. Then insert the key blade in the lock cylinder and unlock the door.
If central locking cannot be unlocked with the
PCC, e.g. if the batteries are discharged, then
the left-hand front door can be opened with
the PCC's detachable key blade (see Detachable key blade - detaching/attaching (p. 158)).
3. Refit the plastic cover after unlocking.
NOTE
When the driver's door is unlocked using
the key blade and is opened, the alarm is
triggered. It is switched off by inserting the
PCC in the ignition switch, see Alarm remote control key not working (p. 175).
Keyless drive* - key memory
The key memory3 in the PCC means that certain settings in the car can be individually
adapted for different persons.
The key memory function is available in combination with power seat and power rearview
and door mirrors. Settings for door mirrors
and driver's seat can be saved in the key
memory.
PCC memory function
Related information
•
•
Hole for key blade - to loosen the cover.
To access the lock cylinder, the door handle's
plastic cover must be removed - this is also
done with the key blade:
1. Press the key blade approx. 1 cm straight
up into the hole on the underside of the
door handle/cover - do not prize.
> The plastic cover loosens automatically by means of the torque when the
blade is pushed straight up and into
the opening.
3
Keyless drive* (p. 162)
Alarm (p. 174)
If several people each with a PCC approach
the car, then the settings for seat and mirrors
are implemented for the person who opens
the driver's door.
After the driver's door has been opened by
person A with PCC A but person B with
PCC B shall drive, the settings can be
changed as follows:
•
Standing by the driver's door, or sitting
behind the steering wheel, person B
presses their PCC's unlock button, see
Remote control key - functions (p. 154).
•
Select one of three possible memories for
seat adjustment with seat button 1-3, see
Seats, front - electrically operated (p. 76).
•
Adjust seat and mirrors manually, see
Seats, front - electrically operated (p. 76)
and Door mirrors (p. 97).
06
Only in combination with power driver's seat* and power mirrors.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
165
06 Locks and alarm
||
Related information
•
•
Keyless drive* (p. 162)
Remote control key - functions (p. 154)
Keyless drive* - lock settings
Keyless drive* - antenna location
Lock settings for the Keyless function can be
adapted.
The Keyless system has a number of integrated antennae located around the car.
Lock settings for the Keyless function can be
adapted by indicating in the menu system for
MY CAR which doors are to be unlocked. For
a description of the menu system, see MY
CAR (p. 105).
Related information
•
Keyless drive* (p. 162)
Rear bumper, centre
Door handle, left rear
Cargo area, central and furthest in under
the floor
06
Door handle, right rear
Centre console, under the rear section
Centre console, under the front section.
166
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
06 Locks and alarm
WARNING
People who have had a pacemaker operation should not come closer than 22 cm to
the Keyless system's antennas with their
pacemaker. This is to prevent interference
between the pacemaker and the Keyless
system.
Related information
•
Keyless drive* (p. 162)
Locking/unlocking - from the outside
NOTE
Locking/unlocking from the outside is carried
out using the remote control key (p. 152). The
remote control key can lock/unlock all doors
and the tailgate simultaneously. Different
sequences for unlocking can be selected, see
Remote control key - functions (p. 154).
Remember that the alarm is triggered
when the door is opened after being
unlocked with the key blade - the alarm is
switched off when the remote control key
is inserted into the ignition switch.
WARNING
In order that the lock sequence can be activated, the driver's door must be closed - if
any of the other doors or the tailgate is open,
then it/they is/are locked and the alarm is
activated only when it/they are closed. With
the Keyless* system all the doors and tailgate
must be closed.
NOTE
Be aware of the risk of being locked in the
car when it is locked from the outside
using the remote control key - it is then not
possible to open any of the doors from the
inside with the door controls. For more
information, see Deadlocks* (p. 171).
Automatic relocking
Be aware of the risk of locking the remote
control key in the car.
If it is not possible to lock/unlock with the
remote control key, the battery may be discharged - lock or unlock the left-hand front
door with the detachable key blade, see
Detachable key blade - detaching/attaching
(p. 158).
If none of the doors or the tailgate is opened
within two minutes of unlocking, all are
locked again automatically. This function
reduces the risk that the car is left unlocked
unintentionally. (For cars with alarm, see
Alarm (p. 174).)
06
Related information
•
Locking/unlocking - from the inside (p.
168)
•
Locking/unlocking - from the outside (p.
167)
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
167
06 Locks and alarm
Manual locking of the door
The door is blocked against opening from
the outside.
In certain situations the car must be lockable
manually, e.g. in the event of power failure.
The door can be opened from both the
outside and the inside.
The left-hand front door can be locked with
its lock cylinder and the remote control key's
detachable key blade, see Keyless drive* unlocking with the key blade (p. 165).
NOTE
Other doors do not have lock cylinders and
instead have lock knobs on each door's end
face which must be re-turned - then they are
mechanically locked/blocked against opening
from the outside. The doors can still be
opened from the inside.
•
A door's knob control only locks that
particular door - not all doors simultaneously.
•
A manually locked rear door with an
activated manual child safety lock cannot be opened from either the outside
or the inside, see Child safety locks manual activation (p. 172). A rear door
that is locked in this way can only be
unlocked with the remote control key
or central locking button.
Related information
•
06
Remote control key/PCC - replacing the
battery (p. 161)
Locking/unlocking - from the inside
All of the doors and the tailgate are locked or
unlocked simultaneously using the central
locking button on the driver's door and passenger door*.
Central locking
Central locking.
•
Press one side
the other side
of the button to lock to unlock.
Press and hold to also open all side windows*
simultaneously.
Unlocking
Manual locking of the door. Not to be mixed up
with child safety locks (p. 172).
–
168
Use the remote control key's detachable
key blade to turn the knob, see Detachable key blade - detaching/attaching (p.
158).
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
A door can be unlocked from the inside in
two different ways:
•
Press the central locking button
.
A long press also opens all the side windows*
simultaneously (see also Total airing function
(p. 169)).
06 Locks and alarm
•
Pull the door handle and open the door the door is unlocked and opened in one
operation.
Total airing function
Lock button* rear doors
The total airing function opens or closes all
side windows simultaneously and can be
used for example to quickly air the car during
hot weather.
Lamp in lock button
Central locking is available in two variants the lamp in the central locking button for the
driver's door has different meanings dependent on the variant.
With central locking button only in the driver's
door, other doors have no button:
•
Illuminated lamp means that all doors are
locked.
With central locking button on both front
doors and electric lock button in each rear
door:
•
Illuminated lamp means that only that
particular door is locked. When all buttons are illuminated all doors are locked.
The button's lamp illuminates when the door is
locked.
The rear door lock buttons only lock their
respective rear door.
To unlock the door:
•
Locking
•
Press the central locking button
closed doors are locked.
- all
A long press also closes all side windows and
sunroof simultaneously (see also Total airing
function (p. 169)).
Central locking button
Pull the door handle - the door is
unlocked and opened.
Automatic locking
The doors and tailgate are locked automatically when the car starts to move.
A long press on the
symbol in the central
locking button opens all side windows simultaneously. The same procedure on the
symbol closes all side windows simultaneously.
The function can be activated/deactivated in
the menu system MY CAR. For a description
of the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 105).
•
Locking/unlocking - from the inside (p.
168)
Related information
•
Power windows (p. 95)
•
Locking/unlocking - from the outside (p.
167)
•
•
Alarm (p. 174)
06
Related information
Remote control key - functions (p. 154)
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
169
06 Locks and alarm
Locking/unlocking - glovebox
Locking/unlocking - tailgate
The glovebox (p. 143) can only be locked/
unlocked using the detachable key blade from
the remote control key.
The tailgate can be opened, locked and
unlocked in several ways.
For information on the key blade, see Detachable key blade - detaching/attaching (p. 158).
Manual opening
IMPORTANT
•
Minimal force is required to release the
rear hatch lock - just gently press the
rubberised panel.
•
Do not place the lift force on the rubber panel when opening the rear hatch
- lift the handle. Using too much force
may damage the electrical contacts on
the rubber panel.
Unlocking with the remote control key
Rubber plate with electrical contact.
Locking the glovebox:
06
The tailgate is held closed by an electrical
lock. To open:
Insert the key blade in the glovebox lock
cylinder.
1. Push down gently on the wider of the two
rubberised pressure plates under the
outer handle - the lock is released.
Turn the key blade 90 degrees clockwise.
The keyhole is horizontal in the locked
position.
2. Lift the outside handle in order to fully
open the tailgate.
Pull out the key blade.
•
Unlock by carrying this out in reverse
order.
For information on privacy locking, see Privacy locking* (p. 159).
170
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
The alarm for the tailgate can be disarmed*
and the tailgate unlocked on its own by using
the remote control key's
button.
The lock indicator (p. 153) on the instrument
panel stops flashing in order to show that not
all of the car is locked and the alarm's* level
and movement sensors and the sensors for
opening the tailgate are disconnected.
06 Locks and alarm
The doors remain locked and armed.
Locking with the remote control key
Deadlocks*
•
–
Deadlocks4 means that all door handles are
mechanically disengaged, which prevents
doors being opened from both inside and
outside.
The tailgate is unlocked, but remains
closed - press lightly on the rubberised
pressure plate under the outer handle and
lift the tailgate.
If the tailgate is not opened within 2 minutes
then it is relocked and the alarm is re-armed.
Unlocking the car from inside
Unlocking, tailgate
To unlock the tailgate:
–
4
Press the lighting panel button. (1)
> The tailgate is unlocked and can be
opened within 2 minutes (if the car is
locked from the inside).
Press the remote control key's button for
, see Remote control key locking
functions (p. 154).
> The lock indicator on the instrument
panel starts flashing, which means that
the car is locked and the alarm* has
been activated.
Related information
•
Locking/unlocking - from the inside (p.
168)
•
Locking/unlocking - from the outside (p.
167)
The deadlocks are activated with the remote
control key (p. 152) and are set after an
approximately 10 second delay after the
doors have been locked.
NOTE
If a door is opened within the delay time
then the sequence is interrupted and the
alarm is deactivated.
The car can only be unlocked from a deadlock state with the remote control key. The
front left door can also be unlocked with the
detachable key blade (p. 158). In addition, it is
possible to unlock/open the doors and tailgate on cars equipped with the Keyless drive*
by touching door handles or the tailgate's
handle.
06
WARNING
Do not allow anyone to remain in the car
without first deactivating the deadlocks in
order to avoid the risk of anyone being
locked in.
Only in combination with alarm.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
171
06 Locks and alarm
||
Temporary deactivation
Related information
•
Keyless drive* - unlocking with the key
blade (p. 165)
•
Remote control key with key blade (p.
152)
Child safety locks - manual activation
The child safety locks prevent children from
being able to open a rear door from the
inside.
Activate/deactivate child safety locks
Active menu options are indicated with a cross.
MY CAR
OK MENU
TUNE knob control
EXIT
06
172
If someone is going to stay in the car but the
doors must be locked from the outside, then
the deadlocks function can be temporarily
switched off. This takes place the menu system MY CAR. For a description of the menu
system, see MY CAR (p. 105).
Manual child safety locks. Not to be mixed up
with manual door lock (p. 168).
The child safety locks are located on the trailing edge of the rear doors and are only
accessible when the doors are open.
To activate/deactivate the child safety locks:
–
Use the remote control key's detachable
key blade (p. 158) to turn the knob.
NOTE
•
The door is blocked against opening from
the inside.
Remember that the alarm is activated
when the car is locked.
•
If any of the doors are opened from
the inside then the alarm is triggered.
The door can be opened from both the
outside and the inside.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
06 Locks and alarm
WARNING
Each rear door has two knob controls - do
not mix up the child safety locks with manual door locks.
NOTE
•
A door's knob control only blocks that
particular door - not both rear doors
simultaneously.
•
Cars with an electric child safety lock
do not have a manual child lock.
Child safety locks - electrical
activation*
Child safety locks with electrical activation
prevent children from opening the rear doors
or windows from the inside.
Activation
The child safety locks can be activated/deactivated in all key positions (p. 73) higher than
0. Activation/deactivation can be performed
up to 2 minutes after switching off the engine,
provided that no door is opened.
To activate the child safety locks:
Child safety locks - electrical activation*
(p. 173)
•
Locking/unlocking - from the inside (p.
168)
•
Locking/unlocking - from the outside (p.
167)
When the child safety lock is active then the
rear:
•
windows can only be opened with the
driver's door control panel
•
doors cannot be opened from inside.
The current setting is stored when the engine
is switched off - if the child safety locks are
activated at engine shutdown, the function
will remain activated the next time the engine
is started.
Related information
•
2. Press the button in the driver's door control panel.
> The combined instrument panel's
information display shows the message Rear child locks Activated and
the button's lamp illuminates - the
locks are active.
Related information
•
Child safety locks - manual activation (p.
172)
•
Locking/unlocking - from the inside (p.
168)
06
Control panel driver's door.
1. Start the engine or choose a key position
higher than 0.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
173
06 Locks and alarm
Alarm
NOTE
The alarm is a device that warns in the event
of e.g. a break-in in the car.
The movement sensors trigger an alarm in
the event of movement in the passenger
compartment - air currents are also registered. For this reason the alarm is triggered if the car is left with a window or the
sunroof open or if the passenger compartment heater is used.
Activated alarm is triggered if:
•
a door, the bonnet or the tailgate is
opened
•
a movement is detected in the passenger
compartment (if fitted with a movement
detector*)
•
the car is raised or towed away (if fitted
with a tilt detector*)
•
•
the battery's cable is disconnected
To avoid this: Close the window/sunroof
when leaving the car. If the car's integrated passenger compartment heater (or
a portable electric heater) shall be used direct the airflow from the air vents so that
they are not pointing upwards in the passenger compartment. Alternatively,
reduced alarm level can be used, see
Reduced alarm level (p. 176).
the siren is disconnected.
If there is a fault in the alarm system then the
information display in the combined instrument panel shows a message. In which case,
contact a workshop - an authorised Volvo
workshop is recommended.
NOTE
Do not attempt to repair or alter components in the alarm system yourself. Any
such attempts may affect the terms of the
insurance.
06
Arming the alarm
–
Press the remote control key lock button.
Deactivate the alarm
–
174
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Press the remote control key unlock button.
Deactivating a triggered alarm
–
Press the remote control key unlock button or insert the remote control key in the
ignition switch.
Related information
•
•
•
Alarm indicator (p. 175)
Alarm - automatic re-arming (p. 175)
Alarm - remote control key not working
(p. 175)
06 Locks and alarm
Alarm indicator
Alarm - automatic re-arming
The alarm indicator shows alarm system (p.
174) status.
Automatic re-arming of the alarm (p. 174) prevents the car being left with the alarm disarmed unintentionally.
If the car is unlocked with the remote control
key (and the alarm is disarmed) but none of
the doors or the tailgate is opened within 2
minutes, then the alarm is automatically rearmed. The car is relocked at the same time.
Related information
•
Reduced alarm level (p. 176)
Alarm - remote control key not
working
If the alarm (p. 174) cannot be deactivated
with the remote control key, e.g. if the key's
battery (p. 161) is discharged - the car can be
unlocked, disarmed and the engine started as
follows:
1. Open the driver's door with the detachable key blade (p. 165).
> The alarm is triggered, the alarm indicator (p. 175) flashes rapidly and the
siren sounds.
Same LED as lock indicator (p. 153).
A red LED on the instrument panel indicates
the alarm system's status:
•
•
LED not lit – Alarm not armed
•
The LED flashes rapidly after disarming
the alarm (and until the remote control
key is inserted in the ignition switch and
key position I is selected) – Alarm has
been triggered.
The LED flashes once every other second
– Alarm is armed
06
2. Insert the remote control key in the ignition switch.
> The alarm is deactivated and the alarm
indicator goes out.
3. Start the engine.
175
06 Locks and alarm
Alarm signals
Reduced alarm level
When the alarm (p. 174) is triggered a siren
sounds and all direction indicators flash.
Reduced guard means that the movement
and tilt detectors can be temporarily deactivated.
•
A siren sounds for 30 seconds or until the
alarm is switched off. The siren has its
own battery and works independently of
the car battery.
•
The direction indicators flash for 5
minutes or until the alarm is switched off.
To avoid accidental triggering of the alarm (p.
174) - e.g. if a dog is left in a locked car or
during transport on a car train or car ferry temporarily deactivate the movement and tilt
detectors.
The procedure is the same as with the temporary disengaging of deadlocks (p. 171)5.
Related information
•
06
5
176
Only in combination with alarm.
Alarm indicator (p. 175)
DRIVER SUPPORT
07 Driver support
Stability and traction control system
(DSTC)
The stability and traction control system,
DSTC (Dynamic Stability & Traction Control),
helps the driver to avoid skidding and
improves the car's traction.
The activation of the system during braking
may be noticed as a throbbing sound. The
car may accelerate slower than expected
when the accelerator pedal is depressed.
The system consists of the following functions:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Involuntary wheel locking while driving can,
amongst other things, impair the driver's ability to steer the car.
Corner Traction Control (CTC)
CTC compensates for understeer and allows
higher than normal acceleration in a bend
without wheelspin on the inner wheel, e.g. on
an arcing motorway entrance road to quickly
reach the prevailing traffic speed.
Traction control system
Engine drag control - EDC
Corner Traction Control - CTC
Trailer Stability Assist* - TSA
Spin Control
The function prevents the driving wheels from
spinning against the road surface during
acceleration.
178
Engine drag control (EDC)
EDC (Engine Drag Control) prevents involuntary wheel locking, e.g. after shifting down or
engine braking when driving in low gears on
slippery road surfaces.
Active Yaw Control
The function checks the driving and brake
force of the wheels individually in order to
stabilise the car.
1
The function is active at low speed and transfers power from the driving wheel that is spinning to the one that is not.
Spin Control
Active Yaw Control
07
Traction control system
Included in the installation of Volvo genuine towbar.
Trailer Stability Assist1
Trailer stability assist (p. 301) function is to
stabilise the car and trailer combination if it
begins to snake. For more information, see
Driving with a trailer (p. 296).
NOTE
The function is deactivated if the driver
selects Sport mode.
Related information
•
Stability and traction control system
(DSTC) - operation (p. 179)
•
Stability and traction control system
(DSTC) - symbols and messages (p. 180)
07 Driver support
Stability and traction control system
(DSTC) - operation
The stability and traction control system (p.
178) (DSTC - Dynamic Stability & Traction
Control), helps the driver to avoid skidding
and improves the car's traction.
- after the engine is started the next time the
stability and traction control system is back in
its normal mode again.
Related information
•
Stability and traction control system
(DSTC) - symbols and messages (p. 180)
Selection of level - Sport mode
The stability and traction control system is
always activated - it cannot be switched off.
However, the driver can select the Sport
mode, which allows for a more active driving
experience. In Sport mode the system
detects whether the accelerator pedal, steering wheel movements and cornering are more
active than in normal driving and then allows
controlled skidding with the rear section up to
a certain level before it intervenes and stabilises the car.
If the driver interrupts a controlled skid by
releasing the accelerator pedal then the stability and traction control system intervenes
and stabilises the car.
With Sport mode, maximum traction is
obtained if the car has become stuck, or
when driving on a loose surface - e.g. sand or
deep snow.
07
Sport mode is selected in the menu system
MY CAR. For a description of the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 105).
The Sport mode is active until the driver
deselects it or until the engine is switched off
179
07 Driver support
Stability and traction control system
(DSTC) - symbols and messages
Control) helps the driver to avoid skidding and
improves the car's traction.
The stability and traction control system (p.
178) (DSTC - Dynamic Stability & Traction
Table
Symbol
Message
Specification
DSTC Temporarily OFF
The system is temporarily reduced due to excessive brake disc temperature. - The function is reactivated automatically when the brakes have cooled.
DSTC Service required
The system is disengaged.
•
•
Stop the car in a safe place, switch off the engine and start it again.
Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
"Message"
There is a text message in the combined instrument panel (p. 62) - Read it!
Constant glow for
2 seconds.
System check when the engine is started.
Flashing light.
The system is being activated.
and
Sport mode is activated.
07
Related information
•
180
Stability and traction control system
(DSTC) - operation (p. 179)
07 Driver support
Road Sign Information (RSI)*
Road sign information (RSI)* operation
WARNING
The road sign information function (RSI –
Road Sign Information) helps the driver to
remember which speed-related road signs the
car has passed.
RSI does not work in all situations but is
designed merely as a supplementary aid.
The driver always bears ultimate responsibility for ensuring that the vehicle is driven
safely and that applicable road traffic rules
and regulations are followed.
The road sign information function (RSI –
Road Sign Information) helps the driver to
remember which speed-related road signs the
car has passed.
The function is operated as follows
Related information
•
Road sign information (RSI)* - operation
(p. 181)
•
Road sign information (RSI)* - limitations
(p. 183)
Examples of readable speed related signs2.
The RSI function gives information on current
speed, e.g. that a motorway or road is starting/ending and when overtaking is prohibited.
If both a sign for motorway/road for motorised traffic and a sign showing the maximum
permitted speed are passed, RSI decides to
show the sign symbol for maximum permitted
speed.
2
3
Recorded speed information3.
When RSI has recorded a road sign with an
imposed speed, the combined instrument
panel displays the sign as a symbol.
Together with the symbol for
the current speed limit, a
sign showing that overtaking
is prohibited may also be
displayed where appropriate.
07
Road signs shown in the combined instrument panel are market-dependent - the illustrations in these instructions only show a few examples.
Road signs shown in the combined instrument panel are market-dependent - the illustrations in these instructions only show a few examples.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
181
07 Driver support
||
End of restriction or motorway
Additional signs
A corresponding road sign is shown in the
combined instrument panel for
approx. 10 seconds in situations where RSI
detects a sign that involves the end of a
speed limit - or other speed-related information, e.g. end of a motorway.
Some speeds are applicable only after e.g. a
specific distance or at a certain time of day.
The driver's attention is drawn to the situation
by means of a symbol for an additional sign
under the symbol showing speed.
Examples of such signs are:
Examples of additional signs3.
End of all restrictions.
Sometimes different speed limits are signposted for the same road - an additional sign
then indicates the circumstances under which
the different speeds apply. The road section
may be particularly susceptible to accidents
in rain and/or fog, for example.
An additional sign relating to rain is displayed
only if the windscreen wipers are in use.
End of motorway.
07
Following which, the sign information is hidden until the next speed-related sign is
detected.
The speed applicable on an
exit is indicated in certain
markets by means of an
additional sign containing an
arrow.
Display of additional information
A symbol for additional sign in the form of an
empty frame under the combined instrument
panel's speed symbol means that the RSI has
detected an additional sign with supplementary information for the current speed limit.
Setting in MY CAR
There are options for RSI in the MY CAR
menu system; see MY CAR (p. 105).
Speed signs linked to this
type of additional sign are displayed only if
the driver is using the direction indicator.
3
182
Road signs shown in the combined instrument panel are market-dependent - the illustrations in these instructions only show a few examples.
07 Driver support
Road sign information On/Off
exceeded. The function can be activated/
deactivated in the menu system MY CAR. For
a description of the menu system, see MY
CAR (p. 105).
Related information
The combined instrument panel's speed symbol display can be disabled. The function can
be activated/deactivated in the menu system
MY CAR. For a description of the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 105).
Speed warning
•
•
Road Sign Information (RSI)* (p. 181)
•
MY CAR (p. 105)
Road sign information (RSI)* - limitations
(p. 183)
Road sign information (RSI)* limitations
The road sign information function (RSI –
Road Sign Information) helps the driver to
remember which speed-related road signs the
car has passed. The function has the following limitations.
The RSI function's camera sensor has limitations just like the human eye - read more
about camera sensor limitations (p. 222)).
Signs which indirectly provide information on
a prevailing speed limit, e.g. name signs for
towns/districts, are not recorded by the RSI
function.
Here are several examples of what can disrupt the function:
•
•
•
•
•
Faded signs
Signs positioned on bends
Rotated or damaged signs
Concealed or poorly positioned signs
Signs completely or partly covered with
frost, snow and/or dirt.
Related information
The driver can opt to receive a warning when
the applicable speed limit is exceeded by
5 km/h or more. This warning is given by the
symbol showing the applicable maximum
speed temporarily flashing when this speed is
•
•
Road Sign Information (RSI)* (p. 181)
07
Road sign information (RSI)* - operation
(p. 181)
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
183
07 Driver support
Speed limiter*
Related information
A (Speed Limiter) can be regarded as a
reverse cruise control - the driver regulates
the speed using the accelerator pedal but is
prevented from accidentally exceeding a preselected/set speed by the speed limiter.
•
•
•
Speed limiter* - alarm for speed exceeded (p. 186)
Overview
•
Speed limiter* - deactivation (p. 186)
Speed limiter* - getting started (p. 184)
Speed limiter* - temporary deactivation
and standby mode (p. 185)
Speed limiter* - getting started
A (Speed Limiter) can be regarded as a
reverse cruise control - the driver regulates
the speed using the accelerator pedal but is
prevented from accidentally exceeding a preselected/set speed by the speed limiter.
Switch on and activate
When the speed limiter is active, its symbol
(6) is shown in combination with a mark (5) by
the set maximum speed in the combined
instrument panel.
Selection and storage of the highest possible
speed in the memory can be made both during a journey and while stationary.
While driving
Steering wheel keypad and combined instrument
panel.
Speed limiter - On/Off.
07
Standby mode ceases and the stored
speed is resumed.
Standby mode.
Activate and adjust the max. speed.
Selected speed.
Speed limiter active.
184
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
1. Press the steering wheel button
to
switch on the speed limiter.
> The symbol (6) for speed limiter illuminates in the combined instrument
panel.
2. When the car is moving at the desired
highest possible speed: Press one of the
steering wheel buttons
or
until the
combined instrument panel shows a
mark (5) by the desired maximum speed.
> The speed limiter is then active and the
selected max. speed is stored in the
memory.
07 Driver support
Speed limiter* - changing speed
When stationary
1. Press the steering wheel button
switch on the speed limiter.
to
2. Scroll with the
button until the combined instrument panel shows a mark (5)
by the desired maximum speed.
> The speed limiter is then active and the
selected max. speed is stored in the
memory.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
Speed limiter* (p. 184)
Speed limiter* - changing speed (p. 185)
A (Speed Limiter) can be regarded as a
reverse cruise control - the driver regulates
the speed using the accelerator pedal but is
prevented from accidentally exceeding a preselected/set speed by the speed limiter.
To change the stored speed:
•
To adjust +/- 1 km/h:
•
Speed limiter* - temporary deactivation
and standby mode (p. 185)
Speed limiter* - deactivation (p. 186)
Speed limiter* - alarm for speed exceeded (p. 186)
or
Adjust with short presses on
every press gives +/- 5 km/h. The last
presses made are stored in the memory.
Hold the button depressed and release
when the combined instrument panel
shows a mark (5) by the desired maximum speed.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
Speed limiter* (p. 184)
Speed limiter* - getting started (p. 184)
Speed limiter* - temporary deactivation
and standby mode (p. 185)
Speed limiter* - deactivation (p. 186)
Speed limiter* - alarm for speed exceeded (p. 186)
Speed limiter* - temporary
deactivation and standby mode
A (Speed Limiter) can be regarded as a
reverse cruise control - the driver regulates
the speed using the accelerator pedal but is
prevented from accidentally exceeding a preselected/set speed by the speed limiter.
Temporary deactivation - standby mode
To temporarily deactivate the speed limiter
and set it in standby mode:
–
Press
.
> The mark (5) in the combined instrument panel changes colour from
GREEN to WHITE and the driver can
temporarily exceed the set maximum
speed.
The speed limiter is reactivated with
. The mark (5) then
one press on
changes colour from WHITE to GREEN
and the car's maximum speed is limited once again.
Temporary deactivation with the
accelerator pedal
The speed limiter can also be set in standby
mode with the accelerator pedal, e.g. for rapidly accelerating the car out of a situation:
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
07
185
07 Driver support
||
– Depress the accelerator pedal fully.
> The combined instrument panel shows
the stored maximum speed with a coloured mark (5) and the driver can temporarily exceed the set maximum
speed - the mark (5) changes colour
during this time from GREEN to
WHITE.
The speed limiter is automatically reactivated after the release of the accelerator pedal and the car's speed is
slowed down to below the selected/
stored maximum speed - the display's
mark (5) changes colour from WHITE
to GREEN and the car's maximum
speed is again limited.
Speed limiter* - alarm for speed
exceeded
A (Speed Limiter) can be regarded as a
reverse cruise control - the driver regulates
the speed using the accelerator pedal but is
prevented from accidentally exceeding a
pre-selected/set speed by the speed limiter.
On a steep downhill gradient the speed limiter's engine braking effect may be inadequate
and the selected maximum speed is exceeded. The driver is alerted about this with an
acoustic signal.
07
The alarm is only activated after 5 seconds
if the speed has been exceeded by at least
3 km/h provided that none of the buttons
or
has been depressed during the
last half minute.
Speed limiter* - getting started (p. 184)
Speed limiter* - changing speed (p. 185)
Speed limiter* - deactivation (p. 186)
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
186
To deactivate the speed limiter:
–
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Speed limiter* (p. 184)
Speed limiter* - changing speed (p. 185)
Speed limiter* - getting started (p. 184)
Speed limiter* - temporary deactivation
and standby mode (p. 185)
Speed limiter* - deactivation (p. 186)
Press the steering wheel button
.
> The combined instrument panel's symbol for the speed limiter (6) and the
mark for the set speed (5) are extinguished. The selected and stored
speed are thus deleted from the memory and cannot be resumed with the
button.
NOTE
Speed limiter* (p. 184)
Speed limiter* - alarm for speed exceeded (p. 186)
A (Speed Limiter) can be regarded as a
reverse cruise control - the driver regulates
the speed using the accelerator pedal but is
prevented from accidentally exceeding a preselected/set speed by the speed limiter.
The signal is active until the driver has slowed
to below the selected maximum speed.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
Speed limiter* - deactivation
The driver can then use the accelerator
pedal to choose a speed without limitation.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Speed limiter* (p. 184)
Speed limiter* - getting started (p. 184)
Speed limiter* - temporary deactivation
and standby mode (p. 185)
Speed limiter* - alarm for speed exceeded (p. 186)
07 Driver support
Cruise control*
WARNING
The cruise control (CC – Cruise Control) helps
the driver maintain an even speed, resulting in
a more relaxed driving on motorways and
long, straight roads in regular traffic flows.
The driver must always be observant with
regard to the traffic conditions and intervene when the cruise control is not maintaining a suitable speed and/or suitable
distance.
Overview
The driver always bears ultimate responsibility for ensuring that the vehicle is driven
safely.
Related information
•
Cruise control* - managing speed (p.
188)
•
Cruise control* temporary deactivation
and standby mode (p. 188)
Standby mode ceases and the stored
speed is resumed.
•
Cruise control* - resume set speed (p.
189)
Standby mode
•
Cruise control* - deactivate (p. 189)
The steering wheel buttons and combined instrument panel in cars with speed limiter4.
Cruise control - On/Off.
The steering wheel buttons and combined instrument panel in cars without speed limiter4.
Activate and adjust the speed.
Selected speed (GREY = Standby mode).
Cruise control active - WHITE symbol
(GREY = Standby mode).
07
4
A Volvo dealer has updated information about what applies in each respective market.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
187
07 Driver support
Cruise control* - managing speed
The cruise control (CC – Cruise Control) helps
the driver to maintain an even speed. It is
possible to activate, set or change the speed.
Activating and setting the speed
To enable cruise control:
•
Press the steering wheel button
>
The cruise control symbol in the combined instrument panel changes from
WHITE to GREY and shows that the
cruise control is in standby mode.
•
A temporary increase in speed with the accelerator pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not
affect the cruise control setting - the car
returns to the set speed when the accelerator
pedal is released.
NOTE
If any of the Cruise Control buttons are
held depressed for several minutes then it
is blocked and deactivated. To be able to
reactivate Cruise Control, the car must be
stopped and the engine restarted.
To activate cruise control:
•
At the required speed - press the steering
wheel button
or
.
>
The current speed is stored in the memory and the combined instrument panel's
marking (5) is illuminated/turns WHITE at
the selected speed.
NOTE
Hold down the button and release it at
the required speed.
Related information
•
•
Cruise control* - resume set speed (p.
189)
•
Cruise control* - deactivate (p. 189)
Changing the speed
To change the stored speed:
•
Adjust with short presses on
or
every press gives +/- 5 km/h. The last
presses made are stored in the memory.
To adjust +/- 1 km/h:
188
Cruise control* temporary deactivation
and standby mode (p. 188)
•
Cruise Control cannot be enabled at
speeds below 30 km/h.
07
Cruise control* (p. 187)
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Cruise control* temporary
deactivation and standby mode
The cruise control (CC – Cruise Control) helps
the driver to maintain an even speed. The
function can be temporarily deactivated and
set in standby mode.
Temporary deactivation - standby mode
To temporarily disengage cruise control and
set it in standby mode:
•
Press the steering wheel button
>
The combined instrument panel's marking (5) and the symbol (6) change colour
from WHITE to GREY.
.
Automatic standby mode
Cruise control is temporarily disengaged and
set in standby mode if:
•
•
•
•
wheels lose traction
•
the driver maintains a speed higher than
the set speed for longer than 1 minute.
the foot brake is used
speed falls below approx. 30 km/h
the gear selector is moved to neutral
position (automatic gearbox)
The driver must then regulate the speed.
Related information
•
•
Cruise control* (p. 187)
Cruise control* - managing speed (p. 188)
07 Driver support
•
•
Cruise control* - resume set speed (p.
189)
Cruise control* - deactivate (p. 189)
Cruise control* - resume set speed
Cruise control* - deactivate
The cruise control (CC – Cruise Control) helps
the driver to maintain an even speed. After
temporary deactivation and standby mode (p.
188) it is possible to resume the set speed.
The cruise control (CC – Cruise Control) helps
the driver to maintain an even speed. How it
is deactivated is described here.
To reactivate the cruise control from standby
mode:
•
Press the steering wheel button
>
The combined instrument panel's marking (5) and symbol (6) change colour from
GREY to WHITE and the speed is then
set to the last speed stored.
.
NOTE
A marked speed increase may occur once
the speed has been resumed by selecting
.
The cruise control is deactivated with a steering wheel button (1) or by switching off the
engine - the set speed is deleted from the
memory and cannot be resumed with the
button.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Cruise control* (p. 187)
Cruise control* - managing speed (p. 188)
Cruise control* temporary deactivation
and standby mode (p. 188)
Cruise control* - resume set speed (p.
189)
Related information
•
•
•
•
Cruise control* (p. 187)
Cruise control* - managing speed (p. 188)
Cruise control* temporary deactivation
and standby mode (p. 188)
07
Cruise control* - deactivate (p. 189)
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
189
07 Driver support
Adaptive cruise control - ACC*
The adaptive cruise control (ACC – Adaptive
Cruise Control) helps the driver to maintain an
even speed and a safe distance from the vehicle ahead.
The adaptive cruise control provides a more
relaxing driving experience on long journeys
on motorways and long straight main roads in
smooth traffic flows.
The driver sets the desired speed (p. 193)
and time interval (p. 194) to the car in front.
When the radar detector detects a slower
vehicle in front of the car, the speed is automatically adapted to that. When the road is
clear again the car returns to the selected
speed.
If the adaptive cruise control is switched off
or set to standby mode (p. 195) and the car
comes too close to a vehicle in front, then the
driver is warned instead by the Distance
Warning (p. 204) function about the short
distance.
07
190
WARNING
The driver must always be observant with
regard to the traffic conditions and intervene when the adaptive cruise control is
not maintaining a suitable speed or suitable distance.
The adaptive cruise control cannot handle
all traffic, weather and road conditions.
Read all the sections about the adaptive
cruise control in the owner's manual in
order to learn about its limitations, of
which the driver should be aware before it
is used.
The driver always bears responsibility for
maintaining the correct distance and
speed, even when the adaptive cruise control is being used.
IMPORTANT
Maintenance of adaptive cruise control
components must only be performed at a
workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop
is recommended.
Automatic gearbox
Cars with automatic gearbox have enhanced
functionality with the adaptive cruise control's
Queue Assist (p. 196).
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Related information
•
Adaptive cruise control* - overview (p.
192)
•
Adaptive cruise control* - function (p.
191)
•
Adaptive cruise control* - fault tracing
and action (p. 201)
•
Adaptive cruise control* - symbols and
messages (p. 202)
07 Driver support
Adaptive cruise control* - function
The adaptive cruise control (ACC – Adaptive
Cruise Control) helps the driver to maintain an
even speed and a safe distance from the vehicle ahead. It consists of a cruise control system and a coordinated spacing system.
Function overview
WARNING
Adaptive cruise control is not a collision
avoidance system. The driver must intervene if the system does not detect a vehicle in front.
The adaptive cruise control does not brake
for humans or animals, and not for small
vehicles such as bicycles and motorcycles. Nor for oncoming, slow or stationary
vehicles and objects.
Do not use the adaptive cruise control, for
example, in city traffic, in dense traffic, at
junctions, on slippery surfaces, with a lot
of water or slush on the road, in heavy
rain/snow, in poor visibility, on winding
roads or on slip roads.
Function overview5.
Warning lamp - braking by driver required
Steering wheel keypad (p. 192)
Radar sensor (p. 199)
5
6
Distance to the vehicle ahead (p. 194) is
measured primarily by a radar sensor (p.
199). Cruise control regulates the speed with
acceleration and braking. It is normal for the
brakes to emit a low sound when they are
being used by the adaptive cruise control.
The adaptive cruise control aims to follow the
vehicle ahead in the same lane at a time interval set by the driver. If the radar sensor cannot see any vehicle in front then the car will
instead maintain the cruise control's set
speed. This also happens if the speed of the
vehicle in front exceeds the cruise control's
set speed.
The adaptive cruise control aims to control
the speed in a smooth way. In situations that
demand sudden braking the driver must
brake himself/herself. This applies with large
differences in speed, or if the vehicle in front
brakes heavily. Due to limitations in the radar
sensor (p. 199) braking may come unexpectedly or not at all.
The adaptive cruise control can be activated
to follow another vehicle at speeds from
30 km/h6 up to 200 km/h. If the speed falls
below 30 km/h or if the engine speed
becomes too low, the cruise control is set in
standby mode (p. 195) at which automatic
braking ceases - the driver must then take
over himself/herself to maintain a safe distance to the vehicle ahead.
Warning lamp - braking by driver
required
Adaptive cruise control has a braking
capacity that is equivalent to more than 40%
of the car's braking capacity.
If the car needs to be braked more heavily
than cruise control capacity and the driver
does not brake, then cruise control uses the
warning lamp and warning sound from the
Collision warning system (p. 214) in order to
alert the driver that immediate intervention is
required.
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may differ depending on car model.
Queue Assistant (p. 196) (in cars with automatic gearbox) can operate in the range of 0-200 km/h.
07
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
191
07 Driver support
||
NOTE
The warning lamp may be difficult to see in
strong sunlight or when wearing sunglasses.
WARNING
Cruise Control warns only of vehicles
which the radar sensor has detected.
Hence the warning may not be given, or it
may be given with a certain delay. Do not
wait for a warning without braking when so
required.
Adaptive cruise control* - overview
Operation of the adaptive cruise control and
steering wheel keypad varies depending on
whether or not the car is equipped with speed
limiter7.
Adaptive cruise control with Speed
limiter
Time distance
ACC is active at the GREEN symbol
(WHITE = standby mode).
Adaptive cruise control without Speed
limiter
Steep roads and/or heavy load
Bear in mind that the adaptive cruise control
is primarily intended for use when driving on
level road surfaces. It may have difficulty in
keeping the correct distance from the vehicle
ahead when driving on steep downhill slopes,
with a heavy load or with a trailer - in which
case, be extra attentive and ready to slow
down.
Related information
07
•
•
•
7
192
Adaptive cruise control - ACC* (p. 190)
Adaptive cruise control* - deactivate (p.
196)
Adaptive cruise control* - overtaking
another vehicle (p. 196)
Cruise control - On/Off.
Cruise control - On/Off or Standby mode.
Standby mode ceases and the stored
speed is resumed.
Time interval - Increase/decrease.
Standby mode
Activate and adjust the speed.
Time interval - Increase/decrease.
(Not used)
Activate and adjust the speed.
Green marking at stored speed (WHITE =
standby mode).
Green marking at stored speed (WHITE =
standby mode).
A Volvo dealer has updated information about what applies in each respective market.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Standby mode ceases and the stored
speed is resumed.
07 Driver support
Time distance
ACC is active at the GREEN symbol
(WHITE = standby mode).
Related information
•
•
•
Adaptive cruise control - ACC* (p. 190)
Adaptive cruise control* - function (p.
191)
Adaptive cruise control* - symbols and
messages (p. 202)
Adaptive cruise control* - managing
speed
At the same time a speed
range is marked:
The adaptive cruise control (ACC – Adaptive
Cruise Control) helps the driver to maintain an
even speed and a safe distance from the vehicle ahead.
To enable cruise control:
•
-a
Press the steering wheel button
similar WHITE symbol illuminates in the
combined instrument panel (8) which
shows that cruise control is in standby
mode (p. 195).
To activate cruise control:
•
the higher speed with the GREEN marking (6) is the pre-programmed speed
•
the lower speed is the speed of the car in
front.
Changing the speed
To change the stored speed:
•
•
At the required speed - press the steering
or
.
wheel button
or
Adjust with short presses on
every press gives +/- 5 km/h. The last
presses made are stored in the memory.
>
The current speed is stored in the memory, the combined instrument panel
shows a "magnifying glass" around the
selected speed for a second or so and its
marking changes from WHITE to GREEN.
If speed is increased using the accelerator pedal prior to pressing the
/
button, then it is the car's current speed
when the button is pressed that is stored
in the cruise control.
When this symbol changes colour
from WHITE to GREEN, the cruise
control is active and the car maintains the stored speed.
To adjust +/- 1 km/h:
•
Hold down the button and release it at
the required speed.
07
Only when the symbol shows
an image of another vehicle
is the distance to the vehicle
in front controlled by the
cruise control.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
193
07 Driver support
||
NOTE
If any of the Cruise Control buttons are
held depressed for several minutes then it
is blocked and deactivated. To be able to
reactivate Cruise Control, the car must be
stopped and the engine restarted.
In certain situations, cruise control cannot
be activated. In this case, the combined
instrument panel (p. 202) shows Cruise
control Unavailable.
Related information
•
•
•
Adaptive cruise control - ACC* (p. 190)
Adaptive cruise control* - overview (p.
192)
Adaptive cruise control* - function (p.
191)
Adaptive cruise control* - set time
interval
The adaptive cruise control (ACC – Adaptive
Cruise Control) helps the driver to maintain an
even speed and a safe distance from the vehicle ahead.
Different time intervals to the
vehicle in front can be
selected and shown in the
combined instrument panel
as 1-5 horizontal lines - the
more lines the longer the
time interval. One line corresponds to approximately 1 second to the
vehicle in front, 5 lines
approximately 3 seconds.
To set/change the time distance:
•
Turn the thumbwheel on the steering
wheel keypad (p. 192) (or use the
/
buttons for cars without Speed limiter).
At low speed, when the distances are short,
the adaptive cruise control increases the time
interval slightly.
07
The adaptive cruise control allows the time
interval to vary noticeably in certain situations
in order to allow the car to follow the vehicle
in front smoothly and comfortably.
Note that a short time interval only allows the
driver a short time to react and take action if
any unforeseen traffic problem should arise.
194
The same symbol is also shown when Distance Warning (p. 204) function is activated.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
NOTE
Only use the time intervals permitted by
local traffic regulations.
If Cruise Control does not appear to react
when activated, this may be because the
time distance to the car in front is preventing an increase in speed.
The higher the speed the longer the calculated distance in metres for a given time
interval.
Related information
•
•
Adaptive cruise control - ACC* (p. 190)
Adaptive cruise control* - overview (p.
192)
•
Adaptive cruise control* - function (p.
191)
•
Adaptive cruise control* - deactivate (p.
196)
07 Driver support
Adaptive cruise control* - temporary
deactivation, and standby mode
The adaptive cruise control (ACC – Adaptive
Cruise Control) helps the driver to maintain an
even speed and a safe distance from the vehicle ahead. The cruise control can be temporarily deactivated and set in standby mode.
Temporary deactivation - standby mode
with Speed limiter
To temporarily disengage the adaptive cruise
control and set it in standby mode:
•
Press the steering wheel button
This symbol and the stored speed's
marking then change colour from
GREEN to WHITE.
Temporary deactivation - standby mode
without Speed limiter
To temporarily disengage the adaptive cruise
control and set it in standby mode:
•
Press the steering wheel button
Standby mode due to driver intervention
Cruise control is temporarily disengaged and
set in standby mode if:
•
•
the foot brake is used
•
the driver maintains a speed higher than
the set speed for longer than 1 minute.
8
the gear selector is moved to N position
(automatic gearbox)
The driver must then regulate the speed.
Resume set speed
A temporary increase in speed with the accelerator pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not
affect the cruise control setting - the car
returns to the last stored speed when the
accelerator pedal is released.
Adaptive cruise control in standby mode is
reactivated with one press on the steering
- the speed is then set to the
wheel button
last stored speed.
NOTE
Automatic standby mode
The adaptive cruise control is dependent on
other systems, e.g. DSTC (Stability and traction control system) (p. 178). If any of these
systems stop working then cruise control is
automatically deactivated.
In the event of automatic deactivation a signal
will sound and the message Cruise control
Cancelled is shown in the combined instrument panel. The driver must then intervene
and adapt the speed and distance to the
vehicle ahead.
A marked speed increase may occur once
the speed has been resumed by selecting
.
Related information
•
•
•
Adaptive cruise control - ACC* (p. 190)
Adaptive cruise control* - overview (p.
192)
Adaptive cruise control* - function (p.
191)
An automatic deactivation can be due to:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
the driver opens the door
the driver takes off his seatbelt
engine speed is too low/high
speed has fallen below 30 km/h8
07
wheels lose traction
brake temperature is high
the radar sensor is covered e.g. by wet
snow or heavy rain (radar waves blocked).
Does not apply to a car with Queue Assistant - it manages right down to stationary.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
195
07 Driver support
Adaptive cruise control* - overtaking
another vehicle
The adaptive cruise control (ACC – Adaptive
Cruise Control) helps the driver to maintain an
even speed and a safe distance from the vehicle ahead.
Keypad with Speed limiter
The adaptive cruise control is switched off
in the
with the steering wheel button
steering wheel keypad (p. 192). The set speed
is cleared and cannot be resumed with the
button.
This function is active at speeds
above 70 km/h.
Keypad without Speed limiter
WARNING
Related information
•
•
•
9
196
The adaptive cruise control (ACC – Adaptive
Cruise Control) helps the driver to maintain an
even speed and a safe distance from the vehicle ahead.
When the car is following another vehicle and
the driver indicates an impending overtaking
manoeuvre with the direction indicator9, the
adaptive cruise control helps to briefly accelerate the car towards the vehicle in front.
Be aware that this function can be activated in more situations other than during
overtaking, e.g. when a direction indicator
is used to indicate a change of lane or exit
to another road - the car will then accelerate briefly.
07
Adaptive cruise control* - deactivate
Adaptive cruise control - ACC* (p. 190)
Adaptive cruise control* - overview (p.
192)
With a short press on the steering wheel butthe adaptive cruise control is set in
ton
standby mode (p. 195). With a further short
press it is deactivated. The set speed is
cleared and cannot be resumed with the
button.
Related information
•
•
•
Adaptive cruise control - ACC* (p. 190)
Adaptive cruise control* - function (p.
191)
Adaptive cruise control* - symbols and
messages (p. 202)
Adaptive cruise control* - function (p.
191)
On left flash only in left-hand-drive car, or right flash in right-hand-drive car.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Adaptive Cruise Control* - Queue
Assist
The adaptive cruise control (ACC – Adaptive
Cruise Control) helps the driver to maintain an
even speed and a safe distance from the vehicle ahead. Queue Assist also provides the
Adaptive Cruise Control with enhanced functionality at speeds below 30 km/h..
The adaptive cruise control is supplemented
by the Queue Assist function (also called
"Queue Assist").
Queue Assistant has the following functions:
•
•
•
•
Extended speed range - also below
30 km/h and when stationary
Change of target
Automatic braking ceases when stationary
Automatic activation parking brake.
Note that the lowest programmable speed for
the adaptive cruise control is 30 km/h - even
though it is capable of following another vehicle down to a standstill, a lower speed cannot be selected.
07 Driver support
Extended speed range
NOTE
NOTE
In order to activate the cruise control the
driver's door must be closed and the driver
must be wearing the seatbelt.
The adaptive cruise control can follow
another vehicle within the range 0-200 km/h.
•
The driver has to release the parking
brake before the cruise control can be
reactivated.
•
For shorter stops in connection with inching
in slow traffic or at traffic lights driving is
automatically resumed if the stops do not
exceed about 3 seconds - if it takes longer
before the car in front starts moving again
then the Adaptive cruise control is set in
standby mode with automatic braking. The
driver must then reactivate it in one of the following ways:
.
or
•
Depress the accelerator pedal.
>
The cruise control will then resume following the vehicle in front.
The driver must intervene him/herself
and brake.
Automatic standby mode with change
of target
Activation of the cruise control below
30 km/h requires a vehicle in front within a
reasonable distance.
Press the steering wheel button
When the cruise control is following
another vehicle at speeds in excess of
30 km/h and the target is changed from a
moving vehicle to a stationary vehicle, the
cruise control will ignore the stationary
vehicle and instead select the stored
speed.
Change of target
NOTE
•
WARNING
Queue Assist can hold the car stationary
for a maximum of 4 minutes - then the
parking brake is applied and Cruise Control is disengaged.
The adaptive cruise control is disengaged
and set in standby mode:
•
when the speed is below 5 km/h and
cruise control is not sure whether the target object is a stationary vehicle or some
other object, e.g. a speed bump.
If the target vehicle in front suddenly turns then
there may be stationary traffic in front.
•
When the adaptive cruise control is following
another vehicle at speeds below 30 km/h and
changes target from a moving to a stationary
vehicle, the cruise control will slow down for
the stationary vehicle.
when the speed is below 5 km/h and the
vehicle in front turns off so the cruise
control no longer has a vehicle to follow.
Termination of automatic braking at a
standstill
In certain situations, Queue Assist stops
automatic braking at a standstill. This means
that the brakes are released and the car may
start to roll - the driver must therefore intervene and brake the car himself/herself in
order to maintain its position.
07
}}
197
07 Driver support
||
Queue Assist releases the foot brake and sets
the adaptive cruise control in standby mode
in the following situations:
•
the driver puts his/her foot on the brake
pedal
•
•
the parking brake is applied
•
the driver sets the cruise control in
standby mode.
the gear selector is moved to P, N or R
position
Adaptive cruise control* - switch
cruise control functionality
The adaptive cruise control (ACC – Adaptive
Cruise Control) helps the driver maintain a
safe distance from the vehicle ahead.
Changing from ACC to CC
With one press of the button the adaptive
part (spacing system) in the cruise control is
deactivated, at which point the car just follows the set speed.
Automatic activation parking brake
•
In certain situations Queue Assist applies the
parking brake in order to keep the car remaining stationary.
Give a long press on the steering wheel
- the combined instrument
button
to
.
panel's symbol changes from
>
By these means the standard cruise control (p. 187) CC (Cruise
Control) is activated.
This takes place if:
07
•
the driver opens the door or takes off
his/her seatbelt
•
DSTC is changed from Normal to Sport
mode
•
Queue Assist has held the car stationary
for more than 4 minutes
•
•
the engine is switched off
the brakes have overheated.
Related information
•
•
•
198
Adaptive cruise control - ACC* (p. 190)
Adaptive cruise control* - overview (p.
192)
WARNING
The car no longer brakes automatically
after switching from ACC to CC - it merely
follows the set speed.
Changing back from CC to ACC
Switch off cruise control with 1-2 presses on
in accordance with the deactivation
instructions (p. 196). The next time the system is switched on it is the Adaptive cruise
control that is activated.
Adaptive cruise control* - function (p.
191)
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Related information
•
•
•
Adaptive cruise control - ACC* (p. 190)
Adaptive cruise control* - overview (p.
192)
Adaptive cruise control* - function (p.
191)
07 Driver support
Radar sensor
Radar sensor - limitations
The function of the radar sensor is to detect
cars or larger vehicles in the same direction,
in the same lane.
A radar sensor (p. 199) has certain limitations,
due to its limited field of vision for example.
The radar sensor is used by the following
functions:
•
•
Adaptive cruise control*
•
Distance Warning*
The capacity of the radar sensor to detect
vehicles in front is reduced significantly:
•
Collision Warning with Auto Brake and
Pedestrian Detection*
NOTE
Related information
•
•
•
•
Keep the area in front of the radar sensor
clean - see subheading "Maintenance" (p.
219).
Radar sensor - limitations (p. 199)
Adaptive cruise control - ACC* (p. 190)
Collision warning system* (p. 214)
Distance Warning* (p. 204)
if the radar sensor becomes blocked and
cannot detect other vehicles e.g. in heavy
rain or slush, or if other objects have collected in front of the radar sensor.
•
if the speed of vehicles in front is significantly different from your own speed.
Field of vision
The radar sensor has a limited field of vision.
In some situations another vehicle is not
detected, or the detection is made later than
expected.
ACC field of vision.
Sometimes the radar sensor is late at
detecting vehicles at close distances, e.g.
a vehicle that drives in between the car
and vehicles in front.
Small vehicles, such as motorcycles, or
vehicles not driving in the centre of the
lane can remain undetected.
07
In bends the radar sensor may detect the
wrong vehicle or lose a detected vehicle
from view.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
199
07 Driver support
||
WARNING
WARNING
The driver must always be observant with
regard to the traffic conditions and intervene when the adaptive cruise control is
not maintaining a suitable speed or suitable distance.
Adaptive cruise control is not a collision
avoidance system. The driver must intervene if the system does not detect a vehicle in front.
The adaptive cruise control does not brake
for humans or animals, and not for small
vehicles such as bicycles and motorcycles. Nor for oncoming, slow or stationary
vehicles and objects.
The adaptive cruise control cannot handle
all traffic, weather and road conditions.
Read all the sections about the adaptive
cruise control in the owner's manual in
order to learn about its limitations, of
which the driver should be aware before it
is used.
Do not use the adaptive cruise control, for
example, in city traffic, in dense traffic, at
junctions, on slippery surfaces, with a lot
of water or slush on the road, in heavy
rain/snow, in poor visibility, on winding
roads or on slip roads.
The driver always bears responsibility for
maintaining the correct distance and
speed, even when the adaptive cruise control is being used.
IMPORTANT
WARNING
In the event of visible damage to the car's
grille, or if you suspect that the radar sensor may be damaged:
Accessories or other objects such as auxiliary lamps must not be fitted in front of the
grille.
•
Contact a workshop - an authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended.
The function may completely or partially
disappear - or malfunction - if the grille,
the radar sensor or its bracket is damaged
or has loosened.
07
Related information
•
•
•
200
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Adaptive cruise control - ACC* (p. 190)
Collision warning system* (p. 214)
Distance Warning* (p. 204)
07 Driver support
Adaptive cruise control* - fault tracing
and action
The adaptive cruise control (p. 190) (ACC –
Adaptive Cruise Control) helps the driver to
maintain an even speed and a safe distance
from the vehicle ahead.
If the combined instrument panel shows the
message Radar blocked See manual this
means that the radar signals from the radar
sensor (p. 199) are blocked and that vehicles
in front of the car cannot be detected.
The following table presents examples of
possible causes for a message being shown
along with the appropriate action:
In turn this means that - apart from Adaptive
Cruise Control - Distance Warning (p. 204)
and Collision Warning (p. 214) with Auto
Brake are not operating either.
Cause
Action
The radar surface in the grille is dirty or covered with ice or snow.
Clean the radar surface in the grille from dirt, ice and snow.
Heavy rain or snow blocking the radar signals.
No action. Sometimes the radar does not work during heavy rain or snowfall.
Water or snow from the road surface swirls up and blocks the
radar signals.
No action. Sometimes the radar does not work on a very wet or snowy road
surface.
The radar surface has been cleaned but the message remains.
Wait. It could take several minutes for the radar to sense that it is no longer
blocked.
Related information
•
Adaptive cruise control* - overview (p.
192)
•
Adaptive cruise control* - function (p.
191)
•
Adaptive cruise control* - symbols and
messages (p. 202)
07
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
201
07 Driver support
Adaptive cruise control* - symbols
and messages
The adaptive cruise control (ACC – Adaptive
Cruise Control) helps the driver to maintain an
Symbol
even speed and a safe distance from the vehicle ahead. Sometimes the adaptive cruise
control may display a symbol and/or text
Message
Specification
The symbol is GREEN
The car maintains the stored speed.
The symbol is WHITE
Adaptive cruise control is set to standby mode.
message. Here are several examples - follow
the recommendation given if appropriate:
Standard cruise control is selected manually.
DSTC Normal to enable
Cruise
The adaptive cruise control cannot be activated until the Stability and Traction Control system (DSTC)
(p. 178) has been set in Normal mode.
Cruise control Cancelled
The adaptive cruise control has been deactivated - the driver has to regulate the speed himself.
Cruise control Unavailable
The adaptive cruise control cannot be activated.
This could be due to:
•
•
07
Radar blocked See
manual
brake temperature is high
the radar sensor is blocked by e.g. wet snow or rain.
The adaptive cruise control is temporarily disengaged.
•
The radar sensor is blocked and cannot detect other vehicles. For example, in the event of heavy
rain or if slush has collected in front of the radar sensor.
The driver can then choose to switch to (p. 198) normal Cruise control (CC) - a text message provides
information on appropriate alternatives.
Read about radar sensor limitations (p. 199).
202
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
07 Driver support
Symbol
Message
Specification
Cruise control Service
required
The adaptive cruise control is disengaged.
Press Brake To hold +
acoustic alarm
The car is stationary and the cruise control will release the foot brake to allow the parking brake to take
over and hold the car, but a fault in the parking brake means the car will shortly begin to roll.
(Only with Queue Assistant)
•
Below 30 km/h Only following
Shown with attempts to activate the cruise control at speeds below 30 km/h without a vehicle in front
within the activation distance (approx. 30 metres).
•
Contact a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
The driver must brake himself/herself. The message remains and the alarm sounds until the driver
depresses the brake pedal or uses the accelerator pedal.
(Only with Queue Assistant)
Related information
•
•
•
Adaptive cruise control - ACC* (p. 190)
Adaptive cruise control* - overview (p.
192)
Adaptive cruise control* - function (p.
191)
07
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
203
07 Driver support
Distance Warning*
Distance Warning (Distance Alert) is a function
that informs the driver about the time interval
to vehicles in front.
Distance Warning is active at speeds above
30 km/h and only reacts to vehicles driving in
front of the car, in the same direction. No distance information is provided for oncoming,
slow or stationary vehicles.
NOTE
Distance warning is deactivated during the
time the adaptive cruise control is active.
tion is handled by the car's menu system MY
CAR, see MY CAR (p. 105).
Set time interval
WARNING
Distance warning only reacts if the distance to the vehicle ahead is shorter than
the preset value - the speed of the driver's
vehicle is not affected.
Operation
Controls and symbol for time interval.
Time interval - Increase/decrease.
Time interval - On.
Orange-coloured warning lamp10.
07
An orange-coloured warning lamp in the
windscreen illuminates with a constant glow if
the distance to the vehicle in front is shorter
than the set time interval.
Press the button in the centre console to
switch the function on or off. The function is
switched on if one lamp is illuminated in the
button.
Some combinations of the selected equipment leave no vacant space for a button in
the centre console - in which case the func-
10
204
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Different time intervals to the
vehicle in front can be
selected and shown in the
combined instrument panel
as 1-5 horizontal lines - the
more lines the longer the
time interval. One line corresponds to approximately 1 second to the
vehicle in front, 5 lines
approximately 3 seconds.
07 Driver support
The same symbol is also shown when adaptive cruise control is activated.
NOTE
The higher the speed the longer the calculated distance in metres for a given time
interval.
Distance Warning* - limitations
Distance Warning (Distance Alert) is a function
that informs the driver about the distance to
vehicles in front. The function uses the same
radar sensor as the Adaptive cruise control (p.
190) and Collision warning with auto brake (p.
214), has some limitations.
The set time interval is also used by the
function adaptive cruise control (p. 191).
NOTE
Strong sunlight, reflections or strong variations in light intensity, as well as wearing
sunglasses, could mean that the warning
light in the windscreen cannot be seen.
Only use the time intervals permitted by
local traffic regulations.
Related information
•
Poor weather or winding roads could
affect the radar sensor's capacity to detect
vehicles in front.
Distance Warning* - limitations (p. 205)
The size of other vehicles could also affect
detection capacity, e.g. motorcycles. This
could mean that the warning lamp illuminates at a shorter distance than the setting
or that the warning is temporarily absent.
Extremely high speeds can also cause the
lamp to illuminate at a shorter distance
than that set due to limitations in sensor
range.
For further information on radar sensor limitations, see Radar sensor - limitations (p. 199)
and (p. 220).
07
Related information
•
•
Distance Warning* (p. 204)
Distance Warning* - symbols and messages (p. 206)
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
205
07 Driver support
Distance Warning* - symbols and
messages
to vehicles in front. The function has certain
limitations.
Distance Warning (Distance Alert) is a function
that informs the driver about the time interval
SymbolA
Message
Specification
Radar blocked See
manual
Distance Warning temporarily disengaged.
The radar sensor is blocked and cannot detect other vehicles, e.g. in the event of heavy rain or if slush has
collected in front of the radar sensor.
Read about radar sensor limitations (p. 199).
Collision warn.
Service required
A
Distance Warning and Collision Warning with Auto Brake fully or partially disengaged.
Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Symbols are schematic - may vary by market and car model.
Related information
•
•
Distance Warning* (p. 204)
Distance Warning* - limitations (p. 205)
07
206
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
07 Driver support
City Safety™
Maintenance and replacement of City
Safety™ components must only be performed by a workshop - an authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended.
The City Safety™ function is active at speeds
under 50 km/h and it helps the driver by automatically braking the car in the event of imminent risk of collision with vehicles in front,
should the driver not react in time by braking
and/or steering away.
City Safety™ does not engage in all driving situations or traffic, weather or road
conditions.
City Safety™ does not react to vehicles
driving in a different direction from the car,
to small vehicles and motorcycles or to
humans and animals.
City Safety™ can prevent collision at a
speed difference of less than 15 km/h - at
a higher speed difference, it is only possible to reduce collision speed. In order to
obtain full brake function, the driver must
depress the brake pedal.
City Safety™ is designed to be activated as
late as possible in order to avoid unnecessary
intervention.
The driver or passengers normally only notice
City Safety™ if a situation arises where the
car is extremely close to being in a collision.
If the car is also equipped with Collision
Warning with Auto Brake (p. 214)* these two
systems complement each other.
City Safety™ detects the traffic in front of the
car with a laser sensor fitted in the top edge
of the windscreen. If there is an imminent risk
of collision, City Safety™ will automatically
brake the car, which may be experienced as
sudden braking.
WARNING
City Safety™ is activated in situations where
the driver should have started braking earlier,
which is why it cannot help the driver in every
situation.
City Safety™ must not be used as an excuse
for the driver to change his/her driving style. If
the driver solely relies on City Safety™ to do
the braking, there will be a collision sooner or
later.
City Safety™ - function
IMPORTANT
City Safety™ is a function for helping the
driver to avoid a collision when driving in
queues, amongst other things, when changes
in the traffic ahead, combined with a lapse in
attention, could lead to an incident.
Never wait for City Safety™ to engage.
The driver always bears responsibility for
maintaining the proper distance and
speed.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
07
City Safety™ - limitations (p. 209)
City Safety™ - function (p. 207)
City Safety™ - operation (p. 208)
City Safety™ - laser sensor (p. 211)
City Safety™ - symbols and messages (p.
213)
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
207
07 Driver support
||
When the function is activated and brakes,
the combined instrument panel shows a text
message to the effect that the function is/has
been active.
NOTE
When City Safety™ brakes, the brake
lights come on.
Related information
Laser sensor transmitter and receiver window11.
If the speed difference is 4-15 km/h in relation
to the vehicle in front then City Safety™ can
completely prevent a collision.
City Safety™ activates a short, sharp braking
and stops the car in normal circumstances,
just behind the vehicle in front. For most drivers this is well outside normal driving style
and may be experienced as being uncomfortable.
07
City Safety™ - limitations (p. 209)
City Safety™ (p. 207)
City Safety™ - operation (p. 208)
City Safety™ - laser sensor (p. 211)
City Safety™ - symbols and messages (p.
213)
If the difference in speed between the vehicles is greater than 15 km/h then City
Safety™ may not prevent the collision on its
own. To obtain full brake force, the driver
must depress the brake pedal. This could
then make it possible to prevent a collision,
even at speed differences above 15 km/h.
11
208
•
•
•
•
•
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
City Safety™ - operation
City Safety™ is a function for helping the
driver to avoid a collision when driving in
queues, amongst other things, when changes
in the traffic ahead, combined with a lapse in
attention, could lead to an incident.
On and Off
NOTE
The City Safety™ function is always
switched on after the engine has been
started via key position I and II (p. 73).
In certain situations, it may advisable to disable City Safety™, e.g. where leafy branches
could sweep over the bonnet and/or windscreen.
After starting the engine City Safety™ can be
deactivated as follows: The function can be
activated/deactivated in the menu system MY
CAR. For a description of the menu system,
see MY CAR (p. 105).
However, the function will be enabled the
next time the engine is started, regardless of
whether the system was enabled or disabled
when the engine was switched off.
07 Driver support
WARNING
The laser sensor also transmits laser light
when City Safety™ is disabled manually.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
City Safety™ (p. 207)
City Safety™ - limitations (p. 209)
City Safety™ - function (p. 207)
City Safety™ - laser sensor (p. 211)
City Safety™ - symbols and messages (p.
213)
MY CAR (p. 105)
City Safety™ - limitations
The sensor in City Safety™ is designed to
detect cars and other large vehicles in front of
the car irrespective of whether it is day or
night. However, the function has a number of
limitations.
However, the sensor has limitations and has
poorer functionality - or none at all - in e.g.
heavy snowfall or rain, dense fog, dust
storms or white-out situations. Mist, dirt, ice
or snow on the windscreen may disrupt the
function.
Low-hanging objects, e.g. a flag/pennant for
projecting load, or accessories such as auxiliary lamps and bull bars that are higher than
the bonnet limit the function.
The laser beam from the sensor in City
Safety™ measures how the light is reflected.
The sensor cannot detect objects with low
reflection capacity. The rear sections of the
vehicle generally reflect the light sufficiently
thanks to the number plate and rear light
reflectors.
On slippery road surfaces the braking distance is extended, which may reduce the
capacity of City Safety™ to avoid a collision.
In such situations the ABS and DSTC systems will provide best possible braking force
with maintained stability.
When your own car is reversing, City Safety™
is temporarily deactivated.
City Safety™ is not activated at low speeds under 4 km/h, which is why the system does
not intervene in situations where a vehicle in
front is being approached very slowly, e.g.
when parking.
Driver commands are always prioritised,
which is why City Safety™ does not intervene
in situations where the driver is steering or
accelerating in a clear manner, even if a collision is unavoidable.
When City Safety™ has prevented a collision
with a stationary object the car remains stationary for a maximum of 1.5 seconds. If the
car is braked for a vehicle in front that is moving, then speed is reduced to the same speed
as that maintained by the vehicle in front.
On a car with manual gearbox the engine
stops when City Safety™ has stopped the
car, unless the driver manages to depress the
clutch pedal beforehand.
NOTE
•
Keep the windscreen surface in front
of the laser sensor free from ice, snow
and dirt (see the illustration for sensor
location (p. 207)).
•
Do not affix or mount anything on the
windscreen in front of the laser sensor
•
Remove ice and snow from the bonnet
- snow and ice must not exceed a
height of 5 cm.
07
209
07 Driver support
||
Fault tracing and action
IMPORTANT
If the message Windscreen Sensors
blocked is shown in the combined instrument panel it indicates that the laser sensor is
blocked and cannot detect vehicles in front of
the car. This means in turn that City Safety™
is not operational.
If there are cracks, scratches or stone
chips in the windscreen in front of either of
the laser sensor's "windows" and they
cover a surface of approx. 0.5 x 3.0 mm
(or larger), then a workshop must be contacted for replacement of the windscreen
(see the illustration for sensor location (p.
207)) - an authorised Volvo workshop is
recommended.
The Windscreen Sensors blocked message
is not shown for all situations in which the
laser sensor is blocked. The driver must
therefore be diligent about keeping the windscreen and area in front of the laser sensor
clean.
Failure to take action may result in
reduced performance for City Safety™.
To avoid the risk of failed, deficient or
reduced operation for City Safety™, the
following also applies:
The following table presents possible causes
for the message being shown, along with
suggestions for appropriate action.
07
Cause
Action
The windscreen surface in front of the
laser sensor is dirty or
covered with ice or
snow.
Clean the windscreen surface in
front of the sensor
from dirt, ice and
snow.
The laser sensor field
of vision is blocked.
Remove the
blocking object.
•
Volvo recommends that you do not
repair cracks, scratches or stone chips
in the area in front of the laser sensor instead, the whole windscreen should
be replaced.
•
Before replacing a windscreen, contact an authorised Volvo workshop to
verify that the correct windscreen is
ordered and fitted.
•
The same type or Volvo-approved
windscreen wipers must be fitted during replacement.
Related information
•
•
•
210
City Safety™ (p. 207)
City Safety™ - function (p. 207)
City Safety™ - operation (p. 208)
•
•
City Safety™ - laser sensor (p. 211)
City Safety™ - symbols and messages (p.
213)
07 Driver support
City Safety™ - laser sensor
The City Safety™ function includes a sensor
which transmits laser light (see illustration (p.
207) for sensor location). Contact a qualified
workshop in the event of a fault or if the laser
sensor needs servicing - an authorised Volvo
workshop is recommended. It is absolutely
essential to follow the prescribed instructions
when handling the laser sensor.
The following two labels relate to the laser
sensor:
•
IEC 60825-1:1993 + A2:2001. Complies
with FDA (U.S. Food Administration)
standards for laser product design with
the exception of deviations in accordance
with "Laser Notice No. 50" from
26 July 2001.
WARNING
If any of these instructions are not followed
then there is a risk of eye injury!
•
Never look into the laser sensor (which
emits spreading invisible laser radiation) at a distance of 100 mm or closer
with magnifying optics such as a magnifying glass, microscope, lens or similar optical instruments.
•
Testing, repair, removal, adjustment
and/or replacement of the laser sensor's spare parts must only be carried
out by a qualified workshop - we recommend an authorised Volvo workshop.
•
To avoid exposure to harmful radiation, do not carry out any readjustments or maintenance other than
those specified here.
•
The repairer must follow specially
drawn up workshop information for the
laser sensor.
•
Do not remove the laser sensor (this
includes removing the lenses). A
removed laser sensor does not fulfil
laser class 3B as per standard IEC
60825-1. Laser class 3B is not eyesafe and therefore entails a risk of
injury.
Radiation data for the laser sensor
The following table specifies the laser sensor's physical data.
Maximum pulse energy
2.64 µJ
Maximum average output
45 mW
Pulse duration
Divergence (horizontal x vertical)
33 ns
28° × 12°
The upper label in the figure describes the
laser beam's classification:
•
Laser radiation - Do not look into the
laser beam with optical instruments Class 1M laser product.
The lower label in the figure describes the
laser beam's physical data:
•
07
The laser sensor's connector must be
unplugged before removal from the
windscreen.
}}
211
07 Driver support
||
•
The laser sensor must be fitted onto
the windscreen before the sensor's
connector is plugged in.
•
The laser sensor transmits a laser light
when the remote control key is in key
position II (p. 73) even if the engine is
switched off.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
07
212
City Safety™ (p. 207)
City Safety™ - limitations (p. 209)
City Safety™ - function (p. 207)
City Safety™ - operation (p. 208)
City Safety™ - symbols and messages (p.
213)
07 Driver support
City Safety™ - symbols and
messages
symbols may illuminate in the combined
instrument panel and a text message may be
shown. A text message can be acknowledged
In conjunction with automatic braking by the
City Safety™ (p. 207) system, one or more
Symbol
by briefly pressing the OK button on the
direction indicator stalk.
Message
Meaning/Action
Auto braking by City Safety
City Safety™ is braking or has automatically braked.
Windscreen Sensors blocked
The laser sensor is temporarily non-operational because something is blocking it.
•
Remove the object blocking the sensor and/or clean the windscreen in front of the sensor.
Read about laser sensor limitations (p. 209).
City Safety Service required
City Safety™ is not operational.
•
Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
City Safety™ (p. 207)
City Safety™ - limitations (p. 209)
City Safety™ - function (p. 207)
City Safety™ - operation (p. 208)
City Safety™ - laser sensor (p. 211)
07
213
07 Driver support
Collision warning system*
"Collision Warning with Auto Brake and
Cyclist and Pedestrian Detection" is an aid to
assist the driver when there is a risk of colliding with a pedestrian, bicycle or vehicle in
front that are stationary or moving in the same
direction.
Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedestrian Detection is activated in situations where
the driver should have started braking earlier,
which is why it cannot help the driver in every
situation.
Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedestrian Detection is designed to be activated as
late as possible in order to avoid unnecessary
intervention.
two variants, depending on how the car is
equipped:
•
Collision warning system* - general limitations (p. 220)
Level 1
•
Collision warning system* - camera sensor limitations (p. 222)
•
Collision warning system* - symbols and
messages (p. 224)
warned12
The driver is merely
of occurring
obstacles by means of visual and acoustic
signals - no automatic braking intervenes, the
driver must himself brake.
Level 2
The driver is warned of occurring obstacles
by means of visual and acoustic signals - the
car is braked automatically if the driver himself does not act within a reasonable time.
IMPORTANT
Maintenance of components included in
Collision Warning with Auto Brake &
Pedestrian Detection must only be carried
out in a workshop - an authorised Volvo
workshop is recommended.
Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedestrian Detection may prevent a collision or
reduce the collision speed.
07
Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedestrian Detection must not be used as an
excuse for the driver to change his/her driving
style. If the driver solely relies on Collision
Warning with Auto Brake to do the braking,
there might be a risk of a collision sooner or
later.
Two system levels
The Collision Warning with Auto Brake &
Pedestrian Detection function is available in
12
214
Related information
•
Collision warning system* - function (p.
215)
•
Collision warning system* - detection of
pedestrians (p. 218)
•
Collision warning system* - cyclist detection (p. 216)
•
Collision warning system* - operation (p.
219)
No warning for cyclists with "Level 1".
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
07 Driver support
Collision warning system* - function
3. Auto Brake14
3 - Auto Brake14
"Collision Warning with Auto Brake and
Cyclist and Pedestrian Detection" is an aid to
assist the driver when there is a risk of colliding with a pedestrian, bicycle or vehicle in
front that are stationary or moving in the same
direction.
The collision warning system and City
Safety™ (p. 207) complement each other.
The automatic brake function is activated
last.
1 - Collision warning
If in this situation the driver has not yet
started to take evasive action and the risk of
collision is imminent then the automatic braking function is deployed - this takes place
irrespective of whether or not the driver
brakes. Braking then takes place with full
brake force in order to reduce collision speed,
or with limited brake force if it is sufficient to
avoid a collision. For cyclists, the warning and
full brake intervention may come very late or
simultaneously.
The driver is first warned of a potentially
imminent collision.
The collision warning system detects pedestrians, stationary vehicles as well as vehicles
driving in the same direction in front of the
car.
If there is a risk of collision with a pedestrian
or a vehicle then the driver's attention is
attracted with a flashing red warning signal (1)
and an acoustic signal.
2 - Brake support14
Function overview13.
Audio-visual warning signal in the event
of a collision risk.
Radar sensor14
Camera sensor
Collision Warning with Auto Brake executes
three steps in the following order:
1. Collision warning
2. Brake support14
13
14
If the risk of collision has increased further
after the collision warning then the brake support is activated.
This means that the brake system is prepared
for rapid braking by applying the brakes
lightly, which may feel like a slight jolt.
If the brake pedal is depressed sufficiently
quickly then full brake function is implemented.
07
Brake support also reinforces the driver's
braking if the system considers that the braking is not sufficient to avoid a collision.
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
With system Level 2 only.
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
215
07 Driver support
||
WARNING
The collision warning system does not
engage in all driving situations or traffic,
weather or road conditions. The collision
warning system does not react to vehicles
or cyclists driving in another direction to
the car or to animals.
Warning only activated in the event of a
high risk for collision. This section "Function" and the section "Limitations" inform
about limitations that the driver must be
aware of before using the Collision Warning system with Auto Brake.
Warnings and brake interventions for
pedestrians and cyclists are deactivated at
a vehicle speed exceeding 80 km/h.
Related information
•
•
Collision warning system* (p. 214)
Collision warning system* - detection of
pedestrians (p. 218)
•
Collision warning system* - cyclist detection (p. 216)
•
Collision warning system* - operation (p.
219)
•
Collision warning system* - general limitations (p. 220)
•
Collision warning system* - camera sensor limitations (p. 222)
•
Collision warning system* - symbols and
messages (p. 224)
Collision warning system* - cyclist
detection
"Collision Warning with Auto Brake and
Cyclist and Pedestrian Detection" is an aid to
assist the driver when there is a risk of colliding with a pedestrian, bicycle or vehicle in
front that are stationary or moving in the same
direction.
Warnings and brake interventions for
pedestrians and cyclists do not work in
darkness and tunnels - not even when
streetlights are lit.
The auto-brake function can prevent a collision or reduce collision speed. To ensure
full brake performance, the driver should
always depress the brake pedal - even
when the car auto-brakes.
07
216
Never wait for a collision warning. The
driver is always responsible that the correct distance and speed are maintained even when the collision warning system
with auto-brake is used.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Optimum examples of what the system interprets
as a cyclist - with clear body and bicycle contours, directly from behind and in the car's centre line.
Optimal performance of the system requires
that the system function that detects a cyclist
receives as unambiguous information as possible about the body and bicycle contours this implies the opportunity to identify the
bicycle, head, arms, shoulders, legs, upper
and lower body combined with a normal
human pattern of movement.
07 Driver support
If large parts of the cyclist's body or bicycle
are not visible to the function's camera then
the system cannot detect a cyclist.
•
The function's capacity to detect cyclists
at dusk and dawn is limited - just like the
human eye.
Related information
•
•
Collision warning system* - detection of
pedestrians (p. 218)
The function's capacity to detect cyclists
is deactivated when driving in darkness
and tunnels - even when streetlights are
lit.
•
•
Collision warning system* (p. 214)
•
Collision warning system* - operation (p.
219)
•
Collision warning system* - general limitations (p. 220)
•
Collision warning system* - camera sensor limitations (p. 222)
•
Collision warning system* - symbols and
messages (p. 224)
•
For optimum bicycle detection, the City
Safety™ function must be activated, City
Safety™ (p. 207).
WARNING
Collision Warning with Auto Brake &
Cyclist Detection is a means of assistance.
The function can only "see" cyclists from behind,
who are travelling in the same direction.
•
•
For the function to be able to detect a
cyclist, he/she must be an adult and riding a "senior bicycle".
The bicycle must be equipped with a
highly visible and approved15 rearwardfacing red reflector, fitted at least 70 cm
above the roadway.
•
The function can only detect cyclists
directly from behind and who are travelling in the same direction - not at an
angle from behind, not from the side.
•
Cyclists travelling on the left or right-hand
edge of the car's imagined/extended side
lines may be detected late or not at all.
15
The function cannot detect:
•
all cyclists in all situations and does
not see partially obscured cyclists, for
example.
•
cyclists in clothing that obscures the
contours of the body or who are
approaching from the side.
•
bicycles that have no rearward-facing
red reflector.
Collision warning system* - function (p.
215)
• bicycles loaded with large objects.
The driver is always responsible that the
vehicle is driven properly and with a safety
distance adapted to the speed.
07
The reflector must fulfil the recommendations and conditions of the traffic authority in the market in question.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
217
07 Driver support
Collision warning system* - detection
of pedestrians
"Collision Warning with Auto Brake and
Cyclist and Pedestrian Detection" is an aid to
assist the driver when there is a risk of colliding with a pedestrian, bicycle or vehicle in
front that are stationary or moving in the same
direction.
If large parts of the body are not visible to the
camera then the system cannot detect a
pedestrian.
•
07
218
Collision warning system* (p. 214)
Collision warning system* - function (p.
215)
•
•
Collision warning system* - operation (p.
219)
The system cannot detect a pedestrian
carrying larger items.
•
•
Collision warning system* - cyclist detection (p. 216)
The camera sensor's ability to see pedestrians at dusk and dawn is limited - just
like the human eye.
•
Collision warning system* - general limitations (p. 220)
•
The camera sensor's capacity to detect
pedestrians is deactivated when driving in
darkness and tunnels - even when streetlights are lit.
•
Collision warning system* - camera sensor limitations (p. 222)
•
Collision warning system* - symbols and
messages (p. 224)
Collision Warning with Auto Brake &
Pedestrian Detection is an assistance tool.
Optimal performance of the system requires
that the system function that detects pedestrians receives as unambiguous information
as possible about the contours of the body this implies the opportunity to identify the
head, arms, shoulders, legs, upper and lower
body combined with a normal human pattern
of movement.
•
•
In order for a pedestrian to be detected
he/she must appear full-length and have
a height of at least 80 cm.
WARNING
Optimal examples of what the system regards as
pedestrians with clear body contours.
Related information
This function cannot detect all pedestrians
in all situations and it cannot see e.g. partially obscured pedestrians, people in clothing that hides the contours of the body or
pedestrians shorter than 80 cm.
•
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
The driver is always responsible that
the vehicle is driven properly and with
a safety distance adapted to the
speed.
07 Driver support
Collision warning system* - operation
"Collision Warning with Auto Brake and
Cyclist and Pedestrian Detection" is an aid to
assist the driver when there is a risk of colliding with a pedestrian, bicycle or vehicle in
front that are stationary or moving in the same
direction.
The warning lamp (see (1) in the illustration (p.
215)) is tested each time the engine is started
by briefly lighting the separate light points of
the warning lamp if the visual and acoustic
warning of the collision warning system is
activated.
Acoustic signal
Settings for the collision warning system are
made from MY CAR via the centre console
screen and menu system, see MY CAR (p.
105).
The warning sound can be activated/deactivated separately in the menu system MY
CAR. For a description of the menu system,
see MY CAR (p. 105).
Warning signals On and Off
Set warning distance
You can select whether the collision warning
system's acoustic and visual warning signals
should be switched on or off.
When starting the engine, the setting that was
selected when the engine was switched off is
obtained automatically.
NOTE
The Brake Support and Auto Brake functions are always enabled - they cannot be
deactivated.
Light and acoustic signals
Both the light and acoustic signals can be
deactivated after starting the engine. The
function can be activated/deactivated in the
menu system MY CAR. For a description of
the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 105).
The warning distance regulates the distance
at which the visual and acoustic warnings are
deployed. The warning distance is set in the
menu system MY CAR. For a description of
the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 105).
The warning distance determines the system's sensitivity. Warning distance Long provides an earlier warning. First test with Long
and if this setting produces too many warnings, which could be perceived as irritating in
certain situations, then change to warning
distance Normal.
Only use warning distance Short in exceptional cases, e.g. for dynamic driving.
NOTE
When the adaptive cruise control is in use
the warning lamp and warning sound will
be used by the cruise control even if the
collision warning system is switched off.
The collision warning system warns the
driver in the event of a risk of a collision,
but the function cannot shorten driver
reaction time.
In order for the collision warning system to
be effective, always drive with Distance
Warning (p. 204) set at time interval 4–5.
NOTE
Even if the warning distance has been set
to Long warnings could be perceived as
being late in certain situations, e.g. when
there are large differences in speed or if
vehicles in front brake heavily.
WARNING
No automatic system can guarantee
100 % correct function in all situations.
Therefore, never test Collision Warning
with Auto Brake by driving at people or
vehicles - this may cause severe damage
and injury and risk lives.
07
Checking settings
The settings required can be controlled on
the centre console display screen. Search
with the menu system (p. 105) MY CAR.
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
219
07 Driver support
||
Maintenance
•
Collision warning system* - cyclist detection (p. 216)
•
Collision warning system* - general
limitations
Collision warning system* - general limitations (p. 220)
•
Collision warning system* - camera sensor limitations (p. 222)
•
Collision warning system* - symbols and
messages (p. 224)
"Collision Warning with Auto Brake and
Cyclist and Pedestrian Detection" is an aid to
assist the driver when there is a risk of colliding with a pedestrian, bicycle or vehicle in
front that are stationary or moving in the same
direction.
The function has certain limitations - for
example, it is not active until approx. 4 km/h..
Camera and radar sensor16.
For the sensors to work correctly, they must
be kept clear of dirt, ice and snow, and be
cleaned regularly with water and car shampoo.
NOTE
Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors
will reduce their function and may prevent
measurement.
07
Related information
•
•
•
16
220
Collision warning system* (p. 214)
Collision warning system* - function (p.
215)
Collision warning system* - detection of
pedestrians (p. 218)
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
The collision warning system's visual warning
signal (see (1) in the illustration (p. 215)) may
be difficult to notice in the event of strong
sunlight, reflections, when sunglasses are
being worn or if the driver is not looking
straight ahead. The warning sound should
therefore always be activated.
On slippery road surfaces the braking distance is extended, which may reduce the
capacity to avoid a collision. In such situations the ABS and DSTC systems will provide
best possible braking force with maintained
stability.
07 Driver support
NOTE
WARNING
The visual warning signal can be temporarily disengaged in the event of high passenger compartment temperature caused by
strong sunlight for example. If this occurs
then the warning sound is activated even if
it is deactivated in the menu system.
Warnings and brake interventions could be
implemented late or not at all if the traffic
situation or external influences mean that
the radar or camera sensor cannot detect
a pedestrian, a vehicle or a cyclist in front
correctly.
•
The sensor system has a limited range for
pedestrians and cyclists17 - the system
can provide effective warnings and brake
interventions for them at vehicle speeds up
to 50 km/h. For stationary or slow-moving
vehicles, warnings and brake interventions
are effective at vehicle speeds up to
70 km/h.
Warnings may not appear if the distance to the vehicle in front is small or
if steering wheel and pedal movements are large, e.g. a very active driving style.
Warnings for stationary or slow-moving
vehicles could be disengaged due to darkness or poor visibility.
Warnings and brake interventions for
pedestrians and cyclists are deactivated at
vehicle speeds exceeding 80 km/h.
The collision warning system uses the same
radar sensors as the Adaptive cruise control
(p. 190). Read more about radar sensor limitations (p. 199).
If warnings are perceived as being too frequent or disturbing then the warning distance
can be reduced (p. 219). This would lead to
the system warning at a later stage, which
reduces the total number of warnings.
17
Collision Warning with Auto Brake is temporarily deactivated with reverse gear engaged.
Collision Warning with Auto Brake is not activated at low speeds - under 4 km/h, which is
why the system does not intervene in situations where the car is approaching a vehicle
in front very slowly, e.g. when parking.
In situations where the driver demonstrates
active, aware driving behaviour, a collision
warning may be postponed slightly in order to
keep unnecessary warnings to a minimum.
When Auto Brake has prevented a collision
with a stationary object the car remains stationary for a maximum of 1.5 seconds. If the
car is braked for a vehicle in front that is moving, then speed is reduced to the same speed
as that maintained by the vehicle in front.
On a car with manual gearbox the engine
stops when Auto Brake has stopped the car,
unless the driver manages to depress the
clutch pedal beforehand.
Related information
•
•
Collision warning system* (p. 214)
Collision warning system* - function (p.
215)
•
Collision warning system* - detection of
pedestrians (p. 218)
•
Collision warning system* - cyclist detection (p. 216)
For cyclists, the warning and full brake intervention may come very late or simultaneously.
07
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
221
07 Driver support
•
Collision warning system* - operation (p.
219)
•
Collision warning system* - camera
sensor limitations
Collision warning system* - camera sensor limitations (p. 222)
•
Collision warning system* - symbols and
messages (p. 224)
"Collision Warning with Auto Brake and
Cyclist and Pedestrian Detection" is an aid to
assist the driver when there is a risk of colliding with a pedestrian, bicycle or vehicle in
front that are stationary or moving in the same
direction.
The function uses the car's camera sensor,
which has certain limitations.
The car’s camera sensor is also used - as
well as by Collision Warning with Auto Brake
- by the functions:
•
Automatic main/dipped beam dimming (p. 85)
•
•
•
Road sign information (p. 181)
Driver Alert Control - DAC (p. 226)
Lane Keeping Aid (p. 230)
NOTE
Keep the windscreen surface in front of the
camera sensor free from ice, snow, mist
and dirt.
07
Do not stick or attach anything to the
windscreen in front of the camera sensor
as this may reduce effectiveness or cause
one or more of the systems dependent on
the camera to stop working.
The camera sensors have limitations similar
to the human eye, i.e. they "see" worse in
222
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
darkness, heavy snowfall or rain and in thick
fog for example. Under such conditions the
functions of camera-dependent systems
could be significantly reduced or temporarily
disengaged.
Strong oncoming light, reflections in the carriageway, snow or ice on the road surface,
dirty road surfaces or unclear lane markings
could also significantly reduce camera sensor
function when it is used to scan the carriageway and detect pedestrians and other vehicles.
The field of vision of the camera sensor is limited, which is why pedestrians, cyclists and
vehicles cannot be detected in some situations, or they are detected later than anticipated.
During very high temperatures the camera is
temporarily switched off for about 15 minutes
after the engine is started in order to protect
camera functionality.
Fault tracing and action
If the display shows the message
Windscreen Sensors blocked then this
means that the camera sensor is blocked and
cannot detect pedestrians, cyclists, vehicles
or road markings in front of the car.
At the same time, this means that - besides
Collision Warning with Auto Brake - the Automatic main/dipped beam dimming, Road sign
information, Driver Alert Control and Lane
07 Driver support
Departure Warning functions will not have full
functionality either.
Cause
Action
The following table presents possible causes
for a message being shown along with the
appropriate action.
The windscreen
surface in front of
the camera has
been cleaned but
the message
remains.
Wait. It may take
several minutes for
the camera to
measure the visibility.
Dirt has appeared
between the inside
of the windscreen
and the camera.
Visit a workshop to
have the windscreen inside the
camera cover
cleaned - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Cause
Action
The windscreen
surface in front of
the camera is dirty
or covered with ice
or snow.
Clean the windscreen surface in
front of the camera
from dirt, ice and
snow.
Thick fog, heavy
rain or snow means
that the camera
does not work sufficiently well.
No action. At times
the camera does
not work during
heavy rain or snowfall.
Related information
•
•
Collision warning system* (p. 214)
Collision warning system* - function (p.
215)
•
Collision warning system* - cyclist detection (p. 216)
•
Collision warning system* - detection of
pedestrians (p. 218)
•
Collision warning system* - operation (p.
219)
•
Collision warning system* - general limitations (p. 220)
•
Collision warning system* - symbols and
messages (p. 224)
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
07
223
07 Driver support
Collision warning system* - symbols
and messages
"Collision Warning with Auto Brake and
Cyclist and Pedestrian Detection" is an aid to
SymbolA
assist the driver when there is a risk of colliding with a pedestrian, bicycle or vehicle in
front that are stationary or moving in the same
direction.
Message
Specification
Collis'n warning
OFF
Collision warning system switched off.
Shown when the engine is started.
The message clears after about 5 seconds or after one press of the OK button.
Collision warn.
Unavailable
The collision warning system cannot be activated.
Shown when the driver attempts to activate the function.
The message clears after about 5 seconds or after one press of the OK button.
Auto braking was
activated
Auto Brake has been active.
Windscreen Sensors blocked
The camera sensor is temporarily disengaged.
The message clears after one press of the OK button.
Shown in the event of snow, ice or dirt on the windscreen for example.
•
Clean the windscreen surface in front of the camera sensor.
Read about camera sensor limitations (p. 222).
07
224
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
07 Driver support
SymbolA
Message
Specification
Radar blocked See
manual
Collision Warning with Auto Brake is temporarily disengaged.
The radar sensor is blocked and cannot detect other vehicles. For example, in the event of heavy rain or if
slush has collected in front of the radar sensor.
Read about radar sensor limitations (p. 199).
Collision warn.
Service required
A
Collision Warning with Auto Brake is fully or partially disengaged.
•
Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Symbols are schematic - may vary by market and car model.
Related information
•
•
Collision warning system* (p. 214)
Collision warning system* - function (p.
215)
•
Collision warning system* - detection of
pedestrians (p. 218)
•
Collision warning system* - cyclist detection (p. 216)
•
Collision warning system* - operation (p.
219)
•
Collision warning system* - general limitations (p. 220)
•
Collision warning system* - camera sensor limitations (p. 222)
07
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
225
07 Driver support
Driver Alert System*
Related information
The Driver Alert System is intended to assist
drivers whose driving ability is deteriorating or
who are inadvertently leaving the lane they are
driving on.
•
•
•
The Driver Alert System consists of different
functions which can either be switched on at
the same time or individually:
Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - operation (p.
227)
•
Lane Departure Warning (LDW)* (p. 230)
•
•
Driver Alert Control - DAC (p. 227).
Driver Alert Control (DAC)* (p. 226)
Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - symbols and
messages (p. 228)
Driver Alert Control (DAC)*
The DAC function is intended to attract the
driver's attention when he/she starts to drive
less consistently, e.g. if he/she becomes distracted or starts to fall asleep.
The objective for DAC is to detect slowly
deteriorating driving ability and it is primarily
intended for major roads. The function is not
intended for city traffic.
Lane Departure Warning - LDW (p. 230).
A switched-on function is set in standby
mode and is not activated automatically until
speed exceeds 65 km/h.
The function is deactivated again when speed
decreases to below 60 km/h.
Both functions use a camera which is
dependent on the lane having side markings
painted on each side.
WARNING
07
226
Driver Alert System does not work in all
situations but is designed merely as a supplementary aid.
The driver always bears ultimate responsibility for ensuring that the vehicle is driven
safely.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
A camera detects the side markings painted
on the carriageway and compares the section
of the road with the driver's steering wheel
movements. The driver is alerted if the vehicle
does not follow the carriageway evenly.
In some cases driving ability is not affected
despite driver fatigue. In which case there
may not be any warning issued for the driver.
For this reason it is always important to stop
and take a break in the event of any signs of
07 Driver support
driver fatigue, irrespective of whether or not
DAC issues a warning.
NOTE
The function must not be used to extend a
period of driving. Always plan breaks at
regular intervals, and make sure you are
well rested.
Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - operation
Settings are made from the centre console
display screen and its menu system. For information on how the menu system is used, see
MY CAR (p. 105).
If the vehicle is being driven erratically, the driver is notified by an
acoustic signal plus the text message Driver Alert Time for a break
- the linked symbol is illuminated in the combined instrument panel at the same time. The
warning is repeated after a time if driving ability does not improve.
The warning symbol can go off:
Limitation
•
In some cases the system may issue a warning despite driving ability not deteriorating, for
example:
•
•
WARNING
An alarm should be taken very seriously,
as a sleepy driver is often not aware of
his/her own condition.
in strong side winds
on rutted road surfaces.
In the event of an alarm or a feeling of
tiredness; stop the car in a safe manner as
soon as possible and rest.
NOTE
The camera sensor has certain limitations
(p. 222).
Related information
•
•
Driver Alert System* (p. 226)
•
Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - symbols and
messages (p. 228)
Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - operation (p.
227)
Press the left stalk switch OK button.
Car with LDW can show this on the screen.
The Driver Alert function can be set in
standby mode. The function can be activated/deactivated in the menu system MY
CAR. For a description of the menu system,
see MY CAR (p. 105).
Driver Alert is activated when speed exceeds
65 km/h and remains active as long as the
speed is over 60 km/h.
Studies have shown that it is equally as
dangerous to drive while tired as it is under
the influence of alcohol.
Related information
•
•
•
Driver Alert System* (p. 226)
Driver Alert Control (DAC)* (p. 226)
07
Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - symbols and
messages (p. 228)
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
227
07 Driver support
Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - symbols
and messages
or in the centre console's display screen in
different situations.
DAC (p. 226) can show symbols and text
messages on the combined instrument panel
Combined instrument panel
SymbolA
Message
Specification
Driver Alert Time for a
break
The vehicle has been driven inconsistently - the driver is alerted by an acoustic warning signal + text.
Windscreen Sensors
blocked
The camera sensor is temporarily disengaged.
Shown in the event of snow, ice or dirt on the windscreen for example.
•
Clean the windscreen surface in front of the camera sensor.
Read about camera sensor limitations (p. 222).
Driver Alert Sys Service
required
A
The system is disengaged.
•
Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Symbols are schematic - may vary by market and car model.
Display
07
228
SymbolA
Message
Specification
Driver Alert OFF
The function is disengaged.
Driver Alert Available
The function is activated.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
07 Driver support
SymbolA
A
Message
Specification
Driver Alert Standby <65 km/h
The function is set in standby mode due to speed being lower than 65 km/h.
Driver Alert Unavailable
The carriageway does not have clear side markings or the camera sensor is temporarily disengaged. Read about camera sensor limitations (p. 222).
Symbols are schematic - may vary by market and car model.
Related information
•
•
•
Driver Alert System* (p. 226)
Driver Alert Control (DAC)* (p. 226)
Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - operation (p.
227)
07
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
229
07 Driver support
Lane Departure Warning (LDW)*
NOTE
Lane Departure Warning is one of the functions in the Driver Alert System - sometimes
also referred to as LDW (Lane Departure
Warning).
The function is intended for use on motorways and similar major roads in order to
reduce the risk of the vehicle accidentally
leaving its own lane in certain situations.
Principle for LDW
The driver is only warned once each time
the wheels cross a line. So there is no
acoustic alarm when there is a line
between the car's wheels.
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) function
Certain settings can be made for the Lane
Departure Warning function.
Off & On
Related information
•
•
Driver Alert System* (p. 226)
•
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - function
(p. 230)
•
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - operation (p. 231)
•
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - symbols
and messages (p. 233)
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - limitations (p. 232)
LDW is engaged or disengaged using a button on the centre console. An indicator lamp
in the button illuminates when the function is
switched on.
(The figure is schematic - not model specific.)
07
LDW consists of a camera that detects the
side lines painted on the road/lane.
If the vehicle crosses the left or right-hand
side line of the carriageway without due
cause then the driver is alerted by an acoustic
signal.
This function is complemented in the combined instrument panel with intuitive graphics
in different situations.
Personal preferences
Settings are made from the centre console's
screen via the menu system in MY CAR. For
a description of the menu system, see MY
CAR (p. 105).
Select from the options:
230
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
07 Driver support
• On at start-up - The function enters
standby mode every time the engine is
started. Otherwise the same value as
when the engine was switched off is
obtained.
• Increased sensitivity - The sensitivity
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) operation
Related information
LDW is complemented in the combined
instrument panel with intuitive graphics in different situations. Here are some examples:
increases, an alarm is triggered earlier
and fewer limitations apply.
Related information
•
•
Lane Departure Warning (LDW)* (p. 230)
•
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - operation (p. 231)
•
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - symbols
and messages (p. 233)
•
•
Lane Departure Warning (LDW)* (p. 230)
•
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - function
(p. 230)
•
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - symbols
and messages (p. 233)
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - limitations (p. 232)
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - limitations (p. 232)
The LDW function's side lines (marked in red in
the figure).
•
The LDW symbol has WHITE side lines the function is active and detects/"sees"
one side line, or both.
•
The LDW symbol has GREY side lines the function is active but detects neither
left nor right side line.
or
•
The LDW symbol has GREY side lines the function is in standby mode because
the speed is below 65 km/h.
•
The LDW symbol has no side lines - the
function is deactivated.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
07
231
07 Driver support
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) limitations
The Lane Keeping Aid camera sensor is
restricted in a similar way to the human eye.
For more information, read about camera
sensor limitations (p. 222).
NOTE
There are some situations where LDW
does not give any warning, such as:
•
•
Direction indicators are switched on
The driver has his/her foot on the
brake pedal18
•
In the event of rapid depression of the
accelerator pedal18
•
In the event of rapid steering wheel
movements18
•
If turning is so sharp that the car rolls.
Related information
07
•
•
Lane Departure Warning (LDW)* (p. 230)
•
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - operation (p. 231)
•
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - symbols
and messages (p. 233)
18
232
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - function
(p. 230)
When "Increased sensitivity" is selected a warning is still given, see Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - function (p. 230).
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
07 Driver support
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) symbols and messages
In situations where there is no LDW function a
symbol may be shown in the combined
SymbolA
instrument panel in combination with an
explanatory message - follow the recommendation given if appropriate.
Message
Specification
Lane departure warning ON/
Lane departure warning OFF
The function is switched on/off.
Message examples:
Shown at switch-on/off.
The text disappears after 5 seconds.
Lane Depart. Warning Unavailable at this speed
The function is set in standby mode due to speed being lower than 65 km/h.
Lane Depart. Warning Unavailable
The lane does not have clear side markings or the camera sensor is temporarily disengaged.
Read about camera sensor limitations (p. 222).
Lane Depart. Warning Available
The function scans the lane's side markings.
Windscreen Sensors blocked
The camera sensor is temporarily disengaged.
Shown in the event of snow, ice or dirt on the windscreen for example.
•
Clean the windscreen surface in front of the camera sensor.
Read about camera sensor limitations (p. 222).
Driver Alert Sys Service
required
A
The system is disengaged.
•
07
Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Symbols are schematic - may vary by market and car model.
}}
233
07 Driver support
||
Related information
•
•
Lane Departure Warning (LDW)* (p. 230)
•
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - function
(p. 230)
•
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - operation (p. 231)
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - limitations (p. 232)
07
234
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
07 Driver support
Park Assist*
Parking assistance is used as an aid to parking. An acoustic signal as well as symbols on
the centre console's display screen indicate
the distance to the detected obstacle.
Parking assistance sound level can be
adjusted during the ongoing acoustic signal
using the centre console's VOL knob. The
sound level can also be adjusted in the audio
settings menu, which is accessed by pressing
SOUND or in the car's menu system (p. 105)
MY CAR19.
Park assist syst* - function
Related information
•
Park assist syst* - cleaning the sensors
(p. 238)
•
•
•
•
•
Park assist syst* - function (p. 235)
Park assist syst* - forward (p. 237)
Park assist syst* - fault indication (p. 238)
The parking assistance system is automatically activated when the engine is started the switch's On/Off lamp is illuminated. If
parking assistance is switched off with the
button, the lamp goes out.
Park assist syst* - backward (p. 236)
Park assist camera (p. 239)
Parking assistance is available in two variants:
•
•
19
Rear only
Both front and rear.
WARNING
On/Off for parking assistance and CTA*.
•
Parking assistance does not relinquish
the driver's own responsibility during
parking.
•
The sensors have blind spots where
obstacles cannot be detected.
If the car is equipped with CTA (p. 244) the
indicator lamps flash for BLIS (p. 242) once,
then parking assistance is activated using the
button.
•
Be aware of e.g. people or animals
near the car.
07
Depending on the audio and media system.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
235
07 Driver support
||
IMPORTANT
Objects e.g. chains, thin glossy poles or
low barriers may be in the "signal shadow"
and are then temporarily not detected by
the sensors - the pulsating tone may then
unexpectedly stop instead of changing
over to the expected constant tone.
Park assist syst* - backward
Parking assistance is used as an aid to parking. An acoustic signal as well as symbols on
the centre console's display screen indicate
the distance to the detected obstacle.
The sensors cannot detect high objects,
such as projecting loading docks.
•
Display screen view - showing an obstacle left
front and right rear.
The centre console's display screen shows
an overview of the relationship between the
car and detected obstacle.
Marked sectors show which of the four sensor(s) detected an obstacle. The closer to the
car symbol a selected sector box is, the
shorter the distance between the car and a
detected obstacle.
07
The frequency of the signal increases the
shorter the distance to an obstacle, in front of
or behind the car. Other sound from the audio
system is muted automatically.
When the distance is within 30 cm the tone is
constant and the active sensor's field nearest
the car is filled in. If the detected obstacle is
within the distance for the constant tone both
behind and in front of the car, then the tone
sounds alternately from the loudspeakers.
236
In such situations, pay extra attention
and manoeuvre/reposition the car particularly slowly or stop the current
parking manoeuvre - there may be a
high risk of damage to vehicles or
other objects since the sensors are
temporarily unable to function optimally.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Park Assist* (p. 235)
Park assist syst* - cleaning the sensors
(p. 238)
Park assist syst* - forward (p. 237)
Park assist syst* - fault indication (p. 238)
Park assist syst* - backward (p. 236)
Park assist camera (p. 239)
The distance covered to the rear of the car is
about 1.5 metres. The acoustic signal for
obstacles behind comes from one of the rear
loudspeakers.
Rear parking assistance is activated when
reverse gear is engaged.
When reversing with e.g. a trailer on the towbar, rear parking assistance is switched off
automatically - otherwise the sensors would
react to the trailer.
07 Driver support
NOTE
When reversing with e.g. a trailer or bike
carrier on the towbar - without Volvo genuine trailer wiring - parking assistance may
need to be switched off manually in order
that the sensors do not react to them.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
Park Assist* (p. 235)
Park assist syst* - cleaning the sensors
(p. 238)
Park assist syst* - forward
NOTE
Parking assistance is used as an aid to parking. An acoustic signal as well as symbols on
the centre console's display screen indicate
the distance to the detected obstacle.
Front parking assistance is deactivated
when the parking brake is applied or P
mode is selected in a car with an automatic gearbox.
The parking assistance system is automatically activated when the engine is started the switch's On/Off lamp is illuminated. If
parking assistance is switched off with the
button, the lamp goes out.
IMPORTANT
When auxiliary lamps are fitted: Remember
that these must not obscure the sensors the auxiliary lamps may then be perceived
as an obstacle.
Park assist syst* - function (p. 235)
Related information
Park assist syst* - forward (p. 237)
•
•
Park assist syst* - fault indication (p. 238)
Park assist camera (p. 239)
•
•
•
•
Park Assist* (p. 235)
Park assist syst* - cleaning the sensors
(p. 238)
Park assist syst* - function (p. 235)
Park assist syst* - fault indication (p. 238)
Park assist syst* - backward (p. 236)
Park assist camera (p. 239)
The distance covered in front of the car is
about 0.8 metres. The acoustic signal for
obstacles in front comes from one of the front
loudspeakers.
07
Front park assist is active up to
approx. 10 km/h. The lamp in the button is
illuminated in order to indicate that the system is activated. When the speed is below
10 km/h the system is reactivated.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
237
07 Driver support
Park assist syst* - fault indication
Parking assistance is used as an aid to parking. An acoustic signal as well as symbols on
the centre console's display screen indicate
the distance to the detected obstacle.
If the combined instrument panel's
information symbol illuminates with
constant glow and the text message
Park assist syst Service required is shown
then parking assistance is disengaged.
Park assist syst* - cleaning the
sensors
Parking assistance is used as an aid to parking. An acoustic signal as well as symbols on
the centre console's display screen indicate
the distance to the detected obstacle.
The sensors must be cleaned regularly to
ensure that they work properly. Clean them
with water and car shampoo.
IMPORTANT
Sensor location, rear.
In certain conditions the parking assistance system may produce incorrect warning signals that are caused by external
sound sources that emit the same ultrasonic frequencies that the system works
with.
NOTE
Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors
may cause incorrect warning signals.
Related information
Examples of such sources include horns,
wet tyres on asphalt, pneumatic brakes
and exhaust noises from motorcycles etc.
Related information
07
•
•
•
•
•
•
238
Sensor location, front.
Park Assist* (p. 235)
Park assist syst* - cleaning the sensors
(p. 238)
Park assist syst* - function (p. 235)
Park assist syst* - forward (p. 237)
Park assist syst* - backward (p. 236)
Park assist camera (p. 239)
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Park Assist* (p. 235)
Park assist syst* - function (p. 235)
Park assist syst* - forward (p. 237)
Park assist syst* - fault indication (p. 238)
Park assist syst* - backward (p. 236)
Park assist camera (p. 239)
07 Driver support
Park assist camera
Function and operation
where the car's rear wheels will roll with the
current steering wheel angle, this facilitates
tight parking, reversing into tight spaces and
for hitching a trailer. The car’s approximate
external dimensions are illustrated by means
of two dashed lines. These park assist lines
can be switched off in the settings menu.
The parking camera is an assist system and is
activated when reverse gear is engaged (can
be changed in the settings menu (p. 241)).
The camera image is shown on the centre
console's screen.
If the car is also equipped with parking assistance sensors* then their information is displayed graphically as coloured fields in order
to illustrate the distance to detected obstacles, see the heading "Cars with reversing
sensors" later in the text.
NOTE
When a towbar is configured with the car's
electrical system, the protrusion of the
towbar is included when the function
measures the parking space.
CAM button location.
WARNING
•
The camera shows what is behind the car
and if something appears from the sides.
The parking camera serves as an aid.
It does not relieve the driver of responsibility when reversing.
The camera shows a wide area behind the
car and part of the bumper and any towbar.
•
The camera has blind spots, where
obstacles cannot be detected.
•
Be aware of people and animals in the
vicinity of the car.
The camera is active approx. 5 seconds after
reverse gear has been disengaged or until the
car's speed exceeds 10 km/h forward or
35 km/h backward.
Objects on the screen may appear to tilt
slightly - this is normal.
NOTE
Objects on the display screen may be
closer to the car than they appear to be on
the screen.
If another view is active the parking camera
system takes over automatically and the
camera image is displayed on the screen.
07
Camera location next to the opening handle.
When reverse gear is engaged two unbroken
lines are shown graphically which illustrate
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
239
07 Driver support
||
Light conditions
The camera image is adjusted automatically
according to prevailing light conditions.
Because of this, the image may vary slightly
in brightness and quality. Poor light conditions can result in a slightly reduced image
quality.
NOTE
Keep the camera lens clear of dirt, snow
and ice to ensure optimum function. This
is particularly important in poor light.
Park assist lines
ment, which shows the driver the path the car
will then take - also when the car is turning.
NOTE
•
When reversing with a trailer which is
not connected electrically to the car,
the lines on the display show the route
the car will take - not the trailer.
•
The screen shows no lines when a
trailer is connected electrically to the
car's electrical system.
•
The parking camera is deactivated
automatically when towing a trailer if a
Volvo genuine trailer cable is used.
IMPORTANT
Bear in mind that the screen only shows
the area behind the car - pay attention to
the sides and front of the car when
manoeuvring during reversing.
07
Examples of how the park assist lines can be displayed for the driver.
The lines on the screen are projected as if
they were at ground level behind the car and
are directly related to steering wheel move20
240
Boundary lines
The figure is schematic and does not show the model in question in an accurate way.
The system's different lines20.
Boundary line, free reversing zone
"Wheel tracks"
The dashed line (1) frames in a zone up to
about 1.5 m back from the bumper. It is also
the limit of the car's most protruding parts,
such as door mirrors and corners - also when
the car is turning.
The wide "wheel tracks" (2) between the side
lines indicate where the wheels will roll and
can extend about 3.2 m back from the
bumper if no obstacle is in the way.
07 Driver support
Cars with reversing sensors*
•
Park Assist* (p. 235)
Park assist camera - settings
The parking camera is an assist system and is
activated when reverse gear is engaged.
Settings
To change the settings for the parking camera:
1. Press OK/MENU when a camera view is
shown.
2. Turn to reach the desired option with OK/
MENU.
3. Press OK/MENU and back out with EXIT.
Four coloured areas (one per sensor) show distance.
If the car is also equipped with parking assistance sensors (parking assistance sensors (p.
235)) the distance indication will be more precise and the coloured areas show which of
the 4 sensors is/are registering an obstacle.
1. Press CAM.
2. Press OK/MENU.
3. Turn to reach the desired option with OK/
MENU.
4. Press OK/MENU and back out with EXIT.
Miscellaneous
Colour / paint
Distance (metres)
Light yellow
0.7–1.5
The default setting is that the camera is activated when reverse gear is engaged.
Yellow
0,5–0,7
•
One press on CAM activates the camera
even if reverse gear is not engaged.
Orange
0,3–0,5
•
Red
0–0.3
Change between normal and zoomed
image by turning TUNE or by pressing
CAM.
Related information
•
•
or
Park assist camera - settings (p. 241)
Park assist camera - limitations (p. 242)
07
Towbar
The camera can be used with advantage for
coupling a trailer. A park assist line for the
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
241
07 Driver support
||
towbar's intended "trajectory" toward the
trailer can be shown on the screen - just as
for the "wheel tracks".
•
BLIS* (Blind Spot Information System)
The parking camera is an assist system and is
activated when reverse gear is engaged.
BLIS (Blind Spot Information System) is a
function designed for providing support for
the driver when driving in dense traffic on
roads with several lanes in the same direction.
If precise manoeuvring is required then
the towbar can be zoomed in by pressing
CAM - pressing the button again returns
to normal view.
The towbar's park assist line is activated in
the menu system after pressing OK/MENU
where you can select to display either the
"wheel tracks" or the towbar's trajectory both options cannot be shown simultaneously.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Park assist camera - limitations
Park assist camera (p. 239)
Park assist camera - limitations (p. 242)
Park Assist* (p. 235)
MY CAR (p. 105)
NOTE
A bike carrier or other accessory mounted
on the rear of the car could obscure the
camera's view.
To bear in mind
Pay attention to the possibility that, even if it
only looks like a relatively small part of the
image is obscured, it could be a relatively
large sector that is hidden from view. Obstacles could thereby go undetected until they
are very close to the car.
•
Keep the camera lens free from dirt, ice
and snow.
•
Clean the camera lens regularly with lukewarm water and car shampoo - take care
not to scratch the lens.
Related information
07
242
•
•
•
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Park assist camera (p. 239)
Park assist camera - settings (p. 241)
Park Assist* (p. 235)
BLIS is a driver's aid intended to provide a
warning about:
•
•
vehicles in the car's blind spot
rapidly approaching vehicles in the left
and right-hand lanes closest to the car.
The BLIS function CTA (p. 244) (Cross Traffic
Alert) is a driver's aid intended to provide a
warning about:
•
crossing traffic when the car is reversed.
WARNING
BLIS is a supplementary aid and does not
work in all situations.
BLIS is no substitute for a safe driving
style and the use of rearview and door mirrors.
BLIS can never replace the driver's
responsibility and attention - it is always
the driver's responsibility to change lanes
in a safe manner.
07 Driver support
Overview
BLIS* (Blind Spot Information System)
- operation
Maintenance
BLIS (Blind Spot Information System) is a
function designed for providing support for
the driver when driving in dense traffic on
roads with several lanes in the same direction.
Activate/deactivate BLIS
BLIS is activated when the engine is started.
This is confirmed by the indicator lamps in
the door panels flashing once.
BLIS lamp location21.
Indicator lamp
BLIS symbol
NOTE
The lamp illuminates on the side of the car
where the system has detected the vehicle. If the car is overtaken on both sides at
the same time then both lamps illuminate.
21
The BLIS function can be deactivated/activated the car's menu system (p. 105) MY
CAR.
Sensor location.
The sensors for the BLIS functions are
located inside the rear wing/bumper on each
side of the car.
•
To ensure optimal functionality the areas
in front of the sensors must be kept
clean.
Related information
•
BLIS* (Blind Spot Information System) operation (p. 243)
When BLIS is deactivated/activated the lamp
in the button extinguishes/illuminates and the
combined instrument panel confirms the
change with a text message. The door panel
indicator lamps flash once upon activation.
To extinguish the message:
•
Press the left stalk switch OK button.
or
•
Wait approx. 5 seconds - the message
extinguishes.
07
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
243
07 Driver support
||
When BLIS operates
WARNING
BLIS does not work in sharp bends.
BLIS does not work when the car is being
reversed.
Limitations
Principle for BLIS: 1. Zone in blind spot. 2. Zone
for rapidly approaching vehicle.
•
Dirt, ice and snow covering sensors can
reduce functionality and make it impossible to provide warnings. BLIS cannot
detect hazards if it is covered.
•
Do not affix any objects, tape or labels in
the area of the sensors.
•
BLIS is deactivated when a trailer is connected to the car's electrical system.
The BLIS function is active at speeds above
approx. 10 km/h.
07
244
the driver's vehicle is overtaken by other
vehicles
•
the driver's vehicle is rapidly caught up
by another vehicle.
When BLIS detects a vehicle in zone 1 or a
quickly approaching vehicle in zone 2, the
door panel BLIS lamp illuminates with a constant glow. If the driver activates the direction
indicator on the same side as the warning in
this situation then the BLIS lamp will change
from a constant glow to flashing with a more
intense light.
Activate/deactivate CTA
CTA is activated when the engine is started.
This is confirmed by the indicator lamps for
BLIS in the door panels flashing once.
IMPORTANT
The system is designed to react when:
•
CTA (Cross Traffic Alert)*
CTA (Cross Traffic Alert) is a driver aid
intended to warn about crossing traffic when
the car is reversing. CTA is a supplement to
BLIS (p. 242).
Repair of the BLIS and CTA functions'
components or repainting the bumpers
must only be performed by a workshop an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
•
BLIS* (Blind Spot Information System) (p.
242)
•
BLIS - symbols and messages (p. 246)
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
On/Off for parking assistance and CTA sensors.
The CTA function can be deactivated with the
Parking assistance (p. 235) On/Off button.
The BLIS lamp flashes once on activation
07 Driver support
WARNING
CTA is a supplementary aid and does not
work in all situations.
CTA is no substitute for a safe driving style
and the use of rearview and door mirrors.
CTA can never replace the driver's responsibility and attention - it is always the driver's responsibility to reverse in a safe manner.
When CTA operates
CTA is only active during reversing and is
activated automatically when the gearbox's
reverse position is selected.
•
If CTA detects something approaching
from the side, an acoustic warning signal
sounds. The signal comes from either the
left or the right-hand speaker, depending
on the direction from which the object is
approaching.
•
CTA also warns by illuminating the BLIS
lamps.
•
An additional warning is provided in the
form of an illuminated icon in the display
screen's PAS graphics (p. 235).
Limitations
The car is parked deep inside a parking slot.
Blind CTA sector.
Sector where CTA can detect/"see".
CTA does not perform optimally in all situations, but has a certain limitation - for example, the CTA sensors cannot "see" through
other parked vehicles or obstructing objects.
Principle for CTA.
CTA supplements the BLIS function by being
able to see crossing traffic from the side during reversing, such as when reversing out of a
parking space.
CTA is primarily designed to detect vehicles.
In favourable conditions, it may also be able
to detect smaller objects, such as cyclists
and pedestrians.
Here are some examples of when CTA's "field
of vision" may be limited from the beginning
and approaching vehicles cannot therefore be
detected until they are very close:
07
In an angled parking slot CTA can be completely
"blind" on one side.
However, when the driver is slowly reversing
the car, the angle is changed in relation to the
}}
245
07 Driver support
||
vehicle/object that is blocking, at which the
blind sector rapidly decreases.
BLIS - symbols and messages
In situations where the BLIS (p. 242) and CTA
(p. 244) functions fail or are interrupted, the
combined instrument panel may show a symbol, supplemented by an explanatory message. Follow any recommendation given.
Examples of further limitations:
•
Dirt, ice and snow covering sensors can
reduce functionality and make it impossible to provide warnings. CTA cannot
detect hazards if it is covered.
•
Do not affix any objects, tape or labels in
the area of the sensors.
•
Message
Specification
CTA is deactivated when a trailer is connected to the car’s electrical system.
CTA OFF
CTA is manually switched
off - BLIS is active.
BLIS and
CTA OFF
Trailer
attached
BLIS and CTA are temporarily non-operational
because a trailer is connected to the car's electrical system.
BLIS and
CTA Service required
BLIS and CTA are nonoperational.
IMPORTANT
Repair of the BLIS and CTA functions'
components or repainting the bumpers
must only be performed by a workshop an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Maintenance
Message examples:
Sensor location.
The sensors for the CTA functions are located
inside the rear wing/bumper on each side of
the car.
•
To ensure optimal functionality the areas
in front of the sensors must be kept
clean.
Related information
•
BLIS* (Blind Spot Information System) (p.
242)
•
BLIS - symbols and messages (p. 246)
07
•
Visit a workshop if the
message remains - an
authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
A text message can be acknowledged by
briefly pressing the OK button on the direction indicator stalk.
Related information
•
246
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
BLIS* (Blind Spot Information System) (p.
242)
07 Driver support
Adjustable steering force*
Steering force increases with the speed of the
car to give the driver enhanced sensitivity.
The steering is firmer and more immediate on
motorways. Steering is light and requires no
extra effort when parking and at low speed.
The driver can choose between three different levels of steering force for road responsiveness or steering sensitivity. The setting is
made in the menu system MY CAR. For a
description of the menu system, see MY CAR
(p. 105).
This setting is not accessible when the car is
moving.
NOTE
In certain situations the power steering
may become too hot and then needs to be
temporarily cooled - during this time the
power steering operates with reduced
power and turning the steering wheel may
then be perceived to be slightly heavier.
In parallel with the temporarily reduced
steering assistance the combined instrument panel shows a message.
07
Related information
•
MY CAR (p. 105)
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
247
STARTING AND DRIVING
08 Starting and driving
Alcolock*
Alcolock* - functions and operation
Alcolock1
The function of the
is to prevent the
car from being driven by individuals under the
influence of alcohol. Before the engine can be
started the driver must take a breath test that
verifies that he/she is not under the influence
of alcohol. Alcolock calibration takes place in
accordance with each market's limit value in
force for driving legally.
Functions
WARNING
Indicator
lamp (4)
Battery status
Green flashing
Charging in progress
Green
Fully charged
Yellow
Semi-charged
Red
Discharged - fit the charger
in the holder or connect the
power supply cable from
the glovebox.
The Alcolock is an aid and does not
exempt the driver from responsibility. It is
always the responsibility of the driver to be
sober and to drive the car safely.
NOTE
Nozzle for breath test.
Related information
•
Alcolock* - functions and operation (p.
249)
•
•
•
Alcolock* - to bear in mind (p. 251)
•
Alcolock* - symbols and text messages
(p. 253)
Alcolock* - storage (p. 250)
Alcolock* - before starting the engine (p.
250)
Store the Alcolock in its holder. This will
keep the built-in battery fully charged and
the Alcolock is activated automatically
when the car is opened.
Switch.
Transmission button.
Lamp for battery status.
Related information
Lamp for result of breath test.
Lamp indicates ready for breath test.
Operation - battery
Alcolock indicator lamp (4) shows battery status:
•
•
•
•
Alcolock* (p. 249)
•
Alcolock* - symbols and text messages
(p. 253)
Alcolock* - storage (p. 250)
Alcolock* - to bear in mind (p. 251)
Alcolock* - before starting the engine (p.
250)
08
1
Also called Alcoguard.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
249
08 Starting and driving
Alcolock* - storage
•
Store the Alcolock in its holder. Release the
handheld unit by depressing it slightly in its
holder and releasing it - it then springs out
and can be removed from the holder.
Alcolock* - symbols and text messages
(p. 253)
Alcolock* - before starting the engine
The Alcolock is activated automatically and is
then ready for use when the car is opened.
1. When the indicator lamp (6) is green the
Alcolock is ready for use.
2. Withdraw the Alcolock from its holder. If
the Alcolock is outside the car when it is
unlocked then it must first be activated
with the switch (2).
3. Fold up the nozzle (1), take a deep breath
and blow with an even pressure until a
"click" is heard after approx. 5 seconds.
The result will be one of the alternatives in
the following table Result after breath
test.
Handheld unit storage and charging station.
•
Replace the handheld unit in the holder
by pushing it in until it engages.
•
Store the handheld unit in the holder this provides it with the best protection
and keeps its batteries fully charged.
Related information
08
250
•
Alcolock* - functions and operation (p.
249)
•
Alcolock* - before starting the engine (p.
250)
•
•
Alcolock* (p. 249)
Alcolock* - to bear in mind (p. 251)
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
4. If no message is shown then the transmission to the car may have failed - in
which case, press the button (3) to transmit the result to the car manually.
5. Fold down the nozzle and refit the Alcolock in its holder.
6. Start the engine following an approved
breath test within 5 minutes - otherwise it
must be repeated.
08 Starting and driving
Result after breath test
Indicator
lamp (5) +
Display text
Specification
Green lamp +
Alcoguard
Approved test
Start the engine - no
alcohol content measured.
Yellow lamp +
Alcoguard
Approved test
Engine starting possible - measured alcohol
content is above
0.1 promille but below
the limit value in
forceA.
Red lamp + Disapproved test
Wait 1 minute
Engine starting not
possible - measured
alcohol content is
above the limit value in
forceA.
A
•
•
Alcolock* (p. 249)
Alcolock* - to bear in mind
Alcolock* - symbols and text messages
(p. 253)
In order to obtain correct function and as
accurate a measurement result as possible:
•
Avoid eating or drinking approx.
5 minutes before the breath test.
•
Avoid excess windscreen washing - the
alcohol in the washer fluid may result in
an incorrect measurement result.
In order to ensure that a new breath test is
carried out in the event of a change of driver depress the switch (2) and the send button (3)
simultaneously for approx. 3 seconds. At
which point the car returns to start inhibition
mode and a new approved breath test is
required before starting the engine.
Limit values vary from country to country. Find out what
applies in your country. See also Alcolock* (p. 249)
NOTE
After a completed period of driving, the
engine can be restarted within 30 minutes
without a new breath test.
Related information
•
Alcolock* - functions and operation (p.
249)
•
Alcolock* - storage (p. 250)
08
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
251
08 Starting and driving
||
Calibration and service
The Alcolock must be checked and calibrated
at a workshop2 every 12 months.
30 days before recalibration is necessary the
combined instrument panel shows the message Alcoguard Calibr. required. If calibration is not carried out within these 30 days
then normal engine starting will be blocked only starting with the Bypass function will
then be possible, see the following heading
"Emergency situation".
The message can be cleared by pressing the
send button (3) once. Otherwise it goes out
on its own after approx. 2 minutes but then
reappears each time the engine is started only recalibration at a workshop2 can clear
the message permanently.
Cold or hot weather
The colder the weather the longer it takes
before the Alcolock is ready for use:
Temperature (ºC)
08
2
252
Maximum heating time (seconds)
+10 to +85
10
-5 to +10
60
-40 to -5
180
At temperatures below -20 ºC or above
+60 ºC the Alcolock requires additional power
supply. The combined instrument panel
shows Alcoguard insert power cable. In
which case, connect the power supply cable
from the glovebox and wait until indicator
lamp (6) is green.
When the Alcolock is installed, either the
Bypass or Emergency function is selected as
the bypassing option. This setting can be
changed afterwards at a workshop2.
Activating the Bypass function
•
In extremely cold weather the heating time
can be reduced by taking the Alcolock
indoors.
Emergency situation
In the event of an emergency situation or the
Alcolock is out of order, it is possible to
bypass the Alcolock in order to drive the car.
NOTE
All Bypass activation is logged and saved
in memory, see Recording data (p. 16).
After the Bypass function has been activated
the combined instrument panel shows
Alcoguard Bypass enabled the whole time
while driving and can only be reset by a workshop2.
The Bypass function can be tested without
the error message being logged - in which
case, carry out all the steps without starting
the car. The error message is cleared when
the car is locked.
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Depress and hold the left-hand stalk
switch OK button and the button for hazard warning flashers simultaneously for
approx. 5 seconds - the combined instrument panel first shows Bypass activated
Wait 1 minute and then Alcoguard
Bypass enabled - after which the engine
can be started.
This function can be activated several times.
The error message shown during driving can
only be cleared at a workshop2.
Activating the Emergency function
•
Depress and hold the left-hand stalk
switch OK button and the button for hazard warning flashers simultaneously for
approx. 5 seconds - the combined instrument panel shows Alcoguard Bypass
enabled and the engine can be started.
This function can be used once, after which a
reset must be made at a workshop2.
Related information
•
Alcolock* - functions and operation (p.
249)
•
Alcolock* - storage (p. 250)
08 Starting and driving
•
Alcolock* - before starting the engine (p.
250)
•
•
Alcolock* - symbols and text
messages
Alcolock* (p. 249)
In addition to the previously described messages related to how the alcolock works
before starting the engine (p. 250) the combined instrument panel's display can also
show the following:
Alcolock* - symbols and text messages
(p. 253)
Display text
Meaning/Action
Alcoguard
Restart possible
The engine has been
switched off for less than
30 minutes - engine starting possible without
new test.
Display text
Meaning/Action
Alcoguard
Blow harder
Blowing too weak - blow
harder.
Alcoguard
wait Preheating
Heating not finished wait for text Alcoguard
Blow 5 seconds.
A
Alcoguard
Service
required
Contact a workshopA.
Alcoguard No
signal
Transmission failed send manually with button (3) or take a new
breath test.
Alcoguard
Invalid test
Test failed - take a new
breath test.
Alcoguard
Blow longer
Blowing too short - blow
for longer.
Alcoguard
Blow softer
Blowing too hard - blow
more gently.
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
•
Alcolock* - functions and operation (p.
249)
•
•
•
Alcolock* - to bear in mind (p. 251)
Alcolock* - storage (p. 250)
Alcolock* (p. 249)
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
08
253
08 Starting and driving
Starting the engine
The engine is started and switched off using
the remote control key and the START/STOP
ENGINE button.
Diesel engine
1. Insert the remote control key in the ignition switch and press it in to its end position. Note that if the car is equipped with
Alcolock* then a breath test must first be
approved before the engine can be
started. For more information on the
Alcolock, see Alcolock* (p. 249).
2. Depress the brake pedal fully3.
3. Press the START/STOP ENGINE button
and then release it.
When the engine is started the starter motor
works until the engine is started or until the
overheating protection triggers.
Ignition switch with remote control key extracted/inserted. and START/STOP ENGINE button.
IMPORTANT
Do not press in the remote control key
incorrectly turned - hold the end with the
detachable key blade, see Detachable key
blade - detaching/attaching (p. 158).
When starting the engine in normal conditions
the car's electric drive motor is prioritised the diesel engine remains switched off. This
means that after pressing the START/STOP
ENGINE button the electric motor has
"started" and the car is ready to drive. A
started motor is indicated by the combined
instrument panel's indicator lamps extinguishing and its preset theme illuminating
(see Digital combined instrument panel overview (p. 63)).
However, there are situations where the diesel engine is started instead, e.g. in the event
of the temperature being too low or if the
hybrid battery needs charging.
08
3
254
If the car is moving then it is enough to press the START/STOP ENGINE button to start the engine.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
IMPORTANT
If the engine fails to start after 3 attempts wait for 3 minutes before making a further
attempt. Starting capacity increases if the
battery is allowed to recover.
WARNING
Never remove the remote control key from
the ignition switch after starting the engine
or when the car is being towed.
WARNING
Always remove the remote control key
from the ignition switch when leaving the
car, and make sure that the key position is
0 - in particular if there are children in the
car. For information on how this works see Key positions (p. 73).
NOTE
The idling speed can be noticeably higher
than normal for certain engine types during
cold starting. This is done in order that the
emissions system can reach normal operating temperature as quickly as possible,
which minimises exhaust emissions and
protects the environment.
08 Starting and driving
Keyless drive*
Switching off the engine
Steering lock
Follow steps 2-3 for keyless (p. 162) starting
of the engine.
The engine is switched off using the START/
STOP ENGINE button.
The steering lock makes steering difficult if
the car is e.g. taken unlawfully.
To stop the engine:
Function
NOTE
A prerequisite for the engine to start is that
one of the car's remote control keys with
the Keyless drive function is in the passenger compartment or cargo area.
WARNING
Never remove the remote control key from
the car while driving or during towing.
Related information
•
•
Press START/STOP ENGINE - the
engine stops.
If the gear selector is not in P position or if
the car is moving:
•
Press twice on START/STOP ENGINE or
hold the button depressed until the
engine stops.
Related information
•
Key positions (p. 73)
Switching off the engine (p. 255)
•
The steering lock unlocks when the
remote control key is in the ignition
switch4 and the START/STOP ENGINE
button is depressed.
•
The steering lock locks when the driver's
door is opened after the engine has been
switched off.
A mechanical noise can be perceived when
the steering lock unlocks or locks.
Related information
•
•
•
Starting the engine (p. 254)
Key positions (p. 73)
Steering wheel (p. 79)
08
4
Cars with Keyless drive must have a remote control key inside the passenger compartment.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
255
08 Starting and driving
Jump starting with battery
If the starter battery (p. 346) is discharged
then the car can be started with current from
another battery.
4. Connect one of the red jump lead's
clamps to the donor battery's positive
terminal (1).
IMPORTANT
Connect the start cable carefully to avoid
short circuits with other components in the
engine compartment.
9. Check that the jump lead clamps are
affixed securely so that there are no
sparks during the starting procedure.
10. Start the engine of the "donor car" and
allow it to run a few minutes at a speed
slightly higher than idle
approx. 1500 rpm.
11. Start the engine in the car with the discharged battery with the remote control
key inserted and a press the START/
STOP ENGINE button, see Starting the
engine (p. 254).
NOTE
When jump starting the car, the following
steps are recommended to avoid short circuits or other damage:
1. Insert the remote control key in key position 0 (p. 73).
2. Check that the donor battery has a voltage of 12 V.
3. If the donor battery is installed in another
car - switch off the donor car's engine
and make sure that the two cars do not
touch each other.
08
256
5. Open the clips on the front cover of the
and remove the
battery in your car
cover.
6. Connect the red jump lead's other clamp
onto the car's positive terminal (2).
7. Connect one of the black jump lead's
clamps to the donor battery's negative
terminal (3).
8. Connect the other clamp to a grounding
point, e.g. right-hand engine mounting at
the top, the outer screw head (4).
When starting the engine in normal conditions the car's electric drive motor is prioritised - the diesel engine remains switched
off. This means that after pressing the
START/STOP ENGINE button the electric
motor has "started" and the car is ready to
drive. A started motor is indicated by the
combined instrument panel's indicator
lamps extinguishing and its preset theme
illuminating.
IMPORTANT
Do not touch the crocodile clips during the
start procedure. There is a risk of sparks
forming.
08 Starting and driving
12. Remove the jump leads in reverse order first the black and then the red.
> Make sure that none of the black jump
lead's clamps comes into contact with
the battery's positive terminal or the
clamp connected to the red jump lead!
13. Refit the front cover for the battery in your
car.
WARNING
•
The battery can generate oxyhydrogen
gas, which is highly explosive. A spark
can be formed if a jump lead is connected incorrectly, and this can be
enough for the battery to explode.
•
The battery contains sulphuric acid,
which can cause serious burns.
•
If sulphuric acid comes into contact
with eyes, skin or clothing, flush with
large quantities of water. If acid
splashes into the eyes - seek medical
attention immediately.
Drive systems
This V60 Plug-in Hybrid is a so-called parallel
hybrid, which means that it has two separate
drive systems: an electric motor and a diesel
engine. Depending on the driver-selected
drive mode and the electric energy available,
the two drive systems are used either individually or in parallel.
Two drive systems
An advanced control system combines the
properties of both drive systems in order to
provide optimum driving economy.
The electric motor drives the car mostly at
low speeds, the diesel engine at higher
speeds, and during more active driving.
Both the diesel engine and electric motor can
generate motive force directly to the wheels.
The diesel engine can also charge the electric
motor's hybrid battery with a special highvoltage generator.
Related information
•
•
•
Drive system - drive modes (p. 258)
Energy flow (p. 260)
Drive system - symbols and messages (p.
262)
Related information
•
Starting the engine (p. 254)
Hybrid battery
Hazard voltage generator5
Diesel engine
Electric motor
5
08
Combined high-voltage generator and starter motor - ISG (Integrated Starter Generator).
257
08 Starting and driving
Drive system - drive modes
Since the mileage in electric operation is connected to the car's total energy consumption,
deductions are made for functions that limit
mileage, e.g. climate and dynamic performance. To obtain the maximum possible mileage the air conditioning (p. 124) is therefore
switched off - however, it can be activated
with the AC button if necessary.
Both of the car's drive systems are used
either individually or in parallel. The driver can
select between different drive modes while
driving. Regardless of selected drive mode,
the control system checks that the combination of drivability, driving experience, environmental impact and fuel economy is always
optimal in relation to the selected drive mode.
If a drive mode cannot be activated then the
reason is explained with a text message in
the combined instrument panel.
NOTE
Controls for drive modes.
NOTE
The drive cannot set the "wrong" drive
mode - if any parameter is not met in a
specific situation, the system will automatically choose another, more appropriate
drive mode.
WARNING
•
Do not leave the car in an unventilated
area with drive mode activated and the
diesel engine switched off - the engine
will start automatically when the
energy level in the hybrid battery is
low, and the exhaust fumes may cause
serious harm to humans and animals.
– PURE
This option focuses on electric operation as well as low
energy consumption, and
helps the driver to maximise
driving on the hybrid battery.
08
258
In the event of misting, press AC, AUTO or
the defroster button.
Please note
This drive mode can only be selected when
the hybrid battery has a sufficiently high
energy level.
The diesel engine can start automatically in
certain cases, despite the PURE drive mode
being selected, for example.:
•
•
if the speed exceeds 125 km/h
•
if the hybrid battery's energy level is too
low and it must be charged
•
in the event if system/component limitations, e.g. low outside temperature, see
Energy flow (p. 260).
if the driver requests more motive force
than electric drive can provide
08 Starting and driving
such as to raise/lower the temperature in
the passenger compartment.
– HYBRID
This option is the car's preset start mode. The control
system uses both the electric
motor and diesel engine individually or in parallel and calculates the optimal
use with regard to performance, fuel consumption and comfort.
The capacity to run solely with the electric
motor in the HYBRID drive mode depends on
the hybrid battery's energy level and, for
example, the requirement for heating/cooling
in the passenger compartment. At high level
the capacity for solely driving with electric
operation is same as in PURE mode, i.e. the
car is easy to drive as an electric car (high
electrical power output available).
– POWER
This option sets the car in
the best response and performance mode, by means of
both the electric motor and
diesel engine being activated
the whole time. The car has
sportier characteristics and
faster response to accelerating.
During active driving, the use of a lower gears
is prioritised, leading to a delayed upshift.
Please note
•
•
The diesel engine runs continuously.
At low energy level (hybrid battery is almost
empty) the battery's energy level must also
be maintained at the same time, leading to
the diesel engine starting more often.
•
This drive mode results involves
increased fuel consumption.
To restore the function to run solely on electricity in HYBRID mode:
The mode activates all-wheel
drive, which improves the
car's grip and traction. The
mode is primarily designed
for low speed on slippery
road surfaces, but all-wheel
drive also has a stabilising
effect at higher speeds.
•
Charge the hybrid battery from a 230
VAC socket with the charging cable (see
Charging current (p. 286)) or use the
SAVE function.
Please note
•
The diesel engine may even start with a
high energy level in the hybrid battery,
The car is driven by both the front and
rear wheels.
– AWD
Please note
•
•
The diesel engine runs continuously.
This drive mode results involves
increased fuel consumption.
– SAVE
This function starts charging
the hybrid battery and
ensures that its energy level
does not fall below a
capacity equivalent to
approx. 20 km driving with
electric operation. The idea
is to be able to save this energy for later
when electric operation is more suitable, e.g.
for urban driving.
If the hybrid battery's energy level is low
when pressing the SAVE button then the diesel engine will first charge it to a capacity
equivalent to approx. 20 km driving with electric operation.
Driving with the electric motor saves more
fuel at low speeds than at higher speeds.
Therefore, select SAVE primarily when the
hybrid battery's energy level is high and a
planned journey shall start with a longer distance at higher speeds (e.g. on motorways)
and end with a distance at low speeds when
electric operation is required.
Pressing the SAVE button when the hybrid
battery's energy level is equivalent to more
than approx. 20 km driving with electric oper-
08
}}
259
08 Starting and driving
||
ation will maintain the hybrid battery's current
energy level.
Regardless of selected drive mode, charging
of the hybrid battery is activated temporarily
in the background - similar to the SAVE function - then an automatic DPF (p. 284) regeneration is performed.
Trip statistics
Energy flow
The car stores the statistics (p. 112) of consumed electricity/diesel related to mileage
travelled.
The centre console's screen can graphically
display whether the engine or motor is driving
the car and how the energy is flowing - it
shows, for example, whether the hybrid battery is charging or providing energy to the
electric motor.
Apart from via the trip computer, the trip statistics can also be accessed via the MY CAR
menu system:
•
Please note
•
This drive mode results involves
increased fuel consumption.
•
After the diesel engine has charged the
hybrid battery to the SAVE level the control system will stop/start the diesel
engine in the same way as for low energy
level in HYBRID mode.
Go to MY CAR Trip statistics and
confirm with OK.
In addition, information about temperature
and age-related diesel fuel.
Related information
•
•
•
Drive systems (p. 257)
Drive system - symbols and messages (p.
262)
Energy flow (p. 260)
Drive modes in MY CAR
The car's menu system (p. 105) contains brief
descriptions about the car's different drive
modes.
1. Go to MY CAR
modes.
HYBRID
Driving
2. There, select between PURE, HYBRID,
POWER, AWD and SAVE and confirm
with OK.
Start/Stop function
08
260
The control system determines when the diesel engine can be stopped and be switched
off, as well as for how long. This is equivalent
to the Start/Stop function in conventional
cars with fuel-driven engines.
The function to display the energy flow is
activated in the menu system:
•
Go to MY CAR HYBRID
flow and confirm with OK.
Power
Limitation due to low outside
temperature
To avoid the risk of paraffin precipitate (see
Fuel - diesel (p. 282)) in the diesel fuel due to
low thermal resistance, the car has a market-
08 Starting and driving
dependent function which automatically limits
the option of using electric operation with the
PURE or HYBRID drive mode in low temperatures. If such a situation occurs then the diesel engine will be running the whole time.
Diesel fuel thermal resistance is a measure of
the usefulness of the fuel at low temperatures. Normally, the diesel fuel's thermal
properties are adapted to the climate zone
and season in which it is distributed and sold.
See also information about diesel fuel (p.
282).
The automatic limitation in low temperatures
increases gradually depending on the age of
the fuel in the tank. When the car has recently
been refuelled there is no limitation, but it
increases the older the fuel in the tank
becomes, counted in months.
To avoid such problems, the car has a built-in
function which checks the age of the fuel. In
connection with this, a self-explanatory text
message may appear, for example:
• Aged fuel Start diesel engine to
consume fuel
• Aged fuel Engine will run to consume
fuel
• Aged fuel Fill up fuel tank
Follow the recommended action where
appropriate.
Related information
•
Drive systems (p. 257)
The purpose of the function is, in low outside
temperatures, to allow the car to consume
fuel at such a rate that fresh fuel - with the
correct thermal resistance - can/must be
added before the critical temperature for the
current fuel is reached.
Fuel age
Old diesel fuel (from approx. 5 months and
older) in combination with condensation can,
in some circumstances, lead to algal and
bacterial growth in the fuel system and/or oxidation of the fuel with the risk of operational
disruption as a result.
08
261
08 Starting and driving
Drive system - symbols and
messages
In some situations the drive system can display a message in the combined instrument
panel - follow the recommendation given if
appropriate.
08
262
This symbol illuminates in combination with a text message and an
acoustic warning signal if an unbelted driver opens the driver's door
with the diesel engine or electric motor running.
The same thing happens if an unbelted driver
starts the engine with the driver's door open.
Here are some examples of messages, their
meaning and suggestions for action:
Message
Specification
Action
PURE not available due to low hybrid
system temperature
One or more components in the drive system have
not reached the correct operating temperature.
Drive in HYBRID mode until the message
changes to PURE available - then press
the PURE button.
PURE not available due to temporary
hybrid system limitations
Temporary system limitation, e.g. operating temperature not correct.
Drive in HYBRID mode until the message
changes to PURE available - then press
the PURE button.
PURE not available due to low battery
charge
The hybrid battery's energy level is too low.
Drive in SAVE mode until the message
changes to PURE available or charge
the battery with 230 VAC - then press the
PURE button.
PURE not available when gear lever in
manual position
The gear selector is in manual "+/-" position.
Move the gear selector to the side, to
automatic mode and then press the
PURE button.
PURE available
The PURE mode is available again after the previous
limitation.
–
POWER not available due to temporary
hybrid system limitations
Temporary system limitation, e.g. operating temperature not correct.
–
08 Starting and driving
Message
Specification
Action
SAVE not available due to temporary
hybrid system limitations
Temporary system limitation, e.g. operating temperature not correct.
–
AWD not available due to temporary
hybrid system limitations
Temporary system limitation, e.g. operating temperature not correct.
–
Related information
•
Drive systems (p. 257)
08
263
08 Starting and driving
Gearboxes
Gear shift indicator*
Automatic gearbox -- Geartronic
An V60 Plug-in Hybrid is driven and operated
in the same way as a car with a conventional
internal combustion engine and automatic
gearbox.
The gear shift indicator notifies the driver
when it is appropriate to engage the next
higher or lower gear. An essential detail in
connection with environmental driving is to
drive in the right gear and to change gear in
plenty of time.
The Geartronic gearbox has two different gear
modes - Automatic and Manual.
The exception is that with the gear selector in
manual gear position (+/-) the diesel engine
will always be running. The driver must then
change manually and the car engine brakes
when the accelerator pedal is released, see
Automatic gearbox -- Geartronic (p. 264).
Automatic gearbox
IMPORTANT
To prevent damage to any drive system
components, the working temperature of
the gearbox is checked. If there is a risk of
overheating, a warning symbol is illuminated in the combined instrument panel in
conjunction with a text message being
shown. Follow the recommendation given
in the text message.
Related information
•
08
264
Automatic gearbox -- Geartronic (p. 264)
Combined instrument panel "Digital" with gear
shift indicator.
An indicator is available as an aid on some
variants - GSI (Gear Shift Indicator) - which
notifies the driver when it is appropriate to
engage the next higher or lower gear in order
to obtain the lowest possible fuel consumption. However, taking into consideration characteristics such as performance and vibration-free running, it may be advantageous to
change gear at a higher engine speed. The
framed number indicates the current gear.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
08 Starting and driving
•
In order to be able to move the gear
selector from P-position, the brake pedal
must first be depressed firmly.
Combined instrument panel (p. 62) shows the
position of the gear selector using the following indications: P, R, N, D, S*, 1, 2, 3 etc.
Gear positions
Automatic gear positions are
indicated on the right of the
combined instrument panel.
(Only one marker is illuminated at a time - the one
showing the current gear
selector position.)
Parking position - P
Select position P when starting the engine or
when the car is parked.
6
The gearbox is mechanically blocked when
the P position is engaged. Also apply the
parking brake (p. 272), as a precaution.
NOTE
The gear selector must be in P position to
allow the car to be locked and alarmed.
IMPORTANT
The car must be stationary when position P is selected.
WARNING
Always apply the parking brake when
parking on a slope - the automatic transmission's P position is not sufficient to
hold the car in all situation.
The car must be stationary when R position is
selected.
Neutral position - N
NOTE
When starting the engine there is an automatic function check of the brake system
when the driver depresses the brake pedal
to take the gear selector from the P-position. During the function check the pedal
travel is slightly longer than during normal
braking.
D: Automatic gear positions. +/–: Manual gear
positions. S6: Sport mode*.
Reverse position - R
No gear is engaged and the engine can be
started. Apply the parking brake if the car is
stationary with the gear selector in N position.
Drive position - D
D is the normal driving position. Shifting up
and down takes place automatically based on
the level of acceleration and speed. The car
must be stationary when the gear selector is
moved to D position from R position.
Geartronic – Manual gear positions
(+S-)
With the gear selector in manual gear position
"+S-" the diesel engine is permanently in
operation. The driver must then change manually and the car engine brakes when the
accelerator pedal is released.
The manual gear position is reached
by moving the lever to the side from
position D to the end position at
"+S-". The combined instrument
panel's symbol "+S-" changes colour from
WHITE to ORANGE and the digits 1, 2, 3 etc.
are displayed in a box, corresponding to the
gear that has just been selected.
The "Sport mode" function is not available in a V60 Plug-in Hybrid - only "+" and "-".
08
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
265
08 Starting and driving
||
•
Move the lever forwards towards "+"
(plus) to change up a gear and release the
lever, which returns to its rest position
between + and –.
or
•
Pull the lever back towards "–" (minus) to
change down a gear and release it.
The manual gearshift mode "+S–" can be
selected at any time while driving.
Geartronic automatically shifts down if the
driver allows the speed to decrease lower
than a level suitable for the selected gear, in
order to avoid jerking and stalling.
If the accelerator is released from the kickdown position, the gearbox automatically
changes up.
Kick-down is used when maximum acceleration is needed, such as for overtaking.
•
Safety function
Move the lever to the side to the end
position at D.
It can be easier to pull away on slippery roads
if 3rd gear is engaged manually.
1. Depress the brake pedal and move the
gear selector from D position to the end
position at "+S–" - the combined instrument panel changes indication from D to
the figure 1.
2. Scroll up to gear 3 by pushing the lever
forward towards "+" (plus) twice - the display shifts the indication from 1 to 3.
266
Kick-down
When the accelerator pedal is pressed all the
way to the floor (beyond the position normally
regarded as full acceleration) a lower gear is
immediately engaged. This is known as kickdown.
To return to automatic driving mode:
Geartronic - Winter mode
08
The gearbox "winter mode" means that the
car moves off with a lower engine speed and
reduced engine power on the drive wheels.
3. Release the brake and accelerate carefully.
To prevent overrevving the engine, the gearbox control program has a protective downshift inhibitor which prevents the kick-down
function.
Geartronic does not permit downshifting/
kick-down which would result in an engine
speed high enough to damage the engine.
Nothing happens if the driver still tries to shift
down in this way at high engine speed – the
original gear remains engaged.
When kick-down is activated the car can
change one or more gears at a time depending on engine speed. The car changes up
when the engine reaches its maximum speed
in order to prevent damage to the engine.
Related information
•
Transmission fluid - grade and volume (p.
383)
08 Starting and driving
•
Gear selector inhibitor
There are two different types of gear selector
inhibitor - mechanical and automatic.
Keep your foot on the brake pedal when
moving the gear selector to another position.
Deactivate automatic gear selector
inhibitor
Electric gear inhibitor – Shiftlock
Parking position (P)
Mechanical gear selector inhibitor
To be able to move the gear selector from P
to other gear positions, the brake pedal must
be depressed and the remote control key
must be in key position II (p. 73).
G021351
Shiftlock – Neutral (N)
The gear selector can be moved forward and
back freely between N and D. Other positions
are locked with a latch that is released with
the inhibitor button on the gear selector.
If the gear selector is in N position and the
car has been stationary for at least 3 seconds
(irrespective of whether the engine is running)
then the gear selector is locked.
To be able to move the gear selector from N
to other gear positions, the brake pedal must
be depressed and the remote control key
must be in key position II.
With the inhibitor button depressed the lever
can be moved forwards or backwards
between P, R, N and D.
If the car cannot be driven, e.g. due to a flat
battery, the gear selector must be moved
from the P position so that the car can be
moved.
Lift the rubber mat in the compartment
behind the centre console and locate a
hole7 for the key blade (p. 158) in the bottom of the compartment.
Automatic gear selector inhibitor
Search for a spring-loaded button down
in the hole with the key blade; depress
the button with the blade and hold.
The automatic gearbox has special safety
systems:
Move the gear selector from the P position and pull up the key blade.
Parking position (P)
Stationary car with engine running:
7
There may be 2 holes - one for the key blade and one that fixes the rubber mat.
4. Set the rubber mat back in place.
08
}}
267
08 Starting and driving
||
Related information
•
Automatic gearbox -- Geartronic (p. 264)
Hill start assist (HSA)*
All Wheel Drive - AWD
The foot brake can be released before setting
off or reversing uphill - the HSA (Hill Start
Assist) function means that the car does not
roll backwards.
The best traction possible is achieved with allwheel drive.
The function means that the pedal pressure in
the brake system remains for several seconds
while the driver's foot is moved from brake
pedal to accelerator pedal.
The temporary braking effect releases after
several seconds or when the driver accelerates.
Related information
•
08
268
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Starting the engine (p. 254)
Use this button on the centre
console to activate all-wheel
drive (AWD – All Wheel
Drive), see Drive system drive modes (p. 258). The
mode is primarily intended
for use at low speed in slippery driving conditions. All-wheel drive also
has a stabilising effect at higher speeds.
To achieve the best possible traction and prevent wheel spin the motive force is distributed
automatically to the wheels with the best grip.
Under normal driving conditions, the majority
of power is transmitted to the front wheels.
08 Starting and driving
Foot brake
The foot brake is used to reduce the car's
speed while driving.
The car is equipped with two brake circuits. If
one brake circuit is damaged then this will
mean that the brakes engage at a deeper
level and higher pedal pressure is needed to
produce the normal braking effect.
The driver's brake pedal pressure is assisted
by a brake servo.
WARNING
The brake servo only works when the
engine is running.
If the brake is used when the engine is
switched off then the pedal travel is slightly
longer and a higher pedal pressure must be
used to brake the car.
In very hilly terrain or when driving with a
heavy load the brakes can be relieved by
using engine braking. Engine braking is most
efficiently used if the same gear is used
downhill as up.
For more general information on heavy loads
on the car, see Engine oil - adverse driving
conditions (p. 379).
Function check when the engine is
started
A V60 Plug-in Hybrid is equipped with a socalled "brake by wire" brake system. After
each time the engine is started there is an
automatic function check of the brake system
when the driver depresses the brake pedal to
take the gear selector from the P position,
see Automatic gearbox -- Geartronic (p. 264).
In connection with the function check, in
some cases, the information display may
show a message and a symbol, see examples
in the table at the end of this section.
NOTE
During the function check the pedal travel
is slightly longer than during normal braking.
Light braking - hybrid battery charging
The electric motor's engine brake is used
during light braking. The car's kinetic energy
is then converted to electrical energy instead
which is used to charge the hybrid battery.
Battery charging with engine braking is indicated in the combined instrument panel (p.
63) with an animation.
This function is active in the speed range
150-5 km/h - for harder braking, as well as
outside the speed range, the braking is complemented by the hydraulic brake system.
Cleaning the brake discs
Coatings of dirt and water on the brake discs
may result in delayed brake function. With
wet road surfaces, prior to long-stay parking
and after the car has been washed, it is
advisable to carry out cleaning by braking
gently for a short period while driving.
Maintenance
To keep the car as safe and reliable as possible, follow the Volvo service intervals as
specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet.
IMPORTANT
The wear on the brake system's components must be checked regularly.
Contact a workshop for information about
the procedure or engage a workshop to
carry out the inspection - an authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended.
08
}}
269
08 Starting and driving
||
Symbols and messages
Symbol
Message
Meaning/Action
Constant glow – Check the brake fluid level. If the level is low, fill with brake fluid and check for the
cause of the brake fluid loss.
Constant glow for 2 seconds when the engine is started - automatic function check.
Fully depress the brake
pedal in order to exit
the P-position
Brake pedal characteristics changed Service
required
Foot pressure on the brake pedal is too low.
•
Press the pedal further down.
May be shown in very cold weather or if the gear selector has been moved from the P position with the
brake pedal insufficiently depressed.
•
Switch off the engine by pressing the START/STOP ENGINE button - start the engine again and
depress the brake pedal.
If the error message remains: Contact a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
WARNING
If
and
illuminate at the same
time, there may be a fault in the brake system.
If the level in the brake fluid reservoir is
normal at this stage, drive carefully to the
nearest workshop and have the brake system checked - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
08
If the brake fluid is below the MIN level in
the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive further before topping up the brake fluid.
The reason for the loss of brake fluid must
be investigated.
270
Related information
•
•
Parking brake (p. 272)
Foot brake - emergency brake lights and
automatic hazard warning flashers (p.
271)
•
Foot brake - emergency brake assistance
(p. 271)
•
Foot brake - anti-lock braking system (p.
271)
08 Starting and driving
Foot brake - anti-lock braking system
The anti-lock braking system, ABS (Anti-lock
Braking System), prevents the wheels from
locking up during braking.
The function allows steering ability to be
maintained, and it is easier to swerve to avoid
a hazard for example. Vibration may be felt in
the brake pedal when this is engaged and this
is normal.
A short test of the ABS system is made automatically after the engine has been started
when the driver releases the brake pedal. A
further automatic test of the ABS system may
be made when the car reaches 10 km/h. The
test may be experienced as pulses in the
brake pedal.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Foot brake (p. 269)
Parking brake (p. 272)
Foot brake - emergency brake lights
and automatic hazard warning
flashers
Emergency brake lights are activated to alert
vehicles behind about sudden braking. The
function means that the brake light flashes
instead of - as in normal braking - shining with
a constant glow.
Emergency brake lights are activated at
speeds above 50 km/h in the event of sudden
braking. After the car's speed has been
slowed below 10 km/h the brake light returns
from flashing to the normal constant glow while at the same time the hazard warning
flashers (p. 89) are activated, and they flash
until the driver changes engine speed with the
accelerator pedal or they are deactivated with
their button.
Related information
Foot brake - emergency brake lights and
automatic hazard warning flashers (p.
271)
•
•
•
Foot brake - emergency brake assistance
(p. 271)
•
Foot brake (p. 269)
Parking brake (p. 272)
Foot brake - emergency brake assistance
(p. 271)
Foot brake - anti-lock braking system (p.
271)
Foot brake - emergency brake
assistance
Emergency brake assistance EBA (Emergency
Brake Assist) helps to increase the braking
force and so reduce the braking distance.
EBA detects the driver's braking style and
increases the braking force when necessary.
The brake force can be reinforced up to the
level when the ABS system is engaged. The
EBA function is interrupted when the pressure
on the brake pedal is reduced.
NOTE
When EBA is activated the brake pedal
lowers slightly more than usual, depress
(hold) the brake pedal as long as necessary. If the brake pedal is released then all
braking ceases.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Foot brake (p. 269)
Parking brake (p. 272)
Foot brake - emergency brake lights and
automatic hazard warning flashers (p.
271)
Foot brake - anti-lock braking system (p.
271)
08
271
08 Starting and driving
Parking brake
Applying the parking brake
The parking brake holds the car stationary,
when the driver's seat is empty, by mechanically locking/blocking two wheels.
LOCK/PULL RELEASE. The braking procedure is stopped when the control is released.
NOTE
In the event of emergency braking at
speeds above 10 km/h a signal sounds
during the braking procedure.
Function
A faint electric motor noise can be heard
when the electrical parking brake is being
applied. The noise can also be heard during
the automatic function checking of the parking brake.
If the car is stationary when the parking brake
is applied then it only acts on the rear wheels.
If it is applied when the car is moving then the
normal foot brake is used, i.e. the brake acts
on all four wheels. Brake function changes
over to the rear wheels when the car is almost
stationary.
Low battery voltage
If the battery voltage is too low then the parking brake can neither be released nor applied.
Connect a donor battery if the battery voltage
is too low, see Jump starting with battery (p.
256).
Parking on a hill
If the car is parked facing uphill:
•
Parking brake control - apply.
1. Press the foot brake pedal down firmly.
2. Press the control PUSH LOCK/PULL
RELEASE.
>
The combined instrument panel's symbol starts flashing - once there
is a constant glow the parking brake is
applied.
3. Release the foot brake pedal and make
sure that the car is at a standstill position.
•
When parking the vehicle put the gear
selector in the P position.
Emergency brake
08
272
In an emergency the parking brake can be
applied when the vehicle is in motion by
pressing and holding the control for PUSH
Turn the wheels away from the kerb.
If the car is parked facing downhill:
•
Turn the wheels towards the kerb.
WARNING
Always apply the parking brake when
parking on a slope - leaving the car in
gear, or in P if it has automatic transmission, is not sufficient to hold the car in all
situation.
08 Starting and driving
Disengaging the parking brake
Releasing automatically
1. Put the seatbelt on.
2. Start the engine.
3. Press the foot brake pedal down firmly.
4. Move the gear selector to position D or R
and depress the accelerator.
>
The parking brake releases and
the combined instrument panel's symbol extinguishes.
NOTE
Parking brake control - release.
For safety reasons, the parking brake is
only released automatically if the engine is
running and the driver is wearing a seatbelt. The parking brake is released immediately on cars with automatic gearbox
when the accelerator pedal is depressed
and the gear selector is in position D or R.
Releasing manually
1. Insert the remote control key in the ignition switch8.
2. Press the foot brake pedal down firmly.
3. Pull the control.
>
The parking brake releases and
the combined instrument panel's symbol extinguishes.
is released automatically on a steep incline.
Avoid this by depressing the control while
driving off. Release the control when the
engine achieves traction.
Replacing the brake linings
The rear brake linings must be replaced at a
workshop due to the design of the electric
parking brake - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Symbols and messages
For information on how the combined instrument panel's text messages can be shown
and deleted, see Messages - handling (p.
105).
Heavy load uphill
A heavy load, such as a trailer, can cause the
car to roll backward when the parking brake
08
8
For a car with the Keyless system: Press START/STOP ENGINE.
}}
273
08 Starting and driving
||
Symbol
Message
Meaning/Action
"Message"
•
Read the message in the combined instrument panel.
A flashing symbol indicates that the parking brake is applied.
If the symbol flashes in any other situation then this means that a fault has arisen.
•
Park brake not
fully released
Read the message in the combined instrument panel.
A fault is preventing the parking brake from being released:
•
Try to apply and release the brake.
If the fault persists after a few attempts:
•
Visit a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Note: A warning signal sounds if the journey is continued with this error message.
Parking brake
not applied
A fault is preventing the parking brake from being applied:
•
Try to release and apply the brake.
If the fault persists after a few attempts:
•
Visit a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
The message is also illuminated on cars with manual gearbox when the car is driven at low speed with the door
open in order to alert the driver that the parking brake may have been unintentionally disengaged.
Parking brake
Service
required
A fault has arisen:
•
•
08
274
•
Try to apply and release the brake.
If the fault persists after a few attempts:
Visit a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
If the car has to be parked before a possible fault is rectified then the wheels
must be turned as if parking on a hill and
the gear selector must be set in position
P.
A text message can be acknowledged by
briefly pressing the OK button on the direction indicator stalk.
08 Starting and driving
Related information
•
Foot brake (p. 269)
08
275
08 Starting and driving
Planning your driving
It is important to plan carefully when driving in
electric mode in order to achieve the longest
possible driving distance.
Here is some advice that reduces power consumption (allowing longer possible mileage)
without the need for travelling time to
increase or driving pleasure to decrease.
Utilise electric operation as much as possible:
•
Do not hold the car stationary on a hill
with the accelerator pedal. Use the foot
brake instead.
•
Use engine braking and smooth operation
of the foot brake when braking - this
recharges the hybrid battery and extends
the possible mileage with the electric
motor.
•
Find out where the charging stations are
located.
•
Prioritise choosing a parking space with a
charging station.
•
Balance electricity consumption with the
accelerator pedal, and by these means
use the advantages of the electric motor.
•
WARNING
Remember that the car does not emit any
engine noise when it is only powered by
the electric motor and may therefore be
difficult to notice by children, pedestrians,
cyclists and animals. This applies in particular at low speeds, such as in car parks.
NOTE
Make a habit of always starting a journey
with fully-charged hybrid battery.
Driving techniques
08
276
The electric motor acts as both engine and
alternator. During braking (p. 269) the brake
force is used to recharge the hybrid battery
(p. 286) - energy that otherwise would have
been lost as heat energy.
High speed increases power consumption considerably due to increased wind
resistance - doubling speed increases
wind resistance 4 times.
•
Maintain the car regularly - follow Volvo's
recommended service intervals.
•
Towing another car consumes a lot of
electricity - use the AWD mode. This then
charges the hybrid battery, in combination with improving the car's driving characteristics and roadholding, see Drive
system - drive modes (p. 258).
Outside temperature
The electric motor, electronics and batteries
work best at approx. 25 °C. When the car is
connected to an electrical socket it is conditioned (p. 129) to its optimal temperature
range. If the car is started in cold weather or
goes beyond its permitted temperature range
while driving then the fuel heater starts and, if
required, the internal combustion engine
starts automatically so that heating takes
place. The car can be driven electrically but
with reduced power if the temperature
becomes too low.
Similarly, the system may need to be cooled
down when driving in hot conditions.
NOTE
If the outside temperature drops extremely
low then the diesel engine will always be
running.
Power consumers
The more power consumers in the car that
are switched on (e.g. stereo, electrically
heated windows, door mirrors, seats, etc.) the
higher the energy consumption.
Related information
•
•
Economical driving (p. 285)
Winter driving (p. 279)
08 Starting and driving
Fording
IMPORTANT
Fording means that the car is driven through a
water-covered roadway. Fording must be carried out with great caution.
Engine damage can occur if water enters
the air filter.
In depths greater than 25 cm, water could
enter the transmission. This reduces the
lubricating ability of the oils and shortens
the service life of these systems.
The car can be driven through water at a
maximum depth of 25 cm at a maximum
speed of 10 km/h. Extra caution should be
exercised when passing through flowing
water.
During driving in water, maintain a low speed
and do not stop the car. When the water has
been passed, depress the brake pedal lightly
and check that full brake function is achieved.
Water and mud for example can make the
brake linings wet resulting in delayed brake
function.
•
Clean the electric contacts of the electric
engine block heater and trailer coupling
after driving in water and mud.
•
Do not let the car stand with water over
the sills for any long period of time - this
could cause electrical malfunctions.
In the event of the engine stalling in water,
do not try restart - tow the car from the
water to a workshop - an authorised Volvo
workshop is recommended. Risk of engine
breakdown.
Overheating
Under special conditions, for example hard
driving in hilly terrain and hot climate, there is
a risk that the engine and drive system may
overheat - in particular with a heavy load.
For information about overheating when driving with a trailer, see Driving with a trailer (p.
296).
•
Remove any auxiliary lamps from in front
of the grille when driving in hot climates.
•
If the temperature in the engine's cooling
system is too high then a warning symbol
is illuminated in the combined instrument
panel's information display and a text
message High engine temp Stop safely
is shown there - stop the car in a safe
way and allow the engine to run at idling
speed for several minutes in order to cool
down.
•
If the text message High engine temp
Stop engine or Coolant level low, Stop
engine is shown then the engine must be
switched off after stopping the car.
•
In the event of overheating in the gearbox
a built-in protection function is activated
which, amongst other things, illuminates
a warning symbol in the combined instrument panel, and its display shows the
text message Transmission hot Reduce
speed or Transmission hot Stop safely
- follow the recommendation given and
lower the speed and stop the car in a safe
way and allow the engine to run at idling
Related information
•
•
Recovery (p. 304)
Towing (p. 302)
08
277
08 Starting and driving
speed for a few minutes in order to allow
the gearbox to cool down.
•
If the car overheats, the air conditioning
may be switched off temporarily.
•
Do not turn the engine off immediately
you stop after a hard drive.
Driving with open tailgate
Overload - starter battery
When driving with the tailgate open, toxic
exhaust fumes can be sucked into the car
through the cargo area.
The electrical functions in the car load the
starter battery (p. 346) to varying degrees.
Avoid using the key position (p. 73) II when
the engine is switched off. Instead use the I
mode - which uses less power.
WARNING
Do not drive with an open tailgate! Toxic
exhaust fumes could be drawn into the car
through the cargo area.
NOTE
It is normal for the engine's cooling fan to
operate for a time after the engine has
been switched off.
Related information
•
Loading (p. 145)
Also, be aware of different accessories that
load the electrical system. Do not use functions which use a lot of power when the
engine is switched off. Examples of such
functions are:
•
•
•
•
ventilation fan
headlamps
windscreen wiper
audio system (high volume).
If the starter battery voltage is low then the
combined instrument panel's information display shows the text Low battery Power
save mode. The energy-saving function then
shuts down certain functions or reduces certain functions such as the ventilation fan
and/or audio system.
–
08
278
In which case, charge the battery by starting the engine and then running it for at
least 15 minutes - starter battery charging
is more effective during driving than running the engine at idling speed while stationary.
08 Starting and driving
Before a long journey
Winter driving
Before a long journey, it makes good sense to
go through the following points:
For winter driving it is important to perform
certain checks in order to ensure that the car
can be driven safely.
•
Check the following in particular before the
cold season:
To achieve optimum roadholding Volvo recommends using winter tyres on all wheels if
there is a risk of snow or ice.
•
Check that the engine is working normally
and that fuel consumption (p. 386) is normal.
•
Make sure that there are no leaks (fuel, oil
or other fluid).
•
•
Check all bulbs and tyre tread depths.
Carrying a warning triangle (p. 317) is a
legal requirement in certain countries.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Engine oil - checking and filling (p. 333)
Changing wheels - removing wheels (p.
312)
The engine coolant (p. 334) must contain
at least 50% glycol. This mixture protects
the engine against frost erosion down to
approximately –35 °C. To achieve optimum antifreeze protection, different types
of glycol must not be mixed.
•
The fuel tank must be kept filled to prevent condensation.
•
Engine oil viscosity is important. Oils with
lower viscosity (thinner oils) facilitate starting in cold weather and also reduce fuel
consumption while the engine is cold. For
more information on suitable oils, see
Engine oil - adverse driving conditions (p.
379).
Lamp replacement (p. 337)
starter battery and its capacity is reduced
by the cold.
Use washer fluid (p. 346) to avoid ice
forming in the washer fluid reservoir.
NOTE
The use of winter tyres is a legal requirement in certain countries. Studded tyres
are not permitted in all countries.
Slippery driving conditions
Practise driving on slippery surfaces under
controlled conditions to learn how the car
reacts.
IMPORTANT
Low viscosity oil must not be used for hard
driving or in hot weather.
•
The condition of the starter battery and
charge level must be inspected. Cold
weather places great demands on the
08
279
08 Starting and driving
Range for electric operation
The car's range for electric operation is
dependent on several factors, such as the
number of consumers that are switched on.
if the car is parked in a cool place. For further
information about what to consider during
longer periods of inactive time, see Longterm storage - points to remember (p. 295).
Power consumers
Related information
In order to achieve the longest possible mileage for electric operation, the driver of an
electric car also has to think about saving
current (p. 286). The more consumers there
are (stereo, electric heating in windows/
mirrors/seats, very cold air from the climate
control system, etc.) that are switched on the shorter the potential mileage.
•
•
Fuel filler flap - Opening/closing
The fuel filler flap can be opened/closed as
follows:
Opening/closing the fuel filler flap
Planning your driving (p. 276)
Winter driving (p. 279)
To specify the range for electric operation,
see Range - specification (p. 389).
NOTE
In addition to high power output in the
passenger compartment, high speed, sudden acceleration, heavy loads and uphill
gradients can also reduce the possible
driving distance.
Longer periods of inactive time
08
280
During normal hybrid battery charging (p.
286) some of the charging current is used to
keep the car's drive system ready to drive,
mainly to control the hybrid battery's temperature. If the car is not being used for a few
days then energy can be saved by not starting preconditioning. If the car is not used for
a long time, the hybrid battery performs best
Open the fuel filler flap using the button on
the lighting panel - the flap opens when the
button is released.
In the combined instrument panel's
display the arrow on the symbol indicates which side of the car the fuel cap is
located.
•
Close the fuel filler flap by pressing it in
until a click confirms that it is closed.
Related information
•
Filling up with fuel (p. 281)
08 Starting and driving
Fuel filler flap - manual opening
Filling up with fuel
Filling with a fuel can9
The fuel filler flap can be opened manually
when electric opening from the passenger
compartment is not possible.
Important things to consider when refuelling.
When filling with a fuel can, use the funnel
located under the floor hatch in the cargo
area. The funnel is located by the spare wheel
or in the well under the floor hatch.
Opening/closing the fuel cap
Make sure you insert the funnel's pipe firmly
into the filler pipe. The filler pipe has an openable cap and the funnel's pipe must be
moved past the cap before filling can begin.
Related information
•
•
Fuel filler flap - manual opening (p. 281)
Fuel - handling (p. 282)
The fuel filler cap can be attached onto the flap.
1. Open/remove the side hatch in the cargo
area (same side as fuel filler flap).
2. Expand/open a perforated section in the
isolation and locate a green cord with
handle.
3. Pull the cord gently straight back until the
fuel filler flap folds out with a "click".
IMPORTANT
Pull the wire gently - minimal force is
required to disengage the hatch lock.
Related information
•
Filling up with fuel (p. 281)
9
Only applies to cars with diesel engine.
A certain overpressure may arise in the tank
in the event of high outside temperatures.
Open the cap slowly.
•
After refuelling - refit the cap and turn it
until one or more clicking sounds are
heard.
Filling up with fuel
•
Do not overfill the tank but fill until the
pump nozzle cuts out.
NOTE
Excess fuel in the tank can overflow in hot
weather.
08
281
08 Starting and driving
Fuel - handling
IMPORTANT
Fuel of a lower quality than that recommended by Volvo must not be used as engine
power and fuel consumption is negatively
affected.
Mixing different types of fuel or the use of
fuel not recommended invalidates Volvo's
guarantees, and any associated service
agreement. This applies to all engines.
NOTE: It does not apply to cars with
engines that are adapted to run on ethanol
fuel (E85).
WARNING
Always avoid inhaling fuel vapour and getting fuel splashes in the eyes.
NOTE
In the event of fuel in the eyes, remove any
contact lenses and rinse the eyes in plenty
of water for at least 15 minutes and seek
medical attention.
Never swallow fuel. Fuels such as petrol,
bioethanol and mixtures of them and diesel are highly toxic and could cause permanent injury or be fatal if swallowed.
Seek medical attention immediately if fuel
has been swallowed.
WARNING
Fuel which spills onto the ground can be
ignited.
Switch off the fuel-driven heater before
starting to refuel.
Never carry an activated mobile phone
when refuelling. The ring signal could
cause spark build-up and ignite petrol
fumes, leading to fire and injury.
08
282
Extreme weather conditions, driving with a
trailer or driving at high altitudes in combination with fuel grade are factors that
could affect the car's performance.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
Economical driving (p. 285)
Fuel - diesel (p. 282)
Diesel particle filter (DPF) (p. 284)
Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions (p.
386)
Fuel tank - volume (p. 385)
Fuel - diesel
Diesel is used as fuel.
Only use diesel fuel from well-known producers. Never use diesel of dubious quality. Diesel should fulfil the EN 590 or JIS K2204
standards. Diesel engines are sensitive to
contaminants in the fuel, such as excessively
high volumes of sulphur particles for example.
At low temperatures (-6 °C to -40 °C), a paraffin precipitate may form in the diesel fuel,
which may lead to ignition problems. Special
diesel fuel designed for low temperatures
around freezing point is available from the
major oil companies. This fuel is less viscous
at low temperatures and reduces the risk of
paraffin precipitate.
The risk of condensation in the fuel tank is
reduced if the tank is kept well filled. When
refuelling, check that the area around the fuel
filler pipe is clean. Avoid spilling fuel onto the
paintwork. Wash off any spillage with detergent and water.
IMPORTANT
Only ever use fuel that fulfils the European
diesel standard.
The sulphur content must be a maximum
of 50 ppm.
08 Starting and driving
tion, see Key positions (p. 73) for more
information.
IMPORTANT
Diesel type fuels that must not be used:
•
•
•
•
Special additives
2. Press the START button without
depressing the brake and/or clutch pedal.
Marine diesel fuel
3. Wait approx. 1 minute.
Heating oil
4. To start the engine: Depress the brake
and/or clutch pedal and then press the
START button again.
FAME10 (Fatty Acid Methyl Ester) and
vegetable oil.
These fuels do not fulfil the requirements in
accordance with Volvo recommendations
and generate increased wear and engine
damage that is not covered by the Volvo
warranty.
Empty tank
The design of the fuel system in a diesel
engine means that if the vehicle runs out of
fuel, the tank may need to be vented in the
workshop in order to restart the engine after
fuelling.
Once the engine has stopped due to fuel
starvation, the fuel system needs a few
moments to carry out a check. Do this before
starting the engine, once the fuel tank has
been filled with diesel:
1. Insert the remote control key in the ignition switch and push it in to the end posi-
10
NOTE
Before filling with fuel in the event of fuel
shortage:
•
Stop the car on as flat/level ground as
possible - if the car is tilting there is a
risk of air pockets in the fuel supply.
To bear in mind when you have run out
of fuel
Avoid running out of fuel. In the event of an
empty tank, it is possible to continue driving
with the available charge in the hybrid battery. After refilling the fuel, it may seem to
take longer to start the engine (up to
30 seconds). In certain cases, repeated
attempts to start the car may also be
required.
Once the engine has been started, it is recommended to keep it running for at least
5 minutes. Select drive mode AWD or
POWER in order to facilitate the supply of
fuel.
If the message Internal combustion engine
unavailable Limited performance and
mileage is shown in the combined instrument panel's information display - switch off
and then restart the engine again to regain full
function.
Draining condensation from the fuel
filter
The fuel filter separates condensation from
the fuel. Condensation can disrupt engine
operation.
The fuel filter must be drained at the intervals
specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet
or if you suspect that the car has been filled
with contaminated fuel. For more information,
see Volvo service programme (p. 327).
IMPORTANT
Certain special additives remove the water
separation in the fuel filter.
Related information
•
•
•
Fuel - handling (p. 282)
Diesel particle filter (DPF) (p. 284)
Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions (p.
386)
08
Diesel fuel may contain a certain amount of FAME, but further amounts must not be added.
283
08 Starting and driving
Catalytic converters
Diesel particle filter (DPF)
The purpose of the catalytic converters is to
purify exhaust gases. They are located close
to the engine so that operating temperature is
reached quickly.
Diesel cars are equipped with a particle filter,
which results in more efficient emission control.
The catalytic converters consist of a monolith
(ceramic or metal) with channels. The channel
walls are lined with a thin layer of platinum/
rhodium/palladium. These metals act as catalysts, i.e. they participate in and accelerate a
chemical reaction without being used up
themselves.
Lambda-sondTM oxygen sensor
The Lambda-sond is part of a control system
intended to reduce emissions and improve
fuel economy (see Fuel consumption and
CO2 emissions (p. 386)).
An oxygen sensor monitors the oxygen content of the exhaust gases leaving the engine.
This value is fed into an electronic system
that continuously controls the injectors. The
ratio of fuel to air directed to the engine is
continuously adjusted. These adjustments
create optimal conditions for efficient combustion, and together with the three-way catalytic converter reduce harmful emissions
(hydrocarbons, carbon monoxide and nitrous
oxides).
08
Related information
•
•
284
Economical driving (p. 285)
Fuel - diesel (p. 282)
The particles in the exhaust gases are collected in the filter during normal driving. Socalled "regeneration" is started in order to
burn away the particles and empty the filter.
This requires the engine to have reached normal operating temperature.
Start regeneration of the filter by driving the
car until the engine reaches normal operating
temperature, preferably on a main road or
motorway. The car should then be driven for
approximately 20 minutes more.
NOTE
The following may arise during regeneration:
Regeneration of the particle filter is automatic
and normally takes 10-20 minutes. It may
take a little longer at a low average speed.
Fuel consumption may increase slightly during regeneration.
During regeneration, charging of the hybrid
battery is activated temporarily in the background, which is similar to the SAVE function,
see Drive system - drive modes (p. 258).
Regeneration in cold weather
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
a smaller reduction of engine power
may be noticed temporarily
•
fuel consumption may increase temporarily
•
a smell of burning may arise.
When regeneration is complete the warning
text is cleared automatically.
Use the parking heater* in cold weather - the
engine then reaches normal operating temperature more quickly.
If the car is frequently driven short distances
in cold weather then the engine does not
reach normal operating temperature. This
means that regeneration of the diesel particle
filter does not take place and the filter is not
emptied.
When the filter has become approx. 80% full
of particles, a yellow warning triangle is
shown in the combined instrument panel, and
the message Soot filter full See manual is
shown in its information display.
•
IMPORTANT
If the filter is completely filled with particles, it may be difficult to start the engine
and the filter is non-functional. Then there
is a risk that the filter will need to be
replaced.
Related information
•
•
Fuel - handling (p. 282)
Fuel - diesel (p. 282)
08 Starting and driving
•
•
Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions (p.
386)
Fuel tank - volume (p. 385)
Economical driving
•
Driving economically means driving smoothly
while thinking ahead and adjusting your driving style and speed to the prevailing conditions.
Remove unnecessary items from the car the greater the load the higher the consumption.
•
Use engine braking to slow down, when it
can take place without risk to other road
users.
•
Use the ECO Guide which indicates how
fuel-efficiently the car is being driven, see
Eco guide & Hybrid guide (p. 67).
•
•
Drive in the highest gear possible, adapted to the current traffic situation and
road - lower engine speeds result in lower
fuel consumption. Use the gear indicator
(p. 264).
A roof load and ski box increase air resistance, leading to higher consumption remove the load carriers when not in use.
•
Avoid driving with open windows.
•
Avoid sudden unnecessary acceleration
and heavy braking.
•
High speed results in increased fuel consumption - the wind resistance increases
with speed.
•
Do not run the engine to operating temperature at idling speed, but rather drive
with a light load as soon as possible - a
cold engine consumes more fuel than a
warm one.
•
Drive with the correct air pressure in the
tyres and check this regularly - select
ECO tyre pressure for best results, see
Tyres - approved tyre pressures (p. 387).
•
Choice of tyres can affect fuel consumption - seek advice on suitable tyres from a
dealer.
For information about Volvo Car Corporation's environmental philosophy, see Volvo
Cars' environmental philosophy (p. 19).
For more information about fuel consumption,
see Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions (p.
386).
WARNING
Never switch off the engine while moving,
such as downhill, this deactivates important systems such as the power steering
and brake servo.
Related information
•
•
Fuel - handling (p. 282)
•
Fuel tank - volume (p. 385)
Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions (p.
386)
08
285
08 Starting and driving
Charging the hybrid battery
In addition to the fuel tank, as in a conventional car, the car is equipped with a
rechargeable battery, a so-called hybrid battery of the Lithium-ion type.
The hybrid battery is charged using a charging cable with control unit (p. 289) which is
located in the storage area under the cargo
area floor, see Charging cable with control
unit (p. 289).
NOTE
Use a charging cable recommended by
Volvo in accordance with IEC 62196 and
IEC 61851 that supports temperature
monitoring.
The time it takes for the hybrid battery to be
charged is dependent on the charging current
(p. 286) that is used.
During the charging of the car's hybrid battery the display on the charging cable's control unit shows the current status (p. 291)
during an ongoing charging and after charging is complete.
While the hybrid battery is being charged,
charging is also in progress for the car's
starter battery (p. 346).
08
11
286
European standard - EN 61851-1.
If the hybrid battery's temperature is below
-10 ºC or above 30 ºC then it may mean that
some of the car's functions are changed or
unavailable because the capacity of the
hybrid batteries is reduced outside this temperature range.
An example of this is the PURE drive mode
(see Drive system and drive modes (p. 258))
which is not selectable if the temperature in
the battery is too low or high.
Charging with fixed control unit in
accordance with mode 311
In certain markets the control unit is installed
within a charging station connected to the
mains power circuit. In which case, the
charging cable has no control unit of its own.
Instead, it has a special connector to be used
to connect the charging cable to the charging
station. Follow the instructions at the charging station.
Related information
Charging current
Charging current is used for charging the
hybrid battery (p. 286) as well as preconditioning of the car. Charging cable (p. 289)
between the car's charging input socket and
a 230 VAC socket can be set for different current intensity loads (6-16 A) using the control
unit.
When the charging cable is activated the
combined instrument panel shows a message
and a lamp (p. 294) in the car's charging
input socket illuminates. The charging current
is mainly used for battery charging, but is also
used for preconditioning (p. 129) the car.
IMPORTANT
Never unplug the charging cable from the
230 VAC socket while charging is in progress - there is then a risk that the 230
VAC socket may be damaged.
•
Charging the hybrid battery - preparations (p. 288)
Charging time varies with the amperage setting on the control unit.
•
Range for electric operation (p. 280)
See examples in the following table:
08 Starting and driving
Current intensity (A)
Charging time
(hours)
6
7,5–10,0
10
4,5–7,0
16
4,0–5,5
then the car will draw 10 A from the 230 VAC
mains power circuit. If additional consumers
are connected to the same socket (or another
socket in the same fuse circuit) then there is a
risk that the fuse for the socket/fuse socket
will be overloaded and triggered, at which
point battery charging is stopped.
In which case, reset the fuse for the socket/
fuse circuit and select a lower charging current on the control unit - or disconnect other
consumers from the socket.
NOTE
•
•
If the weather is very cold or very hot
then some of the charging current is
used to heat/cool the hybrid battery
and the passenger compartment (preconditioning (p. 129)), which results in
a longer charging time.
The charging time is extended if preconditioning (p. 129) has been
selected. The time required depends
mainly on the outside temperature.
Charging cable plug and charging input socket.
Example 3
Normally several 230 VAC consumers are
included in a fuse circuit, so additional consumers (e.g. lighting, vacuum cleaner, electric
drill, etc.) can be on the same fuse.
If the car is connected to a 230 VAC/10 A
socket and the control unit is set at 6 A , then
the car will only draw 6 A from the 230 VAC
mains power circuit. Battery charging will of
course take longer, but then additional consumers can be connected at the same time to
the same socket (or fuse circuit) as long as
the total load does not exceed the capacity of
the fuse circuit.
Example 1
If the car is connected to a 230 VAC/10 A
socket and the control unit is set at 16 A, then
the car will attempt to draw 16 A from the
230 VAC mains power circuit - after a while
the overloaded 10 A fuse for the socket will
be tripped and battery charging stopped.
Related information
•
Range for electric operation (p. 280)
In which case, reset the fuse for the socket
and select a lower charging current on the
control unit, see Charging the hybrid battery preparations (p. 288).
Example 2
If the car is connected to a 230 VAC/10 A
socket and the control unit is set at 10 A ,
08
287
08 Starting and driving
Charging the hybrid battery preparations
Before recharging the car's hybrid battery can
be started (p. 293) a number of preparations
need to be made.
WARNING
•
Charging the hybrid battery must only
take place from approved grounded
230 VAC sockets.
•
The control unit's ground fault breaker
protects the car, but there may still be
a risk of overloading the 230 VAC
mains power circuit.
•
Avoid visible worn or damaged mains
sockets since they may lead to fire
damage and/or personal injury if used.
•
Never use an extension cable.
WARNING
The hybrid battery must only be replaced
by a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Before charging
IMPORTANT
•
The control unit should not be flooded
or immersed in water.
•
Avoid direct sunlight.
•
Check that the 230 VAC socket has
adequate power supply for charging
electric vehicles - in the event of
uncertainty the socket must be
checked by a qualified professional.
•
If the socket has unknown current
intensity - use the lowest level on the
control unit.
Opening/closing the cover for the
charging input socket
IMPORTANT
Press in the rear section of the cover and
release.
Open the hatch.
Pull away the cover for the charging input
socket and secure it in the holder inside
the cover. Make sure that the cover's rubber straps are bent downwards in order
to prevent the cover coming off from the
holder.
On the charging cable's control unit (p. 289)
select the required charging current (p. 286)
6-16 A12. On delivery, the lowest possible
charging current is preset.
Close the cover for the charging input socket
in reverse order.
Related information
•
•
08
12
288
Maximum charging current may vary depending on market.
Charging the hybrid battery (p. 286)
Charging the hybrid battery - ending (p.
294)
08 Starting and driving
Charging cable with control unit
The charging cable with its control unit is
used to charge the car's hybrid battery. Use a
charging cable recommended by Volvo.
WARNING
Control unit
The charging cable must not be used if
any part of it is damaged - there is then
the risk of electric shock or serious personal injury.
A damaged or inoperative charging cable
must only be repaired by a workshop - an
authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
IMPORTANT
Never unplug the charging cable from the
230 VAC socket while charging is in progress - there is then a risk that the 230
VAC socket may be damaged.
The charging cable is located in the storage
compartment under the cargo area's floor cover.
Specifications, charging cable
Enclosure class
Ambient temperature
IP67
-32 ºC to +50 ºC
Control unit display and controls.
08
}}
289
08 Starting and driving
||
Indicator13 showing selected charging
current.
•
The symbol illuminates when the charging
cable is plugged into a 230 VAC socket.
Charging cable with control unit - status
messages (p. 291)
•
Pushbuttons to increase/decrease the
charging current.
Charging cable with control unit - ground
fault breaker (p. 292)
•
Charging current (p. 286)
The symbol illuminates when the charging
cable is plugged into the car's 230 VAC
input socket.
IMPORTANT
Multiple plugs, overvoltage protection or
similar devices must not be used together
with the charging cable since this may
involve a risk of fire, electric shocks, etc.
An adapter between the 230 VAC socket
and charging cable may only be used if the
adapter is marked with approval in accordance with IEC 61851 and IEC 62196.
NOTE
The charging cable will remember the last
setting of the charging current. It is therefore important to adjust the setting if
another 230 VAC socket is used at the
next charging.
08
13
290
Related information
Maximum charging current may vary depending on market.
08 Starting and driving
Charging cable with control unit status messages
During the charging (p. 286) of the car's
hybrid battery the display on the charging
cable's control unit (p. 289) shows the current
status during an ongoing charging and after
charging is complete.
Control unit display
Status
Specification
Recommended action
The indicator for charging current (1) is
extinguished. The car symbol (5) illuminates with a constant green glow.
Standby
•
The charging cable is connected to the
car.
Wait until the battery is fully
charged.
•
Charging is possible but has not yet
been activated by the electronics in the
car.
Existing current consumption is shown
with a green indicator (1). The car symbol
(5) illuminates with a constant green
glow.
Charging in
progress.
•
The car's electronics have started
charging.
•
Charging in progress.
The indicator for charging current is
extinguished. The car symbol (5) flashes
red.
Charging is not
possible.
•
There is a communication error between
the control unit and the car.
1. Check all connections or use
another 230 VAC socket.
•
The ventilation for the car's electronics
is not adequate, not activated or defective.
2. Restart the battery charging.
The car symbol (5) illuminates with a
constant red glow.
Charging is not
possible.
•
The ground fault breaker on the charging cable has triggered.
1. Unplug the charging cable
from the 230 VAC socket.
Wait until the battery is fully
charged.
2. The ground fault breaker is
reset and the unit restarts.
The indicator (1) for charging current and
the house symbol (3) flash red.
Charging is not
possible.
Temperature monitoring has triggered for
the 230 VAC socket.
Restart charging. If the problem
persists - consult a qualified professional.
08
Related information
•
Charging current (p. 286)
291
08 Starting and driving
Charging cable with control unit temperature monitoring
In order for the car's hybrid battery to be
charged (p. 286) safely every time, the control
unit (p. 289) has a built-in monitoring device
for the charging current.
The control unit's monitoring device ensures
that the permissible charging current (p. 286)
is automatically adjusted to take into account
the safety aspect. This ensures safe operation
without supervision as well as optimised
charging time.
IMPORTANT
If the temperature monitoring has automatically lowered the charging current repeatedly and charging has been interrupted
then the cause of the overheating must be
investigated and rectified.
Charging cable with control unit ground fault breaker
The control unit for the charging cable (p.
289) has a built-in ground fault breaker that
protects the car and the user from electric
shocks caused by system faults.
If the control module's built-in ground fault
breaker is tripped then the car symbol illuminates with red constant glow - check the
230 VAC socket.
IMPORTANT
The control unit's earth fault switch does
not protect the 230 VAC socket.
NOTE
Use a charging cable recommended by
Volvo in accordance with IEC 62196 and
IEC 61851 that supports temperature
monitoring.
Temperature fuse
Temperature monitoring is activated automatically when the car's hybrid battery starts
charging. If a critical temperature is reached
then the charging current is lowered. If this
happens repeatedly and then charging is
switched off.
08
292
Related information
•
Charging the hybrid battery (p. 286)
08 Starting and driving
Charging the hybrid battery - starting
5. The charging cable's plug is fastened/
locked in and charging starts after
approx. 10 seconds.
How to start charging the hybrid battery (p.
286).
To check the remaining charging time:
IMPORTANT
•
Never connect the charging cable when
there is a risk of lightning.
NOTE
Use a charging cable recommended by
Volvo in accordance with IEC 62196 and
IEC 61851 that supports temperature
monitoring.
Remove the charging handle's cover and
then connect the handle to the car.
Take out the charging cable (p. 289) from the
storage compartment under the cargo area
floor.
Press the remote control key's button
for Approach lighting - the combined
instrument panel then shows the estimated time.
Battery charging can be interrupted for a
while if the car is unlocked:
•
and the door is opened - charging
restarts after 2 minutes.
•
without the door being opened - the
car is relocked automatically, see
Locking/unlocking - from the outside
(p. 167). Charging restarts after
1 minute.
NOTE
Location of the charging handle's cover.
IMPORTANT
Connect the charging cable to a 230 VAC
socket. Never use an extension cord.
2. Set the correct charging current (p. 286)
(for current 230 VAC socket) on the control unit.
To avoid damage to the paint, e.g. in the
event of high winds, position the charging
handle's protective cover so that it does
not touch the car.
Approach lighting must be active in order
to show the remaining charging time. Its
settings are managed in the menu system
MY CAR (p. 105).
IMPORTANT
Never unplug the charging cable from the
230 VAC socket while charging is in progress - there is then a risk that the 230
VAC socket may be damaged.
08
}}
293
08 Starting and driving
||
6. When charging is complete (see following
table) - open the driver's door. Then the
combined instrument panel illuminates
and can show information about charge
status.
LED lamp
glow
Specification
White constant
LED light
Yellow constant
Waiting modeA - waiting for charging to
start.
Green flashing
Charging in progressB.
Green constant
Charging completeC.
Blue - flashing or
constant
Timer switched on.
Red - flashing,
constant
A fault has arisen.
A
The LED lamps show the current status while
charging is in progress. The white, blue, red
and yellow lamps are activated when the passenger compartment lighting is switched on they remain switched on for a while after the
passenger compartment lighting has been
switched off.
B
C
NOTE
To be able to detach the charging cable
glove from the car's 230 VAC intake, the
car must first be unlocked using the
remote control key/PCC.
For example, after a door has been opened or the charging
cable's plug is not locked in.
The slower the flashing, the closer to fully charged.
Extinguishes after a while.
Condensation from the air conditioning may
drip under the car during charging. This is
normal and takes place due to cooling of the
hybrid battery.
Related information
•
08
294
Charging the hybrid battery - ending
How to stop charging the hybrid battery (p.
286).
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Charging the hybrid battery - ending (p.
294)
Unlock the car with the remote control
key/PCC* - the charging cable's locked
plug releases/is unlocked.
08 Starting and driving
Charging with the diesel engine
The hybrid battery can also
be charged by the car's diesel engine, see Drive systems (p. 257).
Related information
Unplug the cable from the car's electrical
input socket, refit the charging input
socket's cover and close the hatch, see
Charging the hybrid battery - preparations (p. 288).
•
•
Charging cable with control unit (p. 289)
Charging the hybrid battery - starting (p.
293)
Long-term storage - points to
remember
To reduce degradation of the hybrid battery
during long-term storage of the vehicle it is
recommended that the state of charge
remains at 25%.
Proceed as follows:
1. Select the "Hybrid" theme for the combined instrument panel. (For information
on menu navigation, see Combined
instrument panel (p. 62).)
2. If the state of charge is high - run the car
until approx. 25% remains. If the state of
charge is low - press the POWER button
and run the car until approx. 25% is achieved. (For more information about drive
modes, see Drive system - drive modes
(p. 258).)
3. If storage has lasted longer than
6 months and is intended to continue start the engine in drive mode POWER
and leave it running for at least
10 minutes until the state of charge has
stabilised at around 25% again (recommended).
Unplug the cable from the 230 VAC
socket.
Return the charging cable to the storage
space under the cargo area floor.
If the car has been locked in and could not be
run, and the hybrid battery's charge level is
significantly below 25% - charge the battery
for approx. 45 minutes at the lowest level,
depending on the state of charge. Check the
charge level continuously in the combined
08
295
08 Starting and driving
||
instrument panel, see Charging the hybrid
battery - starting (p. 293).
For handling the starter battery in connection
with long-term storage, see Battery (p. 346).
NOTE
Choose the coolest location possible for
the vehicle in order to minimise aging of
the battery during long-term storage. During summer the vehicle should preferably
remain indoors or outdoors in the shade,
depending on where the temperature is
lowest.
IMPORTANT
During long-term storage, the charging
cable must not be plugged into the car's
charging input socket.
Related information
•
•
08
296
Charging the hybrid battery (p. 286)
Driving with a trailer
•
When driving with a trailer there are a number
of important points to think about regarding
e.g. the towing bracket, the trailer and how
the load is positioned in the trailer.
Do not tow a heavy trailer when the car is
brand new. Wait until it has been driven
at least 1000 km.
•
The brakes are loaded much more than
usual on long and steep downhill slopes.
Downshift to a lower gear and adjust your
speed.
•
For safety reasons, the maximum permitted speed for the car when coupled with
a trailer should not be exceeded. Follow
the regulations in force for the permitted
speeds and weights.
•
Maintain a low speed when driving with a
trailer up long, steep ascents.
•
Avoid driving with a trailer on inclines of
more than 12%.
Payload depends on the car's kerb weight.
The total of the weight of the passengers and
all accessories, e.g. towbar, reduces the car's
payload by a corresponding weight. For more
detailed information on weights, see Weights
(p. 376).
If the towing bracket is mounted by Volvo,
then the car is delivered with the necessary
equipment for driving with a trailer.
•
The car's towing bracket must be of an
approved type.
•
If the towbar is retrofitted, check with
your Volvo dealer that the car is fully
equipped for driving with a trailer.
•
Distribute the load on the trailer so that
the weight on the towing bracket complies with the specified maximum towball
load.
•
Increase the tyre pressure to the recommended pressure for a full load. For tyre
pressure label location, see Tyres - air
pressure (p. 316).
•
The engine is loaded more heavily than
usual when driving with a trailer.
Range for electric operation (p. 280)
Trailer cable
An adapter is required if the car's towing
bracket has 13 pin electrics and the trailer
has 7 pin electrics. Use an adapter cable
approved by Volvo. Make sure the cable does
not drag on the ground.
Direction indicators and brake lights on
the trailer
If any of the trailer's lamps for direction indicators are broken, then the combined instrument panel's symbol for direction indicators
flashes faster than normal and the information
display shows the text Bulb fail - Ind. signal
trailer.
08 Starting and driving
If any of the trailer's lamps for the brake light
are broken then the Bulb fail - Stop lamp
trailer text is shown.
Trailer weights
For information on Volvo's permitted trailer
weights, see Towing capacity and towball
load (p. 377).
NOTE
The stated maximum permitted trailer
weights are those permitted by Volvo.
National vehicle regulations can further
limit trailer weights and speeds. Towbars
can be certified for higher towing weights
than the car can actually tow.
Driving with a trailer - automatic
gearbox
Starting on a hill
When driving with a trailer in hilly terrain in a
hot climate there may be a risk of overheating.
2. Move the gear selector to driving position D.
•
3. Release the parking brake.
•
In the event of overheating a warning
symbol is illuminated in the combined
instrument panel with a message that is
shown in the information display - follow
the recommendation given.
4. Release the foot brake and start driving
off.
Related information
•
Automatic gearbox -- Geartronic (p. 264)
Steep inclines
•
WARNING
Follow the stated recommendations for
trailer weights. Otherwise, the car and
trailer may be difficult to control in the
event of sudden movement and braking.
An automatic gearbox selects the optimum gear related to load and engine
speed.
1. Depress the foot brake.
Do not lock the automatic transmission in
a higher gear than the engine "can cope
with" - it is not always a good idea to
drive at a high gear with low engine revolutions.
Parking on a hill
1. Depress the foot brake.
2. Activate the parking brake.
Related information
•
Driving with a trailer - automatic gearbox
(p. 297)
•
•
Towing bracket/Towbar (p. 298)
3. Move the gear selector to position P.
4. Release the foot brake.
•
Move the gear selector to park position P
when parking an automatic car with a
hitched trailer. Always use the parking
brake.
•
Block the wheels with chocks when parking a car with hitched trailer on a hill.
Lamp replacement (p. 337)
08
297
08 Starting and driving
Towing bracket/Towbar
Detachable towbar - storage
Detachable towbar - specifications
A towing bracket means that it is possible to
e.g. tow a trailer behind the car.
Store the detachable towbar in the cargo
area.
Specifications for detachable towbar.
If the car is equipped with a detachable/
removable towbar, the installation instructions for the loose section must be followed
carefully, see Detachable towbar - attachment/removal (p. 299).
Specifications
WARNING
•
Follow the installation instructions
carefully.
•
The detachable section must be
locked with the key before setting off.
•
Check that the indicator window
shows green.
G021485
If the car is fitted with a Volvo detachable
towbar:
Towbar storage space.
IMPORTANT
Always remove the towbar after use and
store it in the appointed location in the car.
Important checks
•
The towbar's towball must be cleaned
and greased regularly.
NOTE
When a hitch with a vibration damper is
used, the towball must not be lubricated.
08
298
Related information
•
Driving with a trailer (p. 296)
Related information
•
Detachable towbar - specifications (p.
298)
•
Detachable towbar - attachment/removal
(p. 299)
•
Driving with a trailer (p. 296)
08 Starting and driving
Detachable towbar - attachment/
removal
The attachment/removal of the detachable
towbar is performed in the following way:
G021488
Attaching
G018928
The indicator window must show red.
Dimensions, mounting points (mm)
81
C
854
D
427
E
109
F
282
G
Side member
H
Ball centre
Related information
•
Detachable towbar - attachment/removal
(p. 299)
•
•
Detachable towbar - storage (p. 298)
Driving with a trailer (p. 296)
Remove the protective cover by first
and then pulling
pressing in the catch
.
the cover straight back
G021489
B
Insert the towbar until you hear a click.
Ensure that the mechanism is in the
unlocked position by turning the key
clockwise.
G021490
998
G021487
A
08
The indicator window must show green.
299
08 Starting and driving
Turn the key anticlockwise to locked
position. Remove the key from the lock.
Check that the towbar is secure by pulling it up, down and back.
WARNING
If the towbar is not fitted correctly then it
must be detached and reattached in
accordance with the previous instructions.
IMPORTANT
G021495
G021494
G000000
||
Safety cable.
WARNING
Take care to secure the trailer's safety
cable in the intended bracket.
Removing the towbar
Only grease in the ball for the towing hitch,
the remainder of the towbar should be
clean and dry.
Insert the key and turn it clockwise to the
unlocked position.
08
300
08 Starting and driving
Trailer stabiliser - TSA14
G018929
The trailer stability assist (TSA - Trailer
Stability Assist) function is designed to stabilise the car and trailer combination if it begins
to snake.
Push the protective cover until it snaps
tight.
Push in the locking wheel
and turn it
until you hear a click.
anticlockwise
Related information
•
•
•
Turn the locking wheel down fully, until it
comes to a stop. Hold it in this position
while pulling the towbar rearward and
upward.
WARNING
Secure the towbar safely if it is stored in
the car, see Detachable towbar - storage
(p. 298).
14
Detachable towbar - storage (p. 298)
Detachable towbar - specifications (p.
298)
Driving with a trailer (p. 296)
The trailer stability assist is included in the
stability and traction control system (p. 178)
(DSTC - Dynamic Stability and Traction
Control).
Function
The snaking phenomenon can occur with any
car/trailer combination. Snaking normally
occurs at high speeds. But, there is a risk of it
occurring at lower speeds (70-90 km/h) if the
trailer is overloaded or the load is improperly
distributed, e.g. too far back.
In order for snaking to occur, there must be a
triggering factor, e.g.:
•
Car with trailer subjected to a sudden and
powerful side wind.
•
Car with trailer drives on an uneven road
surface or in a pothole.
•
Sweeping steering wheel movements.
Operation
If snaking has started, it could be difficult or
even impossible to suppress. This makes the
car/trailer combination difficult to control and
there is a risk that you could, for example,
08
Included in the installation of Volvo genuine towbar.
301
08 Starting and driving
||
end up in the wrong lane or leave the carriageway.
The trailer stability assist continually monitors
the car's movements, particularly lateral
movements. If snaking is detected, the front
wheels are individually braked. This serves to
stabilise the car/trailer combination. This is
often enough to help the driver regain control
of the car.
If snaking is not eliminated the first time the
trailer stability assist comes into action, the
car/trailer combination is braked with all
wheels and engine power is reduced. Once
snaking has been gradually suppressed and
the car/trailer combination is stable once
again, the system stops regulating and the
driver once again has full control of the car.
For more information, see Stability and traction control system (DSTC) - operation (p.
179)
such a situation the system cannot determine
whether it is the trailer or the driver that is
causing the snaking.
When the trailer stability assist is
working, the combined instrument
panel's DSTC symbol flashes.
Related information
•
Towing
During towing, one vehicle is towed by
another vehicle using a tow rope.
Towing the V60 Plug-in Hybrid is not permitted. When moving the car it must be transported raised up with all the wheels on the
recovery vehicle's platform.
Stability and traction control system
(DSTC) - symbols and messages (p. 180)
IMPORTANT
Note that the car must always be towed
with the wheels rolling forward.
Jump starting
Do not tow the car to bump start the engine.
Use a donor battery if the battery is discharged and the engine does not start, see
Jump starting with battery (p. 256).
IMPORTANT
Miscellaneous
The electric drive motor and the catalytic
converter may be damaged during
attempts to tow-start the car.
The trailer stability assist can engage within
the speed interval 60-160 km/h.
NOTE
TSA function is switched off if the driver
selects Sport mode, see Stability and
traction control system (DSTC) (p. 178).
08
302
The trailer stability assist may fail to engage if
the driver uses sudden steering wheel movements to try to rectify the snaking because in
Related information
•
Towing eye (p. 303)
08 Starting and driving
Towing eye
The towing eye is screwed into a threaded
socket behind a cover on the rear right-hand
side of the bumper.
Attaching the towing eye
Take out the towing eye, which is located
behind the panel on the left-hand side of
the cargo area.
aged if you try to pull it up using the towing
eye. Raise the car using the recovery vehicle's lifting device if necessary.
The cover for the towing eye's attachment point is available in two variants
which must be opened in different ways:
•
Open the variant with a recess using a
coin or similar inserted in the recess,
turning it outwards. Then turn out the
cover completely and remove it.
•
The second variant has a marking
along one side or in a corner: Press the
marking with a finger and fold out the
opposite side/corner at the same time
using a coin or similar - the cover turns
around its axis and can then be
removed.
WARNING
No one/nothing is allowed to remain
behind the recovery vehicle while the car
pulled up onto the flatbed platform.
Related information
•
•
Towing (p. 302)
Recovery (p. 304)
Screw the towing eye right in up to its
flange. Turn in the towing eye firmly e.g.
using the wheel wrench.
After use, unscrew the towing eye and
return it to its place.
Finish by refitting the cover onto the
bumper.
The towing eye may be used to pull the car
up onto a recovery vehicle with a flatbed platform. The car's position and ground clearance determine whether it is possible. If the
slope of the recovery vehicle's ramp is too
steep, or if the ground clearance under the
car is inadequate, then the car may be dam-
08
303
08 Starting and driving
Recovery
Recovery means that the vehicle is transported away by means of another vehicle.
Call a recovery service for recovery assistance.
The towing eye may be used to pull the car
up onto a recovery vehicle with a flatbed platform. The car's position and ground clearance determine whether it is possible. If the
slope of the recovery vehicle's ramp is too
steep, or if the ground clearance under the
car is inadequate, then the car may be damaged if you try to pull it up using the towing
eye. Raise the car using the recovery vehicle's lifting device if necessary.
WARNING
No one/nothing is allowed to remain
behind the recovery vehicle while the car
pulled up onto the flatbed platform.
IMPORTANT
Note that the V60 Plug-in Hybrid must
always be transported raised up with all
the wheels on the recovery vehicle's platform.
08
304
Related information
•
Towing (p. 302)
WHEELS AND TYRES
09 Wheels and tyres
09
Tyres - direction of rotation
NOTE
Tyres with a tread pattern which are designed
to only turn in one direction have the direction
of rotation marked with an arrow.
Make sure that both pairs of wheels have
the same type and dimension, and also the
same make.
Follow the recommended tyre pressures
specified in the tyre pressure table (p. 387).
G021778
Related information
The arrow shows the tyre's direction of rotation.
The tyre must always rotate in the same
direction throughout its lifespan. Tyres should
only be switched between front and rear
positions, never between left and right-hand
sides, or vice versa. If the tyres are fitted
incorrectly, the car's braking characteristics
and capacity to force rain and slush out of the
way are adversely affected. Tyres with the
greatest tread depth should always be fitted
to the rear of the car (to decrease the risk of
skidding).
306
•
•
•
•
•
Tyres - dimensions (p. 311)
Tyres - speed ratings (p. 312)
Tyres - load index (p. 311)
Tyres - maintenance (p. 306)
Tyres - tread wear indicators (p. 308)
Tyres - maintenance
Amongst other things, the function of the
tyres is to provide grip on the road surface,
dampen vibration and protect the wheel from
wear.
Driving characteristics
Tyres greatly affect the car's driving characteristics. The type of tyre, dimensions, tyre
pressure and speed rating are important for
how the car performs.
Tyre age
All tyres older than 6 years old should be
checked by an expert even if they seem
undamaged. Tyres age and decompose, even
if they are hardly ever or never used. The
function can therefore be affected. This
applies to all tyres that are stored for future
use. Examples of external signs which indicate that the tyre is unsuitable for use are
cracks or discoloration.
09 Wheels and tyres
New tyres
Tyres are perishable. After a few years they
begin to harden at the same time as the friction capacity/characteristics gradually deteriorate. For this reason, aim to get as fresh
tyres as possible when you replace them.
This is especially important with regard to
winter tyres. The last four digits in the
sequence mean the week and year of manufacture. This is the tyre's DOT marking
(Department of Transportation), and this is
stated with four digits, for example 1510. The
tyre in the figure was manufactured in week
15 of 2010.
Summer and winter tyres
When summer and winter wheels are
changed the wheels should be marked with
which side of the car they were mounted on,
for example L for left and R for right.
Wear and maintenance
Correct tyre pressure (p. 316) results in more
even wear. Driving style, tyre pressure, climate and road condition affect how quickly
your tyres age and wear. To avoid differences
in tread depth and to prevent wear patterns
arising, the front and rear wheels can be
switched with each other. A suitable distance
for the first change is approx. 5000 km and
then at 10000 km intervals. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo
workshop for checking if you are uncertain
about tread depth. If significant differences in
wear (> 1 mm difference in tread depth)
between tyres have already occurred, the
least worn tyres must always be placed on
the rear. Understeer is normally easier to correct than oversteer, and leads to the car continuing forwards in a straight line rather than
having the rear end skidding to one side,
resulting in possible complete loss of control
over the car. This is why it is important for the
rear wheels never to lose grip before the front
wheels.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
09
Tyres - dimensions (p. 311)
Tyres - speed ratings (p. 312)
Tyres - load index (p. 311)
Tyres - direction of rotation (p. 306)
Tyres - tread wear indicators (p. 308)
Wheels should be stored lying down or hanging up - and not standing up.
WARNING
A damaged tyre may lead to loss of control
over the car.
307
09 Wheels and tyres
09
Tyres - tread wear indicators
Wheel bolts
Tools
A tread wear indicator shows the status of the
tyre's tread.
Wheel bolts are used to fasten the wheels at
the hubs and are available in different versions.
Amongst other things, the car contains towing
eye, jack* and wheel bolt wrench*.
IMPORTANT
G021829
The wheel bolts must be tightened to 140
Nm. Overtightening can damage the nuts
and the bolts.
Tread wear indicators.
Tread wear indicators are narrow treadless
bands across the width of the tread. On the
side of the tyre are the letters TWI (Tread
Wear Indicator). When the tyre's tread depth
is down to 1.6 mm, the tread depth will be
level in height with the tread wear indicators.
Change to new tyres as soon as possible.
Remember that tyres with little tread depth
provide very poor grip in rain and snow.
Only use rims that are tested and approved
by Volvo and which are Volvo genuine accessories. Check the torque with a torque
wrench.
Locking wheel bolts*
Locking wheel bolts* can be used on both
aluminium and steel rims.
Related information
•
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
308
Tyres - dimensions (p. 311)
Tyres - speed ratings (p. 312)
Tyres - load index (p. 311)
Tyres - direction of rotation (p. 306)
Tyres - maintenance (p. 306)
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Wheel and wheel rim dimensions (p. 310)
The car's towing eye and emergency puncture repair kit are located behind the hatch on
the left-hand side of the cargo area. There is
also space for the sleeve for the lockable
wheel bolts. Jack* and wheel bolt wrench* are
located in a bag on the cargo area floor.
If the car is not equipped with the accessory
spare wheel then the jack need not be stored
in the car.
WARNING
When the towing eye and emergency
puncture repair kit are stored in the foam
block, they must always be strapped in
with the tensioning strap.
09 Wheels and tyres
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
Emergency puncture repair (p. 318)
Towing eye (p. 303)
Changing wheels - removing wheels (p.
312)
Wheel bolts (p. 308)
Jack* (p. 309)
Jack*
front of the car. Refit the towing eye in the
foam block on the left-hand side of the cargo
area.
A jack is used to raise the car, e.g. when
changing the tyres.
The original jack should only be used for
changing to the spare wheel. The jack's
thread must always be well greased.
09
WARNING
The bag should be secured so that the
white arrow (see the inset figure) points
forward in the car.
Tools - returning into place
NOTE
If the floor hatch in the cargo area floor is
not closed then privacy locking does not
work.
Related information
•
•
Warning triangle (p. 317)
Emergency puncture repair (p. 318)
The white arrow must point toward the front of
the car.
After use, crank the jack together and screw
apart the towing eye and wheel bolt wrench.
Place the wheel bolt wrench and the jack in
their respective compartments in the bag.
Tighten the bag's centre strap firmly and use
the other strap to secure the bag in the rear
load retaining eyelet on the left-hand side of
the cargo area. Position the bag so it is not
pinched when the tailgate is closed. The
white arrow on the bag must point toward the
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
309
09 Wheels and tyres
09
Winter tyres
Using snow chains
Wheel and wheel rim dimensions
Winter tyres are tyres that are adapted for
winter road conditions.
Snow chains may only be used on the front
wheels (also applies to all-wheel drive cars).
Never drive faster than 50 km/h with snow
chains. Avoid driving on bare ground as this
wears out both the snow chains and tyres.
Wheel and rim dimensions are designated in
accordance with the examples in the table
below.
Winter tyres
Volvo recommends winter tyres with particular dimensions. Tyre dimensions are dependent on engine variant. When driving on winter
tyres, the correct type of tyres must be fitted
to all four wheels.
WARNING
Use Volvo genuine snow chains or equivalent chains designed for the car model,
and tyre and rim dimensions. In the event
of uncertainty Volvo recommends that you
consult an authorised Volvo workshop.
The wrong snow chains may cause serious
damage to your car and lead to an accident.
NOTE
Volvo recommends that you consult a
Volvo dealer about which wheel rim and
tyre types are most suitable.
Studded tyres
Studded winter tyres should be run in gently
for 500-1000 km so the studs settle properly
into the tyres. This gives the tyre, and especially the studs, a longer service life.
NOTE
The legal provisions for the use of studded
tyres vary from country to country.
Tread depth
Road conditions with ice, slush and low temperatures place considerably higher demands
on tyres than summer conditions. Volvo
therefore recommends not to drive on winter
tyres that have a tread depth of less than
4 mm.
310
Related information
•
The car has an approval for the complete
vehicle. This means that certain combinations
of wheel (wheel rim) and tyre are approved.
Wheels (rims) have a designation of dimensions, for example: 7Jx16x50.
7
Rim width in inches
J
Rim flange profile
16
Rim diameter in inches
50
Off-set in mm (distance from wheel
centre to wheel contact surface
against the hub)
Changing wheels - removing wheels (p.
312)
Related information
•
•
Tyres - dimensions (p. 311)
Tyres - approved tyre pressures (p. 387)
09 Wheels and tyres
Tyres - dimensions
The car's wheels (wheel rims) and tyres have
a certain dimension, see the examples in the
table below.
The car has an approval for the complete
vehicle. This means that certain combinations
of wheels (wheel rims) and tyres are
approved.
The dimensions are stated on all car tyres.
Example of designation:235/45R17 97W.
235
Tyre width (mm)
45
Ratio between tyre wall height and
tyre width (%)
R
Radial ply
17
Rim diameter in inches (")
97
Codes for the maximum permitted
tyre load, tyre load index (LI)
W
Speed rating for maximum permitted
speed, speed rating (SS). (In this
case 270 km/h.)
•
Wheel and wheel rim dimensions (p. 310)
Tyres - load index
09
Load index indicates a tyre's ability to carry a
certain load.
Each tyre has a certain capacity to carry a
load, a load index (LI). The car's weight determines the load capacity required of the tyres.
Minimum permissible index is indicated in the
load index table.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Tyres - dimensions (p. 311)
Tyres - approved tyre pressures (p. 387)
Tyres - speed ratings (p. 312)
Tyres - maintenance (p. 306)
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
Tyres - speed ratings (p. 312)
Tyres - load index (p. 311)
Tyres - direction of rotation (p. 306)
Tyres - maintenance (p. 306)
Tyres - approved tyre pressures (p. 387)
311
09 Wheels and tyres
09
Tyres - speed ratings
Each tyre can withstand a certain maximum
speed and therefore belongs to a particular
speed rating (SS - Speed Symbol).
Tyre speed class must at least correspond
with the car's top speed. Minimum speed rating is indicated in the speed rating table
below. The only exception to these regulations is the winter tyre (p. 310)1, where a
lower speed rating may be used. If such a
tyre is chosen, the car must not be driven
faster than the speed rating of the tyre (for
example, class Q can be driven at a maximum of 160 km/h). Traffic regulations determine how fast a car can be driven, not the
speed rating of the tyres.
W
270 km/h
Y
300 km/h
WARNING
The car must be fitted with tyres which
have the same or a higher load index (p.
311) (LI) and speed rating (SS) than specified. If a tyre with too low a load index or
speed rating is used, it may overheat.
Q
160 km/h (used only on winter tyres)
T
190 km/h
H
210 km/h
The correct tyre pressure for the spare wheel
is stated in the tyre pressure table (p. 387).
V
240 km/h
•
•
•
NOTE
312
Spare wheel*
The following instructions only apply if a
spare wheel has been purchased as an
accessory for the car. If the car is not equipped with a spare wheel - see information
about Emergency puncture repair (TMK) (p.
318).
The spare wheel (Temporary spare) is only
intended for use temporarily and must be
replaced by an ordinary wheel as soon as
possible. The car's handling may be altered
by the use of the spare wheel. The spare
wheel is smaller than the normal wheel. The
car's ground clearance is affected accordingly. Pay attention to high kerbs and do not
machine wash the car. If the spare wheel is
fitted on the front axle, you cannot use snow
chains at the same time. On all-wheel drive
cars the drive on the rear axle can be disconnected. The spare wheel must not be
repaired.
Related information
The maximum permitted speed is specified in the table.
1
Changing wheels - removing wheels
The car's wheels can be changed for e.g. winter wheels/winter tyres.
Both metal-studded and studless tyres.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Tyres - dimensions (p. 311)
Tyres - load index (p. 311)
Tyres - direction of rotation (p. 306)
09 Wheels and tyres
IMPORTANT
•
Never drive faster than 80 km/h with a
spare wheel on the car.
•
The car must never be driven fitted
with more than one "Temporary
Spare" wheel.
The spare wheel is supplied in a bag which
must be secured on the cargo area floor
using straps.
Before changing a wheel
1. Loosen the straps, lift out the spare wheel
from the cargo area and remove it from
the spare wheel bag.
3. Take out the jack* and the wheel bolt
wrench* (which is located in a bag on the
cargo area floor). If another jack is
selected, see Raising the car (p. 328).
2. To access the towing eye, open the hatch
on the left-hand side of the cargo area.
09
WARNING
Check that the jack is not damaged, that
the threads are thoroughly lubricated and
that it is free from dirt.
NOTE
•
If the car is not equipped with the
accessory spare wheel then the jack
need not be stored in the car.
•
Volvo recommends only using the jack*
that belongs to the car model in question, which is indicated on the jack's
label.
•
The decal also indicates the jack's
maximum lift capacity at a specified lifting height.
Cars with four load retaining eyelets.
Turn the handle on the spare wheel bag out
towards you. Attach the sewn-in tensioning
strap hooks in the front load retaining eyelets.
Attach the long strap into one of the front
load retaining eyelets, run the strap diagonally
over the spare wheel and through the upper
handle. Tighten the short tensioning strap
onto the long one. Attach the rear load retaining eyelet and tighten.
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
313
09 Wheels and tyres
09
||
NOTE
The car's regular jack is designed only for
use occasionally and for a short time, such
as when changing a wheel with a punctured tyre, switching between summer
tyres and winter tyres, etc. Only the jack
belonging to the specific model is to be
used to jack up the car. If the car is to be
jacked up more often, or for a longer time
than is required just to change a wheel,
use of a garage jack is recommended. In
this instance, follow the instructions for
use that come with the equipment.
3. Screw together the towing eye with the
wheel wrench* until the stop position in
accordance with the following figure.
5. There are two jacking points on each side
of the car. There is a recess in the plastic
cover at each point. Crank the foot of the
jack down so it is pressed squarely on the
ground.
4. Set up the warning triangle (p. 317) if a
wheel is replaced in a trafficked location.
The car and jack* must be on a firm horizontal surface.
Removing
1. Apply the parking brake (p. 272) and
engage reverse gear, or position P if the
car has an automatic gearbox.
2. Place chocks in front of and behind the
wheels which will remain on the ground to
prevent them from rolling. Use heavy
wooden blocks or large stones for example.
WARNING
Never position anything between the
ground and the jack, nor between the jack
and the car's jacking point.
IMPORTANT
The towing eye must be screwed into all
threads in the wheel bolt wrench.
4. Loosen the wheel bolts ½-1 turn anticlockwise with the wheel wrench.
IMPORTANT
The ground must be firm, smooth and
level.
6. Lift the car so that the wheel is free.
Remove the wheel bolts and lift off the
wheel.
314
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
09 Wheels and tyres
Related information
•
•
•
•
Changing wheels - fitting (p. 315)
Jack* (p. 309)
It is important that the procedure for fitting
the wheel is carried out correctly.
Warning triangle (p. 317)
Fitting
Wheel bolts (p. 308)
09
Changing wheels - fitting
1. Clean the contact surfaces between
wheel and hub.
2. Put on the wheel. Tighten the wheel bolts
thoroughly.
3. Lower the car so that the wheels cannot
rotate.
The white arrow must point toward the front of
the car.
4. Tighten the wheel bolts crosswise. It is
important that the wheel bolts are tightened properly. Tighten to 140 Nm. Check
the torque with a torque wrench.
5. Screw apart the towing eye and wheel
bolt wrench. Place the wheel bolt wrench
and the jack in their respective compartments in the bag. Tighten the bag's centre strap firmly and use the other strap to
secure the bag in the rear load retaining
eyelet on the left-hand side of the cargo
area. Position the bag so it is not pinched
when the tailgate is closed. The white
arrow on the bag must point toward the
front of the car.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
315
09 Wheels and tyres
09
||
NOTE
•
•
After a tyre has been inflated, always
refit the dust cap in order to avoid
damage to the valve from gravel, dirt,
etc.
Only use plastic dust caps. Metal dust
caps can rust and become difficult to
unscrew.
Tyres - air pressure
Refit the valve cover
Tyres can have different air pressures which
are measured in bar.
1. Fit the valve cap.
Check the air pressure in the tyres
The tyre pressures must be checked every
month.
The bag should be secured so that the
white arrow (see the inset figure) points
forward in the car.
WARNING
Never crawl under the car when it is raised
on the jack.
Park the car such that passengers have
the car, or ideally a crash barrier, between
themselves and the roadway.
Related information
•
Changing wheels - removing wheels (p.
312)
•
•
•
Jack* (p. 309)
2
316
Warning triangle (p. 317)
Wheel bolts (p. 308)
3. Then fold the cover in toward the wheel
rim - and at the same time, gently press
down the angled top edge in order to
help it in under the edge of the wheel rim.
4. Check that the cover is flush with the surface of the wheel rim - if not, gently press
in the part that is bulging out.
WARNING
Passengers must leave the car when it is
raised on the jack.
2. Press one edge of the cover (without the
).
hole) into place (nearest the tyre
The tyre valve is covered by a plastic cover
which is equipped with a hole2.
Remove the valve cover
1. Take the torx wrench (which is fitted in
the foam block behind the panel on the
left-hand side of the cargo area).
2. Press the torx wrench into the hole.
3. Prize off the cover using the torx wrench
.
4. Remove the valve cap.
Only 17" wheel Thia
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
09 Wheels and tyres
NOTE
•
•
Check the tyre pressure when the
tyres are cold. "Cold tyres" means that
the tyres are at the same temperature
as the outdoor temperature. The tyres
will heat up and the tyre pressures will
increase after driving for a few kilometres.
Tyre pressures which are too low will
increase fuel consumption, reduce tyre
service life and impair the car's handling. Driving with tyre pressures
which are too low may lead to the
tyres overheating and sustaining damage. Tyre pressures affect ride comfort, road noise and steering.
Tyre pressure decreases over time,
this is a natural phenomenon. Tyre
pressure also varies depending on
ambient temperature.
09
The warning triangle is used to warn other
road users of a stationary vehicle.
Storage and folding up
G021830
•
Warning triangle
Tyre pressure label
The tyre pressure label on the driver side's
door pillar (between frame and rear door)
shows the tyre pressures for the car's recommended tyre dimensions. This is also specified in the tyre pressure table, see Tyres approved tyre pressures (p. 387).
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
Tyres - dimensions (p. 311)
Tyres - speed ratings (p. 312)
Tyres - load index (p. 311)
Tyres - maintenance (p. 306)
Tyres - tread wear indicators (p. 308)
317
09 Wheels and tyres
09
First aid kit*
Emergency puncture repair
The first aid box contains first aid equipment.
Emergency puncture repair, where the emergency puncture repair kit (TMK - Temporary
Mobility Kit) is used to seal a puncture and
check and adjust the tyre pressure (p. 387).
The emergency puncture repair kit (p. 320)
consists of a compressor and a bottle of sealant. The sealing works as a temporary repair.
The sealing fluid bottle must be replaced
before its expiration date and after use. The
sealing fluid effectively seals tyres punctured
in the tread.
Lift the floor hatch and take out the warning triangle.
Take the warning triangle from the case,
fold out and assemble the two loose
sides.
Fold out the warning triangle's support
legs.
Follow the regulations for the use of a warning triangle. Position the warning triangle in a
suitable place with regard to traffic.
Ensure the warning triangle and its case are
properly secured in the cargo area after use.
NOTE
A case with first aid equipment is located
under the floor in the cargo area.
NOTE
If the car has been locked with privacy
locking then the boot lid/tailgate and floor
hatch cannot be opened, see Privacy locking* (p. 159).
NOTE
If the car has been locked with privacy
locking then the boot lid/tailgate and floor
hatch cannot be opened, see Privacy locking* (p. 159).
318
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
The emergency puncture repair kit is only
intended for sealing tyres with a puncture
in the tread.
The emergency puncture repair kit has limited
capacity to seal tyres which have punctures
in the wall. Do not seal tyres with the emergency puncture repair kit if they have larger
slits, cracks or similar damage. Connect the
compressor to one of the car's 12 V sockets.
Choose the socket that is nearest to the
punctured tyre.
09 Wheels and tyres
IMPORTANT
If the compressor for emergency puncture
repair is connected to one of the two sockets (p. 144) in the tunnel console then no
other current consumer may be connected
to the other one.
NOTE
Emergency puncture repair kit location
IMPORTANT
09
If the compressor for emergency puncture
repair is connected to one of the two sockets (p. 144) in the tunnel console then no
other current consumer may be connected
to the other one.
Emergency puncture repair kit (TMK Temporary Mobility Kit) is used to seal a
puncture and check and adjust the tyre pressure (p. 387).
Location of the emergency puncture
repair kit
NOTE
The compressor for temporary emergency
puncture repair has been tested and
approved by Volvo.
The compressor for temporary emergency
puncture repair has been tested and
approved by Volvo.
Related information
Related information
•
Emergency puncture repair - operation (p.
320)
•
Emergency puncture repair kit - overview
(p. 320)
•
Emergency puncture repair - rechecking
(p. 323)
•
Emergency puncture repair kit - sealant
(p. 325)
•
Emergency puncture repair kit - overview
(p. 320)
•
Emergency puncture repair (p. 318)
•
Tools (p. 308)
The emergency puncture repair kit is located
behind the hatch on the left-hand side of the
cargo area.
Set up the warning triangle (p. 317) if a tyre is
being sealed in a trafficked location.
NOTE
The emergency puncture repair kit is only
intended for sealing tyres with a puncture
in the tread.
319
09 Wheels and tyres
09
Emergency puncture repair kit overview
Emergency puncture repair, where the emergency puncture repair kit (TMK - Temporary
Mobility Kit) is used to seal a puncture and
check and adjust the tyre pressure (p. 387).
Related information
•
Emergency puncture repair kit - location
(p. 319)
•
Emergency puncture repair kit - sealant
(p. 325)
•
Emergency puncture repair (p. 318)
Emergency puncture repair operation
Emergency puncture repair, where the emergency puncture repair kit (TMK - Temporary
Mobility Kit) is used to seal a puncture and
check and adjust the tyre pressure (p. 387).
Emergency puncture repair
Label, maximum permitted speed
Switch
Cable
Bottle holder (orange cap)
Protective cap
Pressure reducing valve
Air hose
Sealing fluid bottle
Pressure gauge
320
For information on the function of the parts, see
Emergency puncture repair kit - overview (p.
320).
09 Wheels and tyres
1. Detach the label for maximum permitted
speed (which is fitted on one side of the
compressor) and affix it to the steering
wheel.
WARNING
You should not drive faster than 80 km/h
after the emergency tyre repair kit has
been used. Volvo recommends that you
visit an authorised Volvo workshop for
inspection of the sealed tyre (maximum
driving distance is 200 km). The staff there
can determine whether or not the tyre can
be repaired or if it needs to be replaced.
4. Screw the bottle into its holder.
WARNING
Do not unscrew the bottle, it is equipped
with a reverse catch to prevent leakage.
5. Remove the valve cover3
Take the torx wrench (which is fitted in the
foam block behind the panel on the lefthand side of the cargo area).
Press the torx wrench into the hole.
Prize off the cover using the torx wrench
(A).
WARNING
6. Connect the hose from the compressor to
the valve.
09
7. Plug the cable into the 12 V socket and
start the car.
NOTE
If the compressor is connected to one of
the two 12 V sockets, in the tunnel console, no other current consumer must be
connected to the other one.
WARNING
Do not leave children in the car without
supervision when the engine is running.
The sealing fluid can irritate the skin. In the
case of contact with skin, wash away the
fluid with soap and water.
2. Check that the switch is in position 0 and
locate the cable and the air hose.
NOTE
Do not break the bottle's seal before use.
The seal is broken automatically when the
bottle is screwed in.
3. Unscrew the orange cap and unscrew the
bottle's stopper.
3
Only 17" wheel Thia
Unscrew the valve cap and disconnect
the hose from the compressor to the
valve.
}}
321
09 Wheels and tyres
09
||
8. Flick the switch to position I.
WARNING
Never stand next to the tyre when the
compressor is running. If cracks or
unevenness arise then the compressor
must be switched off immediately. The
journey should not be continued. Contacting an authorised tyre centre is recommended.
10. Switch off the compressor to check the
pressure on the pressure gauge. Minimum pressure is 1.8 bar and maximum
3.5 bar. (Release air with the pressure
reducing valve if the tyre pressure is too
high.)
WARNING
If the pressure is below 1.8 bar then the
hole in the tyre is too big. The journey
should not be continued. Contacting an
authorised tyre centre is recommended.
NOTE
When the compressor starts, the pressure
can increase up to 6 bar but the pressure
drops after approximately 30 seconds.
9. Inflate the tyre for 7 minutes.
11. Switch off the compressor and unplug the
cable from the 12 V socket.
12. Detach the hose from the tyre valve and
fit the valve cap.
Press the cover3 back over the tyre valve
with the hole against the wheel's hub.
Two clicks confirm that the cover is fitted
in place.
IMPORTANT
Risk of overheating. The compressor must
not run for more than 10 minutes.
13. As soon as possible, drive approximately
3 km at a maximum speed of 80 km/h so
that the sealing fluid can seal the tyre.
Related information
•
•
3
322
Only 17" wheel Thia
Emergency puncture repair (p. 318)
Emergency puncture repair - rechecking
(p. 323)
•
Emergency puncture repair kit - overview
(p. 320)
09 Wheels and tyres
Emergency puncture repair rechecking
Emergency puncture repair, where the emergency puncture repair kit (TMK - Temporary
Mobility Kit) is used to seal a puncture and
check and adjust the tyre pressure (p. 387).
09
WARNING
Do not unscrew the bottle, it is equipped
with a reverse catch to prevent leakage.
3. Make sure the compressor is switched
off. Detach the air hose and cable.
Check tyre pressure
1. Reconnect the equipment (for instructions
on removing the valve cover, see (p.
321)).
2. Read the tyre pressure on the pressure
gauge.
•
•
4
5
bar4
If it is below 1.3
then the tyre is
insufficiently sealed. The journey
should not be continued. Contact a
tyre centre.
If the tyre pressure is higher than 1.3
bar4, the tyre must be inflated to the
pressure specified in accordance with
the tyre pressure table, see Tyres approved tyre pressures (p. 387).
Release air using the pressure reducing valve if the tyre pressure is too
high.
1 bar = 100 kPa.
Only 17" wheel Thia
4. Refit the valve cover5
Fit the valve cap.
Press one edge of the cover (without the
hole) into place (nearest the tyre - B).
Then fold the cover in toward the wheel
rim - and at the same time, gently press
down the angled top edge in order to
help it in under the edge of the wheel rim.
Check that the cover is flush with the surface of the wheel rim - if not, gently press
in the part that is bulging out.
}}
323
09 Wheels and tyres
09
||
NOTE
•
After a tyre has been inflated, always
refit the dust cap in order to avoid
damage to the valve from gravel, dirt,
etc.
•
Only use plastic dust caps. Metal dust
caps can rust and become difficult to
unscrew.
NOTE
The sealing fluid bottle and the hose must
be replaced after use. Volvo recommends
that this replacement is performed by an
authorised Volvo workshop.
WARNING
Check the tyre pressure regularly.
Volvo recommends that you drive to the nearest authorised Volvo workshop for the
replacement/repair of the damaged tyre.
Advise the workshop that the tyre contains
sealing fluid.
WARNING
You should not drive faster than 80 km/h
after the emergency tyre repair kit has
been used. Volvo recommends that you
visit an authorised Volvo workshop for
inspection of the sealed tyre (maximum
driving distance is 200 km). The staff there
can determine whether or not the tyre can
be repaired or if it needs to be replaced.
Related information
•
•
•
Emergency puncture repair (p. 318)
Emergency puncture repair - operation (p.
320)
Emergency puncture repair kit - overview
(p. 320)
Emergency puncture repair kit inflating the tyres
The car's original tyres can be inflated using
the compressor in the emergency puncture
repair kit (p. 320).
1. The compressor must be switched off.
Make sure that the switch is in position 0
and locate the cable and air hose.
2. Remove the valve cover6 - for instructions
on removing the valve cover, see (p. 321).
3. Unscrew the wheel's dust cap and screw
in the air hose valve connection to the
bottom of the thread on the tyre's air
valve.
WARNING
Inhaling car exhaust fumes could result in
danger to life. Never leave the engine running in sealed areas or areas that lack sufficient ventilation.
WARNING
Do not leave children in the car without
supervision when the engine is running.
4. Connect the cable to one of the car's
12 V sockets and start the car.
6
324
Only 17" wheel Thia
09 Wheels and tyres
5. Start the compressor by flicking the
switch to position I.
IMPORTANT
Risk of overheating. The compressor must
not run for more than 10 minutes.
6. Inflate the tyre to the pressure specified in
accordance with the tyre pressure table,
Tyres - approved tyre pressures (p. 387).
Release air using the pressure reducing
valve if the tyre pressure is too high.
Related information
•
•
•
Emergency puncture repair (p. 318)
Emergency puncture repair kit - overview
(p. 320)
Emergency puncture repair - rechecking
(p. 323)
Emergency puncture repair kit sealant
The container (bottle) with the emergency
puncture repair kit (p. 320) contains sealant
and it can be replaced.
Replace the bottle when the expiration date
has passed. Treat the old bottle as environmentally hazardous waste.
WARNING
The bottle contains 1.2-Ethanol and natural rubber-latex.
7. Refit the dust cap.
Refit the valve cover6 by pressing one
edge of the cover (the one without the
hole) into place (nearest the tyre), see
Emergency puncture repair - rechecking
(p. 323). Then fold the cover in toward the
wheel rim - and at the same time, gently
press down the angled top edge in order
to help it in under the edge of the wheel
rim. Check that the cover is flush with the
surface of the wheel rim - if not, gently
press in the part that is bulging out.
09
Harmful if ingested. Could result in allergic
reaction in the event of skin contact.
Avoid contact with the skin and eyes.
Store out of the reach of children.
Related information
•
Emergency puncture repair (p. 318)
8. Switch off the compressor Detach the air
hose and cable.
6
Only 17" wheel Thia
325
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
10 Maintenance and service
Volvo service programme
To keep the car as safe and reliable as possible, follow the Volvo service programme as
specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet.
Volvo recommends engaging an authorised
Volvo workshop to perform the service and
maintenance work. Volvo workshops have the
personnel, special tools and service literature
to guarantee the highest quality of service.
Service interval and next service,
charging cable
The hour meter on the charging cable counts
charging time until the next service interval.
Volvo recommends that the control unit is
checked by an electrician after every 5000
operating hours.
10
IMPORTANT
Do not modify the control unit in any way.
IMPORTANT
For the Volvo warranty to apply, check and
follow the instructions in the Service and
Warranty Booklet.
Related information
•
Climate control system - fault tracing and
repair (p. 336)
Service and repair
Service your car regularly. Follow Volvo's recommended service intervals.
If inspection and repair are required then only
an authorised Volvo workshop may carry out
the work.
WARNING
Do not carry out any repairs of your own
on this vehicle. Electrical cables and/or
components that have detached must only
be rectified by an authorised workshop an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
327
10 Maintenance and service
Raising the car
10
When raising the car it is important that the
jack or lifting arms are fitted in the intended
points on the car's underbody.
NOTE
Volvo recommends only using the jack that
belongs to the car model in question. If a
jack is selected other than the one recommended by Volvo, follow the instructions
supplied with the equipment.
328
10 Maintenance and service
10
Jacking points (arrows) for the jack that belongs to the car and lifting points (marked in red).
If the car is raised with a front workshop jack
then it must be positioned under one of the
four lifting points furthest in under the car. If
the car is raised with a rear workshop jack
then it must be positioned under one of the
lifting points. Ensure that the workshop jack
is positioned so that the car cannot slide off
the jack. Always use axle stands or similar.
If the car is raised with a two-pillar workshop
lift then the front and rear lifting arms can be
positioned under the outer lifting points (jacking points). Alternatively, the inner lifting
points can be used at the front.
Related information
•
Changing wheels - removing wheels (p.
312)
329
10 Maintenance and service
Bonnet - opening and closing
10
Move the catch to the left and open the
bonnet. (The catch hook is located
between the headlamp and grille, see
illustration.)
The bonnet can be opened when the handle
in the passenger compartment has been
turned clockwise and the lock by the grille has
been moved to the left.
WARNING
Check that the bonnet locks properly when
closed.
Engine compartment - overview
The overview shows normal checking points.
Some of the car's batteries and several of the
components included in the car's electric
drive system are located under the bonnet.
Exercise caution in this area and only touch
anything that is related to normal maintenance.
Related information
•
•
Engine compartment - checking (p. 331)
Engine compartment - overview (p. 330)
WARNING
Orange cables marked with a high-voltage
decal must only be handled by qualified
personnel.
The handle for bonnet opening is always on the
left-hand side.
WARNING
Several components in the car operate
with lethal high-voltage electricity.
Turn the handle about 20-25 degrees
clockwise. You will hear when the catch
releases.
330
•
Do not touch anything that is not
clearly described in this owner's manual.
•
Exercise caution when checking/refilling fluids in the engine compartment.
10 Maintenance and service
Related information
•
•
Bonnet - opening and closing (p. 330)
Engine compartment - checking (p. 331)
Engine compartment - checking
Some oils and fluids should be checked at
regular intervals.
Regular checking
Check the following oils and fluids at regular
intervals, e.g. when refuelling:
Normal checking points - other parts require
specialist expertise.
•
•
•
•
Filling engine oil
Always have the engine cleaned by a
workshop. There is a risk of fire if the
engine is hot.
Checking/filling of brake fluid (on driver's
side)
Battery
WARNING
The car's electrical system must always be
in key position 0 when work is being performed in the engine compartment; see
Key positions - functions at different levels
(p. 73).
Power steering fluid
Washer fluid
Remember that the radiator fan (located at
the front of the engine compartment,
behind the radiator) may start automatically some after the engine has been
switched off.
Checking/filling the power steering fluid
Filling washer fluid
Coolant
Engine oil
WARNING
Checking/refilling the coolant for the cooling and climate control systems.
Relay and fuse box
10
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
Bonnet - opening and closing (p. 330)
Engine compartment - overview (p. 330)
Coolant - level (p. 334)
Engine oil - checking and filling (p. 333)
Power steering fluid - level (p. 336)
Washer fluid - filling (p. 346)
331
10 Maintenance and service
Engine oil - general
10
An approved engine oil must be used in order
that the recommended service intervals can
be applied.
When driving under adverse conditions, see
Engine oil - adverse driving conditions (p.
379).
IMPORTANT
In order to fulfil the requirements for the
engine's service intervals all engines are
filled with a specially adapted synthetic
engine oil at the factory. The choice of oil
has been made very carefully with regard
to service life, starting characteristics, fuel
consumption and environmental impact.
Volvo recommends:
An approved engine oil must be used in
order that the recommended service intervals can be applied. Only use a prescribed
grade of oil for both filling and oil change,
otherwise you will risk affecting service life,
starting characteristics, fuel consumption
and environmental impact.
Volvo Car Corporation disclaims all warranty liability if engine oil of the prescribed
grade and viscosity is not used.
Volvo recommends that oil changes are
carried out at an authorised Volvo workshop.
Volvo uses different systems for warning of
low/high oil level or low/high oil pressure.
Certain engine variants have an oil pressure
sensor, and then the combined instrument
panel's warning symbol for low oil pressure is
used. Other variants have an oil level sensor,
when the driver is informed via the instrument's warning symbol
and display
332
texts. Certain variants have both systems.
Contact a Volvo dealer for more information.
Change the engine oil and oil filter in accordance with the intervals specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet.
Using oil of a higher than specified grade is
permitted. If the car is driven in adverse conditions, Volvo recommends using an oil of a
higher grade; see Engine oil - adverse driving
conditions (p. 379).
For filling capacities, see Engine oil - grade
and volume (p. 381).
Related information
•
Engine oil - checking and filling (p. 333)
10 Maintenance and service
Engine oil - checking and filling
WARNING
The oil level is checked with the electronic oil
level sensor.
Do not fill more oil if filling level (3) or (4)
appears as shown in the illustration below.
The level must never be above MAX or
below MIN, as this could lead to engine
damage.
Engine with electronic oil level sensor,
5-cyl. diesel
10
NOTE
Message and graph in the display.
Message
Engine oil level
Filler pipe.1
You do not need to take action with respect
to the engine oil level before a message is
shown in the display, see the illustration
below.
The oil level is checked using the electronic
oil level gauge with the thumbwheel when the
engine is switched off, see Menu navigation combined instrument panel (p. 103).
WARNING
If the message Oil service required is
shown, visit a workshop. The oil level may
be too high.
IMPORTANT
The oil level is only detected by the system
when certain conditions are fulfilled. For
this reason the system cannot always
directly detect changes when the oil is
filled or drained. Under certain conditions,
internal combustion engine operation may
be required for approx. 30 km.
WARNING
Do not spill oil onto the hot exhaust manifold due to the risk of fire.
Measuring the oil level, 5-cyl. diesel
If the oil level needs to be checked then it
should be carried out in accordance with the
sequence below.
1. Activate key position II; see Key positions
- functions at different levels (p. 73).
In the event of the message Oil level low
Refill 0.5 litre, only fill with 0.5 litres.
1
Engines with electronic oil level sensor do not have a dipstick.
}}
333
10 Maintenance and service
10
||
2. Rotate the thumbwheel on the left-hand
stalk switch to position Oil level.
> You will then see information displayed
about the engine oil level.
For more information on menu navigation, see Menu navigation - combined
instrument panel (p. 103).
Coolant - level
The coolant cools the internal combustion
engine to the correct operating temperature.
The heat that is transferred from the engine to
the coolant can be used to heat the passenger compartment.
The coolant level must lie between the MIN
and MAX marks on the expansion tank.
Checking the level and topping up
WARNING
Coolant can be very hot. If the coolant
requires topping up when the engine is at
operating temperature, unscrew the
expansion tank cap slowly to gently
release the overpressure.
For capacities and for standards regarding
water quality; see Coolant - grade and volume (p. 382).
Check the coolant regularly
The level must lie between the MIN and MAX
marks on the expansion tank. If the system is
not filled sufficiently, high temperatures could
occur, causing a risk of damage to the
engine.
The figures 1-4 represent filling level. Do not fill
more oil if filling level (3) or (4) is shown. Recommended filling level is 4. Message and graph in
the display.
Related information
•
334
Engine oil - general (p. 332)
When topping up the coolant, follow the
instructions on the packaging. It is important
that the mixture of coolant concentrate and
water is correct for the prevailing weather
conditions. Never top up with water only. The
risk of freezing increases with both too little
and too much coolant concentrate.
10 Maintenance and service
IMPORTANT
Brake and clutch fluid - level
•
A high content of chlorine, chlorides
and other salts may cause corrosion in
the cooling system.
•
Always use coolant with anti-corrosion
agent as recommended by Volvo.
Checking the level
•
Ensure that the coolant mixture is 50%
water and 50% coolant.
•
Mix the coolant with approved quality
tap water. In the event of any doubt
about water quality, used ready-mixed
coolant in accordance with Volvo recommendations.
•
When changing coolant/replacing
cooling system components, flush the
cooling system clean with approved
quality tap water or flush with readymixed coolant.
•
The engine must only be run with a
well-filled cooling system. Otherwise,
temperatures that are too high may
occur resulting in the risk of damage
(cracks) in the cylinder head.
Filling
The brake fluid level should be between container's MIN and MAX marks.
10
The level must be between the MIN and MAX
marks that are visible inside the reservoir.
Check the level regularly.
Change the brake fluid every other year or at
every other regular service.
For capacities and recommended brake fluid
grade, see Brake fluid - grade and volume (p.
384). The fluid should be changed annually on
cars driven in conditions requiring hard, frequent braking, such as driving in mountains
or tropical climates with high humidity.
WARNING
If the brake fluid is under the MIN level in
the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive further before topping up the brake fluid.
Volvo recommends that the reason for the
loss of brake fluid is investigated by an
authorised Volvo workshop.
The fluid reservoir is located on the driver's side.
The fluid reservoir is protected under the
cover over the cold zone in the engine compartment. The round cover must be removed
first before the reservoir cap can be reached.
Turn and open the cover located on the
covering.
Unscrew the reservoir cap and fill the
fluid. The level must be between the MIN
and MAX marks, which are located on
the inside of the reservoir.
IMPORTANT
Do not forget to refit the cap.
335
10 Maintenance and service
Power steering fluid - level
10
The power steering fluid level must be
between the MIN and MAX marks. The fluid
does not need to be changed.
NOTE
If a fault should arise in the power steering
system, or if the engine is switched off and
must be towed, then the car can still be
steered.
Climate control system - fault tracing
and repair
The air conditioning system must only be
serviced and repaired by an authorised workshop.
Troubleshooting and repair
The air conditioning system contains fluorescent tracing agents. Use ultraviolet light when
looking for leaks.
Volvo recommends that you contact an
authorised Volvo workshop.
WARNING
The air conditioning system contains pressurised refrigerant R134a. This system
must only be serviced and repaired by an
authorised workshop.
IMPORTANT
Keep the area around the power steering
fluid reservoir clean when checking. The
cover must not be opened.
Check the level frequently. The fluid does not
require changing. The fluid level must be
between the MIN and MAX marks. For recommended fluid grade, see Power steering
fluid - grade (p. 384).
336
Related information
•
Volvo service programme (p. 327)
10 Maintenance and service
Lamp replacement
Lamp replacement can be carried out for
bulbs. When replacing LED and Xenon lamps,
please refer to a workshop.
The bulbs are specified (p. 343). The following list contains locations of bulbs and other
light sources that are specialised, such as
LED2 lamps, or are unsuitable for changing
for some other reason, except at a workshop:
•
Active Xenon headlamps - ABL (Xenon
lamps)
•
Daytime running lights/Position/parking
lamps front
•
•
•
•
•
WARNING
The car's electrical system must be in key
position 0 for bulb replacement; see Key
positions - functions at different levels (p.
73).
Side marker lamps front
Cornering lights
Side direction indicators, door mirrors
Approach lighting, door mirrors
Interior lighting apart from Courtesy lighting front
•
•
Glovebox lighting
•
Brake light.
2
WARNING
Position/parking lamps rear/Side marker
lamps rear
NOTE
On cars with Xenon headlamps, the
replacement of Xenon lamps must be carried out at a workshop - an authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended. Working
with Xenon lamps demands extreme caution because the headlamp is equipped
with a high voltage unit.
IMPORTANT
Never touch the glass part of the bulbs
with your fingers. Grease from your fingers
is vaporised by the heat, coating the
reflector and then causing damage.
Outside lighting such as headlamps, fog
lamps and rear lamps may temporarily
have condensation on the inside of the
lens. This is normal, all exterior lighting is
designed to withstand this. Condensation
is normally vented out of the lamp housing
when the lamp has been switched on for a
time.
10
Related information
•
•
Lamp replacement - headlamps (p. 338)
Lamp replacement - location of rear
lamps (p. 342)
•
Lamp replacement - vanity mirror lighting
(p. 343)
•
Lamp replacement - lighting in cargo area
(p. 342)
•
Lamp replacement - number plate lighting
(p. 342)
NOTE
If an error message remains after the broken bulb has been replaced then we recommend that you visit an authorised Volvo
workshop.
LED (Light Emitting Diode)
337
10 Maintenance and service
Lamp replacement - headlamps
10
1. Plug in the connector, a clicking sound
should be heard.
All of the headlamp bulbs are replaced via the
engine compartment. First loosen and remove
the whole headlamp.
2. Reinstall the headlamp and locking pins.
The short pin is fitted closest to the grille.
Check that they are correctly inserted.
Removing the headlamp
3. Check the lighting.
Set the car's electrical system in key position
0, see Key positions - functions at different
levels (p. 73).
Detach the headlamp connector by
pressing down the clip with your thumb.
At the same time, guide out the connector with your other hand.
5. Lift out the headlamp and place it on a
soft surface to avoid scratching the lens.
6. Replace the bulb in question.
Pull out the headlamp's locking pins.
Release the headlamp by alternately tilting and pulling it out.
IMPORTANT
Do not pull the electrical cable, only the
connector.
338
Securing the headlamp
The headlamp must be mounted and the connector correctly installed before the lighting is
switched on or the remote control key is
inserted into the ignition switch.
Related information
•
•
•
Lamp replacement (p. 337)
Lamp replacement - cover for main/
dipped beam bulbs (p. 339)
Lamps - specifications (p. 343)
10 Maintenance and service
Lamp replacement - cover for main/
dipped beam bulbs
Main/dipped beam bulbs are accessed by
releasing the headlamp's larger cover.
•
•
Lamp replacement - main beam (p. 340)
Lamp replacement - dipped beam
Lamp replacement - extra main beam (p.
340)
The dipped beam bulb is fitted inside the
headlamp's larger cover.
NOTE
10
Applies to cars with halogen headlamps.
Before starting to replace a bulb, see Lamp
replacement - headlamps (p. 338).
1. Unscrew the cover's four screws using a
Torx tool, size T20 (1). They should not be
loosened completely. (3 - 4 turns are sufficient.)
2. Slide the cover to one side.
3. Remove the cover.
Reinstall the cover in reverse order.
Related information
•
•
Lamp replacement - headlamps (p. 338)
Lamp replacement - dipped beam (p.
339)
1. Detach the headlamp (p. 338).
2. Remove the cover (p. 339).
3. Unplug the connector from the bulb.
4. Detach the bulb by pulling it straight out.
5. The guide pin on the lamp should be
straight up when it is fitted and a clicking
sound should be heard when it clicks into
place.
Reinstall the parts in reverse order.
Related information
•
Lamps - specifications (p. 343)
339
10 Maintenance and service
Lamp replacement - main beam
Lamp replacement - extra main beam
The main beam bulb is fitted inside the headlamp's larger cover.
The extra main beam bulb is fitted inside the
headlamp's larger cover.
NOTE
10
NOTE
Applies to cars with halogen headlamps.
Lamp replacement - direction
indicators front
The direction indicator lamp is fitted inside
the headlamp's smaller cover.
Applies to cars with Xenon headlamps*.
1. Detach the headlamp (p. 338).
2. Detach the cover by pulling it straight out.
1. Detach the headlamp (p. 338).
1. Detach the headlamp (p. 338).
2. Remove the cover (p. 339).
2. Remove the cover (p. 339).
3. Detach the bulb by turning anticlockwise
and then pulling straight out.
3. Detach the bulb by turning anticlockwise
and then pulling straight out.
4. Unplug the connector from the bulb.
4. Unplug the connector from the bulb.
5. Replace the bulb and align it in the socket
and turn clockwise in order to secure it. It
can be secured in one position.
5. Replace the bulb and align it in the socket
and turn clockwise in order to secure it. It
can only be secured in one position.
Reinstall the parts in reverse order.
Reinstall the parts in reverse order.
Related information
Related information
•
340
Lamps - specifications (p. 343)
•
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Lamps - specifications (p. 343)
3. Pull the bulb holder in order to extract the
bulb.
4. Press and simultaneously turn the bulb to
detach it.
Reinstall the parts in reverse order.
Related information
•
Lamps - specifications (p. 343)
10 Maintenance and service
Lamp replacement - rear lamp
Related information
Rear direction indicators, rear fog lamp and
reversing lamp are replaced from inside the
cargo area.
Lamp housing, rear
•
Lamp replacement - location of rear
lamps (p. 342)
•
Lamps - specifications (p. 343)
10
The lamps are accessible when emergency
puncture repair kit is lifted out.
1. Open the panel.
2. Lift the emergency puncture repair kit.
The bulbs for reversing lamp, fog lamp and
direction indicator in the rear lamp cluster are
replaced from inside the cargo area.
3. Remove the insulation that is fitted in
front of the bulb holder by pulling it
straight out.
4. Press down the catch and pull out the
bulb holder.
5. Remove the blown bulb by pressing it in
and turning anticlockwise.
6. Fit a new bulb, press down and turn
clockwise.
7. Press down the catch when the bulb
holder is refitted.
8. Refit the insulation, emergency puncture
repair kit and panel.
341
10 Maintenance and service
Lamp replacement - number plate
lighting
Lamp replacement - lighting in cargo
area
The overview shows the location of the lamps
at the rear.
The number plate lighting is located under the
tailgate handle.
The cargo area lighting is located in the tailgate.
Brake light (LED)
1. Remove the screws with a screwdriver.
Position/parking lamps (LED)/Side marker
lamps (LED)
2. Carefully detach the whole lamp housing
and withdraw it.
1. Insert a screwdriver and gently prize so
that the lamp housing comes loose.
Indicator (p. 341)
3. Replace the bulb.
Brake light (LED)
4. Refit the whole lamp housing and screw it
into place.
G031942
10
Lamp replacement - location of rear
lamps
Reversing lamp
Rear fog lamp
Related information
•
•
342
Lamp replacement (p. 337)
Lamps - specifications (p. 343)
Related information
•
Lamps - specifications (p. 343)
2. Replace the bulb.
3. Check that the bulb illuminates and press
back the lamp housing.
Related information
•
Lamps - specifications (p. 343)
10 Maintenance and service
Lamp replacement - vanity mirror
lighting
The vanity mirror's lamps are fitted inside the
lamp lenses.
Removal of lamp lens
1. Insert a screwdriver under the lamp lens
and gently prize up the lug on the edge.
2. Carefully detach and lift aside the lamp
lens.
3. Use needle-nose pliers to pull the bulb
straight out to the side and replace with a
new one. Note! - Do not pinch hard with
the pliers. Otherwise the lamp lens could
then be crushed.
Attaching the lamp lens
1. Refit the lamp lens.
2. Press it into place.
Related information
•
Lamps - specifications (p. 343)
Lamps - specifications
The specifications apply to bulbs. When
replacing LED and Xenon lamps, please refer
to a workshop.
Lighting
WA
Type
Dipped beam,
halogen
55
H7 LL
Main beam, Halogen
65
H9
Extra main beam,
ABL
65
H9
Front direction
indicators
24
PY24W
Courtesy lighting
front
3
T10 Socket
W2.1x9.5d
Glovebox lighting
5
Socket SV8.5
Length 43 mm
1,2
T5 Socket
W2x4.6d
Cargo area lighting
5
Socket SV8.5
Length 43 mm
Number plate
lighting
5
C5W LL
Direction indicators, rear
21
PY21W LL
Vanity mirror
lighting
10
343
10 Maintenance and service
||
Lighting
WA
–
10
Type
–
–
Reversing lamp
21
P21W LL
Rear fog lamp
21
H21W LL
Watt
A
Related information
•
•
•
Wiper blades
The wiper blades sweep water away from the
windscreen and rear window. Together with
the washer fluid they clean the windows and
ensure visibility for driving.
The windscreen wiper blades must be in service position when they are to be replaced.
Service position
Lamp replacement (p. 337)
Lamp replacement - location of rear
lamps (p. 342)
In order to make replacement possible, to
clean or lift the wiper blades (for scraping off
ice from the windscreen, for example), they
must be in service position.
344
Not necessary in cars with Keyless function.
1. Place the remote control key in the ignition lock3 and briefly press the START/
STOP ENGINE button to set the car's
electrical system to key position I. For
detailed information on key positions, see
Key positions - functions at different levels (p. 73).
2. Briefly press the START/STOP ENGINE
button again to set the car’s electrical
system in key position 0.
Lamp replacement - vanity mirror lighting
(p. 343)
Wiper blades in service position.
3
IMPORTANT
Before placing the wiper blades in the
service position, make sure that they are
not frozen down.
3. Within 3 seconds, move the right stalk
switch up and hold it in position for
approx. 1 second.
> The wipers then move to standing
straight up.
The wipers return to their starting position
when you briefly press the START/STOP
ENGINE button to set the car’s electrical system to key position I (or when the car is
started).
10 Maintenance and service
IMPORTANT
If the wiper arms in service position have
been folded up from the windscreen, they
must be folded back down onto the windscreen before the wipers are allowed to
return to their starting position. This is to
avoid scraping the paint on the bonnet.
10
Replacing the wiper blades
Fold up the wiper arm when it is in service position. Press the button located on
the wiper blade mounting and pull
straight out parallel with the wiper arm.
Slide in the new wiper blade until a "click"
is heard.
Check that the blade is firmly installed.
4. Fold the wiper arm back towards the
windscreen.
The wipers return from service position to
their starting position when you briefly press
the START/STOP ENGINE button to set the
car’s electrical system to key position I (or
when the car is started).
NOTE
The wiper blades are different lengths. The
blade on the driver's side is longer than on
the passenger side.
Replacing the wiper blades, rear
window
}}
345
10 Maintenance and service
||
1. Fold out the wiper arm.
2. Grip the inner section of the blade (by the
arrow).
10
3. Turn anticlockwise to use the blade's end
position against the wiper arm as a lever
to detach the blade more easily.
Washer fluid - filling
Battery
Washer fluid is used for cleaning the headlamps and windows. Washer fluid with antifreeze must be used during winter.
The service life and function of the battery is
influenced by factors such as the number of
starts, discharging, driving style, driving conditions, climatic conditions etc.
The car's traditional 12 V battery is here
called "starter battery" even if the hybrid battery (p. 350) is often used for starting the
internal combustion engine.
4. Press the new wiper blade into position.
Check that it is firmly installed.
5. Lower the wiper arm.
Cleaning
For cleaning wiper blades and windscreen,
see Car washing (p. 365).
•
Never disconnect the battery when the
engine is running.
•
Check that the cables to the battery are
correctly connected and properly tightened.
IMPORTANT
Check the blades regularly. Neglected
maintenance shortens the service life of
the wiper blades.
WARNING
The windscreen and headlamp washers share
a common reservoir.
Use washer fluid with antifreeze during the
winter to avoid freezing in the pump, reservoir and hoses.
Washer fluid - filling (p. 346)
For capacities, see Washer fluid - quality and
volume (p. 384).
Related information
•
346
The battery can generate oxyhydrogen
gas, which is highly explosive. A spark
can be formed if a jump lead is connected incorrectly, and this can be
enough for the battery to explode.
•
The battery contains sulphuric acid,
which can cause serious burns.
•
If sulphuric acid comes into contact
with eyes, skin or clothing, flush with
large quantities of water. If acid
splashes into the eyes - seek medical
attention immediately.
IMPORTANT
Related information
•
•
Wiper blades (p. 344)
10 Maintenance and service
IMPORTANT
NOTE
Only a traditional battery charger should
ever be used when charging the battery.
The life of the battery is shortened if it
becomes discharged repeatedly.
The life of the battery is affected by several
factors, including driving conditions and
climate. Battery starting capacity decreases gradually with time and therefore
needs to be recharged if the car is not
used for a longer time or when it is only
driven short distances. Extreme cold further limits starting capacity.
NOTE
If both the starter battery and the hybrid
battery (p. 286) are discharged then both
batteries must be charged. In such a case,
charging only the hybrid battery first is not
possible.
To maintain the battery in good condition,
at least 15 minutes of driving/week is recommended or that the battery is connected to a battery charger with automatic
trickle charging.
IMPORTANT
If the following instruction is not observed
then the energy saving function for infotainment may be temporarily disengaged,
and/or the message in the information display about the main battery's state of
charge may be temporarily inapplicable,
following the connection of an external
battery or battery charger:
•
The negative battery terminal on the
car's starter battery must never be
used for connecting an external battery or battery charger - only the car
chassis may be used as the grounding point.
See Jump starting with battery (p. 256) for
a description of how the cable clamps
must be attached.
Battery - symbols
There are information and warning symbols
on the battery.
Symbols on the battery
10
Use protective goggles.
Further information is
available in the owner's
manual.
A battery that is kept fully charged has a
maximum service life.
Related information
•
•
Store the battery out of
the reach of children.
Battery - symbols (p. 347)
Starter battery - replacement (p. 348)
The battery contains corrosive acid.
347
10 Maintenance and service
||
Avoid sparks and naked
flames.
10
Risk of explosion.
Starter battery - replacement
The starter battery in the car can be replaced
without the help of a workshop.
The car's traditional 12 V battery is here
called "starter battery" even if the hybrid battery (p. 350) is often used for starting the
internal combustion engine.
Removal
Must be taken for recycling.
NOTE
An expended battery must be recycled in
an environmentally safe manner as it contains lead.
Related information
•
348
Battery (p. 346)
First of all: Take the remote control key from
the ignition switch and wait at least 5 minutes
before any electrical connections are touched
- this is because the car's electrical system
needs to store the necessary information to
control modules.
10 Maintenance and service
Move the battery aside.
Lift it up.
Fitting
For more information on the car's battery Electrical system (p. 388).
10
Open the clips on the front cover and
remove the cover.
Release the rubber moulding so that the
rear cover is free.
Remove the rear cover by screwing one
quarter turn and lifting it away.
WARNING
Connect and remove the positive and negative cables in the correct order.
Detach the black negative cable.
Detach the red positive cable.
Detach the ventilation hose from the battery.
Loosen the screw holding the battery
clamp.
1. Lower the battery into the battery box.
2. Move the battery inward and to the side
until it reaches the rear edge of the box.
3. Tighten the clamp that holds the battery.
4. Connect the ventilation hose.
> Check that it is correctly connected to
both battery and outlet in the body.
5. Connect the red positive cable.
6. Connect the black negative cable.
7. Press in the rear cover. (See earlier section "Removal".)
8. Fit the rubber moulding. (See "Removal".)
9. Align the front cover and secure it with
the clips. (See "Removal".)
349
10 Maintenance and service
Hybrid battery
10
The car is equipped with a hybrid battery for
electric motor operation - a maintenance-free
rechargeable Lithium-ion type battery.
WARNING
The hybrid battery must only be replaced
by a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
•
Charging the hybrid battery - preparations (p. 288)
Fuses - general
All electrical functions and components are
protected by a number of fuses in order to
protect the car's electrical system from damage by short circuiting or overloading.
WARNING
Orange cables marked with a high-voltage
decal must only be handled by qualified
personnel.
Coolant
The hybrid battery's cooling system has a
separate expansion tank.
WARNING
Several components in the car operate
with lethal high-voltage electricity.
Do not touch anything that is not clearly
described in this owner's manual.
If an electrical component or function does
not work, it may be because the component's
fuse was temporarily overloaded and failed. If
the same fuse fails repeatedly then there is a
fault in the circuit. Volvo recommends that
you visit an authorised Volvo workshop for
checking.
IMPORTANT
The hybrid battery's coolant must only be
topped up by a workshop - an authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended.
350
Changing
1. Look in the fuse diagram to locate the
fuse.
2. Pull out the fuse and check from the side
to see whether the curved wire has
blown.
10 Maintenance and service
3. If this is the case, replace it with a new
fuse of the same colour and amperage.
WARNING
Never use a foreign object or a fuse with
an amperage higher than that specified
when replacing a fuse. This could cause
significant damage to the electrical system
and possibly lead to fire.
Location of central electrical units
Cargo area
Engine compartment, cold zone
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
Fuses - in engine compartment (p. 352)
10
Fuses - under glovebox (p. 355)
Fuses - in the control module under the
glovebox (p. 357)
Fuses - in cargo area (p. 359)
Fuses - in the engine compartment's cold
zone (p. 363)
Central electrical unit locations in a left-hand
drive car. In a right-hand drive car the central
electrical units under the glovebox change
sides.
Engine compartment
Under the glovebox
Under the glovebox
351
10 Maintenance and service
Fuses - in engine compartment
10
352
Fuses in the engine compartment protect
engine and brake functions, amongst other
things.
10 Maintenance and service
General fuses, engine compartment
On the inside of the cover there are tweezers
that facilitate the procedure for the removal
and fitting of fuses.
Positions (see preceding illustration)
Engine compartment, upper
Engine compartment, front
Engine compartment, lower
These fuses are all located in the engine compartment box. The fuses in (C) are located
under (A).
On the inside of the cover is a label that
shows the location of the fuses.
•
•
•
Fuses 1-7 and 42-44 are of the "Midi
Fuse" type and must only be replaced by
a workshop4.
A
Function
A
–
–
Primary fuse for the central
electronic module (CEM) under
the glovebox
20
ABS
5
Adjustable steering force*
5
Engine control module; Transmission control module; Airbags
10
Heated washer nozzles*
10
Primary fuse for relay/fuse box
under the glovebox
60
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Windscreen wipers
30
Parking heater*
25
–
–
Fuses 8-15 and 34 are of the "JCASE"
type and should be replaced by a workshop4
–
–
ABS pump
40
Fuses 16-33 and 35-41 are of the "Mini
Fuse" type.
ABS valves
20
20
10
Function
A
Headlamp washer*
–
–
Headlamp levelling*; Active
Xenon headlamps - ABL*
Primary fuse for the central
electronic module (CEM) under
the glovebox
4
Function
10
–
–
Light switches
5
–
–
–
–
–
–
Relay coils
5
Auxiliary lamps*
20
Horn
15
50
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
353
10 Maintenance and service
||
10
Function
A
Function
A
Relay coil in main relay for
engine management system;
Engine control module
10
Crankcase ventilation heater
5
Transmission control module
15
Glow plugs
70
Cooling fan
80
Power steering
100
354
•
•
•
–
–
Relay coils in central electrical
unit in engine compartment
cold zone
5
Start relay
30
Glow control module
10
Engine Control Module (ECM)
15
Mass air flow sensor; Control
valves
15
Valves; Oil level sensor
10
Lambda-sond; Control module,
radiator roller cover
10
Diesel filter heater
Related information
Behind the engine
20
A: Left-hand drive car. B: Right-hand drive car.
Fuse
Function
A
Monitoring of vacuum pump for
brake system
5
Fuses - under glovebox (p. 355)
Fuses - in the control module under the
glovebox (p. 357)
Fuses - in cargo area (p. 359)
10 Maintenance and service
Fuses - under glovebox
Fuses under the glovebox protect the infotainment and seat functions, amongst other
things.
Positions
Function
A
Primary fuse for audio control
module*; Primary fuse for fuses
16-20: Infotainment
40
Windscreen washers; Rear window washer
25
–
–
–
–
10
Function
A
Function
A
–
–
20
Door handle (Keyless*)
5
Control panel, rear passenger
door, right
–
Control panel, rear passenger
door, left
20
–
Control panel, driver's door
20
Keyless*
7,5
Control panel, front passenger
door
20
Power seat driver's side*
20
Power seat passenger side*
20
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
355
10 Maintenance and service
||
10
356
Function
A
Function
A
–
–
5
Infotainment control module;
ScreenA
5
Parking assistance*; Parking
camera*; Towbar control module*
Audio control unit (amplifier)*,
Digital radio*; TV*
10
Audio or Control Module SensusA
15
Telematics*; Bluetooth*
5
–
–
Sunroof*; Interior lighting roof;
Climate sensor*; Damper
motors, air intake
5
12 V socket, tunnel console
15
Seat heating, rear right*
15
Seat heating, rear left*
15
Electrically-driven heater
5
Seat heating (passenger side)
15
Seat heating (driver's side)
15
BLIS*
A
–
–
–
–
Certain model variants.
Related information
•
•
•
•
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Fuses - in engine compartment (p. 352)
Fuses - in the control module under the
glovebox (p. 357)
Fuses - in cargo area (p. 359)
Fuses - in the engine compartment's cold
zone (p. 363)
10 Maintenance and service
Fuses - in the control module under
the glovebox
Fuses in the control module under the glovebox protect airbag and collision warning system functions, amongst other things.
Positions
Function
A
Rear window wiper
15
–
Interior lighting; Driver's door
control panel, power windows;
Remote controlled garage door
opener*; Power seats, front*
–
7,5
10
Function
A
Function
A
Combined instrument panel
5
Heated steering wheel*
15
Adaptive cruise control, ACC*;
collision warning system*
10
Heated windscreen*
15
Interior lighting; Rain sensor
7,5
Unlocking, tailgate
10
Steering wheel module
7,5
Folding head restraint*
10
Central locking system, fuel
filler flap
10
Fuel pump
20
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
357
10 Maintenance and service
||
10
Function
A
Movement detector alarm*; Climate panel
5
Steering lock
15
Siren*; Data link connector
OBDII
5
–
–
Airbags
10
Collision warning*
5
Accelerator pedal sensor; Dimming interior rearview mirror*;
Seat heating, rear*
7,5
Infotainment control module
(Performance); Audio (Performance)
15
Brake lights
5
Sunroof*
20
Immobiliser
5
•
Related information
•
•
•
358
Fuses - in engine compartment (p. 352)
Fuses - under glovebox (p. 355)
Fuses - in cargo area (p. 359)
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Fuses - in the engine compartment's cold
zone (p. 363)
10 Maintenance and service
Fuses - in cargo area
Fuses in the cargo area protect trailer and
electric drive functions, amongst other things.
10
The fuse box is located behind the upholstery on the left-hand side.
}}
359
10 Maintenance and service
||
Box A
10
Function
A
–
–
–
–
Trailer socket 1*
–
The emergency puncture repair kit needs to be
lifted out for the central electrical unit to be
accessible.
Positions
Box A
Function
A
Electric parking brake, left
30
Electric parking brake, right
30
Rear window defroster
30
Trailer socket 2*
15
–
12 V socket, cargo area
360
–
15
–
–
–
–
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
40
–
10 Maintenance and service
10
The fuse box is located behind the upholstery on the left-hand side.
Box
B
The emergency puncture repair kit needs to be
lifted out for the central electrical unit to be
accessible.
Function
A
Coolant pump 1 for hybrid
battery; Valve for coolant
pumps 1 and 2
Box
B
Function
A
10
Charging unit; Voltage converter 400 V-12 V; Control
module for hybrid battery
10
Coolant pump 2 for hybrid
battery
10
10
Charging unit; Voltage converter 400 V-12 V; Control
module for hybrid battery
5
Relay coils; Hazard voltage
converter for electric motor
and combined hazard voltage generator/starter motor
15
Coolant pump for the cooling system's low temperature circuit
15
Disengaging the electric
motor from the rear axle
–
–
}}
361
10 Maintenance and service
||
Box
B
10
Function
A
Hazard voltage converter for
electric motor and combined
hazard voltage generator/
starter motor; Control module for hybrid battery
10
Coolant valves for the cooling system's low temperature circuit; Electric A/C
compressor; Valve for heat
exchanger; Valve for climate
control system
10
–
–
–
–
Related information
•
•
•
•
362
Fuses - in engine compartment (p. 352)
Fuses - under glovebox (p. 355)
Fuses - in the control module under the
glovebox (p. 357)
Fuses - in the engine compartment's cold
zone (p. 363)
10 Maintenance and service
Fuses - in the engine compartment's
cold zone
Fuses in the engine compartment's cold zone
are fitted in cars with the Start/Stop function.
10
Location of fuses for the Start/Stop function.
•
•
•
Fuses A1 and A2 are of the "MEGA Fuse"
type and must only be replaced by a
workshop5.
Fuses 1-11 are of the "Midi Fuse" type
and must only be replaced by a workshop5.
Fuse 12 is of the "Mini Fuse" type.
For more information on Start/Stop - see
Drive system - drive modes (p. 258).
5
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Positions
Function
A
Main fuse for central electrical
unit in the engine compartment
175
Main fuse for central electronic
module (CEM) under the glovebox, relay/fuse box under the
glovebox, central electrical
units in cargo area
175
Function
A
Vacuum pump for brake system
40
Primary fuse for the central
electronic module (CEM) under
the glovebox
50
Primary fuse for relay/fuse box
under the glovebox
60
}}
363
10 Maintenance and service
||
10
Function
A
Primary fuse for central electrical unit B in cargo area
50
Primary fuse for central electrical unit A in cargo area
60
Ventilation fan
40
–
–
–
–
–
–
Internal diode
50
Oil pump automatic gearbox
30
–
–
Related information
•
•
•
•
364
Fuses - in engine compartment (p. 352)
Fuses - under glovebox (p. 355)
Fuses - in the control module under the
glovebox (p. 357)
Fuses - in cargo area (p. 359)
10 Maintenance and service
Car washing
The car should be washed as soon as it
becomes dirty. Wash the car in a car wash
with oil separator. Use car shampoo.
Washing by hand
•
•
•
•
Remove bird droppings from the paintwork as soon as possible. Bird droppings
contain chemicals that affect and discolour paintwork very quickly. An authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended for the
removal of any discoloration.
Hose down the underbody.
Rinse the entire car until the dissolved dirt
has been removed so as to reduce the
risk of scratches from washing. Do not
spray directly onto the locks.
If necessary, use cold degreasing agent
on very dirty surfaces. Note that in this
case, the surfaces must not be hot from
the sun!
•
Wash using a sponge, car shampoo and
plenty of lukewarm water.
•
Clean the wiper blades with a lukewarm
soap solution or car shampoo.
•
Dry the car using a clean, soft chamois or
a water scraper. If you avoid allowing
drops of water to dry in strong sunlight,
you reduce the risk of water drying stains
which may need to be polished out.
WARNING
Always have the engine cleaned by a
workshop. There is a risk of fire if the
engine is hot.
IMPORTANT
Dirty headlamps have impaired functionality. Clean them regularly, when refuelling
for example.
Do not use any corrosive cleaning agents
but use water and a non-scratching
sponge instead.
NOTE
Outside lighting such as headlamps, fog
lamps and rear lamps may temporarily
have condensation on the inside of the
lens. This is normal, all exterior lighting is
designed to withstand this. Condensation
is normally vented out of the lamp housing
when the lamp has been switched on for a
time.
Wiper blades
NOTE
Wash the wiper blades and windscreen
regularly with lukewarm soap solution or
car shampoo. Do not use any strong solvents.
10
Automatic car washes
An automatic car wash is a simple and quick
way of washing the car, but it cannot reach
everywhere. Handwashing the car is recommended for achieving optimum results.
NOTE
The car must only be washed by hand
over the first few months. This is because
the paint is more delicate when it is new.
High-pressure washing
When using high-pressure washing, use
sweeping movements and make sure that the
nozzle does not come closer than 30 cm to
the surface of the car (the distance applies to
all exterior parts). Do not spray directly onto
the locks.
Asphalt, dust and salt residue on wiper
blades, as well as insects, ice etc. on the
windscreen, impair the service life of wiper
blades.
For cleaning:
- Set the wiper blades to the service position,
see Wiper blades (p. 344).
}}
365
10 Maintenance and service
||
Testing the brakes
IMPORTANT
Avoid waxing and polishing on plastic and
rubber.
WARNING
10
Always test the brakes after washing the
car, including the parking brake, to ensure
that moisture and corrosion do not attack
the brake linings and reduce braking performance.
Lightly depress the brake pedal now and then
when driving long distances in rain or slush.
The heat from the friction causes the brake
linings to warm up and dry. Do the same
thing after starting in very damp or cold
weather.
Exterior plastic, rubber and trim
components
A special cleaning agent available from Volvo
dealers is recommended for the cleaning and
care of coloured plastic parts, rubber and trim
components, such as glossy trim mouldings.
When using such a cleaning agent the
instructions must be followed carefully.
When using degreasant on plastic and
rubber, only rub with light pressure if it is
necessary. Use a soft washing sponge.
Polishing glossy trim mouldings could
wear away or damage the glossy surface
layer.
Polishing agent that contains abrasive
must not be used.
Rims
Only use rim cleaning agent recommended
by Volvo.
Strong rim cleaning agents can damage the
surface and cause stains on chrome-plated
aluminium rims.
Polishing and waxing
Polish and wax the car if the paintwork is dull
or to give the paintwork extra protection.
The car does not need to be polished until it
is at least one year old. However, the car can
be waxed during this time. Do not polish or
wax the car in direct sunlight.
Wash and dry the car thoroughly before you
begin polishing or waxing. Clean off asphalt
and tar stains using tar remover or white spirit. More stubborn stains can be removed
using fine rubbing paste designed for car
paintwork.
Polish first with a polish and then wax with
liquid or solid wax. Follow the instructions on
the packaging carefully. Many preparations
contain both polish and wax.
IMPORTANT
Related information
•
•
•
Only paint treatment recommended by
Volvo should be used. Other treatment
such as preserving, sealing, protection,
lustre sealing or similar could damage the
paintwork. Paintwork damage caused by
such treatments is not covered by Volvo
warranty.
Polishing and waxing (p. 366)
Cleaning the interior (p. 367)
Water and dirt-repellent coating (p. 367)
Related information
•
366
Car washing (p. 365)
10 Maintenance and service
Water and dirt-repellent coating
Rustproofing
Cleaning the interior
The windows are treated with a surface coating that improves visibility in difficult weather
conditions.
Only use cleaning agents and car care products recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly
and follow the instructions included with the
car care product.
Maintenance:
The car received a thorough and complete
rustproofing at the factory. Parts of the body
are made of galvanised sheet metal. The
underbody is protected by a wear-resistant
anti-corrosion compound. A thin, penetrating
rustproofing fluid was sprayed into the
exposed members, cavities, closed sections
and side doors.
•
Never use products such as car wax,
degreaser or similar on glass surfaces as
this could ruin their water-repellent properties.
Inspection and maintenance
•
Take care when cleaning so as not to
damage the glass surface.
•
To avoid damaging glass surfaces when
removing ice – only use plastic ice scrapers.
•
Treatment with a special finishing agent
available from Volvo dealers is recommended in order to maintain the waterrepellent properties. This should be used
first after three years and then each year.
Water and dirt-repellent coating*
There is natural wear of the waterrepellent coating.
IMPORTANT
Do not use a metal ice scraper to remove
ice from the windows. Use the heating to
remove ice from the door mirrors, see Windows and rearview and door mirrors heating (p. 99).
Dirt and road salt can lead to corrosion so it
is important to keep the car clean. The car's
rustproofing needs to be checked regularly
and touched-up if necessary in order for it to
be maintained.
Under normal conditions the rustproofing
does not require treatment for approximately
12 years. After this period, it should be treated at three-year intervals. Volvo recommends that you engage an authorised Volvo
workshop for assistance if the car needs further treatment.
Related information
•
Paint damage (p. 369)
10
Vacuuming is important prior to using cleaning agents.
Carpets and cargo area
Remove inlaid carpets for separate cleaning
of the floor carpet and the inlaid carpets. Use
a vacuum cleaner to remove dust and dirt.
Each inlay mat is secured with pins.
Take hold of the inlay mat at each pin and lift
the mat straight up.
Fit the inlay mat in place by pressing it in at
each pin.
WARNING
Before setting off check that the inlaid mat
in the driver area is firmly affixed and
secured in the bosses in order to avoid
getting caught adjacent to and under the
pedals.
A special textile cleaner is recommended for
stains on the floor mat after vacuuming. Floor
mats should be cleaned with agents recommended by your Volvo dealer.
Related information
•
Car washing (p. 365)
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
367
10 Maintenance and service
||
Stains on fabric upholstery and roof
upholstery
10
A special fabric cleaning agent, available from
authorised Volvo dealers, is recommended to
avoid impairing the fire retardant qualities of
the upholstery.
IMPORTANT
Sharp objects and Velcro may damage the
fabric upholstery.
Stains on leather upholstery
Volvo's leather upholstery is treated to preserve its original appearance.
Leather upholstery ages and acquires a beautiful patina over time. The leather is refined
and processed so that it retains its natural
characteristics. It is given a protective coating, but regular cleaning is required in order
to maintain both characteristics and appearance. Volvo offers a comprehensive product
for the cleaning and treatment of leather
upholstery which, when used in accordance
with the instructions, preserves the leather's
protective coating. After a period of use the
natural appearance of the leather will nevertheless emerge, depending more or less on
the surface texture of the leather. This is a
natural maturing of the leather and shows
that it is a natural product.
To achieve best results Volvo recommends
cleaning and the application of protective
cream once to four times per year (or more if
necessary). The Volvo Leather Care kit is
available from your Volvo dealer.
IMPORTANT
•
•
Certain items of coloured clothing (for
example, jeans and suede garments)
may stain the upholstery.
Never use strong solvents. Such products may damage fabric, vinyl and
leather upholstery.
Washing instructions for leather
upholstery
1. Pour the leather cleaner on the dampened sponge and squeeze out a strong
foam.
2. Work the dirt away with gentle circular
movements.
3. Dab accurately with the sponge on the
stains. Allow the sponge to absorb the
stain. Do not rub.
4. Wipe off with soft paper or a cloth and
allow the leather to dry completely.
Protective treatment of leather
upholstery
1. Pour a small amount of the protective
cream on the felted cloth and massage in
a thin layer of cream with gentle circular
movements on the leather.
2. Allow the leather to dry for 20 minutes
before use.
The leather has now been given improved
protection against stains and improved UV
protection.
Washing instructions for the leather
steering wheel
•
Remove dirt and dust with a soft premoistened sponge and neutral soap.
•
Leather needs to breathe. Never cover
the leather steering wheel with protective
plastic.
•
Use natural oils. Volvo's leather care
agents are recommended for best results.
If the steering wheel has stains:
Group 1 (ink, wine, coffee, milk, sweat and
blood)
–
Use a soft cloth or sponge. Mix a 5%
ammonia solution. (For blood stains, use
a solution of 2 dl water and 25g salt.)
Group 2 (fats, oils, sauces and chocolate)
1. Same procedure as for group 1.
2. Polish with an absorbent paper or cloth.
368
10 Maintenance and service
Group 3 (dry dirt, dust)
Paint damage
1. Use a soft brush to remove the dirt.
Paint is an important part of the car's rustproofing and should therefore be checked
regularly. The most common types of paintwork damage are stone chips, scratches, and
marks on the edges of wings, doors and
bumpers.
2. Same procedure as for group 1.
Stains on interior plastic parts, metal
parts and wood parts
A fibrillated fibre or microfibre cloth, lightly
moistened with water, available from Volvo
dealers, is recommended for cleaning interior
parts and surfaces.
10
Touching up minor paintwork damage
To avoid the onset of rust, damaged paintwork should be rectified immediately.
Do not scrape or rub stains. Never use strong
stain removers. A special cleaning agent
available from Volvo dealers can be used for
more difficult cleaning.
Materials
•
Seatbelts
primer6 - a special adhesive primer in a
spray can is available for e.g. plasticcoated bumpers
•
basecoat and clearcoat - available in
spray cans or as touch-up pens/sticks7
Use water and a synthetic detergent. A special textile cleaning agent is available from
your Volvo dealer. Make sure the seatbelt is
dry before allowing it to retract.
Colour code
•
•
Code for the car's colour
It is important that the correct colour is used.
For product label location, see Type designations (p. 372).
masking tape
fine sand paper6.
Related information
•
6
7
Car washing (p. 365)
If required.
Follow the instructions that are included with the package for the touch-up pen/stick.
369
10 Maintenance and service
||
Repair minor paintwork damage such
as stone chips and scratches
3. Stir the primer well and apply using a fine
brush, a matchstick or similar. Finish off
with a basecoat and clearcoat once the
primer has dried.
10
4. For scratches, proceed as above, but
mask around the damaged area to protect the undamaged paintwork.
NOTE
G021832
If the stone chip has not penetrated down
to the meal and an undamaged layer of
paint remains in place, fill in with base coat
and clear coat as soon as the surface has
been cleaned.
Before work is begun, the car must be clean
and dry and at a temperature above 15 °C.
1. Apply a piece of masking tape over the
damaged surface. Then remove the tape
to remove any loose paint.
If the damage is down to the metal, use
of a primer is appropriate. In the event of
damage to a plastic surface, an adhesive
primer should be used to give better
results - spray into the lid of the spray
can and brush on thinly.
2. Before painting, gentle polishing using a
very fine polishing agent may be carried
out locally if required (e.g. if there are any
uneven edges). The surface is cleaned
thoroughly and left to dry.
370
Related information
•
Rustproofing (p. 367)
SPECIFICATIONS
11 Specifications
Type designations
Type designation, vehicle identification number, etc., i.e. information unique to the car,
can be read on a label in the car.
11
372
11 Specifications
Label location
11
Knowing the car's type designation, vehicle
identification and engine numbers can facilitate all contact with an authorised Volvo
dealer regarding the car and when ordering
spare parts and accessories.
Type designation, vehicle identification
number, maximum permissible weights,
codes for colour and upholstery and type
}}
373
11 Specifications
||
approval number. The label is visible
when the right rear door is opened.
Label for parking heater.
Engine code and engine serial number.
Label for engine oil.
Gearbox type designation and serial number.
11
Car's identification number. (VIN Vehicle
Identification Number)
Further information on the car is presented in
the registration document.
NOTE
It is not intended that the decals illustrated
in the owner's manual should be exact
replicas of those in the car. They are
included to show their approximate
appearance and location in the car. The
information that applies to your particular
car is available on the respective decals
for your car.
Related information
•
•
374
Weights (p. 376)
Engine specifications (p. 378)
11 Specifications
Dimensions
Measurement of car length, height, etc. can
be read in the table.
11
Dimensions
mm
A
Wheelbase
2776
B
Length
4635
C
Load length, floor, folded rear
seat
1749
D
Load length, floor
E
Height
F
Load height
658
G
Front track
1578
978
1484
Dimensions
mm
H
Rear track
1575
I
Load width, floor
1082
J
Width
1865
K
Width including door mirrors
2097
L
Width including folded-in door
mirrors
1899
375
11 Specifications
Weights
WARNING
Max. gross vehicle weight, etc. can be read
on a label in the car.
The car's driving characteristics change
depending on how heavily it is loaded and
how the load is distributed.
Kerb weight includes the driver, the fuel tank
90% full and all fluids.
11
The weight of passengers and accessories,
and towball load (p. 377) (when a trailer is
hitched) influence the load capacity and are
not included in the kerb weight.
Permitted max. load = Gross vehicle weight Kerb weight.
NOTE
The documented kerb weight applies to
cars in the standard version - i.e. a car
without extra equipment or accessories.
This means that for every accessory added
the loading capacity of the car is reduced
correspondingly by the weight of the
accessory.
Examples of accessories that reduce loading capacity are the Kinetic/Momentum/
Summum equipment levels, as well as
other accessories such as Towbar, Load
carriers, Space box, Audio system, Auxiliary lamps, GPS, Fuel-driven heater, Safety
grille, Carpets, Cargo cover, Power seats,
etc.
Weighing the car is a certain way of ascertaining the kerb weight of your own particular car.
For information on label location, see Type designations (p. 372).
Max. gross vehicle weight
Max. train weight (car+trailer)
Max. front axle load
Max. rear axle load
Equipment level
Max. load: See registration document.
Max. roof load: 75 kg.
Related information
•
376
Towing capacity and towball load (p.
377)
11 Specifications
Towing capacity and towball load
Towing capacity and towball load for driving
with a trailer can be read in the tables.
Max. weight braked trailer
Engine
Engine codeA
Gearbox
D6 AWD
D82PHEV
Automatic, TF-80SD
Max. weight braked trailer (kg)
Max. towball load (kg)
1800
90
Engine code, component and serial number can be read on the engine; see Type designations (p. 372).
A
11
Max. weight unbraked trailer
Max. weight unbraked trailer (kg)
Max. towball load (kg)
750
50
Related information
•
•
•
Weights (p. 376)
Driving with a trailer (p. 296)
Trailer stabiliser - TSA (p. 301)
377
11 Specifications
Engine specifications
Engine specifications (output etc.) for each
respective engine alternative can be read in
the table.
Diesel engine
Engine
11
D6 AWD
A
Engine
codeA
D82PHEV
Output
Output
Torque
(kW/rpm)
(hp/rpm)
(Nm/rpm)
158/4000
215/4000
440/1500-3000
Engine code, component and serial number can be read on the engine; see Type designations (p. 372).
Related information
•
•
378
No. of cylinders
Coolant - grade and volume (p. 382)
Engine oil - grade and volume (p. 381)
5
Bore
Stroke
(mm)
(mm)
81.0
93.15
Swept volume
Compression ratio
(litres)
2.400
16.5:1
11 Specifications
Motor specifications - Electric drive
motor
V60 PLUG-IN HYBRID is driven both by a diesel engine and an electric drive motor (ERAD
– Electric Rear Axle Drive).
Max. power output: 50 kW (70 hp).
Torque: 200 Nm.
Related information
•
Engine specifications (p. 378)
Engine oil - adverse driving conditions
Adverse driving conditions can lead to abnormally high oil temperature or oil consumption.
Below are some examples of adverse driving
conditions.
Check the oil level (p. 333) more frequently for
long journeys:
•
•
•
•
towing a caravan or trailer
11
in mountainous regions
at high speeds
in temperatures colder than -30 °C or
hotter than +40 °C.
The above also apply to shorter driving distances at low temperatures.
Choose a fully synthetic engine oil for adverse
driving conditions. It provides extra protection
for the engine.
Volvo recommends:
IMPORTANT
In order to fulfil the requirements for the
engine's service intervals all engines are
filled with a specially adapted synthetic
engine oil at the factory. The choice of oil
has been made very carefully with regard
to service life, starting characteristics, fuel
consumption and environmental impact.
An approved engine oil must be used in
order that the recommended service intervals can be applied. Only use a prescribed
grade of oil for both filling and oil change,
otherwise you will risk affecting service life,
starting characteristics, fuel consumption
and environmental impact.
Volvo Car Corporation disclaims all warranty liability if engine oil of the prescribed
grade and viscosity is not used.
Volvo recommends that oil changes are
carried out at an authorised Volvo workshop.
379
11 Specifications
||
Related information
•
•
11
380
Engine oil - grade and volume (p. 381)
Engine oil - general (p. 332)
11 Specifications
Engine oil - grade and volume
Engine oil grade and volume for each respective engine alternative can be read in the
table.
Volvo recommends:
11
Engine
Engine codeA
Oil grade
Volume, incl. oil filter
(litres)
D6 AWD
D82PHEV
Oil grade: ACEA A5/B5
approx. 5.9
Viscosity: SAE 0W–30
A
Engine code, component and serial number can be read on the engine; see Type designations (p. 372).
Related information
•
Engine oil - adverse driving conditions (p.
379)
•
Engine oil - checking and filling (p. 333)
381
11 Specifications
Coolant - grade and volume
Approved coolant volume for each respective
engine alternative can be read in the table.
Prescribed grade: Coolant recommended by
Volvo mixed with 50% water2, see the packaging.
Engine
11
Volume
(litres)
D6 AWD
12.9
Related information
•
2
382
Coolant - level (p. 334)
Water quality must fulfil the standard STD 1285.1.
11 Specifications
Transmission fluid - grade and volume
The prescribed transmission fluid and volume
for each respective gearbox alternative can be
read in the table.
Manual gearbox
NOTE
Under normal driving conditions, the gearbox oil does not need to be changed during its service life. However, it may be necessary under adverse driving conditions.
11
Automatic gearbox
Automatic gearbox
TF-80SD
Volume (litres)
approx. 7.0
Prescribed transmission fluid
AW1
NOTE
Under normal driving conditions, the gearbox oil does not need to be changed during its service life. However, it may be necessary under adverse driving conditions.
Related information
•
Engine oil - adverse driving conditions (p.
379)
•
Type designations (p. 372)
383
11 Specifications
Brake fluid - grade and volume
Power steering fluid - grade
Washer fluid - quality and volume
The medium in a hydraulic brake system is
called brake fluid, and it is used to transfer
force from e.g. a brake pedal via a master
brake cylinder to one or more slave cylinders,
which in turn act on a mechanical brake.
Power steering fluid is the denomination of
the medium used in the car's power steering
system.
Washer fluid is used, together with windscreen and rear window wipers (p. 93) to keep
the car's windows and headlamps clean and
ensure visibility when driving.
Prescribed grade: DOT 4
11
Volume: 0.6 litres
Related information
•
Brake and clutch fluid - level (p. 335)
Prescribed grade: WSS M2C204-A2 or
equivalent product.
Related information
•
Power steering fluid - level (p. 336)
Prescribed grade: Washer fluid recommended by Volvo - with frost protection during cold weather and below freezing point.
Volume:
•
•
Cars with headlamp washing: 3.4 litres.
Cars without headlamp washing: 3.4
litres.
Related information
•
•
384
Washer fluid - filling (p. 346)
Wiper blades (p. 344)
11 Specifications
Fuel tank - volume
Fuel tank volume for each respective engine
alternative can be read in the table.
Engine
Volume (litres)
D6 AWD
approx 45
Related information
•
•
Filling up with fuel (p. 281)
Prescribed grade
Diesel: Fuel - diesel (p. 282)
11
Engine specifications (p. 378)
385
11 Specifications
Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions
Fuel consumption in a vehicle is measured in
litres per 100 km and CO2 emissions in grams
per km.
Explanation
litre/100 km
combined driving
NOTE
Extreme weather conditions, driving with a
trailer or driving at high altitudes in combination with fuel grade are factors that
could affect the car's performance.
There are several reasons for increased fuel
consumption compared with the table's values. Examples of this are:
•
•
gram/km
11
car is loaded, increases fuel consumption and
carbon dioxide emissions.
The driver's driving style.
If the customer has specified wheels
larger than those fitted as standard on the
model's basic version, then resistance
increases.
•
High speed results in increased wind
resistance.
•
Fuel quality, road and traffic conditions,
weather and the condition of the car.
Related information
•
•
Economical driving (p. 285)
Weights (p. 376)
Even a combination of the above-mentioned
examples can result in significantly improved
consumption. For further information, please
refer to the regulations referred to3.
D6 AWD
(D82PHEV)
48
1.8
Fuel consumption and emission values in the
table above are based on specific EU cycles3,
that apply to cars with kerb weight in the
basic version and without extra equipment.
The car's weight may increase depending on
equipment. This, as well as how heavily the
3
386
Large deviations in fuel consumption may
arise in a comparison with the EU driving
cycles3 which are used in the certification of
the car and on which the consumption figures
in the table are based.
Official fuel consumption figures are based on two standardised driving cycles in a laboratory environment ("EU driving cycles") all in accordance with EU Regulation no 692/2008 and 715/2007
(Euro 5) / Euro 6 and UN ECE Regulation no 101. The regulations cover the driving cycles for urban driving and extra-urban driving. - Urban driving - the measurement starts with cold starting the
engine. The driving is simulated. - Extra-urban driving - the car is accelerated and braked at speeds between 0 and 120 km/h. The driving is simulated. - The combined driving value given in the
table is a combination of urban driving and extra-urban driving, in accordance with applicable legislation. CO2 emissions - the exhaust gases are collected in order to calculate the carbon dioxide
emissions during the two driving cycles. These are then analysed and give the value for CO2 emissions.
11 Specifications
Tyres - approved tyre pressures
Approved tyre pressures for each respective
engine alternative can be read in the table.
Engine
D6 AWD (D82PHEV)
Tyre size
Load, 1 - 3 persons
Max. load
(km/h)
Front
Rear
Front
Rear
Front/rear
(kPa)B
(kPa)
(kPa)
(kPa)
(kPa)
ECO pressureA
235/45 R 17
0 – 160
280
280
280
280
280
235/45 R 18
160 +
280
280
320
320
–
max. 80
420
420
420
420
420
Temporary Spare Tyre
A
B
Speed
11
Economical driving.
In certain countries there is the "bar" unit beside the SI unit "Pascal": 1 bar = 100 kPa.
Related information
•
•
•
Tyres - dimensions (p. 311)
Tyres - air pressure (p. 316)
Type designations (p. 372)
387
11 Specifications
Electrical system
Starter battery - specification
Hybrid Battery - specification
The electrical system is single-pole and uses
the chassis and engine casing as a conductor.
The starter battery is used to drive the starter
motor and other electrical equipment in the
car.
The hybrid battery (battery for drive motor) is
used to power the electric motor when driving
in electric mode.
Voltage: 12 V.
Type: Lithium-ion
Cold start capacity, CCA - Cold Cranking
Amperes: 700-800 A.
Energy quantity: 11.2 kWh.
The car has a voltage-regulated AC alternator.
Starter battery capacity is dependent upon
the equipment level in the car.
11
IMPORTANT
Reserve capacity: 135-160 minutes.
IMPORTANT
If the battery is replaced, take care to
replace it with a battery with the same cold
starting capacity and reserve capacity as
the original battery (see the label on the
battery).
If the battery is replaced, take care to
replace it with a battery with the same cold
starting capacity and reserve capacity as
the original battery (see the label on the
battery).
Related information
•
•
•
Starter battery - specification (p. 388)
NOTE
Starter battery - replacement (p. 348)
Battery (p. 346)
•
The starter battery's container size
should be consistent with the original
battery's dimensions.
•
The starter battery's height is different
depending on size.
Related information
•
•
388
Starter battery - replacement (p. 348)
Battery (p. 346)
Service life: Longer than 10 years.
Related information
•
•
Charging the hybrid battery (p. 286)
Charging the hybrid battery - preparations (p. 288)
11 Specifications
Range - specification
The car's range during electric operation
(drive mode PURE): up to 50 km.
Type approval - remote control key
system
Type approval for the remote control key system can be read in the table.
Type approval - radar system
Type approval for the radar system can be
read in the table.
Country/Area
Country/
Area
EU
Europe
Lock system, standard
Delphi Electronics &
Safety hereby declares that
L2C0038TR and L2C0049TR
are in compliance with the
essential requirements and
other relevant provisions of
Directive 1999/5/EC. This declaration of conformity may, if
necessary, be consulted with
Delphi Electronics & Safety /
One Corporate Center /
Kokomo, Indiana 46904-9005
USA.
Keyless lock system (Keyless drive)
Country/Area
EU
11
Related information
Related information
•
•
Radar sensor (p. 199)
Remote control key with key blade (p.
152)
389
11 Specifications
Type approval - Bluetooth®
Type approval for Bluetooth® can be read in
the table.
11
390
11 Specifications
Declaration of Conformity (Declaration of Conformity)
Country/
Area
Countries
in the EU:
Exporting country: Japan
Manufacturer: Alpine Electronics Inc.
Type of equipment:
Bluetooth®
11
device
For further information visit http://ec.europa.eu/enterprise/rtte/faq.htm #informing
}}
391
11 Specifications
||
Country/
Area
11
392
Czech
Republic:
Alpine Electronics, Inc. tímto prohlašuje, že tento Bluetooth® Module je ve shodě se základními požadavky a dalšími příslušnými
ustanoveními směrnice 1999/5/ES.
Denmark:
Undertegnede Alpine Electronics, Inc. erklærer herved, at følgende udstyr Bluetooth® Module overholder de væsentlige krav og
øvrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.
Germany:
Hiermit erklärt Alpine Electronics, Inc., dass sich das Gerät Bluetooth® Module in Übereinstimmung mit den grundlegenden
Anforderungen und den übrigen einschlägigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999/5/EG befindet.
Estonia:
Käesolevaga kinnitab Alpine Electronics, Inc. seadme Bluetooth® Module vastavust direktiivi 1999/5/EÜ põhinõuetele ja nimetatud
direktiivist tulenevatele teistele asjakohastele sätetele.
UK
Hereby, Alpine Electronics, Inc., declares that this Bluetooth® Module is in compliance with the essential requirements and other
relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.
Spain:
Por medio de la presente Alpine Electronics, Inc. declara que el Bluetooth® Module cumple con los requisitos esenciales y
cualesquiera otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 1999/5/CE.
Greece:
ΜΕ ΗΝ ΠΑΡΟ ΣΑ Alpine Electronics, Inc. ΗΛΩΝΕ Ο Bluetooth® Module Σ ΜΜΟΡΦΩΝΕ Α ΠΡΟΣ
ΑΠΑ ΗΣΕ Σ Α Σ ΛΟ ΠΕΣ ΣΧΕ
ΕΣ Α ΑΞΕ Σ ΗΣ Ο Η ΑΣ 1999/5/Ε .
France:
Par la présente Alpine Electronics, Inc. déclare que l'appareil Bluetooth® Module est conforme aux exigences essentielles et aux
autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999/5/CE.
Italy:
Con la presente Alpine Electronics, Inc. dichiara che questo Bluetooth® Module è conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed alle altre
disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999/5/CE.
Latvia:
Ar šo Alpine Electronics, Inc. deklarē, ka Bluetooth® Module atbilst Direktīvas 1999/5/EK būtiskajām prasībām un citiem ar to
saistītajiem noteikumiem.
Lithuania:
Šiuo Alpine Electronics, Inc. deklaruoja, kad šis Bluetooth® Module atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas 1999/5/EB Direktyvos
nuostatas.
ΣΟ ΣΩ ΕΣ
11 Specifications
Country/
Area
Netherlands:
Hierbij verklaart Alpine Electronics, Inc. dat het toestel Bluetooth® Module in overeenstemming is met de essentiële eisen en de
andere relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999/5/EG.
Malta:
Hawnhekk, Alpine Electronics, Inc., jiddikjara li dan Bluetooth® Module jikkonforma mal-ħtiġijiet essenzjali u ma provvedimenti
oħrajn relevanti li hemm fid-Dirrettiva 1999/5/EC.
Hungary:
Alulírott, Alpine Electronics, Inc. nyilatkozom, hogy a Bluetooth® Module megfelel a vonatkozó alapvetõ követelményeknek és az
1999/5/EC irányelv egyéb elõírásainak.
Poland:
Niniejszym Alpine Electronics, Inc. oświadcza, że Bluetooth® Module jest zgodny z zasadniczymi wymogami oraz pozostałymi
stosownymi postanowieniami Dyrektywy 1999/5/EC.
Portugal:
Alpine Electronics, Inc. declara que este Bluetooth® Module está conforme com os requisitos essenciais e outras disposições da
Directiva 1999/5/CE.
Slovenia:
Alpine Electronics, Inc. izjavlja, da je ta Bluetooth® Module v skladu z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi relevantnimi določili direktive 1999/5/ES.
Slovakia:
Alpine Electronics, Inc. týmto vyhlasuje, že Bluetooth® Module spĺňa základné požiadavky a všetky príslušné ustanovenia Smernice 1999/5/ES.
Finland:
Alpine Electronics, Inc. vakuuttaa täten että Bluetooth® Module tyyppinen laite on direktiivin 1999/5/EY oleellisten vaatimusten ja
sitä koskevien direktiivin muiden ehtojen mukainen.
Sweden:
Härmed intygar Alpine Electronics, Inc. att denna Bluetooth® Module står I överensstämmelse med de väsentliga egenskapskrav
och övriga relevanta bestämmelser som framgår av direktiv 1999/5/EG.
Iceland:
Alpine Electronics, Inc. hereby certifies that this Bluetooth® Module conforms to the essential characteristic requirements and
other relevant regulations of directive 1999/5/EC.
Norway:
Alpine Electronics, Inc. erklærer herved at utstyret Bluetooth® Module er i samsvar med de grunnleggende krav og øvrige
relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.
11
393
11 Specifications
Licenses
Sensus software
11
394
This software uses parts of sources from
clib2 and Prex Embedded Real-time OS Source (Copyright (c) 1982, 1986, 1991,
1993, 1994), and Quercus Robusta (Copyright
(c) 1990, 1993), The Regents of the University
of California. All or some portions are derived
from material licensed to the University of
California by American Telephone and
Telegraph Co. or Unix System Laboratories,
Inc. and are reproduced herein with the
permission of UNIX System Laboratories, Inc.
Redistribution and use in source and binary
forms, with or without modification, are
permitted provided that the following
conditions are met: Redistributions of source
code must retain the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer. Redistributions in binary form
must reproduce the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer in the documentation and/or other
materials provided with the distribution.
Neither the name of the <ORGANIZATION>
nor the names of its contributors may be
used to endorse or promote products derived
from this software without specific prior
written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS
PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS
AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.
IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT
OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS
OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND
ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER
IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF
THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
This software is based in part on the work of
the Independent JPEG Group.
This software uses parts of sources from
"libtess". The Original Code is: OpenGL
Sample Implementation, Version 1.2.1,
released January 26, 2000, developed by
Silicon Graphics, Inc. The Original Code is
Copyright (c) 1991-2000 Silicon Graphics,
Inc. Copyright in any portions created by third
parties is as indicated elsewhere herein. All
Rights Reserved. Copyright (C) [1991-2000]
Silicon Graphics, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge,
to any person obtaining a copy of this
software and associated documentation files
(the "Software"), to deal in the Software
without restriction, including without limitation
the rights to use, copy, modify, merge,
publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell
copies of the Software, and to permit persons
to whom the Software is furnished to do so,
subject to the following conditions: The
above copyright notice including the dates of
first publication and either this permission
notice or a reference to http://oss.sgi.com/
projects/FreeB/ shall be included in all copies
or substantial portions of the Software. THE
SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS",
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT
NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL
SILICON GRAPHICS, INC. BE LIABLE FOR
ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF
CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE,
ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN
CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR
THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE
SOFTWARE. Except as contained in this
notice, the name of Silicon Graphics, Inc.
shall not be used in advertising or otherwise
to promote the sale, use or other dealings in
this Software without prior written
authorization from Silicon Graphics, Inc.
11 Specifications
This software is based in parts on the work of
the FreeType Team.
this product by VCC / or for as long as VCC
offers spare parts or customer support.
GNU Lesser General Public License (LGPL),
etc.
This software uses parts of SSLeay Library:
Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young
([email protected]). All rights reserved
Portions of this product uses software
copyrighted © v2.4.3/2010 The
FreeTypeProject (www.freetype.org). All rights
reserved.
You have the right of acquisition,
modification, and distribution of the source
code of the GPL/LGPL software.
Combined Instrument Panel Software
Open Source Software Notice
This product uses certain free / open source
and other software originating from third
parties, that is subject to the GNU General
Public License version 2 and 3 (GPLv2/
GPLv3), GNU Lesser General Public License
version 3 (LGPLv3), The FreeType Project
License (“FreeType License”) and other
different and/or additional copyright licenses,
disclaimers and notices. The links how to
access the exact terms of GPLv2, GPLv3,
LGPLv3, and the other open source software
licenses, disclaimers, acknowledgements and
notices are provided to you below. Please
refer to the exact terms of the relevant
License, regarding your rights under said
licenses. Volvo Car Corporation (VCC) offers
to provide the source code of said free/open
source software to you for a charge covering
the cost of performing such distribution, such
as the cost of media, shipping and handling,
upon written request. Please contact your
nearest Volvo Dealer.
This offer is valid for a period of at least three
(3) years from the date of the distribution of
This product includes software under
following licenses:
GPL v2 : http://www.gnu.org/licenses/oldlicenses/gpl-2.0.html
•
•
•
Linux kernel (merge between MontaVista
2.6.31 kernel and kernel from
L2.6.31_MX51_ER_1007 BSP)
uBoot (based on v2009.08)
busybox (based on version 1.13.2.)
GCC runtime library exception: http://
www.gnu.org/licenses/gcc-exception.html
•
libgcc_s.so.1
LGPL v3: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/
lgpl.html
•
You may download Source Code from the
following website at no charge: http://
www.embedded-carmultimedia.jp/linux/oss/
download/TVM_8351_013
11
The website provides the Source Code "As
Is" and without warranty of any kind.
By downloading Source Code, you expressly
assume all risk and liability associated with
downloading and using the Source Code and
complying with the user agreements that
accompany each Source Code.
Please note that we cannot respond to any
inquiries regarding the source code.
DivX®
Libc.so.6, libpthread.so.0, Librt.so.1
The FreeType Project License: http://
www.freetype.org/FTL.TXT
•
libfreetype.so.6 (version 2.4.3)
Linux software
This product contains software licensed
under GNU General Public License (GPL) or
DivX Certified® to play DivX® video. DivX®,
DivX Certified® and associated logos are
}}
395
11 Specifications
||
registered trademarks of DivX, Inc. and are
used under license. ABOUT DIVX VIDEO:
DivX® is a digital video format created by
DivX, Inc. This is an official DivX Certified
device that plays DivX video. Visit
www.divx.com for more information and
software tools to convert your files into DivX
video.
11
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND: This DivX
Certified® device must be registered in order
to play DivX Video-on-Demand (VOD)
content. To generate the registration code,
locate the DivX VOD section in the device
setup menu. Go to http://vod.divx.com with
this code to complete the registration
process and learn more about DivX VOD.
Covered by one or more of the following U.S.
Patents: 7,295,673; 7,460,668; 7,515,710;
7,519,274.
Gracenote® End User License
Agreement
This program or device contains software
from Gracenote, Inc. of Emeryville, California,
USA ("Gracenote"). The software from Gracenote ("Gracenote software") activates this
program to perform disc and/or file identification and obtain music-related information,
including name, artist, track and title ("Gracenote data") from online servers or embedded
databases (together called "Gracenote servers") and in order to perform other actions.
You may only use Gracenote data in accord-
396
ance with the intended end-user functions for
this program or this device.
You agree to only use Gracenote data,
Gracenote software and Gracenote servers
for your own personal non-commercial use.
You agree not to assign, copy, transfer or
transmit this Gracenote software or any
Gracenote data to any third party. YOU
AGREE NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT GRACENOTE DATA, GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR
GRACENOTE SERVERS, EXCEPT AS
EXPRESSLY PERMITTED IN THIS AGREEMENT.
You agree that your non-exclusive right to
use Gracenote data, Gracenote software and
Gracenote servers will be terminated if you
violate these restrictions. If your license is terminated you agree to cease all use of Gracenote data, Gracenote software and Gracenote
servers. Gracenote holds exclusive rights to
all Gracenote data, all Gracenote software
and all Gracenote servers, including all ownership rights. Gracenote will under no circumstances have any obligation to pay you for
any information you provide. You agree that
Gracenote, Inc. may enforce the company's
rights under this agreement against you
directly in its own name.
The Gracenote service uses a unique identifier to track enquiries for statistical purposes.
The purpose of a randomly assigned numeric
identifier is to enable the Gracenote service to
count enquiries without knowing anything
about who you are. Additional information is
available on the web page for Gracenote's
privacy policy for the Gracenote service.
The Gracenote software and everything
included in Gracenote data are licensed to
you "as is". Gracenote provides no undertakings or warranties, express or implied, as to
the accuracy of the Gracenote data contained
in the Gracenote servers. Gracenote reserves
the right to delete data from the Gracenote
servers or to change data categories for any
reason that Gracenote deems sufficient. No
warranty is provided that the Gracenote software or Gracenote servers are fault-free or
that the Gracenote software or Gracenote
servers will operate without interruption.
Gracenote has no obligation to provide you
with new, improved or additional data types
or categories that Gracenote may provide in
the future, and the company reserves the
right to discontinue its services at any time.
GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF
INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS.
GRACENOTE DOES NOT GUARANTEE THE
RESULTS OBTAINED THROUGH YOUR USE
OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR A
GRACENOTE SERVER. GRACENOTE WILL
IN NO EVENT BE LIABLE FOR ANY CONSE-
11 Specifications
QUENTIAL DAMAGE OR FOR ANY LOST
PROFITS OR REVENUES.
© Gracenote, Inc. 2009
Related information
•
Volvo Sensus (p. 72)
Symbols in the display
There are a variety of different symbols in the
display in the car. The symbols are divided
into warning, indicator and information symbols. Shown below are the most common
symbols with their meanings and a reference
to where in the manual further information can
be found.
- Red warning symbol, illuminates when
a fault has been indicated which could affect
the safety and/or driveability of the car. An
explanatory text is shown in the combined
instrument panel at the same time.
- Information symbol, illuminates in
combination with text in the combined instrument panel, when a deviation in any of the
car's systems has occurred. The information
symbol can also illuminate in conjunction with
other symbols.
Warning symbols in the combined
instrument panel
Symbol
Specification
See
Parking brake
applied
(p. 69), (p.
272)
Airbags – SRS
(p. 31), (p.
69)
Seatbelt
reminder
(p. 27), (p.
69)
Symbol
Specification
See
Starter battery
not charging
(p. 69)
Fault in brake
system
(p. 69), (p.
269)
Warning, safety
mode
(p. 31), (p.
40), (p. 69)
11
Control symbols in the combined
instrument panel
Symbol
Specification
See
ABL fault*
(p. 68), (p.
87)
Emissions system
(p. 68)
ABS fault
(p. 68), (p.
269)
Rear fog lamp on
(p. 68), (p.
88)
Stability system,
DSTC, Trailer
stability assist*
(p. 68), (p.
180), (p.
301)
Stability system,
sport mode
(p. 68), (p.
180)
Engine preheater
(diesel)
(p. 68)
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
397
11 Specifications
||
Symbol
Specification
See
Low level in fuel
tank
(p. 68), (p.
135)
Information, read
display text
(p. 68)
Main beam On
(p. 68), (p.
84)
Left-hand direction indicators
(p. 68)
Right-hand
direction indicators
(p. 68)
11
Symbol
Information symbols in the combined
instrument panel
Symbol
398
Specification
See
Active high beam,
AHB (Active High
Beam)*
(p. 85)
Camera sensor*
(p. 85)
Adaptive cruise
control*
(p. 202)
Adaptive cruise
control*, Distance
Warning* (Distance
Alert)
(p. 194),
(p. 204)
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Specification
See
Adaptive cruise
control*, time interval
Specification
See
(p. 190),
(p. 192)
Activated timer*
(p. 135)
Cruise control*
(p. 187)
ABL system*
(p. 87)
Radar sensor*
(p. 202),
(p. 206),
(p. 224)
Fuel filler flap,
right-hand side
(p. 280)
Low battery
(p. 135)
Parking brake
(p. 272)
Rain sensor*
(p. 93)
Driver Alert System*, Lane Departure Warning*
(p. 228),
(p. 233)
Driver Alert System*, Lane Departure Warning*
(p. 233)
Driver Alert System*, Time for a
break
(p. 228)
Recorded speed
information*
(p. 181)
Foot brake
(p. 269)
Speed limiter
(p. 184)
Camera sensor*,
Laser sensor*
(p. 213),
(p. 224),
(p. 228),
(p. 233)
Auto Brake*, Distance Warning*
(Distance Alert),
City SafetyTM, Collision warning system*
(p. 206),
(p. 213),
(p. 224)
Engine block and
passenger compartment heater*
(p. 135)
Symbol
11 Specifications
Symbol
Specification
See
Parking inside
(p. 130)
Parking outside
(p. 131)
Heating the seat
(p. 130),
(p. 131)
11
Information symbols in the roof console
display
Symbol
Specification
See
Seatbelt reminder
(p. 30)
Airbag, passenger
seat, activated
(p. 33)
Airbag, passenger
seat, deactivated
(p. 33)
Related information
•
Combined instrument panel - meaning of
indicator symbols (p. 68)
•
Combined instrument cluster - meaning
of warning symbols (p. 69)
•
Messages - handling (p. 105)
399
12 Alphabetical Index
AWD, All Wheel Drive............................... 268
ACC – Adaptive cruise control................. 190
Air cleaning
material............................................... 118
passenger compartment.... 116, 117, 118
Active Bending Lights (ABL)...................... 87
Air conditioning........................................ 124
B
Active high beam....................................... 85
Air conditioning system
repair................................................... 336
A
Active Xenon headlamps........................... 87
Active Yaw Control.................................. 178
Adapting driving characteristics.............. 247
12
Adaptive Cruise Control...........................
change cruise control functionality.....
deactivate...........................................
fault tracing.........................................
function...............................................
managing speed.................................
overtaking...........................................
overview..............................................
radar sensor........................................
setting the time interval......................
standby mode.....................................
temporary deactivation.......................
190
198
196
201
191
193
196
192
199
194
195
195
Adjusting the steering wheel...................... 79
Airbag
activating/deactivating, PACOS........... 33
driver's side.................................... 32, 39
passenger side......................... 32, 33, 39
AIRBAG ..................................................... 32
Airbag system............................................ 31
warning symbol.................................... 31
400
Air distribution.......................................... 119
Recirculation....................................... 125
table.................................................... 127
Air quality system IAQS........................... 118
Alarm........................................ 174, 175, 176
alarm indicator.................................... 175
alarm signals....................................... 176
automatic re-arming........................... 175
checking the alarm............................. 156
reduced alarm level............................ 176
remote control key not working.......... 175
Alcolock................................................... 249
Allergy and asthma inducing substances. 117
All Wheel Drive, (AWD)............................. 268
All Wheel Drive (AWD).............................. 268
Approach lighting.............................. 92, 155
Automatic car washes............................. 365
Automatic gearbox.................................. 264
manual gear positions (Geartronic)..... 265
trailer................................................... 297
Automatic relocking................................. 167
Backrest..................................................... 75
front seat, lowering............................... 75
Backrest rear seat, lowering...................... 78
Battery..................................... 278, 346, 388
jump starting....................................... 256
maintenance....................................... 346
overload.............................................. 278
remote control key/PCC..................... 161
specification....................................... 388
symbols on the battery....................... 347
warning symbols................................. 347
BLIS................................................. 242, 243
Bonnet, opening...................................... 330
Booster seat
lowering................................................ 49
raising................................................... 48
seating position.................................... 47
Brake fluid................................................ 335
grade and volume............................... 384
Brake light.................................................. 89
Brakes.............................................. 269, 271
Anti-lock braking system, ABS........... 271
brake light............................................. 89
12 Alphabetical Index
brake system.............................. 269, 271
Emergency Brake Assistance, EBA ... 271
emergency brake lights........................ 89
filling brake fluid.................................. 335
handbrake........................................... 272
symbols in the combined instrument
panel................................................... 270
Bulbs, see Lighting.................................. 338
C
Camera sensor................................ 209, 222
Car care................................................... 365
Car care, leather upholstery.................... 368
Cargo area
cargo cover.........................................
coolant................................................
lighting..................................................
mounting points..................................
protective net......................................
Charging.................................................. 288
finish charging.................................... 294
start charging...................................... 293
Charging cable........................................ 289
control unit.......................................... 289
Checking the engine oil level................... 332
Children
child safety locks.................................. 42
child seat and airbag............................ 47
child seats and side airbags................. 36
location in car....................................... 47
safety.............................................. 36, 42
Child safety locks............................ 172, 173
Child seat
integrated two-stage booster seat....... 47
Cargo cover............................................. 150
Child seats.................................................
ISOFIX fixture system for child seats...
recommended......................................
size classes for child seats with ISOFIX fixture system.................................
types.....................................................
upper mounting points for child seats..
Car upholstery......................................... 367
City Safety™............................................ 207
Car washing............................................. 365
Cleaning
automatic car wash............................ 365
car washing........................................ 365
rims..................................................... 366
150
350
91
146
147
Catalytic converter................................... 284
Recovery............................................. 302
Charge current......................................... 286
42
50
43
51
52
54
seatbelts............................................. 369
upholstery........................................... 367
Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP)........ 117
Climate control
actual temperature.............................
auto-regulation...................................
general................................................
personal preferences..........................
sensors...............................................
temperature control............................
116
123
115
118
116
124
Clock, adjustment...................................... 71
CO2 emissions......................................... 386
12
Collision..................................................... 40
Collision warning............................. 214, 215
Collision warning system
function............................................... 215
general limitations............................... 220
operation............................................. 219
Pedestrian detection........................... 218
Radar sensor.............................. 199, 207
Collision Warning System with Auto
Brake....................................................... 214
Colour code, paint................................... 369
Combined instrument panel...................... 63
Compass................................................. 100
calibration........................................... 100
Condensation in headlamps.................... 365
401
12 Alphabetical Index
Controls, lights........................................... 81
Control symbols......................................... 66
Control unit.............................................. 292
Control unit display.................................. 291
Coolant
volume and grade............................... 382
Coolant, checking and filling
Engine compartment.......................... 334
Cooling system........................................ 277
overheating......................................... 277
12
Cornering lights......................................... 88
Corner Traction Control........................... 178
D
Daytime running lights............................... 83
Drive systems.......................................... 257
Deadlock.................................................. 171
deactivation........................................ 171
temporary deactivation....................... 172
Driving......................................................
cooling system....................................
with a tailer.........................................
with the tailgate open.........................
Defroster.................................................. 125
Driving in water........................................ 277
Detachable towbar
storage................................................ 298
Driving with a trailer
towball load........................................ 377
towing capacity.................................. 377
Diesel....................................................... 282
run out of fuel..................................... 283
279
277
296
278
Diesel particle filter.................................. 284
Dimensions.............................................. 375
E
Dipstick, electronic.................................. 333
ECC, electronic climate control............... 121
Direction indicator..................................... 90
EcoGuide................................................... 67
Direction indicators.................................... 90
Ecolabelling, FSC, owner's manual........... 21
direction of rotation................................. 306
Economical driving.................................. 285
Disengaging the gear selector inhibitor... 267
CTA.......................................................... 244
Electrically-driven heater......................... 137
Display lighting.......................................... 82
Cyclist detection...................................... 216
Distance Warning.................................... 204
Limitations.......................................... 205
Symbols and messages..................... 206
Electrical socket...................................... 144
cargo area........................................... 147
Crash, see Collision................................... 40
Cruise control..........................................
deactivate...........................................
managing speed.................................
resume set speed...............................
temporary deactivation.......................
187
189
188
189
188
CZIP (Clear Zone Interior Package)......... 117
Door mirrors............................................... 97
automatic dimming............................... 98
Driver Alert Control.................................. 226
operation............................................. 227
402
Driver Alert System.................................. 226
Electrical system...................................... 388
Electric drive motor
specifications...................................... 379
Electric parking brake
low battery voltage............................. 272
Electronic climate control - ECC............. 121
12 Alphabetical Index
Emergency equipment
first aid kit........................................... 318
warning triangle.................................. 317
Emergency puncture repair............. 318, 319
action.................................................. 320
inflating the tyres................................ 324
rechecking.......................................... 323
Emergency puncture repair kit
location............................................... 319
overview.............................................. 320
sealing fluid......................................... 325
Emissions of carbon dioxide................... 386
Error messages
Adaptive Cruise Control..................... 202
Driver Alert Control............................. 228
Lane Departure Warning..................... 233
see Messages and symbols....... 202, 273
Error messages in BLIS........................... 246
exhaust gases, toxic, sucked in.............. 278
External dimensions................................ 375
F
Engine
deactivate........................................... 255
overheating......................................... 296
start..................................................... 254
Fan
ECC.................................................... 123
Engine compartment
coolant................................................
oil........................................................
overview..............................................
power steering fluid............................
First aid kit............................................... 318
334
332
330
336
Engine drag control................................. 178
Engine oil......................................... 332, 379
adverse driving conditions.................. 379
filter..................................................... 332
grade and volume............................... 381
Engine specifications....................... 378, 379
Fault tracing for the camera sensor......... 210
First aid.................................................... 318
Fluids, capacities............. 382, 383, 384, 385
Fluids and oils.......................... 382, 383, 384
Fog lamp
rear........................................................ 88
Foot brake....................................... 269, 271
Fuel-driven heater....................................
auto mode..........................................
deactivate...........................................
fuelling................................................
parking on a hill..................................
starter battery and fuel.......................
137
138
138
138
138
138
Fuelling
filling...................................................
fuel cap...............................................
fuel filler flap.......................................
fuel filler flap, manual opening............
281
281
280
281
Fuel tank
volume................................................ 385
12
Fuse box.................................................. 351
Fuses....................................................... 350
behind the engine............................... 354
cargo area........................................... 359
changing............................................. 350
cold zone............................................ 363
engine compartment.......................... 352
General............................................... 350
Start/Stop........................................... 363
under glovebox........................... 355, 357
FSC, ecolabelling....................................... 21
Fuel..........................................................
fuel consumption................................
fuel economy......................................
fuel filter..............................................
282
386
316
283
403
12 Alphabetical Index
G
Headlamps............................................... 338
I
Gearbox................................................... 264
automatic............................................ 264
head restraint
centre seat, rear.................................... 77
lowering.......................................... 78, 79
IAQS - Interior Air Quality System........... 118
Gear indicator.......................................... 264
Heated washer nozzles.............................. 94
Indicator symbols...................................... 68
Gear selector inhibitor............................. 267
Heater
electrically-driven................................ 137
fuel-driven........................................... 137
Inflatable curtain.................................. 36, 39
Gear selector inhibitor, mechanical disengagement................................................. 267
Geartronic................................................ 265
12
Glass
laminated/reinforced............................. 21
Glovebox................................................. 143
locking................................................ 170
Gross vehicle weight............................... 376
Ground fault breaker................................ 292
GSI - Gear selector assistance................ 264
Heating
rearview and door mirrors.................... 99
rear window.......................................... 99
seats................................................... 122
steering wheel....................................... 80
404
Inlaid mats............................................... 143
Instrument lighting, see Lighting................ 82
High engine temperature......................... 296
Instruments and controls..................... 56, 59
High-pressure headlamp washing............. 94
Interior Air Quality System (IAQS)
Air cleaning......................................... 118
Hill Start Assist........................................ 268
Horn........................................................... 80
Hazard warning flashers............................ 89
Headlamp control...................................... 81
Hybrid guide.............................................. 67
Headlamp levelling.................................... 82
Information display.................................... 63
Heat-reflecting windscreen........................ 17
Hybrid battery.......................................... 350
charging.............................................. 286
specifications...................................... 388
Handbrake............................................... 272
Information button, PCC.......................... 156
Instrument overview
left-hand drive car................................ 56
right-hand drive car.............................. 59
Home safe light duration........................... 92
H
Immobiliser.............................................. 153
Interior lighting, see Lighting..................... 91
Interior rearview mirror............................... 99
automatic dimming............................. 100
Intermittent wiping..................................... 93
J
Headlamp pattern, adjusting..................... 93
Jack......................................................... 309
Headlamp pattern adjustment................... 93
Active Bending Lights .......................... 93
Jacket holder........................................... 142
12 Alphabetical Index
Journey statistics..................................... 112
Leather upholstery, washing instructions 368
Jump starting........................................... 256
Light indications, PCC............................. 156
K
Kerb weight.............................................. 376
Key........................................... 152, 153, 165
Key blade......................................... 158, 159
Keyless drive.... 162, 163, 164, 165, 166, 255
Keyless - locking..................................... 164
Keyless start (keyless drive) 162, 163,
164,
165,
166,
255
Keyless - unlocking................................. 164
Keypad in the steering wheel.................... 80
Key positions............................................. 73
L
Labels...................................................... 372
Laminated glass......................................... 21
Lamps, see Lighting................................ 337
Lane Departure Control................... 230, 231
Lane keeping assistant
operation..................................... 231, 232
Laser sensor............................................ 211
Lighting.................................................... 337
Active Xenon headlamps...................... 87
approach lighting.......................... 92, 155
automatic lighting, passenger compartment............................................... 91
bulbs, specifications........................... 343
controls................................................. 91
cornering lights..................................... 88
daytime running lights.......................... 83
display lighting...................................... 82
headlamp levelling................................ 82
home safe lighting................................ 92
instrument lighting................................ 82
in the passenger compartment............. 91
main/dipped beam............................... 84
position/parking lamps......................... 83
rear fog lamp........................................ 88
tunnel detection.................................... 84
Lighting, bulb replacement...................... 338
bulb holder rear: direction indicators
rear, rear fog lamp and reversing
lamp.................................................... 341
cargo area........................................... 342
dipped beam (cars with halogen headlamps)................................................. 339
direction indicators, front.................... 340
main beam (cars with active xenon
headlamps)......................................... 340
main beam (cars with halogen headlamps)................................................. 340
number plate lighting.......................... 342
vanity mirror........................................ 343
Loading
cargo area...........................................
General...............................................
long load.............................................
roof load.............................................
145
145
146
146
Lock
locking................................................ 167
manual locking.................................... 168
unlocking.................................... 167, 168
12
Lockable wheel bolts............................... 308
Lock confirmation ................................... 153
Lock indicator.......................................... 153
Locking/unlocking
glovebox............................................. 170
inside.................................................. 168
tailgate................................................ 170
Long-term storage................................... 295
M
Main/dipped beam, see Lighting............... 84
Main beam, automatic activation.............. 85
405
12 Alphabetical Index
maintenance
Rustproofing....................................... 367
Mood lighting............................................. 92
MY CAR................................................... 105
Manual gearbox
GSI - Gear selector assistance........... 264
Manual gear positions (Geartronic).......... 265
Max. roof load.......................................... 376
Memory function in seat............................ 76
Menus
Combined instrument panel............... 103
menu overview.................................... 104
12
Messages................................................ 105
Information display............................. 104
Messages and symbols
Adaptive Cruise Control..................... 202
Collision Warning with Auto
Brake.......................................... 213, 224
Driver Alert Control............................. 228
Lane Departure Warning..................... 233
Messages in BLIS.................................... 246
Meters
fuel gauge............................................. 64
speedometer......................................... 64
tachometer........................................... 64
misting
attending to the windows................... 115
Misting
condensation in headlamps............... 365
406
Park assist camera.................................. 239
settings............................................... 241
Parking brake........................................... 272
Parking on a hill....................................... 138
O
Passenger compartment filter................. 117
Oil, see also Engine oil..................... 379, 381
PCC – Personal Car Communicator
functions............................................. 154
range........................................... 157, 162
Oil level low.............................................. 332
Output...................................................... 378
electric motor...................................... 379
outside temperature gauge....................... 71
Overheating............................................. 296
Owner's manual, ecolabelling.................... 21
Pinch protection, sunroof........................ 103
Polishing.................................................. 366
Position/parking lamps.............................. 83
Power seat................................................. 76
Power steering fluid
grade................................................... 384
P
PACOS....................................................... 33
Paintwork
colour code......................................... 369
damage and touch-up........................ 369
Panel lighting............................................. 82
Panic function.......................................... 155
Park Assist...............................................
backward............................................
fault indicator......................................
function...............................................
parking assistance sensors................
Pedestrian detection................................ 214
235
236
238
235
238
Power sunroof......................................... 101
Power windows......................................... 95
Preconditioning........................................
direct start..........................................
general................................................
immediate stop...................................
messages and symbols......................
parking inside.....................................
parking outside...................................
setting.................................................
timer....................................................
129
132
129
133
135
130
131
130
133
Privacy locking......................................... 159
12 Alphabetical Index
Protective grille........................................ 149
Recommendations during driving............ 279
Protective net........................................... 149
Recommended child seats
table...................................................... 43
Recovery.................................................. 304
S
Safety lock
children................................................. 42
Q
Refrigerant............................................... 336
Queue Assist............................................ 196
Regeneration........................................... 284
Safety mode.............................................. 40
moving the car...................................... 42
start attempt......................................... 41
Queue Assistant....................................... 196
Relay/fuse box, see Fuses....................... 350
Sealing fluid............................................. 325
Remote control immobiliser..................... 154
Seat, see Seats.......................................... 75
Rain sensor................................................ 93
Remote control key......................... 152, 153
battery replacement............................ 161
detachable key blade................. 158, 159
functions............................................. 154
loss..................................................... 152
range........................................... 156, 162
Range
during electric operation..................... 389
Remote control key system, type approval............................................................ 389
Seatbelt......................................................
loosen...................................................
pregnancy.............................................
putting on.............................................
rear seat................................................
seatbelt reminder..................................
seatbelt tensioner.................................
Rear bulbs
location............................................... 342
Resetting, trip meter........................ 109, 112
Seatbelt tensioner................................ 30, 39
Resetting the door mirrors......................... 98
Rear seat
Heating............................................... 122
Resetting the power windows................... 97
Seats.......................................................... 75
head restraints, rear.............................. 77
heating................................................ 122
Heating............................................... 122
lowering the front backrest................... 75
lowering the rear backrest.................... 78
power.................................................... 76
R
Radar sensor........................................... 191
Limitations.......................................... 199
Rearview and door mirrors
compass............................................. 100
door...................................................... 97
electrically retractable........................... 98
heating.................................................. 99
interior................................................... 99
Rear window, defrosting............................ 99
Retractable power door mirrors................. 98
Road sign information............................. 181
Limitations.......................................... 183
operation............................................. 181
Roof load, max. weight............................ 376
Rustproofing............................................ 367
27
29
29
28
30
30
30
12
Seatbelt reminder...................................... 30
Sensus....................................................... 72
Service position....................................... 344
Service programme................................. 327
407
12 Alphabetical Index
Set time interval....................................... 204
Side airbag SIPS.................................. 35, 39
SIPS airbag................................................ 35
Skidding................................................... 279
slippery driving conditions....................... 279
Soot filter................................................. 284
SOOT FILTER FULL................................. 284
spare wheel............................................. 312
installation........................................... 315
12
Speed limiter............................................ 184
alarm for speed exceeded.................. 186
deactivation........................................ 186
getting started............................ 184, 185
temporary deactivation....................... 185
79
80
80
79
Stone chips and scratches...................... 369
Storage spaces
glovebox............................................. 143
Jacket holder...................................... 142
tunnel console.................................... 142
Storage spaces in the passenger compartment.................................................. 140
System
tripping.................................................. 39
T
Tailgate
Locking/unlocking.............................. 170
Temperature
actual temperature............................. 116
Temperature control................................ 124
Timer
deactivate...........................................
preconditioning...................................
setting.................................................
start.....................................................
Speed ratings, tyres................................. 312
Sunroof
opening and closing...........................
pinch protection..................................
sunscreen...........................................
ventilation position..............................
Spin control............................................. 178
Sunscreen, sunroof.................................. 102
Tools........................................................ 308
Stability and traction control system 178,
180
operation............................................. 179
Switching off the engine.......................... 255
Total airing function......................... 115, 169
Symbols
indicator symbols........................... 66, 68
warning symbols................................... 66
Towbar
detachable, attachment...................... 299
detachable, removal........................... 300
Symbols and messages
Adaptive Cruise Control..................... 202
Collision Warning with Auto
Brake.......................................... 213, 224
Driver Alert Control............................. 228
Lane Departure Warning..................... 233
Towbar, see Towing equipment.............. 298
Stability system....................................... 178
Stains....................................................... 367
Start/Stop function.................................. 260
Steering force, speed related.................. 247
Steering force level, see Steering force... 247
Steering lock............................................ 255
408
Steering wheel...........................................
heating..................................................
keypad..................................................
steering wheel adjustment....................
101
103
102
102
134
133
133
134
Towbar - detachable
attachment/removal.................... 299, 300
Towing..................................................... 302
towing eye.......................................... 303
Towing bracket........................................ 298
specifications...................................... 298
12 Alphabetical Index
Towing capacity and towball load........... 377
Towing eye.............................................. 303
Type approval
Bluetooth®.......................................... 390
radar system....................................... 389
remote control key system................. 389
V
Type designations................................... 372
V60 PLUG-IN HYBRID
introduction........................................... 24
overview................................................ 22
Tyre dimension........................................ 311
Vanity mirror...................................... 91, 143
Tyre load index........................................ 311
Ventilation................................................ 119
Trailer stability assist............................... 178
Tyre pressure label.................................. 316
Vibration damper..................................... 298
Trailer Stability Assist.............................. 301
Tyres
direction of rotation............................ 306
maintenance....................................... 306
pressure...................................... 316, 387
puncture repair................................... 318
specifications...................................... 387
tread depth......................................... 310
tread wear indicators.......................... 308
winter tyres......................................... 310
Volvo Sensus............................................. 72
Traction control........................................ 178
Trailer.......................................................
cable...................................................
driving with a trailer............................
snaking...............................................
296
296
296
301
Transmission oil
volume and grade............................... 383
Transponder.............................................. 17
Tread depth............................................. 310
Tread wear indicators.............................. 308
Trip computer.................. 106, 108, 111, 112
Trip meter.................................................. 71
Trip meter, resetting........................ 109, 112
Trip statistics........................................... 260
Troubleshooting
Adaptive Cruise Control..................... 201
TSA - trailer stability assist ............. 178, 301
Tunnel console........................................ 142
12 V socket......................................... 144
cigarette lighter and ashtray............... 142
Tunnel detection........................................ 84
U
Unlocking
from the inside.................................... 168
from the outside................................. 167
Unlocking with the key blade................... 165
12
W
Warning lamp
Adaptive Cruise Control..................... 191
collision warning system.................... 219
stability and traction control system.. 178
Warning lamps
Airbags – SRS....................................... 69
Fault in brake system........................... 69
Parking brake applied........................... 69
seatbelt reminder............................ 30, 69
starter battery not charging.................. 69
Warning................................................ 69
Warning sound
collision warning system.................... 219
Warning symbols................................. 66, 69
Warning triangle....................................... 317
409
12 Alphabetical Index
Washer fluid
volume................................................ 384
Windows, rearview and door mirrors. 21, 367
Washer fluid, filling................................... 346
Windscreen wiper...................................... 93
rain sensor............................................ 93
Washer nozzles, heated............................. 94
Washers
rear window.......................................... 95
washer fluid, filling.............................. 346
windscreen........................................... 94
Water and dirt-repellent coating.............. 367
Water-repellent surface, cleaning............ 367
12
Waxing..................................................... 366
Weights
kerb weight......................................... 376
Wheel bolts.............................................. 308
lockable.............................................. 308
Wheel rim, dimensions............................ 310
Wheel rims
cleaning.............................................. 366
Wheels
installation........................................... 315
removal............................................... 312
snow chains........................................ 310
Whiplash injury, WHIPS............................. 37
WHIPS
child seat/booster cushion................... 38
seating position.................................... 38
whiplash protection........................ 37, 39
410
Windscreen washing.................................. 94
Winter driving........................................... 279
Winter tyres.............................................. 310
Wiper blades............................................
changing.............................................
Cleaning..............................................
replacing, rear window.......................
Service position..................................
344
345
346
345
344
Wipers and washing.................................. 93
Volvo Car Corporation TP 17261 (English), AT 1346, Printed in Sweden, Göteborg 2013, Copyright © 2000-2013 Volvo Car Corporation
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement